V -r.t 
 
 V|K,^^-X 
 
 ^.' 
 
 i r? 
 
COL. GEORGE WASHINGTON FLOWERS 
 MEMORIAL COLLECTION 
 
 TRINITY COLLEGE LIBRARY 
 DURHAM. N.C. 
 
 The Gift of. 
 
 Date_ 
 
 T 
 
 k 
 
REVISED SYSTEM 
 
 OF 
 
 CAVALRY TACTICS, 
 
 FOR THE USE OF THE 
 
 Cavalry and Mounted Infantry^ C. S. A. 
 
 BY 
 
 MAJOR GENERAL JOSEPH WHEELER, 
 Chief of (^a^alry, Army of Ti^rmeeee^, C. S. A. 
 
 MOBILE: 
 
 S. H, Gk)BTZEL & Co. 
 
 1863 
 
X 
 
 Entered according to Aoi of Congress in the year 186S, by 
 
 S. H. GOETZEL & CO. 
 
 In the ClerJc'e Office of the District Coiirt of Alabama, for iJi-e 
 Confederate States of America. • 
 
 
 FARRO'W & DENNETT, PRINTERS 
 
■ INTRODUCTION. 
 
 Much kas been saicl iTgaiHiiDgJlre relative atJvaafage 
 of single aM double rank formation. "We have sc/*u that 
 the depth of fowuation has been gradually decreasing 
 during the last t^vo thousand years fropi ten or even six- 
 teen ranks to the present system. 
 
 The most perfect system of formation is that which en- 
 ables the comnaandcr to do the most service with a given 
 number of men. We will suppose a Cavalry Brigade of 
 four' regiments to be drawn up to chftrge bho enem}'. 
 With the' single rank formation the Brigade will be 
 formed in four lines and inflict upon, the enemy four suc- 
 cessive shocks, each of which would be "nearly as severe 
 as a charge in two i*anks, and the number of shocks being 
 double, the amount of execution would certainly be much 
 greater. 
 
 Another advantage in single rank, is the greater facil- 
 ity with which troops can be Iiandled and reformed, after 
 the confusion of a charge, and what is of more impor- 
 tance, disorder or confusion are less liable to be incurred. 
 
 1 R 
 
 -— V.J- T--* 
 
 r^ T) i^ 
 
ii INTRODUCTION. 
 
 These, together with several other minor considerations, 
 hate induced cavalry officers of-caost experience both in 
 Europe and America, to prefer the single to double ran^s. 
 
 By forming the flank squadrons in echelon, the enemy 
 would be ignorant as to whether the Regiment charging 
 them was in one or two ranks, and therefore the moral 
 effect would be the same in both cases. 
 
CAVALRY TACTICS, 
 
 FOR SINGLE RANK FORMATIONS. 
 
 . « ag , • - ' : ; — 
 
 PART FIKST. 
 TITLE FIRST. 
 
 ARTICLE FIRSSr. 
 
 TO FORM A REGIMENT OF TENkSQUADRONS 
 'in line of BATTLE. 
 
 A Regiment of Cavaliy coBsists of one Colonel, on€ 
 Lieuleliant Colonel, one Major, one Adjutant, one Ser- 
 geant Major, one Quartermasfer Serjeant,* and ten Com- 
 panies^ each of which consists of one Captain, one Firet 
 Lientenant, two Second Lieutenants, five Sergeants, four 
 Corporals, cue Farrier, one JBl'acksmitli, and from sixty 
 to eighty -privates. "^ ' . 
 
 Quartermasters; Commissaries atW Surgeons are sonle- 
 tira^s appointed for ]«rovisional purposes, but are gene- 
 rally detailed from Lieutenants of tlie4ine. 
 
 A Band is eoraetimes formed Ly selecting musicians 
 from the rank and file. 
 
 Companies will be designated as squadrons in all ma- 
 nceuvres and exercises, and each will be composed of two, 
 three or four platoons, according to its size. 
 
 i 8 5 7 1) 
 
2 BASIS OF INSTRUCTION. • 
 
 "When of 40 or more files, it is divided into four pla- 
 toon's; of 30 to 40 files, into three platoons; of 20 to 30" 
 files, into two. If possible the files of the platooi^s "are 
 of even numbers. The firat and fourth platoons are 
 made the largest if necessary to accomplish thi?. The 
 platoons are numbered at first from right to left, and re- 
 tain their numerical designations whatever relative posi- 
 tions they may subsequently occupy. 
 
 The formation will be in one rank. That w-hich has 
 been prescribed for.the formation mounted, is applicnble 
 to the formation on foot.. ; 
 
 "^The squadrons of a regiment in line," are j3osted with 
 intervals equal to a platoon front betv/een the sergeants 
 on their fianks; the. intervals are equal at any one time, 
 and never less than 12 paces. When the average of pla- 
 toon front is much above this, the colonel announces the 
 increased' uniform interval. 
 
 The squadrons are distinguished by the denourmatiou 
 -of first, second, third, etc., counting "^from right to left ; 
 they retain these designations in the evolutions whatever 
 may be their relative positions. But the l-st capt'ain 
 commands the squadron on the right: the 2d, the tenth 
 (on the left;) the 3d/tRe 'fifth from the right; the 4th, 
 the third from the right; tha oth, the seventl; from ^the 
 right ; the Gth, the secpnd from' the right; the.'Ztb, \he 
 ninth from the/ight; the 8th, the sixth from the right;- 
 the 9th, the fourth -from the right; niid the lOth^the 
 eiglith from the right. 
 
 This is the habitual and parade order of the squadrons; 
 but in sudden formations, they will take post as they sev- 
 rive at the plaice of assembly, and should a captain be 
 permanently atjsent, or. absent for a campaign, the com- 
 naandeii'of the regiment wnll assign his squadron position 
 according to the rarfk of the actual commander. 
 
 Post of the Officers and Non- commissioned Officers of the 
 Field and Staff of a RegimerH in line of Battle. 
 
 The colonel, fifty paces in front of the cenfre o^-the reg- 
 iment, having a chief trumpeter near hipi. • 
 
dASIS OF'IJ?STRW!tY«iNj^ 3 
 
 "" The lieuteuaiit coldng>,-tfeo?'pdfMsAi ajjvanoe of tlie cen.- 
 ^tre of the riglit "wing. • 
 
 Tiie majpr, 25ij)acc3'iu nJvanfe.of tlie^ceifltre of the 
 left wing. ^^ -* ^ , ' * ' « 
 
 The colUP moves ^ber.e'yfei* 'his presence raay bjl ne- 
 cessary^. Tlielieuftnawt f'dlonel and ra^rfor, mo>« v/herc- 
 cver the colonel may tliink'^'oper to •li'l^ct thorn. 
 
 Tlie adjutant accompanies the colonel. , 
 
 The regimental qnar'terin^'^eter and, coi^rai^ary, if there 
 be any, are placed two paces to the righ| of the sei-gcant 
 major, or they accompany the colonel^n? hd'may direct^. 
 
 Tiie sergeant? major is in line wiili theni-egimeat 2 pa« 
 ces from the right flank. 
 
 The qnarternia.-ter sergoaHt k ^in- Hne ^Itft the regi- 
 ment 2,j;ace9-from tlieJeft flaok. r 
 
 The standard bearer is oh ^- right of the guidoir of 
 the of.ntre, or right centlv scfuadron^ a corporal is 1 pace 
 behind him. / 
 
 T\ve regimental marjjcr is-l pacebeWtid the second file 
 from the right of the rogiruent. 
 
 General staff office^ 'serving with the regirn^t 23 da- 
 ces in rear of the riu:Iil of the liegimont. 
 
 The band, fcrmeit in two raniWj i3"2o 2)nc©s..in rear of 
 the coirlre of the i-^giineat. 
 
 Post of t'lte Oji&ii's and ]X'on-t<ysnmi^0>ncd C^c.rs of a 
 
 Squtitdron in I me of;^<xlUe. 
 -' • " ., ' 
 
 TTlie ©aptaiu is posted in front of the contre of the 
 equalron, tl>e.- eroiij^ of his horg)^ * pacegl.n advance of 
 the heiids of the hoiycs in line. ' .;" ^ ' . * 
 
 The senior lieutenant eommaniSs th6 ^st phatoon ; the 
 nc.Kt in rank, the 4th platoon ;^the uext, the 2d ; and the 
 next, the 3d. Each is^^sted iVi front of the. centre of his 
 pldtodn, with the cuuuppf his horse 1 pace in advance of 
 the heads of the horses i;i Mne. Sergeants" supply the 
 places of commanders; o'f platoons, when there are not 
 enough officers present. • ' . ^ * 
 
 The 1st sergeant is ported on the right of the squadron 
 not counted in the rank ; he is the squadron right guide. 
 
4 BASIS OF INSTRUCTION. 
 
 The next sergeaut in rank is posted on the left d 
 the squadron, nofc counted in th^ rank ; he is the squad- 
 ron left guide. • • 
 
 The third sergeant in rank is the guidon bearer, and is 
 theieft file of the 2d platoon. 
 
 The other sergeants and corporals are placed according 
 to rank, as follows-: «r 
 
 Left of 1st platoon. 
 
 Right of 4th platoon. 
 
 Right, of 3d platoon. 
 
 Right of 1st platoon. 
 'Left of 4th platoon. . 
 
 Left of 3d' platoon. 
 
 Right of 2d platoon. 
 
 The 1st trumpeter is posted one pace behind the 4th 
 file from the right of the. ist platoon. 
 
 The other trumpeter, one pace behind the 4lh file irom 
 the left of the 4th platoon. 
 
 The farrier, one pace behind the centra of the second 
 platoon. 
 
 The saddler, one pace b.ehind the centre of the third 
 jdatoon. 
 
 There is ?k size-roll of .the squadron, and with some al- 
 lowance for weight of man and horse, the tallest horses 
 are assigned to the tallest men; the men are poste(J ae- 
 co.rdi.ng to this roll, the tallest men to the right and left 
 of the centre, the lowest at the flanks* 
 V This invariable position of the soldiers is also impor- 
 tant for its encouragement to companionship and mutual 
 assistance in the sets of fours, and to a feeling of respon- 
 sibility of each to the others in conduct and bravery. 
 
 Assmibly of a Regirneni 3founted. 
 
 When a regiment is to mount, boots and. saddles is 
 sounded. At this signal the horses are saddled; bridled, 
 and fully equipped for the occasion. - 
 
 At the signal ^ horse, non-commissioned oificers and 
 troQpers lead into rank. The 1st sergeant calls the roll, 
 
. bIsis of instruction. 5 
 
 or the setgeants of divisiops raay be required to call the 
 division rolls; th-c officers are pre?eBt in ;in|:ierintendence. 
 
 The captain, then, or the senior lieutenant by his oi'der, 
 orders the squadron to count fours in each platoon, and 
 to mount, »■ . 
 
 The captain, first observing that cverj onje is in his 
 prescribed place, and the general appearance of th« 
 »f]aiadron,. marches it, habitually by •fours, to the place 
 of a^enibly. If 1-oquired, on reaching there, he reports 
 al^entees, by his 1st sergeant, to the adjutant.* 
 
 In case o£ alarm or surprise, to horse is founded; the 
 men then saddle, pack up, bridle, and mount "with the 
 utmost celerity, and repair to t^e place of assembly, • 
 which is always previously designated. 
 
 On occasions of parade, .the trunppet^-s And band wiU 
 proceed, as soon as mounted, to the right of the parade 
 ground^ and be there formed in two or more ranks. ^wFif- 
 tGcn minutes arfter to Jwrse, the trumpeters sound the aS' 
 sctnbl//, for marching the squadrons t© the parade. 
 
 Assembly of a Iie<jimcnt DiSitnovnted. 
 
 When a regiment is to turn out under arnis on foot, 
 "to arms" will be sounded ; at this signal the squadrons 
 will be formed and inspected as pre?cribe<l, 
 , For parade, the rogipieut will^be foimed in liee of col- 
 umns, as when mounted, but with intervals of two paces. 
 
 The squadron officers, will take pla'ce four paces in front 
 of the first platoons, in order of rank from right to left, 
 with equal intervals; the left guides on the right of the 
 second platoons. 
 
 DRE3S PARADE AND GUARD ^MOUNTING. 
 
 Dress parade and mounting of guards, mounted, are 
 conducted as prescribe'S in Array Regulations, with the 
 following and other more obvious variations, necessary 
 from tjie diiTerence of cavairy and infantry. 
 
6 BASIS OF INSTRUCTION. 
 
 Th$ officers take post 12 paco?, the uon-i2om.!iDi6sioned 
 officers 6 paces, in front of tbe'guarcl. " . 
 
 After iuspection, tlie.pfiicers take post 2 paces in front 
 of the centre of their, gnard or their pialoons; a non-com- 
 missioned officer commanding a guar J, the same. 
 
 The guard passes in review bj gziard, platoons, ■or fours, 
 having regard to its strength. 
 
 In wet weather the sabres will not be drawn by guards 
 for inspection, or any occasion. of ceremony. ■ 
 
 At regijnental parade the field officers and ■captains 
 are placed as in line; the platoon commanders, exel'u- 
 sively commissioned officers, ai»e aligned on the captains; 
 the adjutant and sergeant major are posted 4 paces from 
 the right guide of squadrons. ' * 
 
 After the music, the adjutant rides to a point 25 paces 
 in front of the centre bf the line, faces it, and comnvands: 
 
 ■ "i. Attention, 
 
 2. Draw — Sabre. 
 
 3. Present — Sabre. 
 
 The Colonel coDclndesthe* exercises with, Rclnrn — 
 Sabre. 
 
 The cominandscfor the advance of tlic line of officers 
 are given in "a tone only loud enough -to be heard by 
 them. ' . ,j» ' 
 
 If the colonel desii-es it', for the pwpose of,parade, he 
 \vill divide the Pojiadi"On into two platoons, and form the 
 regimental parade- in line of platoon columns at U paces 
 distance — ^froro the liorses' croups in the front line to 
 their hea<y9 in the other— with intervals of 6 paces. 
 
 The of^cers take post 4 paces in front of the first pla- 
 toons, in order of rank, from right to left, with equTil in- 
 tervals; if but one officer, in front of the cenire of the 
 platoon; left guides on the right of the 2d platoons. 
 
 To leav6 the parade^ the squadrons will*b^C9inaHind- 
 ed; 1. Right forward — Fours right. 2. MARon. Or, 
 ifby tlie rear, \.' Fours left — Cohimns left. 2. Maecu. 
 In both cases the rear platoon does-not march until the 
 
^ASIS OJ* INSTRUCTION. t 
 
 Iea(^in'g platoon has gniiied' sufficient ground for th%h' 
 properly uniting.' 
 
 .THE-^STANDAKD. 
 
 Genorall}^, when the standard is used, the stftiidavd 
 bearer goes Tor it to the qnarrters or tent 'of th^ colonelt 
 csGO];ted by l\70 sergeai^ts. . 
 
 0u special occasions, iiu J at leaet once a year, it is es- 
 corted and received with ceremony. 
 
 Two platoons of the standard squadron, or one of the 
 Hank sc^u-adrons, will be detached, under the orders of 
 the^oloi^l, to proc^d to liiBtiuaners, as soo? asmoun- 
 t'od. It will boiJialtecV irt thejr^froHt, in column ofe pla- 
 todtiP, with either flank tcrward tlie -quarters, 'ilie slah- 
 dawi bearer, receives the standard- from Jlie hantls of the 
 adjutant or sergeant major, ^nd* takes his po?tin the cen- 
 tre of tbe interjt-al Between the platr^on?, with ft sergeant 
 on each side of him ; the eohiijui is then put in inution. 
 preceded 2£)^acG3 by a chief ti'umpeter and fpxfv trum- 
 peters. ^ 
 
 The column approaehe%a flank of tlw regiment, march- 
 ingjparallel with and" about lOQjjiaces lram*'its front, the 
 trumpets 3ouj3ding*i,he mar'gh. « ^ 
 
 The colon*! aomraands the sabreri to be dra^wu. The 
 escort. is halted \fhen»nQaply opposite fha flank, thejgtan- 
 dard bearer and'two sergeants pass on, and v\'hen 50 pa- 
 ces in froi^ of the colonel face him and the regiment, and 
 halt. = . ■ 
 
 The colonel then orders sabres'presented, and presents 
 sabre himself ; the trumpets .sound to the stahdanl The 
 standard bearer then takes hit place in lin^' -^ 
 
 The escort, the iuomeut the standard bearer leaves it, 
 CiirBS and is marehed by thereat to its place in line. 
 
 . Wh^ there is st band, it may. be substituted for Ihe 
 cht^f twimpeter and four trumpeters. 
 
 On the raturn of the standard it has the.sanie escort. 
 
8 BASIS OF instruction;. 
 
 Salute with the Standard. 
 
 "When the standard is to pay honors, the standard bear- 
 er salutes in the following manner, in two times: 
 
 1. At 4 paces from the person who is to be saluted, 
 lower the lance gently lo the front, bending as near to 
 the horizontal line as possible. 
 
 2. Raise the lance gently, when the person saluted has 
 passed 4 paces. 
 
 Salute with the Sabre. 
 
 When the superior and other officers are to salute, 
 whether on horseback or on foot, at a halt or marching, 
 tI[3;ey*do it in four times. * 
 
 1. At 4 paces from tlie person to be saluted, raise, 'the 
 sabre perpendicularly, thep.oint upwards, the edge to the 
 left, the hand opjwsite to and one foot from the right 
 shoulder, the elbow 6 inches- fram the bx)dy. 
 
 ♦2. Lbw^er'^he blade, extending the arm to its full 
 
 13 
 
 length, the hand m quarte, until the pointof the t^abre 
 near the foot. . * , 
 
 3. Rajae the sabre quickly, the point upwards, as. in 
 tlre.first time, after the person saluted has passed 4 paces. 
 
 4. Car.ry the sabre to the shoulder. ,* 
 
 THE OICDEII OF BATTLE. - 
 
 The order of battle. for a regiment of ten squadrons, is 
 the four right or left squadrons deployed in line; the four 
 squadrons of th-e other flank in-line of squadron columns 
 SOO paces in rear of the first line. The Sthsquadron, in 
 column of platoons, generally left in front, is 60 paces 
 behind the right flank of the first linfe, the line of its left 
 guides being a platoon front to the right of the extremity 
 of that flank ; the 6th squadron, in column-. of platoone, 
 
J^J. 
 
 Feme S 
 
 1 1 
 
 I'll 
 
 .50 
 
 ',■■!■ ! ■ ',! 
 
 23 
 
 r ' I " I ' I' '! ' I ' I - I' T r 
 
 ^<?<? 
 
 ■f 
 
 TT" 
 
 ' '■ ' ' ■ . 1 ■ 
 
 ■^ 
 
 50 
 
 
BASIS OF INSTRUCTION. 9 
 
 rigbt iu front, similarly disposed to the rear of the left* 
 flank of the first line. 
 
 If a squadron be absent, the second line will Le com- 
 posed of 3 squadrons, in columns immediately in rear of 
 the first line ; the 5th and Gth squadrons, counting from 
 the flank which composes the first line, being always the 
 flankiuff squadrons; 
 
 The lieutenant colonel commands, the second line, and 
 is posted 26 paces in froi^ of its centre. 
 
 The order of battle for a regimont 'of eight squaiin)n8 
 is as follows: ' 
 
 The six rightJ or left squadrons deployed in line ; the 
 7th and 8th (or 1st and 2d) squadrons are posted in col- 
 ifmns of platoons, in rear of the right and left flanks of 
 the line of Lattle, as described for the flank squadrons of 
 the regiment of ten squadrons. 
 
 In the order of battle, each field officer is attended by 
 a trumpeter. ' ^ . . 
 
 To change from line or order of- review to order ot bat- 
 tle in an eight squadron regiment, the 7th and 8th squad- 
 rons arq, wheeled by platoons (or by fours) to the right, 
 and conducted by their captains by the shortest lines to 
 their positions. » 
 
 " In a ten squadron regiment, the same for the 6th and 
 Gth squadrons; the lieutenant colonel takes commaml of 
 the next four squadrons, wheels platoons right, column 
 right, and to the left, after marching the proper distance 
 to the rear, . 
 
 ARTICLE SECOND. 
 
 FORMATION OF A REGIMEN'T IN COLUMN. 
 Order in Column by Twos or by Fours. 
 
 In this order, the squadrons preserve distances of 3 pa- 
 ces more than platoon front, counting from the croups of 
 4he horses of the last set of fours' of one, to the heads of 
 the 'horses of the ^rst set of the next 
 
10 BASIS OF INSTRUCTIO;*!. 
 
 ■->• 
 The eojonel marches at the centr.e.of the regii):icnt, on 
 
 "the side of tb.e guides, 50 paces from the flauk of the col- 
 umn, liaving behind Lim a chief bugler. , He moves 
 wheijever his j^resence may be necgsaary. 
 
 , The- lieutcnant'colooel on the side of the guides, 25 pa- 
 ces from the. flank of the column ; he marches hnbituallv 
 on a line vfith the captain eorrtrjanding the 1st squadron. 
 
 The major miirches 25 paces from the same flank of the 
 column, and on a line with the .captain comnaanding the 
 lOth^quadrou, » '^ ■*-: .* 
 
 The adjutant and regimental quartermaster accom- 
 pany the colonel. ' 
 
 The sergeant' major mfirches on the side of the. guides, 
 2 paces from the flankof the column, and «n a line with' 
 the first files gfthe cohimTi.v ' 
 
 ■ The quartermaster sergeant marches on the side of 
 the guides, 2 paces from the flank' of the column, on a 
 line with the last files of the column. 
 
 , The regimental marker marches on the side opposite 
 to the guides, 2 paces from the flank, and on a line with 
 the first files of the column. • 
 
 The captains march on the side of the guides, and '8 
 paces from the flank and abreast of the centre of their 
 squadrons. • 
 
 The.4st lieutenant of eaJch squadron marches at the 
 head of the let platoon, 1 {>nce in advance of the fi<i'st 
 files, liaving'the right guide on his lyght. 
 
 The chiefs of the other platoons march on the side of 
 the guides, 1 pace from the fiaiik of the column, and 
 abreast of their first files ; the trumpeters marcli on the 
 side.oppbsite to the guides, 1 pace fwm the flank, and 
 on a line with the second file from the front and rear 
 of their squadrons.; the farrier and the saddler in the 
 direction of the trumpeters, and opjVosite the centres of 
 the second and thir4 platoons. . 
 
 They all march in a similar manner g» the flanks of 
 the column when the left is m front ; an% in this pase, 
 
BASIS OF INSTftUGTiaN. _^il 
 
 it iatlie commander of the 4Ui -platoon avIio mai-clies at 
 its tfend and in fi\ont of the squadron columns; and the 
 maior is nean the head of the regimental colmiin.- 
 
 Tlie left guide marches behind the last files of the 
 squadron ; when the column is left in front, he takes 
 post on the left of the officer commanding the 4tli pla- 
 toon, 1 pace in front of the left file. 
 
 When the nature of the ground obliges the officers 
 and others to enter the columh, the movement is made 
 succesmely ; the superior officers and others opposite 
 the 1st divisions of squaj^rons place themc-elv^^a.at theif 
 head; those opposite tlTe 2d xlivi^ions, in rear. 
 
 The. primitive order is resumed as soonras'the nature 
 of the ground will permit. 
 
 Order in column of Platoons {open column)., 
 
 In this order the squadrons preservo- distance-J>f-2 
 platoon fronts, less one pnce betwe.en each otlier, count- 
 ing from the platoon horses; the distance of one platoon 
 from another, measured from the forefeet of the hnrsea 
 of one platoon to thpse .of the Hext^is equal to the front 
 of the platoons.- r - ' ■ 
 
 The colonel marches at the'centl'e of the regiment, on 
 the side of the guides, 50" paces froiti the flank.of the 
 column, liaving behind him. a chief trumpeter; lie moves 
 wherever his presence may be required. 
 
 The lieutccant-eolonel.marehes habitually on the side 
 of the guides, 26 paces from the flank of the column, 
 and on a line'vN'itkthe lieutenant commanding the 2d 
 platoon of tlie Ist squadron. 
 
 The major' niarches at the same distance from the 
 j^'amc -flank, on -a line with the commander of the last 
 j5latoon. 
 
 The adjutant and regimental quarterniastei" accom- 
 pany the colonel', '*■ 
 
 Tl'^e serg<3ant major marches on the side of the guides, 
 2 paces from the flank, of the column, and abreast of 
 the Jeadbg platoon. ■ . " 
 
n BASIS OP INSTRUCTION. 
 
 Th 3 quaTterm aster sergeant marches on the side of 
 the gtiides, 2 paces from the flank of the rear phitdon. 
 
 The regimental marker marches one pace in rear of 
 the second file of -the leading platoon on the side of the 
 guides. 
 
 The captains march on the side of the guides, 8 paces 
 from the flank of the column, and habitually abreast of 
 the contre of their squadrons. 
 
 The commanders of platoons march one pace in front 
 of their centres; those of leading platoons are answer- 
 able for the distance to the squadron in front. * 
 
 • When the column mai'ches" right in front, the right 
 guide of each squadron mai'ches on the right of the 1st 
 platoon, and the left guide one pace behind the '2d file 
 from the left of the -ith platoon. The posts of these 
 sergeants is the reverse when the left is in front. 
 
 The trumpeters, -farrier and saddler march in rear of 
 their platoons as in the squadron in line. 
 
 The squadron being, composed of 64 files, when it is 
 broken into sections, the chief of the leading platoon 
 marches at the'head of the leading section ; the chiefs 
 of the other platoons one pace from and on a Hue with 
 their leading section, and on the Bide of the guides. The 
 second sections will be consmanded by their guides, who 
 retain their places. 
 
 Order in close Cohimn. 
 
 The regiment is in column of squadi'ous at platoon 
 distance ; the distances are equal at' any one time, ahd 
 never less than. 9 paces (from the croups of the horses of 
 one squadron to the heads of the horses- of the next). 
 
 The colonel is posted 25 paces from the centre of the 
 column, at the side of the guides. ' _ * 
 
 The lieutenant-colonel and major march habitually on 
 the side of the guides, 12 paces from the flanks of the 
 fir.st and laat squadrons. . ^_ ' - , 
 
 The sergeant major, quartermaster sergeant, and regi- 
 mental marker, march as in column. of platoons. 
 
BXiilS OF INSTUUCTIGN. 18 
 
 AlHlic members of the sqnndrons ai"e_|)o»tod as in Jine 
 except the caplnins, who march on the side of the _i;nkies, 
 4 paces from the Hank, and on a line with the^ ehief^i of 
 the platoons. 
 
 When the guide is centre, " side of th^-guidoa" -will 
 'mean tlio left flank of a colnnin right in front; th.o right 
 flank if left in front. 
 
 The order in open column of squadrons (or of attack) 
 is the same as in dose column, except the cai'tains; 
 they are posted as in line. 
 
 Order in double Cdlnmti. * 
 
 Jut"The cofenel marches at the head of the column. 
 
 The lievtenant-colonei marchxjfe abreast ui€ oentrc of 
 tl. J riiiht column, 26 paces difetant. 
 
 The major nwrches abreast the centre of the left col- 
 umn, 25 paces distant. ' « 
 
 The ch.]itains of each column on tlio outer flankp. ■ 
 
 Tlie 1 'IL s<]uadron guides of the right column on tWb 
 left of ih'st ])latoons; the right/'-squadron dfuides •€ the 
 left column on t'le right of fourth platoons. * 
 
 All otliers the same as iif column of platoons. 
 
 COMPLIMENTS By CAVAr.R.Y ♦UNDER all VIEW. 
 
 The regiment being in line; the colonel com\uhnds: 
 
 1. Attention. ';' " * 
 
 2. Prepare for Revic\v. 
 
 At ^his conmiand, the commanders of platoons ad- 
 vanl^e 3, paces* to the line of squadron commanders ;Jhe 
 adjutant p>occeds to the right of fehc regiment,, and 
 places himself 2 pacesvto the right of the" sergeant major, 
 wllo^■^ (Tvi the right of. {lie line ^vithout^ interVal; the 
 r^'imental qup.Ttei*mast"er is 2 p icei^to the left^of tJUe 
 qur.rfermast'er sergeant, who is oi\'the left of fhe liji'e 
 without interval. The staft' oflioers place thgrnsel^yes 
 on tlic right of the rank olf squadron officevi!, acc^dUng 
 J^o their roliitive rank^'and with iutervals of 1 pa^K ■ 
 
li FASIS OF INSTRUCTION. 
 
 The bniid ""and trumpeters oiVa line, each in que or 
 tV'o' ranks' ficcordiug to their strength — the band on 
 ^e riijht^-at'^ the right of tlie regiment, with au in- 
 terval of 12 paces. 
 
 The cotori&l then ooin^mands: 
 
 1. Aiteniion. 
 2 Drmo — Sabrk. 
 ' ?>. Right — Dress. 
 4. Front. .* 
 
 In tills yarade order, the regiment awaits the ap- 
 pvoneli of the personage who is to rfeviev/ it; for whoso 
 guidance a eamp-eoloV will have been placed one hundred 
 to two^huntlred paceg'in front of the centre,, according 
 to tlrS extent of the line and the plaifi in front of it. 
 . When the^revlpwing pQj'sonage is midway between 
 ilic camp-tiiolor and the colonel, the latter turns his 
 b«Drse to the right-about on his ground, and commands: 
 
 ]. Present — Saeuk. . 
 
 And i^esumes in\mediatelj hie pvoper front. The officers 
 alTsalute. . • ' .. * 
 
 AVlien the reviewing pev:»onage, who has halted until 
 the prijip^r complimentg are paid, advances, the colonel 
 brings his sabre to a carry, turns ^out as before to the 
 linc^ aifd -commands: ' . 
 
 1. Carry — Sab 5^. 
 
 AVheu the whole line remarns peVfectlj;. steady, the 
 Colon<iLxesuming his propel' fi'ont. ' j , -« ><^ 
 
 The. reviewing personage now turns off to like- right of 
 the rer?inn^nt, passes thence, in fe'ont of all the officers, 
 to thc^l eft, around the left, aiHb% the rear. tso the right 
 again. "^Vhila. her is passing ajronnd the regiment, no 
 njAiteiv.'wHat his mii, the uirrsic will pl-ay ; and when 
 ho turns off to'tpke.*hi3 station near the camp-color, the 
 music -will cease, ' ' -^ 
 
 . Tli£ reviewing- perpQaage -having, taken a position 
 uearthe camp-color, previously placed at a j-fi'O'per dis^. 
 
BASIS OF INSTRCCTION'. 15 
 
 tance, the colonel causes the regiment to> break into 
 colunni right in front by platoon or fc-quadron. The 
 band and trumpter's. each wheel at the same time", .the 
 hitter closing upon the former; . (this -wil^ bo the habit- 
 ual formation of the music) 
 
 The po?itioiji of fhe colonel in column of revie-^v is C 
 paces, in front of the captain of the first squadron^ or 
 officer commanding the leading "p^'^toou; the adjutant 
 and^ regimental quartermaster arc on Jus left. 
 
 .Striff officci-s in one rank, according to ]ir.eeedence, 
 from riglit to left 6 paces in rear of the column."' 
 
 The field otTicers arc 6 paces from the "fiaiTlc o|ipo?tte 
 tJic guides; the lieutenant colonel opposite tlie feading 
 division; the major that in rear. 
 
 Tlie pergeant major and* quartermaster sergeant 2 
 paces'from the flank opposite the guides; the foiaiicr 
 opposite the loardiug division ; the la-tter thel'ear. 
 
 In a column of platoons, the captains 4 ^")aces ^oui 
 the flank opposite the guides, opposite t\i*Q centres of 
 their squadrons. . _ ; 
 
 Chiefs of j^atoons'l pace in admhcc of tlie cehtres of 
 their platoons. • / ' \ ' 
 
 The column is then pifl iamaj^clrl at a walk, with tlie 
 guide right. _ ■ , 
 
 The adjutant places the regimental inark«r at-tjie 
 second turn, so thai the ri*ht flank of th? Ci;lumn shall 
 pass G [laees from the rtvieAv'ing pai'sonag^. 
 
 The column first-posses at a wlalk, a.nd afterward, if 
 required, at a trot. 
 
 When the head of ^le column a^'riyes"\\athin 50 paces 
 of the reviewing parsonage, th'e music commences to 
 
 ThT? miisic having passed, the <3rHefJbugler causes it to 
 turn out of the column, so as to take a position fi-icing 
 the reviewing pei'sonage, ai^d, about .12 paces from the. 
 flank of llic. column. It contlnuos to play until the rear 
 of *-t]io cohmm* has^pj^ssed*'; it- then wheels, and fallows 
 in real*. "■ • '• ' ^ 
 
 Pnssiti^j -ata -^alkj'-the colbn£litaaiKl 'all the ofTKjers 
 
 w « 
 
16- BASIS 0*" INSTRUCTION. 
 
 Bftlute witli the sabre as they successively arrive v.'ithiu 
 6 paces-of the reviewing personage) turning the heads 
 ttnx'anls him. 
 
 Thc'Standnrd Joes not salute, except to the President 
 or Vice President of the Confederate States, Governors 
 of Sla^tes, Heads of Departments, or GoneraL Officer ; 
 when the trumpets are to flom'ish in passing, the band 
 ceases -playing, and resumes the same air or marelrwheu 
 the flouri-?hes have ceased. 
 
 Arrived near its original ground, the colonel changes 
 the guide of the column.; on the ground, be lialtsit, and 
 formaline ; othcr~wise lie command^ the' trot, and passes 
 • the reviewing cff.cer. again. I-u thia..case .the bnird v.ill 
 have j-etaincd its place near the reviewing personage, 
 *and \*rill commence toplay^at the approach of .tlie head 
 of t4ie column, wheel in front of it, and thus march off. 
 
 The officers now do not salute; and- the colonel 
 marvches oa. the left of the column. 
 
 The regiment being formed in line on its original 
 ground — if an inspection is not to follvtv — the colonel 
 marches the .regiment forward in line, at the v.alk or 
 trot; regulating u|)on tb.e slaiularJ squadron, and halts 
 ' it»50 5^ar(Is'from the reviewing personage. The instant 
 the lijpe.is motionless, all the officers, takirfg their .time 
 ■from til e^olooel, salute with^ the sabre. This advance 
 of tlie reginxent is oiijilted when other troops are in- 
 cluded. 
 
 When there are two or nwre regiments, the coluniu 
 . bein^ ia motion, the regiments will take 60 paces dis- 
 tance one from another. 
 
 The brigadier general will .place*himself 10 paces i|i 
 front of the leading cojonel, his staft^pfficers on his left ; 
 the music of that regiment 20 paces in front of th^brig- 
 adier general. 
 
 The colonels do not leave their places in the coliiDiD. 
 
 Ihrm and course <ff Inspection. • 
 
 The re^imeat being in line, the colonel pauses the 
 sqiiadrons'to wheel f6 the right. " ^,- 
 
BASIS OF INSTRUCTION. 17 
 
 * - . 
 
 Tho colonel seeing the squadrons alignctl, commands: 
 
 1. OlJicers and^non-coinmissiomd Gfficcra to the frmit of 
 yoT.ir squadrons. 2. Maucii. The oflicers t^iko. places jn 
 one rank, 12 paces, and tl>e non-conMnissioncd ofilcers 
 in one rank, six paces in advance, along the whole front 
 of their rcrpective squadrons, in the order of rank, tlie^ 
 highest oixthe right; ^ the trumpeters at tho'sanic time 
 take post on the alignment of the squadron, G paces 
 from the right, and the fan'ier and saddler oiie paceoa 
 ihejr left, .and one pace apart. 
 
 Seeing the last order in a train of execution, , the 
 colonel commands : I. FieM and Staff to tlic front. 2. 
 Makcii. ftlie- commissioned officers felius designated form 
 themsel-vtjs in one rank, 12 pa<:e3 in front of tire olBCcTs 
 of the Isfc squadrons, in tlK following brdcr, bej^iuuing 
 cm the right: lieutenant-colonel, nuijor, adjutant,. qjuar- 
 tevmaster, sui'geon, and assistant surgeon. The non- 
 commissioned staff iu a similar mainneiV C paces in viyltv 
 of the preceding rank. The standard bearer will take 
 post in thc,ccutre of this rank. The bflud is formed iTi 
 one rank, l2 paces in rear of the column. 
 
 The colon-el n^w takes pogt on the right qf the lieu- 
 tenant-colonel ; but such of the field otiicers ils ma_y be 
 superior in rank to the inspector da not tivke post as 
 above. •» 
 
 Tlie inspection commiaHces in front. After iu^pceting 
 the dress and general appearance of the field a"fed''com- 
 missiuned staff, the inspector, accompanied by these 
 ofHcers, passes down the colutjan, looking'lat each squad- 
 ron in front and rear, w>ith a view to the same objects. 
 He afterwards, in a like manner, passes and inspects 
 the arms^; as he suceessivqly approaches each squndron, 
 ^ its captain commands • 
 
 1. Atlenfiou. 
 
 2. Inspection — Arms, 
 
 Trhich is executed as. prescribed, No. 72. 
 
 If, then, the inspector wishes' to make a particular 
 
i? Basis of instruction. 
 
 inspeetit)a of equipage, ammunition, <tc., the coloael 
 
 l^Aiteiition'. 
 
 % J^iou-co:mmis.'iio7ied officers — ^To your posts. 
 
 o. PRBr!.A;iE TO DTS^JOUNT. 
 
 -1. prs^iouNT. 
 
 At the third eomTiiand. Biiiiibera one and three, 
 itfrou^lioilt the squadrons, ride forv,rard G paces, dress- 
 ing by the ri^it; the trumpeters moY-e forward wi-tli 
 the numbers one'and three, and- take position in 
 frbat ol" tlie farrier and saddler, 'v\'ho stand fast. 
 
 The' regiment' being dismounted, the non-commissioned 
 staff wiiho«t changing position, the captains coiumand: 
 'i .IiigJit--D^t^^. 2. Front. The ranks in front and 
 ^fear-cvofullypreserve the iiiterytd between the files, 
 
 T%e inspector' having inspected the non-commissioned 
 staff, the" captains, as ' he approaches each squadron, 
 oommr.nd : \. Atteoition. 2. 02')en — Boxes; 
 
 As'the inspection of each squadron is completed, the 
 colonel may dismi.^s it from the parade; two platooiis 
 vscorting'tlie standard. 
 
 I 
 
 ARTICLE THIRD. 
 
 • ■ * ■ . . 
 
 DUTIES OF MSTS*U0TORS. 
 
 The colonel is responsible for the instruction of the 
 regimont,/aud he shalj.hot change, im(5eir any pretext, 
 the, dispositions contained in thi;i book. 
 ■ lie will *be present, a§ often as Ids dtlier duties per- 
 mit, lit tlfe theoretical and- pjractical instructions, aifd 
 especially* at that of the officers^assembled together. 
 
 T'he lieutenant-colonel and major are especially 
 cjpiarged wi^tli the supervision, of the instruction- of their 
 rpspecstive wifig?. . * 
 
BASIS OF INSTRUCTION. 19 
 
 IndiTidual instruction being the Lasis pi tlie-insti-ue- 
 tion of tcjuadronp, 'on which that of a rouimcnt dopends, 
 and the first principles Itavijjg t^!c jA'reatcst inlim^nc<! 
 t:pon this indivicTtial instnic'liou, tlie classes ^f recruit? 
 should be watched with the greatest care. 
 
 Tlie instructors place tlieinsQlves liabituiTTly aWr.oJi a 
 distance tlmt they can sec their a\ hole troop at a glance, 
 flii^td rnake themselves^ distinctly Icaid by •^.. * They 
 leave their places as seldom as possible, iwul only to ^ 
 make the con-ectious which* arc indispensabre i» tli# 
 position of thd men and the execution .of the move- 
 ment*. ■ J 
 . The}' repeat, in a-few eljear and precise, x^^ord^ Jlho 
 explanations whicli have not been well und^r?tof)cU 
 
 They' sliould often .join^ example to pr^c^ti^^, skoukl 
 keep up the attention of the mcii^i^y.an q^jif^ihtcd to^e, 
 apd pass to another movement as Foon as Mijtt "V^'h'ich 
 they command has been executed in ii saTisfaetorJ' man- 
 ner. They should not bc'j.oo exaeUng, at fir§t as to pr^ 
 cisio'n and unity. « .,.**■. ^^ ■' . 
 
 The instructor should soraetimes qucstinli the mfin, t^ 
 tbst their attention to his words'; and wheji at fcst, to 
 satisfy himself that the lessof; is welHnitl^rstood!' 
 
 APwTICLE FOURTH. 
 DIVISION, ORDER, A>?^D/PRO^RESSIO]S^ OF IN- 
 
 As instruction crtnnot'bc establislied on a s..»]id basiE; 
 without joining theory to practice, there is iu each I'egi- 
 menjL a theoretical ingtructi^VQ/ independent of the exer- 
 cises^iu the field. , • . » *. ^, 
 
 . The colonel assembles. .the ofiicefs once. a week, or 
 oftener, if he deem it neccssaiy,. ?or the theory of tlx) 
 different parts of their instruction. * 
 
 The captains assemble, in a like mannei', their t'eiv 
 
80 BASIS OF instrtction: 
 
 gean-ts iTud^cyr^^orals ,' a selcqljon^of pi ivales is iucludcd. 
 
 > Inatrudion. 
 
 . Eacli drill la>ts one liour aud ton minutes, including 
 Ihyj^rejjJ^s ; those should not excee'd two minutes at a 
 flme. ' 
 
 TTie. liorses of .the trumpeters should not be excusjitl 
 from participating iu the different classes of instruction. 
 
 All the hordes must be exercised at least three times 
 "a Avcck. 
 
 During the summer, and until the end of October, the 
 regiment is exercised occasionally in the details of the 
 service in War.' For this j^ftrj^ose the Qolonel takes the 
 regiment into the country, in oidev to accustom it to 
 pa^^s over all kinds of ground, and to apply the evolu- 
 tious to the different localities. 
 
 On tliese, ain:! on other occasions, the colonel will 
 practice all the officers of tlicr regiment in judging dis- 
 tances^ j^ is ft point of mucB impoi^ance in the educa- 
 ilfcion of a cavalry officxn*. ' 
 
 When the regihiejit is asscuibled, the colonel should 
 direct lihe superior officers to command, occasion all 3% in 
 tl^. different evolurions, in order to judge of the pi'ogress 
 of their instruction. 
 
 ARTICLE FIFTH. 
 Gil AD ATION OF INSTRUCTION. , 
 
 liccniits. 
 
 .'^ • ,i* ■>» 
 
 The recruit c.omm"fences Ids instructioii.,on fobt. vTh<^ 
 first, v/eck after hid arrival at the regiment is employed 
 CKcluBiveTy in instructing him in all the details of disci,- 
 pline, police, and interior service, agd Jn those I'elating 
 to bis dress a^Vlthe groomilig (^f hisiiorrc. 
 
BASIS OF INSTRUCTION. " 21 
 
 He is taught to mount witliout saddle on both sides 
 of tlie Uoi^o. 
 
 He is taught tli.G name and use of the principal parts 
 of the anus and oquipnionts, and tlie niannor of keeping 
 them clean ; the manner of rolling the clordc, of^i'olding 
 the effects, and of placing tliem in the valise. 
 
 These different instructions are given .by th? corporal 
 of the squad, und,er the super-intendcnce of tlie sergeant 
 and officer of the platoon. 
 
 At the end of tins week, the*^recj'uit corameiiccs clic 
 first lesson on foot ; ho continues -to be instritfeted in tjje 
 aboVc rnenti(;ned dC-tails " ■ ^ 
 
 The recruits are driUed on foot twice a day, wlicii 
 possible, an hour each time. Their instruction on- horse- 
 back is conuncneed at the same time with tlie pabre 
 exercise. 
 
 C\jrpqrals. 
 
 The corporals should be capable of executing ail the 
 lessons mounted and dismounted, and should be quali- 
 fied to teach the school of iJic trooper dismounted, and at 
 least four lessons mounted. 
 
 Their theoretical instruction should include, in addi- 
 tion to these lessons, all the details relative to the func- 
 tions of their grade in the interior service, botii in g;ar- 
 rison and in campaign. 
 
 Sergeants. 
 
 The sergeants should, .be' capable of executing, dis- 
 mounted and mounted, all that is prescribed by this 
 book ; and should be able to teach the lessons of the 
 school of the trooper, and to command a platoon "in the 
 school of the squadron mounted. 
 
 The theoretical instrnction of the sergeants should iir- 
 dud(^thc basis of ?nstrnct4on, the school of the' trooper,' 
 the school of the platoon, and the school of the squad- 
 ron; also, the regulations for the interior service in gar- 
 rison and in campaign, so far as their- grade is^^joncerned. 
 
22 DAjiS OF WSTKUCTipN. 
 
 , , Officers. 
 
 ^vor^'-b^cor ■ liourd be at 'least- alilc to cotnmand ac- 
 d5rJiiii;-.!<) lys i-ank. " .Ifo one will be considered fully iu- 
 vSlU'ucLediinloss ho'ctn also explain and execute all that 
 is con'iain' d in .this book. 
 
 The tifhory pi i\\(i. officel^ should include this book 
 and all the roii^ilnttions which j^rescvibc tlu.ir duties In 
 their different fositians, either in peace or Avar. 
 
 If tiirt faults cojnuutted on diill by an oflicer, of any 
 vaqk whatsoever, atise from negligence or want of in- 
 struotiofi, the coluiicl of the fegimeut shaJl cause him to 
 b^ itntiicsliatoly r'-'pliwed. • -• ■ '. 
 
 ARTK3LE 3fKTH. 
 
 INSiiiUUTIOK TO MUUIST ^wiliiuLi SADDLE, 
 A'ND fo SADLLE. 
 
 » Planner of Vaulting. 
 
 Seize the m«no \ni\\ the Mt hand, hold the»l!eius of 
 tlie snaflle in' the rii;ht hand, and plticc it<)n tlve with- 
 ers, the thumb to tiie left, the ffngers to the right; raise 
 yourself by a'spriii/> on tlie two wrists, the body straight, 
 pass the rightrleg e„\tended over the croup of the horse, 
 without rouchiiig liim, and seat' yourself on hjs back. 
 
 To dismoimt, pass the kft rein of the snaffle into the. 
 rio^ht Iffind'; place Lhis hand on the withers ; seize the 
 mane with the left hand, raise joureelf on the two 
 wrists, pass the right -leg extended over the croup of 
 the horse, without touclii.ng him, bringing the legs to- 
 gether, the body straight, and come to the ground lightly 
 on the tocf5, bending the knoes a little. 
 
BAgIS OF INSTRUCTION. '23 
 
 Manner of Rolling the Cloak. 
 
 *Yhc cloak being eniircly unfolded, the sleeves src laul 
 ilat and extended parallebto the two front oda'cs of the 
 cloak;, each one is then turi\cd up and foldcd'noar the 
 elbow, so as to give a length of 3 feet C> inches from ono_ 
 elbow to the other, the middle of the cloak •remaining- 
 uncovered. The cape is then turned down dyer t^^. 
 sleeves, in such a manner that the front' edges iiQay ^- 
 aetly cover those of the clonk." '** - ' •*"> • • 
 
 Tlic lower extremity of the,clpak is turned up about 
 10 inches; the skirts "are* ]i!:owfse turned. toward^ each 
 other, so that thoy ntaj' to\ich the fold of the vjleevee, 
 and tliafr, being folded a second time upoit tlieyi'selves, 
 they may give to the cloak the form of a rectangle ; the 
 lowen* extremity of ,the cloak is then turned up about 7 
 inches, and it is rolled as tightly as possible, com- 
 mencing at the collar and'pressiijg the knee upon it a?5 
 it is rolled, to hold it. The part of the cloak wliieh is- 
 rolled is then introduced ijito the sort of pocket formed 
 by the part which was tiirned back. 
 
 Manner of Saddling, 
 
 Approach 'the horse on the leftside, and lay the blan- 
 ket, folded into six thicknesses, on his back; the edges 
 on the left side. 
 
 Seize it, then-, with the left hand on the withers, and 
 with the right on the loins ; slide it once or twice' from 
 front to reai:, to smooth the hair, taking .care to rais.e'ifc ■ 
 in carrying it forward, so as not to brush .up the hau',' 
 
 The blanket should be so arranged as to 'pr©je'ct one 
 finger's breadth bej'dud the bars in rear. 
 
 'Seize the saddle at the puinmel with the leftJmnd, at 
 the cautle Avith the right hand, and place it geiitly on 
 the horse's back, bringing it from the direction of his ' 
 croup, in order not to frighten him, and p1ace.it a little 
 in rear, that the crupper may bo put on without draw- 
 ing it back. , Let down the girth, breaststrap, and crup- 
 per ;• step behind the horse, seize the tail with the \fiit 
 
BASIS OP INSTRUCTION. 
 
 liailcl, aii'l hvist tlio liair around tli9 doiSk with, the 
 rieht, v.-liich llion seizes the (?vui>pcr nnd passes the tail 
 throu^lh it, taking care that none of the hah* remaijft 
 UDilcrlt, NVlilcU woidd Inirt tht; ho: so. * 
 , Stop t<j*tho-. right side otf the norse, and, seizing the 
 saddle at tlvc caTiUc ^'ith llic left hand,. and atrthc p'onv- 
 r.K'^^Yit•h Die right hand, I'aiseit and carry itiorwaVd, 
 witraouf'moving the blanket; see, at the same time, that 
 th^re are no straps ca.u^ht under the saddle ; place the 
 ..girth flat, and pass it-tlft-ough the loop of the false mar- 
 tingale; return to the Igf^ide bj the liTea.d of the horse ; 
 run \h6 lefo hand between tjie vrithers and the blanket; 
 raise the l)lanket up a little, so that it will not conipresa 
 the witUers ; inickla the girtli and the l)rcaststra'p. 
 
 ARTICLE SEVENTH. 
 
 OF TRAINING HORSES WHICH HAVE BEEN AL- 
 • " • READY KIDDE'N. . 
 
 "whenever a horse ih-it's or is restive without an ap- 
 parent cause, the saddlery shouM be carefully examined 
 in ord'^*to se'c if any part hurts or" tickles" him. Mere 
 forCGj and \vant of skill jxnd coolness, tend .to confirm 
 ^Ice and' bad habitfi. Resistance in horses is often a 
 work of vig«'>r, and proceeds from high Bpirits ; purdah 
 ment >vould turn it into vice. * 
 
 Rearing is a bad and dangerous habit; while tha 
 hoi'sc is tip,-tjici rider niU^t yield the Hand, iand" at the 
 lime ho is coming down must vigorously determine 
 him forward'; if Ihig is done at any other time, it may 
 add a eprfng to his , rearing, . and make him come over. 
 If this fail, he must be whipped \)y a person from 
 behind. 
 
BASIS OF INSTRUCTION. 35 
 
 Kicking can be prevented by lidldiiig the liorse's 
 iiead well up and closing the legS: — if ncccssar}', forcing 
 hlra* forward. , • 
 
 jSf.artivcf' somot'imes proceeds from defect oif eight; 
 whi«li, if only in one eye, cao'ensilj' be ascertained. If 
 from fearj the liorse must be taken up to the object with 
 great patience and gentleness, and be allowed to toueh 
 it with his lip. In no case should a hor&c he punished for 
 timidity. The dread of chastisement will increase bj.9 
 ftjar of the object. But if a horse persistently turns 
 back, he must be punished ; always,. however, while his 
 head is away from the object. Finding that he o^nly suf- 
 fers while he is turned back, and his head is away, he 
 will desist. . • . 
 
 If a horse turns-against a fence,- and leans to it, t^irn 
 his head <o it, and- not from it. 
 
 PREPARATORY LESSON. 
 
 To make a horse tractah'le and steady at -Moimtinr/. 
 
 A first act of subjection, v/hich may appear of little 
 importance, will prove of great service ; it makes the 
 hor^e quiet, gives him confidence, and the man such 
 ascendancy that the hor?c from the outset is inclined to 
 yield to the means employed to bring him under con- 
 trol. Two lessons of half an hour \till Buflice to exe- 
 cute this. . . 
 
 Go up to the horse, pat .him on the neck, and speak 
 to him ; then taking the bit reins at a few inches from 
 the rings with the left hand, place yourself -so as'to 
 offer, as much resistance as possible to the horse when 
 he tries to break away ; take the whip in the full of the 
 right hand, with the point down, raise it quietly and 
 tap the horse en the breast ; on this he will naturally 
 try to escape from the annoyance, and back to avoid 
 
U ^ BASIS OF INSTRUCTION. 
 
 the whip; folftTw ihe horso/pulling at the 8«ine time 
 against him, but without discontinaing the. whip iiiithe 
 same quiet way, sliowiiig no signs of anger or any symp- 
 toms of yielding. The horse, soon tired of trying in^l- 
 fectually to avoid the inrtiction by jnillingback, will move 
 towards yoii; you amisl then stop aud make niuoli of 
 him. Tliis i-e|)eated once or, twice will prove wonder- 
 fully successful, 'even, in the first lesson. Tlio horse, 
 having4ound, out how to avoid the punishmcnl, will not 
 wait for the application of the whip, but anticipate it, 
 by moving up at the slightest gesture; this wiilj!)e of ' 
 great afe6isLn.nce in the subsequent bending le-sons, as 
 also of 'great use in mounting and dismounting,, atid 
 inuch acccU'rate the training of the horse. 
 
 To bend or supple the IJoa'sc^s neclc.. 
 
 The balance of the horse's body and his lightness in 
 han^ depend on the proper- carriage of the head and 
 neck, and to there two points attention must fii^t, and 
 chielly, be directed. ■ They should always precede and 
 prepare the horse b}' .their attitude for every movement 
 about to be executed ; and the rider has little power 
 over the animal until he has rendered both these points 
 susceptildc of every impulse communicated by him.' 
 
 The horses, with the curb bridle on, are fornjcd in 
 line, at two paces apart, their riders standing at their 
 Jieads, preparatory to the first bending lesson with 
 the bit. - * 
 
 A young horse generally attempts to resist the bit, 
 either by bending his neck to a side, setting his jaw 
 against it, carrying his nose high up, or low down. We 
 must therefore 'render him manageable by teach.ing him 
 to bring his head to position, and arching his neck on 
 the reins being felt. And it will bo found in a short 
 time that horses that required the whole strength of a 
 man's arm to make them obey the action of the bit will 
 bend to the slightest feeling of the reins; for, finding 
 that they cannot resist the power of the bit, used in the, 
 manner hereafter shown, their instinct ^ill teach them 
 
BASTS 0F INSTRUCTION. 27 
 
 to ob^}'', and habit accustom- them to the impnlre rc- 
 eeiv'6(l I'rom the riclor. 
 
 As a' general, rule, iii all the ensuing ben dfng lessons, 
 when a'horse cha'mps the bit, it is a sign tliat he no 
 longer resists the action of the- hind; tlien make much 
 of him, and allow hitn to resume his natural pot^ition. It 
 is of the utmost importance tluxt the horse never be 
 allowed to take the initiative. Always oppose the raising 
 j3f thejiorse's head — always lower your jiands and bring 
 it down. « • • 
 
 See ■.that the bit is properly placed in the horde's 
 mouth, and the curb-chain so that you can pass 3'our 
 finger under it, place yourself on the near side, close to 
 the' horse's neck and facing his head, the feet a little 
 apari to give you more power. 
 
 Takotiio off bit rein in the '<'ull of the right hand, 
 close up, with the ring of the bit between the foreringer 
 and thumb ; the near rein in the same way with the 
 left hand, thumb nails toward each other, and'the little 
 fingero outwards; bring the right hand towards the 
 body, extending the left one from j'ou at the same time, 
 so as to, turn tlic horse's head to the right. The strength 
 employed must be gradual, and proportioned to the 
 resistance met with, taking care at iirst not to bring the 
 horse's nose too much in, or too close to his chest, which 
 would make the bend very difficult ; if the horse backs,, 
 continue the' pressure until he, finding it impossible to 
 escape from the restraint imposed upon him by the bit 
 held* thus crossways in his mouth, stands still and yields 
 to it. 
 
 When the bend is complete, the horse will hold his 
 head there without any restraint, and champ the bit; 
 then make much of him, and allow him to resume gentiv 
 his natural position, but not to throw his head round 
 hurriedly. ' Practice this in the same manner to the left. 
 
 This lesson not only teaches the horse to follow the 
 indication of the rein to both hands, but also to yield 
 his under jaw to Jhe pressure of the bit, the advantage. 
 
28 BASIS OF INSTRUCTION. 
 
 of which will soou become apparent. And now, before 
 inoiiriting, prepare the horses io rein in. 
 
 For tills purpose cross' the snalHe reins lehirid the 
 horse's jiw, talcing the near rein in the right hand, and 
 tlie off rein in the left; at about six inches from the ring, 
 and dravr tiiem across each other till the horse giyee 
 way to the pressure and " reins in." Do not foi-get to 
 oppose the raising of the horse's head by lowering your 
 hands and^ bringing it down again. When the^hprse. 
 giv.eaway to the cross pressure of the.snaiile, ease your ^ 
 hand and make much of hirn. - 
 
 The insti-uctor now orders the men to mount, and 
 then to bend tlie horses' lieads to the right nnd left. 
 The reins being properly adjusted in the left hand to 
 bend the horse's head to the rU/ht, seize the right rein 
 with the right liand well down, so as to have the r-eine 
 short on the off side. Thcji draw tliem o^uietly towards 
 you till you get the • horse's head completely round to 
 the right, in the same position as in the bend dis- 
 mounted. When the horse champs the bit mahe much 
 of him, and allow him to resume his natuVal position. 
 
 When bending the horse's head to the left, pass the 
 right hand over the left one, seize the left rein and draw 
 the horse's head gently to the left. 
 
 Next teach the horse to rein up, arch his neck, bring 
 his nose into proper position, and there remain steady 
 imtil the rider loosens the -reins. At the word, rein m 
 your liorses, lower. the bridle hand as much as. possible, 
 and turn it so that the back shall be uppermost ; with 
 the right hand — nails down — take hold of the curb reins 
 close to the 'left, and shorten them by degrees, drawing 
 them through the left, which closes on the reins each 
 time they are shortened. 
 
 When the horse resists much, and holds his nose up, 
 keep the reins steady; do -not shorten them, npr lengthen 
 tliem ; close the legs to prevent the horse from backing; 
 he will remain perhaps a minute, or more, with his nose 
 up, and his jaw set against the bit, but will then yield, 
 bring his nose in and champ the bit; n>ake much of hioi 
 
/ . BASIS OF INSliRUCTION. 2d 
 
 •v,'itb the right hand, loosen Ihe reins, and, after a few 
 seconds, rein him in again. 
 
 The Iiorse will thus learn to bring his head into posi- 
 tion whenever you feel the reins, and this practice gives 
 him confidence; for most young horses are afraid of the 
 bit, and if frightened at first by any sudden jerk otthe 
 reins will not after go kindly " up to the hand," or let 
 you have that decree of bearing which is requisite not 
 only to the rider, as it forewarn* him of what the horse 
 is going to do, and whether he requires more collecting 
 (v.-luch he does, if the bearing on the hajid is too heavy;) 
 or more freedom, (.which is requisite if the horse rises 
 too much in his action,) but is also necessary to induce 
 the horse to work boldly and well. 
 
 Some horses fire So shaped that they overdo the rclu- 
 i?ig in, and rest the lojver jaw against the breast ; to 
 counteract this, raise his head, by the use of the snaffle, 
 whilst the leg drives him forwai'd to the hand. 
 
 Some horses will not work up to the bit; that is, will 
 not bear on it at all. Such a horse Is unfit for cavalry 
 duty; his paces can never be equal and steady ; and in 
 ;i melee or single combat he could turn to either side, or 
 stop, and go about, before his rider oould prevent ^im. 
 
 Mow to -teach a Jtorse to obey the pressure 'of the lea. 
 
 On the word of command, circle to the right on ili^ 
 fore hand, the horse's head remains straight to the front; 
 apply the left leg well- behind the girth very quietly, 
 and without touching with the spur ; press against him 
 until he takes a step to the right with his hind Icts • 
 tuke the leg from him, and make much of him ; then re- 
 peat the same, and get another step from him, and eo 
 on until he has turned about, always pausing at the half 
 turn. The horse's fore legs remain steady, and his hind 
 quarters circle round his fore. At first the men may, if 
 necessary, assist themselves by feeling the rein on tho 
 same side, and touching the horse very lightly with the 
 whip close to where the leg is applied. The s'pur may 
 also be used if ..necessary, with a sudden and,Bomew"HM 
 
mo BASIS OP INSTRUCTION. 
 
 decided thrust ; but not Treqxiently, and never with a 
 steady pressure, for, instead of yielding to it, the horse 
 Tfill soon begin to press against it. 
 
 Circle to flie left on the fore hand on the same princi- 
 ple. It raust be an invariable rule never to hurry a 
 hor^e in his bending lessons. 
 
 By degrees, as the horse improves in this Jesson and 
 steps freely from the pressure of the leg, let the rider, at 
 the word, circle to the right on the fore hand, pass the 
 right hand down, shortening the off rein, and bend the 
 horse's head a little to the right, so that he may see his 
 hind quarters coming round ; apply the left leg as usual ; 
 should the horse not answer the pressure, use the reins 
 on the same side with the leg, and resume the opposite 
 rein the moment the horse yields. 
 
 All this must be done gradually, for if you bend the 
 horee's head' round as far as it can go, and attempt thus 
 to circle him the first time, he will resist, finding it too 
 difficult; but if done by degrees, he will soon come to it. 
 
 The leg opposite the one which presses the hind quar- 
 ters to circle round the fore must be kept close to th.e 
 horae, to assist in keeping him in his place, by commu- 
 nicating a forward impulse, whilst the other leg com- 
 municates the impulse, which makes the hors§ step from 
 right to left, or left to right ; and in order that the pres- 
 sure of the one shall not counteract the effect, of the 
 other, the leg applied to make the horse step to either 
 hand should be further behind- the girth than the leg 
 used to keep him up to hand. Both legs should be close 
 to the horse at all times, the pressure on either side be- 
 ing increased as occasion requires. 
 
 At first dismounted men are useful with the unsteady 
 horses, by taking hold of the curb reins on the apposite 
 side to that which the horse is to step to, and thus 
 assisting the rider, who then only uses the snaffle ; but 
 all extraneous assistance should be as much as possible 
 avoided. 
 
 The instructor now exercises the hoi*ses in the riding 
 house, trotting out to both hands. The bits should not 
 
BASIS OF INSTRUCTION.' 81 
 
 be used much the first few days;- but the horses brought 
 by degrees to bear slighthi on it. Ride them in the 5r« 
 cles ; trot tliem at a collected pace ; walk and trot again ; 
 walk, halt, and make the men bend their horses to the 
 hand they are working to. 
 
 Explain to the men that the horse's head and neck 
 must always be bent the way he is to go, and prepare 
 the animal by their attitude for all turns, circles, &c. ; and 
 whenever they feel tlie curb reins, and the horse does not 
 yield to them, let them keep the bridle hand steady, and 
 play with the snaffle rein until the horse champs the bit. 
 The sufttiie should be continually used to prevent the 
 liorse from leaning on the hand. 
 
 Go through the bending lessons on foot and raounted,- 
 "aud then file home. 
 
 No lessen with young horses should exceed three- 
 quarters of an hour. 
 
 CIRCLING ON THE HAUNCHES. 
 
 A few minutes being devoted to the dismoiiuted bend- 
 ing lessons, mount and begin by reining the horses in, 
 bending them, and^ircling thorn to the right and left on 
 the fore liaud ; this being done once or twice, proceed 
 to the circling on the haunches. 
 
 By circling the horse on the fore hand we have taught 
 him, on applying the leg, to move hie haunches to either 
 hand ; and, as he has thus learnt to obey the leg, we can, 
 bj' making use of it, prevent him from moving hi^ hind 
 legs to the right or left ; therefore he will now bo 
 taught to circle on them, and in a few lessons he will be 
 led to go completely round on his haunches, and thus in 
 time perform the pirouette — a very important accom- 
 plishment for the cavalry soldier; for when engaged, 
 sword in hand, with an enemy, he can turn his horse, 
 right and left, and about, in an instant, and thus gain 
 the advantage over his antagonist. In a contest on 
 hoMcback, it is not the strongest, but the most skillful 
 rider who is likel^bto be victorious. 
 
32 BASIS OF INSTRUCTION. 
 
 At the command, On the haunches, right aJow^," bend- 
 the horse's head a little to fhc right with the bit, pass the 
 right hand over, and take hold the near snaffle rein (not 
 only as an assistance to the horse, but to make th^i men 
 sensible of the necessity of iising the outward rein in 
 these movements; when the horse is broken in it will bo 
 sufficient to carr}' the bridle hand to the side you wish 
 to turn to), apply the left leg behind the girth to -keep 
 the haunches steady ; at the word March, make the 
 horse step to the right with his fore feet, turning on his 
 hind feet, by feeling the left snaffle rein, bringing both 
 hands a little to the right at the same time, and apply- 
 ing the left leg, while keeping the horse up to the band 
 .with the right leg. 
 
 At first the horse must be halted and inade niuch oi" 
 three or four times during each turn, andifliishaunchcsare 
 thrown'out, they must be brought back again by apply- 
 ing the lefx leg ; and thus gradually led on, the horse 
 will learn to go a' lOut to both hands on his' haunches, 
 v\'ithout touching the ground with his forefeet. 
 
 Go through the trotting lesson, then form up and re- 
 peat the bending lessons on foot and mounted. 
 
 REINING BACK 
 
 In reining back, the hors<i must be \vell in hand and 
 well balanced ; he, can then make an equal use of all 
 four legs and raise them equally from the ground. Be- 
 fore reining back the horse should be square to the front, . 
 his head home, and light in hand ; then apply both legs, 
 retaining a steady feel of both reins to make the horse 
 lift one of his hind legs. It is at this moment that a 
 double feeling of Loth reins will oblige him to recover 
 his balance by stepping backwards. Place him straight 
 to the front 'by bringing his haunches to the right or . 
 left as may be required ; then give him his head, and 
 make much of him. 
 
 At first a few steps backward is all that should be re- 
 quired of a horse; if he bring his ^ind legs too much 
 
BASIS- OF INSTRUCTION. 88 
 
 uiiJer him, ease the hand and apply both lege to maHe 
 hini' regain his balance forward; and for this reason 
 always use the legs first, and then feel the reins ; because 
 if you feel the reins, l^rst, tlie horse throws his weight 
 back; and the more weight he throws on his hind legs, 
 the less able he is to lift tliera, which is a necessary pre- 
 liminary to stepping back. , * 
 
 Tlie horse should never be allowed to hurry, or run 
 back out of hand, or to diverge from the straight line. 
 
 The squad must be frequently halted during the walk- 
 ing, trotting and bending lessons, to practice the reining 
 back; and independently of the dressing, until all the 
 horfies rein back welL 
 
 Attention must now be directed to making the men 
 kee^ their horses v/ell up to the bit, and putting them 
 together with the use of the hand and. leg ; to see that in 
 all turns, circles, &c., the men bend their horses' heads^ 
 and necks in the new direction before leaving the side of * 
 the horse. Endeavor to make them perfect in their 
 bending and trotting lessons; practice the going abovi 
 on the haunches by frequently hailing at the side, and 
 giving the word, On the haunches about, march. 
 
 THE HORSE'S PACES. 
 
 Walk, 7}'of, and Canter. 
 
 , Before moving foi-^vard the horse should be h'ght in 
 hand, the head brought home (not with the nose stuck 
 out), the neck arched, and he should stand evenly on 
 both hind legs. 
 
 Close the legs and communicate a sufficient impulse to 
 carry him forward without giving the haiid ; for if you 
 do, the head <vid neck may relapse into a position which , 
 will defy the control of the hand. 
 
 The rider should always have a light feeling of the 
 reins; and when the horse bears hard on the bit, keep 
 the hand steady, use both leg^, which, by bringing hia, 
 haunches under him, will oblige the horse to take his 
 weight off your hand. 
 
34 BASIS OP INSTRUCTION. 
 
 •It is necessary, in order to make the liorse handy,"^ 
 exercise bim at trotting out ; but it is not eno\-gb that 
 he should trot fast; the quickuess of the pace should not 
 detract from bis lightness in hai^d, or tlie case witb 
 which he should be capable of answering all indications 
 of the hand and leg. 
 
 The hand must be constantly at work to retain the 
 head and. neck in their proper position without counter- 
 acting the forward impulse communicated by the leg; 
 thus the horse will acquire regularity of pace, increased 
 speed, and that safety which is natural to a horse well 
 balanced and light in hand. 
 
 The cantor is a repetition of bound;?, during which the 
 fore hand risea first, and higher than the hind quartern. 
 
 The horse being properly placed, light in hand' and 
 well balanced, throw his weight from the fore hand 
 4oward8 the haunches, (by increasing the pressure of the 
 lege and restraining him with the reins) and, according 
 to the band you wish to strike off to, throw the weight 
 of the horse to the opposite side ; that is, if he is to lead 
 off with the off fore followed by the off hind, (or canter 
 to the right) throw the weight to his near side. This is 
 done by pulling both reins equally to the left and closing 
 the right leg ; the horse's head remaining placed to the 
 right, and the left leg preventing him from throwing out 
 his haunches. The horse's off legs are thus at liberty, 
 and the forward impulse obliges him to use them ; he 
 could not do otherwise without difficulty. 
 • Cantering to the right, if the left fore leg leads, the 
 horse canters false. To rectify this, feel both reins to the 
 left, in or4er to bring hia weight towards that side — the 
 horse's head reTnaining bent to the right — and close firmly 
 the left leg, to bring his haunchefe in again. 
 
 Teach the horse to strike off on the circle first, then on 
 the straight line. After that, try him at changing leg. 
 
 At this stage, when circling on the forehand, stop the 
 
 horse with the inward leg and outward rein at each 
 
 'step ; make a pause, feel both reins, close both legs, and 
 
 prcBB him up to the hand J ease the rein and leg, t-ake 
 
BASIS or INSTRUCTION. 85 
 
 another step withltic liaunclies, stop liini' again, "rein 
 him in," and close your. legs. . This is very useful ; it 
 prevents the horse fropa getting into a habit of running . 
 round v.-ith his haunches ; it makes him obedient, as it 
 teaches him not to yield to habit, but to trust to the 
 rider's liand and leg alone for guidance ; andyi7 accustoms 
 hyn to collect himself at all times, ajd thus he is always 
 ready. It is very important. 
 
 Before moving off the ground give the word, Hein hi 
 your horses ; caution the men to close their legs to their, 
 horses' sides, and to bring the spurs cIqso, without touch- 
 ing them. Give the word, Spur; the left hand is held 
 st<mdily down, and the spur applied on both sides, very 
 gently at first ; the horse should, not move from his ground, 
 but merely arch his neck. This must be repeated two or 
 three times, always quieting the horse after the spur 
 has been given. 
 
 ■Repeat this at intervals. 
 
 Tl\xQ reining &ac^• is to be practiced often. Be careful 
 that the men apply the legs first,' and then feel the reins, 
 to make the horses step back. See that they sit upright 
 in theii- saddles ; do not hurry, and be satisfied with one 
 step at .a time. 
 
 Demi-pirouette. 
 
 Halt the squad, riding in file, on the side of the riding 
 house, and give the command. On the haunches, about ; 
 .at this caution the rider must throw_ the horse's weight 
 from the forehand to the haunches, by closing the legs 
 • and restraining him with the' reins ; at the command 
 MAEcn, given almost iqimcdiately, he must carry the 
 reins decidedly to the side to which the turn is . to be 
 made, and close firmly the opposite leg, to prevent the 
 horse from throwing around his haunches, and-force him- 
 to turn on his hind legs. When the aboiit is completed, 
 the horses should be squared and made much .of before 
 they are put about again. 
 
 Canter.on the circle to both, hands, striking off from 
 
86 • BASIS OF INSTRUCTION. 
 
 >i wftlk, and froquently bring tbomto n v.-alk without- 
 allowing thoni to fftll fust into n trot. 
 
 Thcso lesions -will require at Ief\st tbirtj'.daj's, witb ai- 
 len.=t one lcs.^OD'a (lay. 
 
 ^ ^fanurr of acnisiomlv^ the Horse to Leap. 
 
 The (Jitcli is Icaj.vTl Lcfurc thf ]>;ir. Thi' hor. - ;.:_ 
 lo«] at first with a Eoi'sc accustomed to the exercise in 
 front, Tlic -enaffle must be u?e<:l. If necessary, the hoi-sc 
 must bo urgGd by a wliip from behind. A low fence is 
 preferable to the bar ; and the horse should not be 
 leaped often back and forward over the same thiftg«or 
 at the same place. 
 
 Td accxtatom Horses to Military Noises and Fir'n 
 
 ■>■/. 
 
 The horse, broken to obedience to the hand and lege, 
 can be brought to face most things with little trouble. 
 Encouraged gradually to approach anything which he 
 fears, as a drum being beaten, until he feels it with his 
 lip, he will then cease to be alarmed. Tho field music 
 should be practised at the exercise grounds or riding 
 house. 
 
 A-few trained. horses are mi.xod -nith the new ones, 
 and towards the close of the less'on .separated a litUOj- 
 and the troopers who ride tlnin fire thcir.pistoJs, the 
 riding being continued without change.' . "*' 
 
 If the horses become much cxcitod, discontinue the 
 firing until they become calm. 
 
 In firing from tho hox'seV back, the pistol should at 
 first be held vertically. 
 
 Especial care should be taken not to alter the feel of 
 the horse's mouth when tiring, or suddenly to close the. 
 legs; the rider being cool and quiet, the horse will'soou 
 follow the exam] lie. . . • 
 
 In all .lessons, if one or more horr;ca'at*o so restless or 
 unmanageable as to excite and throw tho others into 
 •coufu.':ion, they should bo .sent off and sop.'^.rately dealt 
 
BASIS OP INSTKUCTION. 8T 
 
 Avith; they require more j)ains, and much caressing nnd 
 other encouragement.' 
 
 When the Iiorses are accustomed to the firing, tliey 
 are formed at the end of the riding ground and marched 
 abreast slowl}' toward a party of dismounted men 
 placed at the other end ; these fire several volleys, until 
 the horses are within forty or fifty j'ards, when the 
 . firing ceases ; tlic hoi-ses are ridden steadily on until 
 thej' reach the men; they are then stopped and caressed. 
 
 Young horses are in like manner accustomed to the 
 manual of arms, waving of flags, music, 'Ac. 
 
 Practice of Paces for Manceuvrc. 
 
 The Himount horses must now be carefully practised, 
 as all the regimeBtal hoi'sea must be, at the paces of 
 ruanfeuvre. 
 
 Nothing can be more important to the regularity and 
 order, and often the success, of large bodies of cavahy, 
 than uniformity in the gaits. The walk should be at 
 the rate of three and three-fourths miles an hour, the 
 trot seven and a half miles an hour, and the gallop ten 
 miles an hour. To confirm the horses in these uniform 
 rates, measure off a half mile and practice the horses to 
 walk it in eight minutes, trot it in four minutes, and 
 gallop it in three minutes. 
 
 ARTICiiE eighth; 
 
 DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL PRINCIPLES. 
 
 A Rank is composed of men abreast of each other. 
 A FiLB is a man in rank; or two or more men, one bo- 
 hind another in ranks. 
 
 Feoxt is the direction perpendicular to the alignment 
 of a boJy of troops and btfore it, either in coVamn or 
 in line. 
 
 CisNTRK is the middle of .siua a bod^ . 
 
iJ3 ■ BASIS -OF INSTRUCTION, 
 
 Wings are the two grand divisions into -^vhich a regi- 
 ment, or an army, is divided, wlign in line. 
 
 Flank is the right or left side of a column, or line. 
 
 Interval is the vacant apace between two bodies of 
 troops, or between files, :, . 
 
 The interval between two troopers in rank; is 4 in<5heB 
 from knee to knee. '~ .' * 
 
 Distance is the vaTcant space between any two subdi- 
 visions in column. 
 
 When a body of troops is formed in column' of pla- 
 toons; the distances prescribed are" measured from the 
 fore feet of the horses of one ?ank to the fore feet of the 
 hai*se3 of another rank. 
 
 DErrn is the space included between the head and 
 rear of a column. - * 
 
 The depth of a regiment in close column is about 
 equal to a platoon front multiplied by the number, of 
 squadrons. 
 
 To estimate the front of a troop, and the depth of a 
 column, it is necessary to know that a horse, when 
 mounted, occupies in breadth one yard, The length of 
 a horse is considered three yards. 
 
 By the Croup is alwa^'s meant the rear extremity of 
 the horse. 
 
 Alignment is the placing of men, or troops, on the 
 same line. 
 
 When a body of troops is to*form and align itself on 
 another, it halts one horse's length in rear of the lino of 
 formation. . . 
 
 ■ A Column is the disposition of a body of troops in 
 subdivisions, one behind another. 
 
 Open Column is formed of subdivisions, having be- 
 tween them the distance necessary to form in line in 
 every way, being generally of platoons, the column of 
 manoeuvre. That column is, distinguished by the name^ 
 Open Column. ' * , • ; 
 
 Close Column is formed of equadrons,*witha ^i^3QC.e 
 
BASIS OP INSTRUCTION. 39 
 
 of platoon front from one to another. The object of 
 this disposition is "to give the least possible depth to the 
 column. . ^ 
 
 Double Column is formed by the advance from the 
 centre of a line, by platooits at wheeling distance, the 
 right wing left in fronts the left wing right in front ; 
 the t"\vo columns preserving an interval between their 
 flanks. 
 
 Points of Direction serve to point- out the direction 
 in which a troop in line, or in column, is to march ; or 
 else to mark the right and left -of a line. 
 
 Intermediate Points are those taken between the 
 fixed pointa They are used to preserve the direction 
 during the march, or to insure the rectitude of the form- 
 ation of the lines. 
 
 The two sergeants on the flanks, who are not counted 
 in the rank, are the right.guide and left guide of their 
 respective squadrons. 
 
 In the oblique march the giiide is on the side towards 
 which the march is made ; and when the primitive di- 
 rection is resumed, after having obliqued, the guide is 
 where it was before having obliqued. 
 
 In a column composed of cavalry and infantry, the 
 guides of the cavalry cover the second file of the subdi- 
 visions of infantry on the side of the guides. In line, 
 the officers who are in front of the squadrons alignthem- 
 selvee on the rear rank of the infantry. 
 
 Wheel is a circular movement executed by a body of 
 troops in line ; each of the men describes the arc of a ' 
 circle, larger in proportion to hie distance from the pivot. 
 
 About Face, or "Wheel, is to face or wheel so as to re- 
 vecse the front. . 
 
 . Right, or Left Face, is- to face at right angles to tke 
 former front. 
 
 Right Half, or Left Half Face, or Wheel, is a ri^heej 
 of 45 degrees. ' 
 
 Pivot is the mafi of the flank oil which the wheel is 
 
40 BASIS OF INSTRUCTION. 
 
 made; there are tR^o kiuus, the fixed pivot and the 
 movable. pivot: .n " 
 
 The pivot is, fixed whenever lie turns upon himself; it 
 is movable when he describes an arc of a circle. 
 
 The arc- of a circle described by the pivot of a rank 
 of two, cf foui", of eight, or of a platoon making the 
 fourth of a wheel, is 5 yards ; and for a squadron it is 
 20 yards. * .. , ■ " " 
 
 Ploy^ient is the movement by^which a regiment forms 
 from liue into close column. 
 
 Deployment is the movement by which a regiment 
 forms from close column into line. 
 
 Formation is the regular placing of all the fi'actions of 
 a body of .troops in any prescribed order. 
 
 Paces : There are three kinds ; the walk, the trot, and 
 the gallop. 
 
 On foot there are three Mnds of step; the common 
 step, the quick step, and the double-quick step. 
 
 On foot the movements are executed habitually at 
 the quick step, without the command being given. 
 When they are to be executed at the common step, or 
 doublc-qirick, the, command sliould signify it. 
 . Tlie'pace, \\'Then used as a measure, is 3 feet. 
 ' On foot the common step is at the rate of 90 per min- 
 ute; the quick step is at the rate of 110 per minute; the 
 double-quick step is at the rate of 165 per minute. . , 
 
 The Direct March is that which is executed by troops 
 in line or in column, to move off perpendicularly to 
 their alignment. ' ^ . 
 
 The March by a Flaxe is that by which ground is 
 gained to the right or left, after having made the fourth 
 of a wheel. 
 
 The Oeiique MARcn is that by which, when moving 
 forward, ground is gained towards one of the flanks 
 without changing the front. There are two kinds, thc- 
 indlvidaal oblique march, and the oblique march h^ troop. 
 
BASIS OF INSTRUCTION. 41 
 
 The individual oblique march is that ^vhich is cxecu- 
 ted by tin individual movement of each man. 
 
 Tlie oblique march by troop is that which is executed 
 by the movement, at t]ie same time, of each of the sub- 
 divisions of a troop in line. 
 
 Countermarch is a movement by which tha men of a 
 rank march to form themselves facing tlic rear, parallel 
 to the first formation. 
 
 The Charge is a direct and impetuous march, the "ob- 
 ject of which is to strike the enemy. 
 
 Skirmishers arc men dispersed in front, in rear, or on 
 the .flanks of a troop, to cover its movements or its 
 poeition. * ■ 
 
 Obstacle is anything in the nature of the ground 
 which obliges troops in line to ploy apart of their front. 
 
 Defile is a passage which compels a line to ploy into 
 column, or a column to diminish its front. 
 
 Evolutions are the regular movements by which a 
 regiment passes from one order io another. 
 
 Evolutions of the line arS these same movements exe- 
 cuted by several regiments. Their applicatit/i', com- 
 bined with tho position or movements of the euctny, is . 
 called manoiriwes. ^ 
 
 CoMMA^jiDs : There are. three kinds: 
 
 The command of caution, which; is "Attention." It is 
 the signal to preserve immobiHty and to give attention. 
 
 The preparatory . command. It indicates the move- 
 ment which is to be executed. 
 
 The command of execution^ at which the ' iction is 
 commenced. 
 
 The tone of command should be animated, distinct, 
 and of a loudness proportioned to the troop wtuch is 
 commanded. 
 
 Preparatory commands should be uttered vith all 
 passible distinctness. 
 
 In commands of execution articulation is not so neces- 
 sary ; but they should be prolonged, because the move- 
 
42 BASIS or INSTRUCTION. 
 
 • ' . 
 raent wiiich h to follow tlieqi being communicuted fi'ora 
 
 •the man to' the horse, all jerking or abruptnessis thereby 
 avoiiled; and thev "will bo better heard amid the noise 
 of cavalry in motion, ^ -, 
 
 la the manual" of arms, the part of the command 
 ■which causes an execution should be pronounced in a 
 firm and brief tone. 
 
 The command of caution, and the preparatory com- 
 mands, are distinguished by italics'; those of execution, 
 
 by CAPITALS. 
 
 .. A TrMKis one of the parts info which an action is di- 
 vided to facilitate the instruction and execution.- A 
 motion is a further subdivision with the same object.- 
 
 ARTICLE NINTH. 
 
 (The book of signals is at the end of the work.) 
 
 1. The general. 
 
 2. Boots and saddlea 
 
 3. To horse. 
 
 4. The assembly. * 
 
 5. To arms. 
 
 6. To the standard. 
 
 7. The march. (Il^also an3wers for a quick step 
 on foot.) ■ • 
 
 8. The charge. 
 
 9. The rally. . ' 
 
 • 10. Reveille, 
 ll. Stable call. 
 
 12. Watering call. 
 
 13. Breakfast call. 
 
 14. Assembly of the guard. 
 
 15. Orders for the orderly sergeant. 
 f6. Assembly of the trumpeters. 
 
 17. Retreat. • 
 
 18. Fatigue call. 
 
 19. Dinner call. 
 
 20. Distributions. 
 
 21. Drill call. 
 
HASIS OF INSTRUCTION. 43 
 
 22. Officer's call. 
 
 23. The rednll. 
 
 24. Sick call. 
 £5. Tattoo. 
 
 26. To extinguish lights. 
 
 ' For the Service of Skirmishers. 
 
 1. Forward. 
 
 2. Halt. 
 
 C. To the left. • ■ 
 
 4. To the right. 
 
 5. The about. 
 
 6. Change direction to the right. 
 T. Change direction to the left. 
 
 8. Trot. 
 0. Gallop. 
 10. To commence firing. 
 ■ 11. To cease firing. 
 
 12, To charge as foragers. 
 The rally is No. 9, general signals. 
 To change the gait to a walk, halt aud fortvard are 
 sounded. 
 
 Note. — The recall serves to withdraw trooji?, so that 
 they rejoin the main body, or the commander, at the 
 ordinary gait'; and also for the cefesatiou, of exercises. 
 
TITLE SECOND. 
 
 INSTRUCTION ON FOOT. 
 
 SCHOOL OF THE TROOPER, DISMOUNTED. 
 
 1. — Th^bbject of this school being the individual and 
 pro^-iossive iustruclion of the recruits, the instructor 
 docs not require ft movement to be executed until -he 
 has given an exact explanation of it; and he executes 
 himseltthe movement wfiich he commands, so as" to join 
 example to precept. He accustoYns the recruit to take 
 by himself the position which is explained, teaches hiin, 
 to rectify it only when required by his want of intelli- 
 gence, and sees that all the Inovemeiits are performed 
 without precipitation. - ; 
 
 Each movement should be perfectly understood before 
 passing 'to another. After they have beeh properly ex- 
 ecuted in the order laid down in tach lesson, the in- 
 structor no longer confines himself to that order; on the 
 contrar}^, he should change it, that" he may judge of the 
 intelligence of tlie men. , , . 
 
 2. — The instructor allows the men to rest two* or 
 three times in the hour ; for this purpose he commands. 
 Rest. * . 
 
 At the command kest the trooper is no longer required 
 to preserve immobility, but will keep his left heel in its ■ 
 place. 
 
 3.— "When the instructor wishes to commence the 
 instruction, he commands, attention ; at this command 
 
46 SCHOOL OF THE 
 
 t!ic trooper takes his position, remains motionless, -and 
 lixee his attention. 
 
 4. — The first principles of the position, ancl those of 
 the march, are taught to each man individually, or, -at 
 most, to eight at a time. In the latter case they iye 
 placed on the same line, -one yard from each other, 
 without being required to' align themselves. 
 
 V POSITION OF THE TROOPER DISMOU]STED. . 
 
 S. — The heels on the same line as near each other-a? 
 the conformation of the man will permit; 
 
 The feet turned out equally, and forming -with oaxh 
 ^ther sometliing less than a right angle; ' 
 
 " The knees straight without stiffness; 
 
 The body erect on the hips, inclining a little forward ; 
 
 The belly rather drawn in, and the breast advanced; 
 
 The shoulders square and falling equally ; 
 
 The arms hanging near the side ; 
 ^ The palm of the hand turned a little to the front ; 
 
 The head erect and square to the front, without con- 
 straint ; . 
 
 The chin somewhat'drawn in ; 
 
 The eyes straight to the front. 
 
 When the trooper is armed, the left hand hangs by 
 the side over the saT^re.* 
 
 EYES RIGHT, EYES LEFT. 
 
 Jii,, — The instructor commands : 
 
 .1. JSyes — Right. 
 12,. Front, 
 
 At the first command, turn the liead gently to the 
 iight, BO that the corner of the left eye, next to tlw nose, 
 may be on a line with the buttons of the jacket. 
 
 M ih& command feont, turn the. head gently to the 
 iront^ • . 
 
TROOPER, DISJTO.UNTED. *47 
 
 7. — The movement eyes left is executed nfter the same 
 principles, at the commands : ' 
 
 1. Eye's — Lkft, 
 
 2. Front. 
 
 ^. — The instructor will take particular care that th<5 
 movement of the head does not derange the squnrenese 
 of the shoulders, which would happen if it were too 
 siudden, or if the head were turned more than is neces- 
 sary. . . . 
 
 As the trooper should, turn the head only, to align 
 himself, and in the wheelings, it is important that he 
 (should be accustomed to turn it but verv little. 
 
 RIGHT FACE, LEFT FACE, ABOUT FACE, RIGHT 
 OBLIQUE FACE, LEFT OBLIQUE FACE. 
 
 • 9. — The insfi*netor eoraraands:: 
 
 1. Right (or left). 
 ''*2: Face. 
 
 1 time. 
 
 At the second <}ommand, raise the right foot slightly, 
 tufn on the left heel, raising the toes a little, and tli;n 
 replace the right heel by the side-of tlie left^ and on the 
 *ame line.. 
 
 1 0. — A bout — Face. 
 
 2 times. 
 
 1. At the first part of the command, xnhka a half face 
 to tht right, turning on the left heel, place the rigHt foot 
 nquare behind the left, the hollow of it opposite to, and 
 three inches from, the kft heel. 
 
 2". At the command, fack, turn on both heels to fooe 
 ^ to the rear, raising the toes a littl<?, the knees straight, 
 and bring the right foot by the side of the left. 
 
4S. SCHOOL OP THE 
 
 11,— -J. Right oblique (or left oblique.) 
 • 2. Face, 
 
 1 time. 
 
 At the second commancl, raise the right foot a little, 
 turn upon the left, raising the toes slightly, and then re- 
 place the right heel by the side of the left, on the same 
 line, making /acl? 80 degrees to the. right or left, (one- 
 third of a right or left face. ) 
 
 . 12. — The instructor pays particular attention that the 
 position of the body shall not be deranged by these 
 movements. 
 
 COMMON STEP. 
 
 nf% 13. — The length of the common step is 2 feet 4 inches, 
 measured from heel to heel ; its quifckness is at the rate 
 of 90 per minute, 
 
 14. — To explain the principles and mefiianism of the 
 step, the instructor places himself 8 or 10 paces in front, 
 facing the squad ; he executes the step slowly himself. 
 ■He commands: . 
 
 1. Forward. 
 
 2. Marcu. 
 
 * 
 At the com'marid, forward, throw the weight of the 
 body on tlie right leg.'' - 
 
 At the command, makcd, carry forward the left foot, 
 smartly and without a jerk, 2 feet 4 inches from the right, 
 the knee straight, the toe a little depressed, and slightly 
 turned out, the upper part of the body inclined forward; 
 plant the left foot, the whole weight of the body being 
 thrown on it; carry forward the right leg, smartly and 
 without jerk, the foot near the ground ; plant it at the 
 same distance, and in the same manner as has just been 
 explained for the left foot, and continue to march with- 
 out crossing the legs or tmrning the shoulders, and with 
 the face always to the front. ^ 
 
TROOPER, DISMOUNTED. 49 
 
 16. — To halt, the' instructor commands : 
 
 1. jSquad. 
 
 2. Halt. 
 
 At the compaand, bring the foot which is in rear by 
 the. side of the other, without shock. 
 
 ^ 16.— rThe instructor marks the cadence of the. step from 
 time to time by the command one, at the moment when 
 the left foot should be planted ; this cadence being regu- 
 lated at the rate of 90 steps per minute. 
 
 TO CHANGE FEJET. 
 
 17. — The instructor teaches this to the squad one at a 
 time ; it is used to catch the step when lost. 
 
 The foot that is being advanced from the rear is plan- 
 ted by tlie side of the other, which is instantly advanced 
 in its stead so as not to lose the cadence. 
 
 TO MARCH BY A FLANK, 
 
 18 --The mdn being in line at a halt, the instructor 
 commands: • e • 
 
 1. night — Face.' 
 .2; Fonocird. 
 
 3. March. 
 
 At the command march, the whole file step off with 
 animation together, with the left foot. " 
 
 1 9. — A well-instructed man should at first march by 
 the side of the leading man. 
 
 The instructor will cause the men to cover each other 
 accurately. He will see tiiat they do not look down- 
 wards, -and do not bend the knee. 
 
 TO FACE TO THE RIGHT OR LEFT WHEN. 
 MARCHING. 
 
 20. — ^The squad marching, the instructor commands : 
 
50 • SCUOOL OF TlIK 
 
 ^l*'~By ffie rujhtjiank, 
 *2. March. 
 
 At the command JiAuciT, turn the boily to the right, 
 and step off with the right foot iu the new direction, 
 without Josing tlie cadence of the step. 
 
 The instructor gives the command MAr.cii at the mo- 
 ment when the left foot is coming to the ground. 
 
 When it ia to the left,W\Q command maucii is given at 
 the moment when the right foot is coming to the ground, 
 Bj this means the new direction is always commenced 
 with the leg on the side towards wliioh the turn is aiade. 
 
 OBLIQUE FACE TO THE RIGHT OR LEI<T WHE.N 
 ;M ARCHING. 
 
 ■ 21. — ^The squad marching, the instructor commands . 
 
 1, Right oblique {ov left oblique.) 
 
 2. Mauch. 
 
 At the command march, the men make'an oblique face 
 to the ric/ht (or to the left,) ayd march iu the new direc- 
 tion. 
 
 22, — ^Tp rtsuine the primitive direction, the instructor 
 commands: 
 
 Forward. 
 
 At this command, the men make an oblique face to the 
 left, if they have obliqued to- the right, and an obHqy-i' 
 face to the right, if they have obliqued to tlio left, and 
 march straight to the front. 
 
 QUrCK STEP. 
 
 23. — Tlie length of the quick step is the same as that 
 of the common step, and its quickness is at the rate of 
 110 per minute. 
 
 The squad being at a. halt, the instructor commands : 
 
 1. Forward, quiet: time. ^ 
 % March. 
 
TROOPER, DISMOUNTED. 51 
 
 At the command makcu, step off smartly with the left 
 
 -24. — The squad is exercised, when marching at th-. 
 qaick step, to halt, move on, face to the right and left, 
 half face to the right and left, and move off again, aa m 
 Gonimou time. ^ 
 
 25.— The squad marching in quick time, to change iv 
 domraon time, the.instructor commands : 
 
 1. Commo7i time. 
 
 2. March. 
 
 At tlie cqmnaand march, the- squad takes the comnini 
 slop. 
 
 gf)_ — To resume the quick step, the instructor com- 
 mands : 
 
 1. Quick time. 
 
 2. M.\RCU. 
 
 At the eommanJ MARCH, the squad resumes the quick 
 «tep. . - ' 
 
 DOUBLE QUICK STEr. 
 
 2'7. — The squad marching in common or quick time, to 
 
 ohange to double quick time, thd instructor c'ommands: 
 
 _ ' *■-■"■ 
 
 . 1. Double quick. ^ • ' 
 
 2. March. 
 
 At the command march, the men' increase the length 
 orstep to 33 inches, and its rapidity to 165 steps in a 
 minute. 
 
 ♦ In this march the carriage of the Lody is different, be 
 ing nearer that of running. The body is more advanced, 
 (ho knees more beat, the arras Tvith their natural mo- 
 tion. • ' <*• 
 
 Trom a lialt, the command, is: 
 
 1. Forward, double quick, 
 
 2. Maucu, _ ' 
 
52 SCirO^L OF THE 
 
 ^ SABRE EXERCISE. 
 
 28. — For this lesson the squaJ is composed oi from G 
 to 6 men, armed only with sabrea;.thoy arc placed iu 
 cue rank, 9 feet from, each other. 
 
 The object of the moulinet is to render the joints of the 
 arm and wrist supple, and as it adds to the eonlidenoe 
 of the men when isolated, by increasing" their dcxteiity, 
 they should first be exercised at it, as a preparation for 
 thfi other motions. 
 
 Each lesson is therefore commenced and ended with 
 moulinete, executed with a quickness proportioned to the 
 pijpgress of the troopers. The instructor pays particular 
 auention thiit the men do not employ a degree of force 
 in the sabre exercise, which not only is less necessary 
 than skill and suppleness, but which is even prejudicial. 
 Kq observes, also, that they do not lean to one fide, in 
 such a manner as to lose the seat, when mounted ; he re- 
 quires more especially, in the motions of the sabre to the 
 rear, that the blade shall not fall too near the body, for 
 fear of wounding the horse. In describing a circle, the 
 flat of the blade should be to the side, and the edge to 
 the front, and it should be so directed as not to touch 
 either the horse's head, or his haunches, or the knees of 
 tiie rider. 
 
 "When the troopers execute all the motions -with regu- 
 larity, the instructor requires each cut to be given with- 
 out decomposing it ; the last Syllable of a command is 
 the signal for the quick execution of it. All the cuts are 
 then terminated by a half-moulinet, which brings back 
 to the position of guard. "^ 
 
 Thrusts eliould always be used in preference, as thej- 
 require less force, and their result is. more prompt, sure, 
 and decisive".. They should be directed quickly /lojne to 
 the body of the adversary, the sabre being hold ^Vith the 
 full grasp, the thumb-pressing against tho guard in. the 
 direction of the blade. • . . 
 
 The parries against the lauce are the same m against 
 the point. • ^<' ' 
 
TIIOOPER, DISMOUNTED. 53 
 
 29. — The instructor explains what is meant by rigid 
 and left side of the gripe ; by tierce, and by quarte' 
 
 The right side 'of the, gripe is tlie side opposite to the 
 guard. ^ " -,. 
 
 The leftsfdc of the gripe is the side next to the guard. 
 
 Tierce is the position in which the edge of the blade is 
 turned to the right, the nails downwards. .. 
 
 Quarte is the ]X)sition in which the edge ojT the blade 
 is turned to the If ft, "the nails upwards. 
 
 To rest, the sabres Jjeing returned, the instructor, con- 
 forms to yvhat is'^irescribed, Ko. 2. . 
 
 SO. — The troopers being placed as prescribed, No. 28, 
 
 the instructor commands: 
 ■» • 
 
 2 times. 
 
 1. At the first part of the command, unhook the sabre 
 •with the left hand, and bring the hilt to the front; run 
 the right wrist through the sword-knot; 'seize the gripe, 
 draw the blade 6 inches out of tlie scabbard, pressing the 
 scabbard against the thigh with the left hand, which 
 seizes it at the upper ring. ' • 
 
 2. At the command sabre, draw the sabre quickly, 
 raising the arm to its full extent, at an angle of about 
 45 degrees; the sabre in a straight line with the arm, 
 make a slight pause, carry the blade to tUe right shoul- 
 der, the back of it against the hollow of the shoulder, tlvo 
 wrist resting against the hip, the little finger t>n the out- 
 side of the gripe. . ■ 
 
 Return — Sabre. 
 
 ■* 2 times. 
 
 31. — 1. At the command RETURN, carry the sabre ver- 
 tically to the front, the thumb opposite to and 6 inches 
 from the neck, the blade vertical, the edge to the left, ^the 
 thumb extended on the right-side of the gripe, the lilitlo 
 finger by the side of the othel's. 
 
 j^ 
 
5-k SCUOOE OF THE 
 
 ■* 
 
 2. At the commaDd sabhe, cnny iLe wrist opposit-e to 
 and € inches frointbe left shoulder; revolve the point of 
 the blade to the rear, uutil it is nearly under the right 
 hand, which, at the same time, is raised; the left hand, 
 also at the same time, takes hold of the upper part of the 
 seal'.bara ; turn the eyes slightly to the left, return the 
 blade, free the wrist from the sabre knot, drop the right 
 hand by the eide.; turning with the left the hilt toward 
 the body, rind so round to the rear, hook up the Sa^bre, 
 and drop the left hand. 
 
 82, — The eabres being.drawn, the instructor commands; 
 
 Guard. 
 
 1 time. 
 
 At the command guard, carry the right foot about'20 
 iDK'hes-froni the left, the heels on the same line ; place the 
 left hand closed, 6 inches from the body, and as high as- 
 the elbow, the fiogers towards the^body, the little finger 
 liearer than the ihumh, {posilio7i of the bridle-ha7}d;).'(it 
 the same time, carry the right hand about 10 inches in 
 front of the right hip, the blade in an oblique position, 
 ih'e point a little raised, the edge upward, the back of the 
 Jdade resting in the hollow of the left arm, as near the 
 body as possible; the right hand without constraint, or 
 fe.clihg the weight of the sabre. 
 
 Ze/t — MouLi:iET. 
 ■ « ■ 
 
 1 iirhe, 2 moiions. 
 
 33-. — 1. At the command moulixkt, ext«nd the right 
 arm to the front to its full length, the hand in tierce and 
 a3 high' as the eyes ; the point to the front, and ^little 
 higher than the hilt, 
 ■ 2, Commencing by lowering the blade, make rapidly 
 a circle round tha hand, to the left of, and as near as safe, 
 to the hcfi'se, and to the elbow^ returniDg to the first po^. 
 aiiion, and then to guard, « •-. ': - • 
 
iV ^^ 
 

J03. 
 
 Paa^ '^ 
 
 (agre 
 

 ^a^ SS 
 
 RujfM -MouUn^f 
 
TROOPER, DISMOUNTED, 55 
 
 Right — JIouLiNiT. 
 1 time, 2 rnotions. 
 
 84. — 1. At tUc command MouONKT, extend the righl 
 ai'm to the front lo its fnll length, the hand ia quarlc. 
 Hntl as high as the eyes, the point to llie front, and a lit- 
 tle higher than the hilt. 
 
 2. Commencing Ly lowerinc; Die LladTp, make rapidly 
 •A circle round the hand, to the riglit of tlie horse and 
 body, returning to the first position, and then to guard. 
 
 JJo. — To execute the monlinet'wilhout stppping, if the 
 instructor wishes to b<?giu by the left, he commands: 
 
 Zeft and right — Moulinet. 
 
 1 tiinc-, 2 7noiwns. 
 
 3G. — If he wishes to begin by the right, he command.-:: 
 
 Right and left — MotJLl^'E'i•. 
 
 1 time, 2 mctions. , 
 
 Pl- 
 
 I 
 
 At either of these commands, the troopers, commencino- 
 from the position of guakd, execute alternately what iei 
 laid down in Nos. 33 and 34, Avithoul 'stopping at any 
 motion. 
 
 Rear — Moulinist. 
 
 1 time, 2 motions. .* . 
 
 3^.-1. At the command MouLi;ficT, raise tlie arm to 
 the right and rear to its full extent, tiie point of the sa- 
 bre upwards, the edge to the right, the thumb extended 
 on the back of the gripe, the body slightly turned to the 
 right. 
 
 2. Describe acircle in rear, commencing by motion of 
 the !«abre towards the left, the aim 'beliig m'otionless to 
 the wrist, return to the let position and then to guard. 
 
 Wlien the troopers execute the mouJinets well, the in- 
 structor requires them to execute severnl in succession, 
 until the command ciuaup. 
 
5G SCHOOL OF THE 
 
 * In tierce — Point. 
 
 1 time, 3 7notions, 
 
 ■ •■♦ 
 
 oS. — 1. At the command toint, raise the hand in tierce, 
 as high as the right ear, and 7 inches from it, throw back 
 the right shoulder, carrying the elbow to the rear, the 
 point of the sabre to the right of. the horse's head and 
 •neck, and a little below the horizontal, the edge up- . 
 wards, the thumb on the back of the gripe. 
 
 2. Thrust forward, -extending the arm to its full 
 length, the edge of the sabre up. 
 
 8. Return'to the position of guard. 
 
 In quarts — Point. 
 1 time, 3 motions, 
 
 39. — 1. At the command point,, lower the hand in»«' 
 quarte near the right hip, the thumb extended on the 
 right side of the-gripe, the point a little higher than the 
 wrist* edge to the left. 
 
 2. Thrust to the right front, extending the arm to its 
 full length, the edge of the blade to the left. 
 ~ 3. Return to the position of guard. 
 
 Left — Point. 
 
 I tithe, 5 motions. 
 
 40.-:-l. At the command point, turn the head to the left, 
 (half face to the left in the saddle,) raise the hand in 
 tierce as high as the right ear, and 7 inches from it, the 
 thumb on the back of the gripe,- the edg'e of the blade 
 upwards, the point directed to the left. 
 
 2. Thrust to the left, or left front, extending the arm 
 to its full length, the edge up. 
 
 3. Eeturn to the position of guard. 
 
 Hight—Voi^T:. ' 
 1 time, Zihofions. 
 41. — 1. At the command POINT, turn the head to the 
 
'i^^' 
 
 h .-,■ .^ 
 
I"/(^ 
 
 ^a^^ 57 
 
 Hi^/r/ - Pof'ni 
 
TROOPEIl, DISMOUNTED. 57 
 
 riglit, (half face to the right in the saddre,) carry the 
 hand in quarte near tlie left breast, the edge upwards, 
 the point directed to the right/ 
 
 2. Thrust to the right, or right front, extending the 
 arm to its full length, edge to the front. 
 
 S, Return to the i:)Osition of guard. 
 
 'Bear — Eoint. 
 1 ti7)ie, 3 motions. 
 
 42. — 1. At the command POINT, turn the head to the 
 right and rear, (half face to the right in the saddle,) bring 
 the hand in quarte in front'of the right shoulder, the arm 
 half extended, the blade horizontal, the point to the 
 rear, the edge upwards, 
 
 2. Thrust to the rear, 6r right rear, extending the arm 
 to its full length, edge to the right. 
 
 S' Return to the position of guard. 
 
 Against infantry left — Point. 
 
 ir»M,ii ^t I >t 1 time, Z moiiohs, 
 
 43. — 1. At the command point, turn the head to the 
 left, (half face to the left in the saddle,') raise the hand 
 in tierce near the neck, the thumb on the back of the 
 gripe, the point of the sabre directed at the heiglit of the 
 breast of a man on foot, • 
 
 2. Thrust down in tierce. 
 
 3, Return to the position of guard. 
 
 Agai7ist infantry right — Point. 
 
 1 time,B motions. 
 
 44. — 1. At the command point," turn the head and 
 body toward the right, carry the hand in quarte near 
 the right hip, the thumb on the right side ot the gripe, 
 the point of the sabre directed at the height of the breast 
 of a man on foot. 
 
 2. Thrust in quarte. 
 
 3. Return to the position of guard. 
 
5S SCTIOOL OP THE 
 
 Against infantry — Front Point. 
 
 \time. 
 
 45,— -At the command ^point, bear the weight on the 
 right stirrup, bend well down to the right., extend the 
 rirjht arm well downwards, and, with the back of th« 
 sabre lipwards, thrust forw'ard, horizontally, and rcs«m<» 
 the guard. 
 
 Front — Cut. ' ■• 
 
 ■ '" , 1 time, 3 motions. 
 
 46. — -1. At tl'.e command cur, raise the sabre, the arm 
 half extended, the hand a ^little higher than the heacl, 
 the edge, upwards, the point to the rear and higher than 
 the hand. , 
 
 2. Cut to the right of the hprse's neck, extending th^ 
 arm to its full length. '^ I ♦ 
 
 3. Return to the position of guard. ^ 
 
 USED AGAINST •CAVALRY AND INFANTRY. 
 
 Xe/f— Cut. 
 
 1 time, 3 mctiojrs. 
 
 47.-_l, At the command out, turn the head to the Mt, 
 (half face to the left in the saddle,) raise the sabre, tb« 
 arm extended to the front and right., the hand in quarte, 
 n.nd as high as the h«ad, the point higher than the band. 
 
 2. Cut diagonally to the left, in quarta 
 
 3. Return to the position of guard. 
 
 This is also used against infantry, bending well for- 
 ward and down, and cutting at the necessary angle. 
 
 RigJit — Cut. 
 
 1 time, 3 motions. 
 
 48.-^1. At the command cut, turn the head to the 
 right, carry the hand near the left shoulder, the point of 
 the Bftbre upwards, the edge to the left. " ♦ 
 
.T'^r. 
 
Il'd 
 
 
TROOPER, DI!;M0UNTED. r>0 
 
 "2. Exteticl the arifi quick!}- to, its full length, give a 
 batk-banded cut horizontal!}'', in lierce. 
 3. Return to the position of guard. 
 
 . This is used against infant rj, leaning to tlie ngl>t, and 
 cutting at the necessarj' angle. 
 
 Bed)' — Clt. 
 
 1 time, 3 motions. 
 
 49','. — 1. At tlxe. command cut, turn the l»ead to the 
 right, throwing back tlie right shoulder, (half face to the 
 right in the saddle,) carry tlie hand,>near tlio left shoul- 
 der, the salire perpendicular, the edge to tlie left. 
 
 2. Extend the arm quick! j to its full lengtli, and give 
 a- back-handed cut horizontally to the reSir, in tierce. 
 
 3. Return to the position of gnnrd. 
 
 Right, in iicrce and q^iari e-^-CvT, 
 
 1 time, 4' motions. 
 
 50.-^1. At the command cut, execute the Ist motloB 
 (^^ right cut, 'No. 48. ^ 
 
 2. Execute the 2d motion of right euf, No. 48. 
 
 3. Turn the handia quarte, and cut horizontally to 
 th-e left. 
 
 4. Return to tlie position of guard. 
 
 Left, in quarte and fierce — Cut. 
 1 time, 4 motions. 
 
 61. — 1. At the command cut, execute the let tnotloB 
 oClcft cut, No. 47. 
 
 2. Execute the 2d motion of left cut. No. 47. 
 
 Z. Turn- the hand. in tierce, and cut horizontally to the 
 rjg^it. 
 
 4. Keturn to the position of guard. 
 
 Right — Parry. 
 1 time, 2 motions. 
 52.— -1, At the command parry, grasp the sabre firm- 
 
GO SCHOOL OF THE ■ 
 
 ly, extend tlie arm to the right, the*h!fn(l moving hori- 
 zontall3',-the point at tWo same time describing a circu- 
 lar motion Hp^wlrd8, and with the edge to the right, 
 parry as strongl}' as possible the blo»v aimed at the 
 light side. i.:^S :i-y 
 
 2. Return to the position 6f guard. 
 
 1 time, 2 ^notions. 
 
 i ' ...._■■■■■ 
 
 53. — 1. Raise the hand ahove, and about seven inches 
 in front of the eyes, the elbov/ somewhat bent, edge to 
 the left, point downwai'ds and aboxit a .foot outside the 
 horse's loft shoulder, and parry as strongly- as possible 
 the blow aimed at the left side. 
 
 2. Return to" the position of guard. 
 
 ■ • Head — Parry. 
 
 1 ii7ne, 2 inotions. ^^-^ 
 
 '54. — 1. At the command i'arry, raise the sabre quick- 
 ly above the head, holding it with the utmost firmness, 
 the arm nearly extended, the edge upward, the point to" 
 the left, and about G inches higher tlian the hand. 
 
 The hand is carried more or less to the right, left^ or 
 rear, according, to the position of the adversary. 
 2. Return to the position of guard. 
 
 Against infantry right— ^Tahvly^ 
 1 time, 3 motions. 
 
 55. — 1, At the command .PARRY, turn the head to the 
 right (half facing to the right in the saddle,) raise the 
 sabre, the arm extended to the right and rear, the point 
 upwards, the thumb extended on the back of the.gripe, 
 the edge to the left. . 
 
 2. I'arry the bayonet with the back of the blade, by 
 a rapid circular motion of the arm and blade, from rear 
 to front, bringing the hand as high as the head, the point 
 upwards, edge to the front. 
 
7y^v/^.y /,f/i,M/r^ Jj'i^.:j^a^^^ 
 
J^7/ 
 
 Pa^ b'i 
 
 3/ Uera -J^ar/y. 
 
TROOrER, DISMOUNTED. :i 
 
 8. Return to the position of guard. 
 
 Against infantry left — Parby. 
 
 1 time, 8 motions. 
 
 56. — 1. At the command parry, turn the head to the 
 left, (half face to the left in the saddle,) raise the sabre, 
 the arm extended to the front and right, the point up- 
 wards, the thumb extended on the back of the gripe, 
 the back of the blade to the front. 
 
 2. Parry the bayonet with the back of the blade, by 
 a forcible circular motion of the arm and blade from.' 
 front to rear, bringing the hand above the left shoulder, 
 edge to the rear, the point upwards. 
 
 3, lleturn to the position of guard. 
 
 PARRIES AGAINST THE LANCE, (OR SABRE.) 
 In tierce — Parry. 
 1 iimef 2 motiont. 
 
 57. — 1. At the command parry, carry the forearm and 
 blade quickly to the front and right, the elbow but little 
 moved, edge to the right, thumb on the back of the 
 gripe, the point being carried to the right front, at the 
 height of the eyes. 
 
 2. Return to the position of guard. 
 
 In quarte — Parry. 
 1 time, 2 motions. 
 
 68. — At the command parry, carry the arm and blade 
 quickly to the left front, edge to the left, the point as 
 high as the eyes, the thumb on the back of the gripe. 
 
 2.* Return to the position of guard. 
 
 69. — When the troopers begin to execute correctly the 
 above cuts, thrusts, and parries, the instructor requires 
 them to make the. application of them by combined mo- 
 tione, such as follow: 
 
6C SCHOOL OF THE 
 
 In tierce — Point and front cut. 
 
 Jn quarte — Point and front cut. 
 
 Zeft — Point and cut. 
 
 Right — Point and cut. ■ 
 
 Hear — Point and cut. 
 
 Against infantry right — Point and cut. 
 
 Against infantry left — Point and cut. 
 
 Carry — Sabre. 
 
 As it is prescribed in K"o. 30, and carry the riglit foot 
 to the side of the left. 
 
 • GENERAL OBSERVATIOK'S AND DIRECTIONS. 
 
 60. — Great attention should at all times be paid to 
 maintain the" proper position and balance of the body ; 
 as by too great an cxei;tiou in delivering a cut or point 
 a horseman may be thrown, or be so discomposed as to 
 lose advantage of his skill, both for atlack and defence ; 
 and he should have confidence in his parries, and not 
 trust to his avoiding the attack of his opponent by turn- 
 ing or drawing back the boily. 
 
 In delivering a forward point very little force is neces- 
 sary when the liorsc is in quick motion, as the extension 
 of the arm, with a good direction of the point, will bo 
 fully sufiicient; nor should a cut, under such circum- 
 stances, be given too strong, as the impetus of the horse 
 will give effective force. Even the drawing of the edge 
 can frequently be applied with advantage, particularly 
 when the point, by being given too soon, may not have 
 taken effect; by a quick turn of the wrist the edge is 
 drawn along the face of your opponent, or other exposed 
 part. The forcing, also, of the edge can bo resorted to 
 ' v/hen very near and closely pressed upon by an ad»ver- 
 sary by suddenly extending the arm and directing the 
 edge across his face, or where an opening is given. 
 
 When sufficient space is allowed for chosing the point 
 of attack you should endeavor to take advantage of it ; 
 if not, at all events to avoid its being made on your left 
 
TROOPER, DISMOUNTED. 03 
 
 real', when a change of position alone can bring you up- 
 on an equality ■with your opponent; it may be done 
 either by making a sudden halt, so as to allow him to 
 pass, and then pressing upon his left rear, or by turning 
 • [uickly to the loft about, and thereby having your right 
 opposed to his. Should you be prevented doing this, 
 and he still keeps upon your left, you must bear up as 
 close as possible to him, otherwise your opposition will 
 be ineffectual ; for in his situation, by keeping at the pro- 
 per distance from you, his cut will reach when yours 
 will not. and consequent!}' you will be reduced to the 
 defence alone. . 
 
 In meeting your opponent on the left front turn sharp- 
 ly to the loft on your own ground, which brings you 
 immediately with 3'our sword arm fiee, and at liberty to 
 act upon his left. And in meeting him upon the right 
 front, press j'our horse quickly on, and by a shprp turn 
 to the right gain his left rear, or if pursued endeavor to 
 keep your adversary on the right roar. When attacked 
 5iy more*l1ian one you Avill naturally endeavor to keep 
 fb.cni both either to the right or left, but when they have 
 1 een enabled to place themselves on both sides, press close 
 upon t!-e left opponent, and endeavor to keep the viirht 
 one at adis'anee. 
 
 The attack or defence against the lance (it is the com- 
 mon weapon of the mounted Indians) depends much up- 
 on horsemanship, and the judgment of the rider. It is 
 parried like the sword ; and you must press in at your 
 opportunity to close upon your antagonist. You must 
 invariably endeavor to gain his j-if/Iit ?rarwhen he is least 
 able to attack or defend ; the left rear and left, weakest 
 for the sabre, are the strongest positions for the lance ; 
 the same may be said of the bow and arrow; in pursuit 
 alvrays approach at the right rear. 
 
 When opposed to infantry, endeavol'to meet an oppo- 
 nent on your right; in the parry the bayonet must be 
 struck, and by the stronger part of your sabre; the cut3 
 form a defence as well as attack upon infantry, but the 
 point should be chiefy used in pursuit. 
 
,4 SCHOOL OP THB 
 
 In the use of the sabre at speed, it is important that 
 '.he horeeman ehould aid the impetus of the cut, and se- 
 .ure his own seat by supporting the sway of the body 
 with the opposite leg to that side on whicli he intends to 
 •ut or point ; for instance, in the left cut he should sup- 
 •ort the bod}' by a strong' pressure of the inside of the 
 light thigh and leg against the saddle and liorse ; in the 
 right cuts support the body with tlie left leg, the lower 
 -lown the grip can be taken the better, not touching the' 
 horse with the spur. It is particularly applicable and 
 r.eeessary in pursuit over rough and varied ground. 
 
 Cuts very often fail from the sabre turning enough to 
 aake the blow one with the flat; at best the^wcund is 
 ::enerally trifling compared to those made by thrusts. 
 
 The instructor thould inopress upon the recruits such 
 occasional observations as become applicable. Oppor- 
 tunities should be taken in j^auses of rests; the sq^uad 
 should not be kept very long in positions or movements. 
 
 MANUAL OF THE PISTOL. 
 
 01. — The army revolver being worn in a belt -holster, 
 suspended by the belt at the rigiit side of the back, the 
 instructor cenimands: 
 
 Draw — Pistol, 
 
 1 tiine, 
 
 02. — At the command pistol, with the right hand un- 
 button the flap of the belt-holster, draw the pistol, and, 
 holding it at the stock, with the point of the fore-finger 
 1. aching above the trigger guard, carry it vertically, 
 with the iiand as high as the right (shoulder, and six in- 
 <hes in front of it. 
 
 OS. — The instructor commands: 
 RE.\Dy. 
 1 time. 
 
 At this command, place the pietol in the left hand, at 
 
TROOPER, DISMOUNTED. .6.% 
 
 the hciglit of the breast, the nmzzle elevfltod and directed 
 lo the left front, cock and raise pistol, (position No. 62.) 
 
 Aim. 
 1 time. 
 
 Ci. — At this command, lower the pistol to the front, the 
 arm i\bout three-fourths extended, tlie forefinger npon 
 the trigger; aim with the right eye, the left eye closed. 
 
 Fire, 
 1 time. 
 
 65. — At this command, fire and raise pistol. 
 
 Gf). — At the position of aim, the instructor ma}' com- 
 mand, raise — pistol, at "which command the men rais(- 
 the pistols to the position No. 62; and if the pistol is not 
 fired, at the command return — risxoL, first let down the 
 hammer. 
 
 67.— To cock the pistol rapidly without the use of tlie 
 left hand, place the thumb upon and press down the ham- 
 mer, throwing forward the muzzle with a rapid motion, 
 to assist the action of the thumb. 
 
 G8. — In a possible case requiring it, the revolver mar 
 ha used in rank dismounted with great effect, in firing to 
 the front, or right or left oblique, ^by volley or file firing. 
 
 To reload, the rank would be ordered to sit on the 
 ground and load at will. 
 
 69. — Being at the position of raise pistol, the instructoi 
 commands: 
 
 Return — Pistol. 
 
 At the command pistol, lowei'tbe pistol, carrying it to 
 the rear, and return it to the holster, and button the flap. 
 
Ou SCHOOL OF THE 
 
 INSPECTION OF ARilS. 
 
 70. — The instructor commanda : 
 
 In i^pcction — Sabre. 
 1 (hnc, 7 motions. 
 
 1. At the command sadrk, execute the first lime of 
 draw sabre, No. SO. 
 
 2. Execiite the second lime of draw sabre, No. SO. 
 
 ;}. Present sabre as it isdescribed in first time of No. 01. 
 
 4. Move the thumb to tlie back uf the grij)e, and turn, 
 it in the Imnd, the edge turning by the front, to the right.- 
 
 5. Carry the sabre to the shoulder, as it is described in 
 No. 30. 
 
 0. Execute the first time of return sabre, No. 31. . 
 
 7. Execute the second time of return sabre, No. 31. • 
 
 71. — The instructor commande: 
 
 Inspcctio:i — Pistol. 
 1 Umc^ 3 motions. 
 
 1. At tlie command pistol, draw pistol, and come to 
 the position of 7'flt.sc^;/A'io/, No. 62. 
 
 2. Place the pistol in the left hand, at the height of 
 the breast, the muzzle elevated and directed to the left, 
 Iialf cock with the right hand; drop the loft hand by the 
 eide, and hold tho pistol vertieall}', in front of, and 4 iu- 
 ches from, the middle of the body, the butt at tlie height 
 of the belt, the guard to the lelt ; the right fore-arm 
 again.st the side. 
 
 3. Take the pistol in the left hand, as in No. GS, let 
 down the hammer, and return the pistol to the holster, 
 button the flap, and drop the hand to the side. 
 
 72. — When the men execute the details correctly, the 
 instructor commands; 
 
TROOPER, DISMOUNTED. 67 
 
 Jnfipection — Arms. 
 
 At the command arms, the men execute th« first and 
 •second motions of inspection of pistol, No. 71. 
 
 As soon as the inspector has passed the man on his left, 
 each man executes the third motion of inspection of pis-, 
 to^, and first and second motions, of tn-s^cc^ton of sabre. 
 
 Each man, as the inspector reaches him the second 
 time, executes the third and fourth motions of inspection 
 of sabre ; nud as soon as the inspector has passed again 
 the next man, he executes the fifth, sixth, and seventh 
 motions of inspection of sabre, Xo. 70. 
 
 • 73. — The inspector passes from right to left, returning 
 to the right by the rear ; he handles the pistols if he de- 
 eives, returning them to the troopers in the same position 
 in which they are held for inspection. 
 
 TARGET FRACTICE. 
 
 7-1. — Tlic target is six feet high and two feet wide; a 
 black stripe 3 inches wide is painted at the centre, from 
 top to bottom ; and tv/o feet and a half from the top a 
 white square of three inches is painted on tlie black. 
 
 When practicable a man is placed behind a ball-proof- 
 obstacle," within reach by a wand, of the target; with 
 this he points out the position of each iiit, immediately 
 nfter it is made; so that the person firing can see from 
 bis place. 
 
 When each has finished his shots, his hits are marked, 
 measured, and noted, as well as the misses. 
 
 Tiie squad first fires at 20 yards, ench man fires to tho 
 front, rear, right, and left; one shot each a day. 
 
 The firing is next at thirty yards, and is carried regu- 
 larly by the decimal increase up to one hundred yards. 
 
 An oftieer is always present at target firing. 
 
 PLATOON, SQUADRON, AND REGIMENT, 
 DISMOUNTED. 
 
 75. — The practice of field movements on foot is useful 
 
fc SCHOOL OP THE 
 
 for the instruction of young officers and men, and when^ 
 for any reason, mounted exercises are not practicable. 
 
 The formation, telling off words of command, and all 
 the movements are the same, with the modifications, 
 which follow : 
 
 The walk and the trot are the only gaits substituted 
 by the quick time and double quick time. The word of 
 command, "walk," will be substituted hy quick time; 
 *' trot," by double quick. 
 
 All the movements will be in quick time when the com- 
 mand is not " double quick." 
 
 ^ 'In line, at the command right — facb, after all face to 
 the right, all numbers two and four step up to the left 
 side of numbers one and three ; if the command is left — 
 FACE, the odd numbers step up to the right of the even 
 numbers. 
 
 A column of twos right in front, being faced to the.left 
 at a halt, or marching, the odd numbers step up into their 
 places on the right of the even numbers; if left in front, 
 and faced to the right, the even numbers step up be- 
 tween the odd numbers. 
 
 The commands and methods found in ISTos. Y to 27, in- 
 clusive, of the school of the trooper dismounted, will be 
 folio wed- 
 To form twos and fours, and to break by two? and fik, 
 is always done at the same gait, without halting, closing 
 or increasing the distances; when increasing front, the 
 files who have to move up doing so with a step or two 
 in double quick, and all together. 
 
 To break a platoon, marching in line, by fours, at the 
 same gait, each set, but the foremost, halts until the one 
 which is to precede it has moved forward, or obliqued 
 two frteps. 
 
 On the same principle, when the squadron in line is 
 broken by platoon, each platoon waits until the one 
 which precedes it has gained a distance of three-fourths 
 of a platoon fr6nt. 
 
 A colvimn of fours making a turn, "the 'pivot shortens 
 his step to 18 inches, (he marches ten steps in making 
 
TROOPXR, DISMOUNTED. GiT 
 
 tli'e tiirn,) and the man on the other flank increases his 
 to about 32 inches. 
 
 In a platoon turning, the pivot man doo5 the same, 
 the outer flank moves in double quick. 
 
 To countermarch a squadron the commands arc: 
 
 1. Countei'march by the right (or left) flank. 
 
 2. Right {pv lc/t)—FACE, 
 
 3. Mahch. 
 
 At the first command, the right guide places himself 
 three paces in rear of the left guide and faces to the rear. 
 At the command march, all step off together, the platoon 
 commander by the side, and conducting the two leading 
 imen, who turn about, and march close to the column. 
 When arrived near the guide, the captain commands: 
 
 1. Halt. 
 
 2. Left (or right) — Face. 
 
 3. Eight (or left)— Dress. 
 
 4. Feont. 
 
 The service of skirmishers on foot is the most impor- 
 tant ;. and the theory can thus be communicated, and in 
 a great degree put in practice, with much more facility 
 than when mounted. 
 
TITLE THIRD.' 
 INSTRUCTION ON HORSEBACK. 
 
 SCHOOL OF THE TROOrEK, MOUNTED. 
 
 T6. — The object of this school is to make troopers skil- 
 ful in the mauagement of their horses and arms. The-- 
 recruit must not pass from one lesson to anotlicr until lie 
 fully understands, and can execute, all which precedes. 
 
 The method prescribed to instructors in No. 1, for giv- 
 ing the lesson, is applicable to this school. 
 
 The instruction is always commenced at a valk ; the 
 horses, excited on first leaving the stables, are tliUB 
 calmed, and the trooper is assured in his scat. The in- 
 struction is also termiqated at a walk. 
 
 The most quiet and best instructed horses are clioscn 
 for the first lessons. 
 
 7*7. — When the instructor wishes to rest the men he 
 commands, ukst. At this command the trooper is no 
 longer required to remain motionless or restrained. To 
 resume the exercise, he commands, attention. 
 
 78. — The first lessons are given, if practicable, to each 
 man separatel}^; spurs are not used. 
 
 The horse is saddled, and in the snafiie, the reins over 
 the neck ; he is led to the ground. by ^le right hanr.1, hold- 
 ing the reins near the mouth, and his head up. (When 
 under arms, the trooper's sabre is hooked up, and un- 
 booked when in position in rank.) 
 
 If more than one, the troopers are placed in a line three 
 paces apart. 
 
 Arms are not used before the 'Tth lesson. 
 
7*2 " SCHOOL OF THE 
 
 FIRST LESSON. 
 
 rOSITION OF THE TROOPER BEFORE 
 MOUNTING. 
 
 T9. — The trooper stands faced to the front, on the left 
 of tho horse's head, his breast on a line with its mouth; 
 ho. holds the reins with the righthand, at six inches from 
 the horse's mouth, the nails downward ; his body, except 
 his right arm, in a position of a soldier, No. 6. 
 
 TO MOUNT. 
 
 80. — The instructor commands: 
 
 Pkepake to Mount. 
 1 time, 2 motions. 
 
 1. At this command [when in close order, numbera one 
 and three lead straight forward four paces, and then all] 
 turn to the right, letting go the reins with the right, and 
 taking the left rein with the left hand ; step two short 
 paces to the rear, right foot leading, so as to face the 
 saddle ; at the same time, the right hand, with the aid of 
 the left, takes hold of the reins over the pommel, feeling 
 the horse's mouth sufficiently to keep him steady, and 
 then seizes also the pommel ; drop the left hand by the 
 side. 
 
 2. Insert the fore part of left foot in the stirrup, with 
 the aid of the left hand if necessary, and then with that 
 hand grasp the horse's crest and mane. 
 
 . Mount. 
 1 time. 
 
 At this command, spring up from the right foot to an 
 erect posture, and instantly throw the right leg over, 
 taking yourseat gently; take the reins in the left hand, 
 and put the right foot in the stirrup. 
 
Fa<^c 72. 
 
TROOPER, MOUNTED. 7* 
 
 Form — Rank. 
 
 At this command, given wlien in close order, numbers' 
 two and four ride gently forward into rank. 
 
 TO DISMOUNT. 
 
 81. — The instructor commands \ 
 
 Prepare to Dismount. 
 1 time. 
 
 1, At this command, [when in close order, numbers 
 one and three ride gently four paces straight forward, 
 dressing by the right, and then all] grasp the reins with 
 the right hand, knuckles to the right, close in front of the 
 left hand, which lets go, and ali^o the right side of the 
 top of the pommel, feeling firmly the horse's mouth ; seize 
 with the left hand the horse's crest and mane at a con- 
 venient distance, at the same time disengage the riglit" 
 foot from the stirrup. 
 
 Dismount. 
 1 time, 2 motions. 
 
 1. At this command, rising upon the left stirrup, with 
 the assisting support of the two hands, pnss the right leg 
 quickly over the liorse's croup to the side of the left, the 
 body for one instant erect, and descend to the ground, 
 the heels together ; drop the left hand by the side. 
 
 2. Face to the front, the right hand leaving the pom- 
 mel, and slipping along the rein as you step, left foot first, 
 to the position of Stand to horse, 'No. 79, the right hand 
 grasping the reins, 6 inches from the horse's moulh. 
 
 Form — Rank. 
 
 At this command, given in close order, numbers tw© 
 and four lead forward into rank. 
 
Tl SCHOOL OP THE 
 
 I'U^ITIOX OF THE TROOPER MOUNTED. 
 
 - 82. — The seat nalnral, wiLhoiit drawiug back the tliigli ; 
 the legs liang vertically from the knees, and close the 
 sides of the horse ; the balls of the foot supported in the 
 stirrup ; the heels about an inch lower than the toes ; 
 llicse to the fjont ; the stirrups supporting the weight of 
 the logs in a natural position. 
 
 The head erect and square to the front ; the shoulders 
 ?nnavc ; the carriage of the body erect, but free and unr 
 constrained. 
 
 The curb reins held in the left hand, the little fingi-r 
 between them ; they come out over tlie forefinger, where 
 they are pressed by the thinnb; the forearm grazing tlie 
 side, and nearly horizontal ; the hand about six inchc* 
 in front of the body, and close above the pommel; its 
 I :^clc is turned somewhat under. The right arm and 
 iuAiHl hang naturally at the side. 
 
 S3. — Riding in the snaffle, in the first lessons oiie rein 
 of. the snaffle is held in each hand, the loose end coming 
 out over the iPorefingcr, or with a turn round it, tlie 
 thumb pressing npon il ; hands from 4 to 6 inches apart, 
 a little h.igher than the elbows; the forearms touching 
 the sides. 
 
 Si. — The instructor commands: 
 
 1. Bight (or left) Duess. 
 
 2. Front. 
 
 As prescribed in Nos. G, 7, and 8. 
 
 THE USE OF THE REINS. 
 
 55, — The reins serve to prepare the horse for the raove- 
 ?ncnts he is required to exemite, to direct him, and iv 
 atop him. Their action should be progressive, and in 
 accordance with that of the leg?. 
 
 When the trooper makes use of tbo reins the arras 
 
TROOPER, MOUNTED. 75 
 
 should act with suppleness, and their movementd ought 
 to extend from the wrist to the shoulder. 
 
 THE USE OF THE LEGS. 
 
 36. — The legs serve to urge the horse forward, to snp- 
 l)ort him, and to aid him in turning to the right and to 
 the left. Whenever the trooper wishes his horse to move 
 forward, he should close the legs by degreos behind the 
 girths, causing their effect to correspond with the sensi- 
 bility of the horse, taking care neither to open nor elevate 
 the knees, of Avhich the bend should be always pliant. 
 The trooper relaxes the legs by degrees, as he closed Ihera. 
 
 THE EFFECT GF THE REINS AND LEGS 
 COMBINED. 
 
 87. — In elevating a little the wrists, and closing the 
 legs, the trooper "gathers his horse;" in elevating again 
 the wrists, lie slackens the pace ; in repeating this move- 
 ment of the wrists, he stops the horse, or "reins back." 
 Tlie trooper ought to elevate the %yrist3 without curvirg 
 them, at the same time draM'ing tJicra tov.artls the body. 
 
 In opening the right rein and closing the right log, thci 
 trooper turns his horse to the right. To open the right 
 rein, the right wrist is carried, without turning it, more 
 or less to the right, according to the sensibility of the 
 Jiorse. 
 
 In opening the left rein, and closing the left leg, tlie 
 trooper turns his horse to the left. To open the left rein, 
 the left wrist is carried, without turning it, more or le?3 
 to the left, according to the sensibility of the horse. 
 
 By lowering slightly the wrists, the horse is at liberty 
 to move forward ; the closing the legs determines the 
 movement. 
 
 TO MARCH. 
 
 88.-- -The instructor commando : 
 
;-0 &CHOOL OF TEE 
 
 1. Forward. 
 
 2. March. 
 
 At the command forward, elevate slightly the wrists, 
 and close the legs, in order to "gatlier the horse." 
 
 At the command march, lower slightly the wriste, and 
 close the legs more or less, according to the sensibility of 
 the horse. The horse having obeyed, replace the wrists 
 and the legs by degrees. 
 
 89. — If the trooper did not gather his horse at the pre* 
 paratory command, the execution of the second command 
 would be too abrupt or too slow. 
 
 If the trooper, at the command of execution, did not 
 commence by lowering the wrists, the horse would not 
 have the liberty necessary to enable him to. move for- 
 ward. 
 
 If the trooper did not close equally the legs, the horsf 
 would not move directly to the front ; and if he did not 
 close them progressiv-ely, the horse would not obey with- 
 out irregularity, 
 
 TO HALT. 
 
 90. — After some steps, the instructor commands : 
 
 1. Squad. 
 
 2. Halt. 
 
 At the command squad, the trooper gathers hia horse, 
 without slackening his pace. 
 
 At the command halt, the trooper braces himself in 
 the saddle ; elevate the wrists at the same time by de- 
 grees, and close the legs in order to prevent the boree 
 from receding. The horse having obeyed, replace thr 
 wrists and the legs by degrees. 
 
 TO TURN TO THE RIGHT, AND TO THE LEFT, 
 FROM A HALT. 
 
 OL — ^Tbe instructor commands : 
 
TROOPER, MOUNTED, 77 
 
 1. To the right (or to the left.) 
 
 2. March. 
 
 3. Halt. 
 
 At the command to the right, gather the horse. 
 
 At the command march, open the right rein, and close 
 progressively the legs, until the horse moves. In order 
 not to turn the horse too short, perform the movement 
 upon a quarter circle 3 paces round. 
 
 At the command halt, elevate slightly the wiiists, and 
 hold the legs near, in order to keep tlie horse straight in 
 tlie new direction ; replace the wrists and the legs by 
 degrees. 
 
 TO TURN ABOUT TO THE RIGHT, AND TO THE 
 LEFT, FROM A HALT. 
 
 93. — The instructor commands : 
 
 1, Right about, (or left about.) 
 •2. March. 
 3. Halt. 
 
 Tiiis movement is executed on the principles prescrib- 
 ed for the turn to the right, or to the left; but the horse 
 passes over a semicircle of 6 paces, and faces to the rear. 
 
 9-1. — In order to make the trooper comprehend better 
 the movements detailed, Nos. 91 and 93, the instructor 
 places himself at the shoulder of the horse, and describes 
 each movement on foot, in marking off the arc of the pre- 
 •scribed circle. 
 
 TO MAKE A THIRD OF A TURN TO THE RIGHT 
 AND TO THE LEFT, FROM A HALT. 
 
 ti5. — The instructor comiiiands: 
 
 1. Right oblique, (or left oblique.) 
 
 2. March. 
 
 3. Halt. 
 
7S SCHOOL OP THE 
 
 At the command right oblique^ gfither the horse. 
 
 At the command march, open a little the right rein, 
 and close slightly the legs, in order to make the horse 
 execute a third of a turn to the right. 
 
 The command halt follows immediately; elevate slight- 
 ly the wrists, and close the legs, to keep the oblique di • 
 rection; replace the wrists and legs by degrees. 
 
 90. — The movements detailed, Nos. 91, 93, and 95, af- 
 ter having been executed to. the right, are executed to 
 the left, according to the same principles, but by inverse 
 means. 
 
 TO. REIN BACK, AND TO CEASE REINING BACK. 
 
 97. — The instructor commands: 
 
 1. Backwards. 
 
 2. March. «" 
 
 3. Squad. 
 
 4. Halt. 
 
 At the command backwards, gather the horse. 
 At the command march, close the legs, and at the mo- 
 ment the horse lifts a leg elevate the wrists, with a stron- 
 ger feel of the mouth. As soon as the horse obeys, low- 
 er and elevate successively the wrists, which is called 
 yielding and checking. If the horse throws the haunches 
 to the right, close the right leg; if he throws them to the 
 left, close the left leg. If these means are not sufficient 
 .to replace the horse in his proper position, open the rein 
 . on the «ide towards which, the horse throws his haunches, 
 causing him to feel, at the same time, slightly the effect 
 of the opposite rein. 
 At the command squad, the trooper prepares to stop. 
 At the command halt, lower the wrists and close the 
 legs. The horse having obeyed, replace the wrists and 
 the legs by degrees. 
 
TROOPER, MOUNTED. .79 
 
 TO FILE OFF. 
 
 98. — The squad being dismounted as prescribed, No. 
 81, the instructor commands: 
 
 1. By the right (or hy the left)-y'FiL^ off, 
 
 2. March. 
 
 At the command file off, hook up the sabre, (when 
 in use,) and unhook the curb; retake the reins with the 
 right hand, and replace the left hand at the side. 
 
 At the command jiarcii, the trooper of the right steps 
 off with the left fo«t, leading his horse to the front; h<^ 
 takes 4 steps, turns to the right, and marches in the new- 
 direction, holding at the same time the hand high and 
 firm to prevent the horse from jumping. Each trooper 
 executes successively the same movement when the one 
 who precedes him has moved 4 paces to the front 
 
 The troopers conform to the same principles to file off 
 by the left. 
 
 SECOND LESSON. 
 
 99, — The instructor may unite for this lesson 8 trooi)- 
 ers, but not more ; they are placed on the same line o 
 paces apart; they are without spurs ; the horses are sad- 
 dled and in the snaffle. 
 
 Two corporals, or instructed troopers, are designated 
 to be conductors; they are placed on the right and on 
 the left of the troopers. 
 
 The instruction is divided into several stages, commen- 
 cing alternately by the right and by the left. 
 
 TO MARCH TO THE RIGHT HAND; TO MARCH 
 TO THE LEFT HAND. 
 
 100.— The instructor commands: 
 
 1. To the rights (or to the left.) ' 
 
 2. March. 
 
80 SCHOOL OF THE 
 
 At these commands the troopers conform to what m 
 prescribed in order to execute a turn to the right from a 
 halt, I^To. 91; then lowering the wrists and closing the 
 legs, march straight forward, and follow the conductor. 
 
 At the extremity of the riding-housfr the conductor 
 turns to the right; the ti'oopers follow, having between 
 them the distance of 4 feet from head to croup. 
 
 101. — The trooper marches to the right hand, when he 
 has the right side towards the interior of the riding- 
 house. He marches to the left ha7id when it is the left side. 
 
 The instructor follows the troopers, keeping on the in- 
 side of the track. 
 
 He observes that their seat is not deranged, and warns 
 them to conform with suppleness to all the motions of 
 the horse. 
 
 Passing from one trooper to another, he occupies him- 
 self successively with all the details of the position of 
 each, BO as to instruct without confusing them. 
 
 TO TURN TO THE RIGHT, AND TO THE LEFT, 
 IN MARCHING. 
 
 102. — The troopers follow the conductor, and make, 
 on arriving at the angles of the riding-house, a turn to 
 the right (or to the left) in marching. To turn to the right 
 or left in marching, the trooper opens the rein to the side 
 towards which the turn is made, and closes both leg?, the 
 outer one most. 
 
 TO HALT, AND TO STEP OFF. 
 
 103. — The troopers marching in column on one of the 
 long sides, the instructor commands : 
 
 1. Squad. * 
 
 2. Halt. 
 
 Tbe troopers stop as presci'ibed, No. 90. 
 
TROOPER, MOUNTED. Sk 
 
 104. — To recommence the marcb, the instructor com- 
 mands: 
 
 1. Forward. 
 
 2. MARcn. 
 
 The troopers move forward as preecribed, No. 88. The 
 instructor causes the squad frequently to stop and to 
 move off, to habituate the troopers in conducting their 
 horses. He observes that they do not incline the body 
 too much forward at the moment of stopping, and that 
 they do not lean back at the moment of starting. When 
 the troopers have stopped, he rectifies their position. 
 
 TO PASS FROM THE WALK TO THE TROT, AND 
 FROM THE TROT TO THE WALK. 
 
 105. — Tlie troopers becoming habituated to the move- 
 ment of the horse, the instructor causes them to pass to 
 the trot. When thej are in column upon one of the long 
 sides, he commands^ 
 
 1. Trot 
 
 2. March. 
 
 At tli-e command trot, gather the horse without in- 
 creasing his gait. 
 
 At the command march, lower a little the wrists, and 
 close the legs more or less, according to the sensibility of 
 the horse. As soon as the horse obeys, replace the wrists 
 and the legs by degrees, 
 
 *106. — ^The in.structQi- employs this gait at first cauti- 
 ously, and at a moderate trot, that the men may not lose 
 their position. 
 
 He makes them understand that it is in remaining well 
 seated, aTid in relaxing, measurably, all the parts of the 
 body, especially the thighs and legs, that they can ae- 
 
 auire the necessary ease and solidity. He observes also 
 lat they do not bear too much upon the reins in this 
 gait 
 
82 SCHOOL OP THE 
 
 When he perceives that their position is deranged, he 
 causes them to resume the walk, and even to stop. 
 
 107. — To pass from the h'ot to the walk, the instructor 
 commands: 
 
 1. Walk. 
 
 2. March. 
 
 At the command walk, gather the horse without affect- 
 ing his gait. 
 
 At the command march, elevate the wrists by degrees, 
 and hold tlie legs near, in order to prevent tlie horse from 
 stopping. As soon as the horse obeys, replace the wrists 
 and the legs by degrees. 
 
 CHANGES OF HAND, 
 
 108. — When the troopers have marched some time to 
 the right hand, (or to the left hand,) to make them change 
 bands, iu the breadth of the riding-house, without stop- 
 ping, the instructor commands: 
 
 Jiiffht (or /e/0— Turn. 
 
 At the command turn, the conductor turns to the right, 
 and crosses the riding-house in its breadth^ followed by 
 the troopers. 
 
 The conductor being at two paces from the opposite 
 track, the instructor commands : 
 
 1. Left (or right) — Turn. 
 
 ' At the command turn, the conductor turns to the left, 
 and follows the track. 
 
 All the other troopers turn successively on the same 
 ground, ♦ 
 
 The instructor causes these changes of hand to be exe- 
 cuted at a walk, and at a trot. 
 
 109. — ^The in.structor occasionally orders the reinscar- 
 ried together in the left hand ; -when so held, the trooper, 
 
TROOPER, MOUNTED. 88 
 
 iu order to turn to the right, carries the hand forward 
 and to the right ; to turn to the left, he carries the hand 
 forward and to the left, the nails always downward. 
 
 TO TURN TO THE RIGHT AND TO THE LEFT 
 BY TROOPER, IN MARCHING. 
 
 110. — The troopers raarching in column, and having 
 arrived about the middle of one of the long sides, the 
 instructor commands: 
 
 1. To the right (or to the left.) 
 
 2. March. 
 
 At the command to the right, gather the horse. 
 
 At the command march, each trOoper executes a titrn 
 to the right iu marching, and moves straight to the front. 
 
 The troopers being at two paces from the opposite 
 track, the instructor commands: 
 
 1. Ih the right (or to the left.) 
 
 2. March. 
 
 At the command march, each trooper executes a turn 
 to the right, following the same principles; and all return 
 to the track. 
 
 The. same movements are repeated to resume the order 
 iu which the troopers were originally. 
 
 TO TURN-ABOUT TO THE RIGHT AND TO THE 
 LEFT BY TROOPER, IN MARCHING ON THE 
 SAME LINE. 
 
 lll.-7-The troopers having made a turn to the right, 
 as has just been explained, and having arrived near the 
 opposite tratik, the instructor commands: 
 
 1. Right-about (or left-ahov.t.) 
 
 2. March. 
 
 At the command right-about, gather the horse. 
 
 At the command march, each trooper executes a turn- 
 
84 SCHOOL OP THE 
 
 about to the right in marching, following the princypleis 
 prescribed, No. 102, and moves directly to the front. 
 
 The instructor gives the conimaud march, at the mo- 
 ment the troopers are within 2 paces of the track; the 
 troopers are then reformed in column upon the opposite 
 track, by the movement of to the right (or (o the left.) 
 
 TO TURN-ABOUT TO THE RIGHT AND TO THE 
 LEFT BY TROOPER, IN MARCHING IN COLUMN. 
 
 112. — Tlie troopers marching in column, and the con- 
 ductor having arrived near the end of one of the long 
 sides of the riding-house, the instructor commands: 
 
 1. Right-about (or left-about.) 
 
 2. March. 
 
 At th-e command right-about, gather the horse. 
 
 At the cx)mmand march, each trooper executes a turn- 
 about to the right in marching, and moves forward. 
 
 On. arriving at tlic opposite short side, the conductor 
 turns to the left without command; the squad returns to 
 the order in which it was originally, in executing tlie 
 inverse movement 
 
 113. — The object of the turns to the right, to the k/t, 
 rightabout, and left-about, in this lesson, is to habituate 
 the troopers to turning in all directions their horses; the 
 instructor causes these movements to be executed at a 
 walk only; he not only observes the squad generally, but 
 watches and rectifies with the greatest care the meanp 
 employed by each trooper in turning his horse. 
 
 In' the instruction to the right hand, the turns to the 
 right, and right-about, are executed; and in the work to 
 the left hand, those to the left and hft-ahout. When the 
 troopers have become accustomed to these movementf^, 
 the instructor causes them to be executed in returning to 
 the tracks, by turns to the right or to the left, without 
 having regard to the change of hand. 
 
 114. — To rest the squad, the iustrnctor causes the troop. 
 
Fa^ S^ 
 
TROOPER, MOUNTED. 85 
 
 era to tarn to ike right, or to the left, when they are about 
 the middle of one of the long sides of the riding-house, 
 and gives the command halt, when they arc out of the 
 track. 
 
 Tlie instruction is re-commenced by a turn to the right 
 or to the left. 
 
 To terminate the drill, the instructor commands the 
 troopers to dismount and file off. 
 
 m 
 
 THIRD LESSON. 
 
 115. — When the troopers begin to execute this lesson 
 correctly, the instructor changes their horses each day 
 of the instruction, to give them the habit of managing 
 different horses. 
 
 During the rests, the instructor exercises the troopers 
 in vaulting on and/rom their horses, without commands, 
 and without using the stirrups. 
 
 To leap to the ground: the trooper, holding the reins 
 of the snaffle as prescribed, No. 82, seizes with the left 
 hand a lock of the mane, the fingers well closed ; places 
 the right hand upon the pommel, raises himself upon tjie 
 wrists, brings the right thigh to the side of the left, re- 
 mains an instant in this position, and descends lightly to 
 the ground. 
 
 To Imip on the horse : the trooper seizes the Vnane with 
 the left hand, places the right hand upon tlie pommel of 
 the saddle, springs up, raising himself upon the two 
 wrists, remains an instant in this position, and places 
 himself lightly in the saddle. 
 
 All the movements in this lesson are explained in de- 
 tail by the right: they are executed by the left according 
 to the same principles, but by inverse means. 
 
 116. — From 12 to 16 troopers are united, and wear 
 
 spurs. 
 
 The horses are saddled, and in the snafile. 
 
 The troopers are placed with the horses at 1 foot from 
 
 each other. Corporals or instructed troopers arc placed 
 
so SCHOOL OF THE 
 
 one oil the ii<<lit, one in the middle of the rank ; and it 
 •would be well to have one on each flank of the two di- 
 visions. 
 
 The instructor makes tlic troopers count off by foure, 
 a3 prescribed, No, 107; he then orders them to mount. 
 
 OF THE SPUR. 
 
 117. — The instructor exi^lains to the troopers the use 
 and the effect of the spur. 
 
 If the hoi'ic does not obe^' the legs, it is necessary to 
 employ the spur. 
 
 The spur is sometimes used to chastise; when neccs- 
 aary, use it vigorously, and at the moment the horse com- 
 mits the fault. 
 
 In order to use the spur, it is necessary to keep steady 
 the body, the waist, and the wrists; to cling to the horse 
 with the thighs, and the calves of the legs; turn the point 
 of the feet a little out ; lower a little the wrists; press the 
 spurs close behind the girths, without moving the body ; 
 rej)lace then the wrists and the legs by degrees. 
 
 When the troopers employ the spur, the instructor ob- 
 serves that thc}^ do not bear too much upon the reins, 
 whicli would counteract the effect of the spur. ^Ile also 
 observes that the troopers do not use the spur unneces- 
 sarily. • 
 
 118. — To conduct the squad to the riding house, the 
 instrucior conuuands: 
 
 1. By file to the right (or to the left.) 
 
 2. March. 
 
 At the command hy file to the right, gather the horse. 
 
 At the command maucii, tlie trooper on tlie right exe- 
 cutes a turn to the right, and moves forward ; this move- 
 ment is executed by all the other troopers successively. 
 
l'M)eS6. 
 
 
TROOPER, MOUNTED. ST 
 
 TO MARCH TO THE RIGHT HAND, AND TO 
 THE LEFT HAND. 
 
 119. — On reaching the opposite side of the riding-house, 
 the instructor commands, right — Turn. When the squad 
 is making a turn from the long to a short side of the ri- 
 ding-house, the instructor halts the half of the squad in 
 rear, with a corporal at its head, at the angle, and orders- 
 it to move forward, when the leader of the first half of 
 the squad reaches the diagonal angle. 
 
 The troopers preserve the distance of 4 feet from head 
 to croup. 
 
 The conductors regulate the pace of their horses so as 
 to arrive at the same time at the opposite angles of the 
 riding house, the conductor of the second division regu- 
 lating himself on him of the first. 
 
 The instructor observes that the position of tlie troop- 
 ers becomes more and more regular ; that they march at 
 a free and even pace ; that they keep their horses straight 
 and look constantly before them in order to maintain 
 themselves in. the direction of the conductors; that they 
 preserve their distances, and recover them gradually 
 when lost 
 
 120. — The instructor reminds the troopers of the prin- 
 ciples prescribed, No. 102, to turn to the right or to tiio 
 left, and directs them to gather their horses a little be- 
 fore arriving. at each corner. 
 
 The horses should not enter the corners too far, neither 
 should they commence to turn too soon. To pass a cor- 
 ner to the right, a turn to the right is executed ; to jxiss 
 a corner to the left, a turn to the left is executed in 
 marching; the troopers should act as if there were no 
 walls; and as the movement of each one should be inde- 
 pendent of the trooper who has gone before, their hands 
 and legs alone should determine the horse to go to the 
 l-ight or to the left. 
 
83 SCHOOL OF THE 
 
 TO PASS FROM THE AVALK TO THE TROT, AND 
 FROM THE TROT TO THE WALK. 
 
 121.— The troopers marching in column upon the long 
 sides, the instructor causes them to commence the trot. 
 
 Whenever the change is made from a slow gait to one 
 more rapid, as from the walk to the troU it is necessary 
 to coaimeiice slowly, and increase it gradually to the de- 
 gree prescribed. 
 
 The troopers marching in column at the trot upon the 
 'long sides, the instructor causes tliem to pass to the walk. 
 
 Whenever the change is made from a lively gait to one 
 more slow, as from the trot to the walk, it is necessary to 
 commence the last gait gradually. 
 
 The squad passes frequently from the walk to the trotf 
 and from th« trot to the walk, in oi'der to accustom th« 
 troopers to the changes of gait, 
 
 CHANGE OF DIRECTION IN THE BREADTH OF 
 THE RIDING-HOUSE. 
 
 122. — ^The instructor causes the change of direction in 
 the breadth of the riding-house, as prescribed for the 
 changes of hand, No. 108, taking care to give the com- 
 mand in sufficient time to prevent the columns from 
 meeting at the end of the change of direction. 
 
 The change of direxstion ought to be executed so as 
 neither to stop nor ch^ck the rear of the column; the 
 troopers, and particularly the conductors, ought to turn 
 without slackening the pace, aiding th-emselves not only 
 with their hands, but also with thejir legs. 
 
 CHANGE OF DIRECTION OBLIQUELY BY 
 TROOPER. 
 
 123. — ^The squad changes direction in the length of 
 the riding-house ; and as soon as all the troopera have 
 turned, and are in -the same direction, the instructor 
 commands ; 
 
JNS. 
 
 12 -i2j«ia <ia <ia <2i 
 
 c^ 
 
 a 
 
 1 
 
 <a 
 
 B5> ea^ ffl-- s> ea> H> 
 
 ^ 
 
 %r S'S 
 
jr^ 76 
 
 
 
 
 Jhfe 
 
 
 c§ 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 /C 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 
 ,.■ e 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■ ■.-■■■.■ J 
 
 
 
 
 
 /V.J 
 
 
 
 
 V , 
 
 %/; 
 
 .•■/■;■ 5 
 //■^ 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 »/'■• 
 
 /■v-/|c /■,■ 
 
 .'fi 
 
 
 
 %■■ 
 
 30/'' / .' 
 
 ■■.■'•'a 
 
 
 
 %/; 
 
 mi 
 
 /■/■■ W/^- 
 
 ■■/9 
 
 
 
 %. / 
 
 y ^/// 
 
 ■■■-fi 
 
 
 
 ?•,■■■ 
 
 »■/■■/■. 
 
 ,.s 
 
 
 
 i/ 
 
 &■■'/■ 
 
 •^a 
 
 
 • 
 
 i 
 
 0- />- . 
 
 /rfi 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 — » 
 
TROOPER, MOUNTED. 8» 
 
 1, Column, 
 
 2. Halt. 
 
 The troopers stop at the same time, keeping their 
 horses i^raight and at their distances. 
 
 The instructor causes tlie troopers to make an oblique 
 turn to the right or to the left from a halt, as prescribed, 
 No. 96. , 
 
 This movement being executed, the instructor assures 
 himself of the exactness of the dircctioBs and the inter- 
 vals, and then commands: 
 
 1. Squad, 
 
 2. March. 
 
 The troopers march at the same gait, each in the di- 
 rection he has taken. 
 
 "When they arrive at 1 foot from the track, the in- 
 structor commands: 
 
 . Forward. 
 
 At this command, make an oblique turn to the left ia 
 advancing, in order to follow the track. 
 
 The iustruotor causes these movements to be repeated * 
 without hailing; for this purpose, after having commen- 
 ced the change of direction in the length of the riding- 
 house, as soon as the two ranks are in column, he com- 
 mands : 
 
 1. Right (or left) oblique. 
 
 2. March. 
 
 1. FORWABT). 
 
 At the command right oblique, gather the horse. 
 
 At the command march, execute an oblique turn to the* 
 right ; having taken this direction, keep the legs equal- 
 ly near, and march straight forward at the same gait. 
 
 At the command forward, turn to the original direc- 
 tion on the track. 
 
90 SCHOOL OP THE 
 
 TO MARCH IN A CIRCLE. 
 
 124. — "When the conductors have passed about a third 
 of the long sides, the instructor commands; 
 
 1. In'clrcle to the right, (or left.) 
 
 2. March. 
 
 At the command march, the conductors turn to ride 
 on circles, touching the two tracks of the long sides; the 
 troopers exactly following them. 
 
 Every horse should bend to the curve he is to pass 
 over; the trooper keeps him in its direction by the inner 
 rein, supporting him, at tlie same time, with the outer 
 leg- 
 To resume the direct march, when the conductors are 
 at the track, the instructor commands: 
 
 Forward. 
 
 125. — To reunite the troopers in order to conduct 
 them to the quarters, the instructor causes thera to close 
 to the distance of 2 feet. 
 
 The column having arrived in the yard of the quar- 
 ters, the instructor commands: 
 
 1. Left into line, 
 
 2. March. 
 
 3. Halt. 
 
 At the first command, marce, the first trooper turns 
 to the left and moves straight forward. 
 
 At the command halt, the trooper stops. 
 
 All the other troopers execute a turn to the left suc- 
 cessively, when they are nearly opposite the place they 
 are to occupy in the rank, and halt abreast of it. 
 
 To terminate the exercise, the instructor gives the com- 
 mand to dismount, and to file off, as prescribed, No. 98, 
 
TROOPER, MOUNTED. 91 
 
 FOURTH LESSON. 
 
 TO TURN TO THE RIGHT OR TO THE LEFT, BY 
 TROOPER, IN MARCHING. 
 
 126. — The instructor canseB this movement to be exe- 
 cuted as prescribed, No. 110, at the commands: 1. To 
 the right ; 2. March; observing that the troopers march- 
 ing in two columns, the preparatory command ought to 
 be given so as to command march at the moment the 
 conductors arrive opposite to the last trooper but one of 
 the other column. 
 
 The troopers move straight forward, preserving their 
 gait and their direction, so that each one may find be- 
 fore him the interval and the place he is to occupy in the 
 column on the opposite track. 
 
 In passing into the intervals, the legs should be kept 
 near, to prevent the horse slackening his gait. 
 
 The instructor attaches much less importance to t¥e 
 uniformity of these movements than to the manner in 
 which each trooper conducts his horse. 
 
 This is executed also at the trot. 
 
 TO TURN ABOUT TO THE RIGHT, OR TO THE 
 LEFT, THE TROOPERS MARCHING ON THE 
 SAME LINE, (OR ABREAST.) 
 
 127. — The instructor causes these movements to be ex- 
 ecuted as prescribed. No. Ill, the troopers of the two di- 
 visions passing by the intervals at the middle of the ri- 
 ding-house. 
 
 TO TURN ABOUT TO THE RIGHT, OR TO THE 
 LEFT, THE TROOPERS MARCHING IN COLUMN. 
 
 128. — ^The instructor causes these movements to be ex- 
 ecuted as prescribed. No. 112. 
 In each column, the last trooper, who becomes the 
 
92 SCHOOL OP THE 
 
 head of the column, should pay attention not to slacken 
 the gait in making bis movement, in order not to retard 
 the others. 
 
 This principle is equally applicable to the troopers 
 who take the head of the columns in re-entering upon the 
 tracks. 
 
 TO PASS SUCCESSIVELY FROM THE HEAD TO 
 THE REAR OF THE COLUMN. 
 
 129. — ^To make the troopers masters of their horses, to 
 force them to use both the reins and the legs ; also, to 
 accustom the horses to leaving each other, the instructor 
 requires tbe troopers to pass from the head to the rear of 
 the column ; each one, becoming in his turn conductor, 
 regulates himself accordingly. 
 
 This movement is executed successively in the two col- 
 umns, at a simple warning from the instructor, by two 
 right about (or left about) turns. 
 
 The trooper designated to pass to the rear of the col- 
 umn gathers his horse and executes the movement in ad- 
 vancing so as not to retard those who are behind him. 
 He holds the outer leg near, in order not to describe a 
 semicircle of more than 6 paces ; he marches then paral- 
 lel to tlie column, and when he has re-entered upon the 
 track by a second turn, he closes to the distance of 4 feet 
 from the last trooper. 
 
 The trooper who follows and who becomes conductor 
 should gather his horse and direct him with the outer 
 rein and the inner leg, to prevent his following the horse 
 which has left the column. 
 
 The instructor also requires the troopers to leave the 
 column, without commencing at the head. In this case, 
 he directs the troopers who follow the one designated to 
 close to the prescribed distance ; or if he thinks proper, 
 in order to habituate the troopers to holding in their 
 horses, he causes the place of the absent trooper to con- 
 tinue vacant. 
 
 When the troopers have been thus misplaced, tbe jn- 
 
TROOPBR, MOUNTED. 93 
 
 Htrnctor halts the aquad,. and directs each tpoop€r to rc- 
 fnrn to his place before passing to another movcraent 
 
 nW^Vr HALTED, TO COMMENCE THE MOVE AT 
 A TROT. 
 
 130 —The troopers being in column upon the lonff 
 ^ido?, the instructor commands: ^ I'l^iong 
 
 1. Fonaard, frof, 
 
 2. March. 
 
 At the command trot, gather the hors^ 
 At the command mahch, lower (he wrist.^ and close the 
 -i,'s progressively : as soon as the horse obey^ rordaee 
 1 he wriets and the legs by degrees. " ^ 
 
 MARGHTNC AT A TROT. TO HALT. 
 
 ini.--Thc troopen mnrching at a trot, and in colnmr 
 vipmi the long sides, the instructor commands : ' '""'^' 
 
 1. Column. 
 
 2, Halt. 
 
 At the command column, gather ilio lior^-^ 
 -At the command halt, eloValc the wrists by degree^ 
 until the horse s ops ; and hold the legs alvva^-s ne? fo 
 keep him straight and to prevent his stepping back 
 Uv degrees '""^ '^''''^^' replacethe wrists7nd!he?^; 
 ^Ijie'instructor requires all the trooper., to .setoff frcelv 
 WM-: /ro at the command MAucir, and to ston n tf 
 gether ^T,thout jostling, at the command haiS ^ "" 
 
 T(» PASS FROM THE TROT TO THE TROT-OUT 
 >,,AND FROM THE TROT-OUT TO THE TROT ' 
 
 132.— The troopers marching at tlu:. trot, and in eol 
 «mn npon the long sides, the instructor commands! 
 
H SCHOOL OP THB 
 
 TROT- OUT. 
 
 At this command, lower a little the wrists and cloee 
 the legs progressively ; as soon as the horse obeys, re- 
 place the wrists and the legs by degrees. 
 
 The gait being lengthened to a suitable degree, the in- 
 structor sees that the troopers keep their horses up to it. 
 
 He pays particular attention to the position of the 
 troopers. He reminds them that it is in holding the 
 body erect, having a light hand, the loins supple, and in 
 allowing the thighs nnd legs to fall nnturally, they can 
 diminish the effect of the reactions o!" the horse, and con- 
 form more readily to all his motions. 
 
 To prevent the horses from over-reaching, it is neeet* 
 sary to raise the wrists and close more or less the lege. 
 
 The lengthened gait is executed only during one or twe 
 turns towards each hand ; in continuing it longer, the 
 horses lose their steadiness, and the equality of their 
 gaitfl is destroyed. 
 
 To pass from the irot-oztt to the trot, the instructor 
 »;ommands: 
 
 £L0W TROT. 
 
 At this command, elevate the wrists by degrees and 
 ilone the legs, to prevent the horse from taking the walk; 
 as soon as the horse obeys, replace the wrists and tb« 
 legs by degrees. 
 
 TO PASS FROM THE TROT TO THE GALLOP. 
 
 133. — When the troopers have acquired some supple- 
 ness and confidence, and preserve at the trot an easy and 
 regular position, the instructor causes them to make a 
 few turiiB at the gallop. He does not explain to them at 
 first the mechanism of this gait, neither the means of as- 
 Buring its regularity ; he only requires that each trooper 
 accommodates himself to the motions of his horse without 
 losing his seat. 
 
 Before commencing this exercise, nnd when the 2d di- 
 
..W/; 
 
 I ; 
 
 '^A 
 
 <E3 
 
 3 
 C 
 
 c 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 :-J 
 
TROOPER, MOUNTED. §6 
 
 vision arrives upon one of the Bhort Bides of the riding- 
 house, it is formed, by causing the troopers to front and 
 HALT, as prescribed, No. 125, paying attontion to make 
 them move forward 6 paces from the track. 
 
 Tlie troopers of the 1st division continue to march 
 talce betvrecn thorn the distance of 4 paces, pas^ to th' 
 {rot, and commence successively the gallop, at the indi- 
 cation of the instructor, as follows : 
 
 Riding to the right, on approaching the corner, lengtli- 
 <*n the trot, and gather the horse ; then feel both reins to 
 the left, and close the right leg; throwing the weight to 
 the leti, and leaving the right shoulder entirely free. 
 
 The horse having taken the gallop, hold a light hand 
 and the legs near, to keep him at this gait. 
 
 After one or two turns at the- most, the troopers paw 
 from the f/allop to the trot, and from the trot to the walk. 
 The instructor makes them change hand in the breadth 
 of the riding-liousc, and recommence the same exercist' 
 to the left hand. The troopers of the tirst division are 
 then formed as those of the second, upon the other short 
 Bide. 
 
 The troopers of the 2d division go through with th*> 
 same exercise. 
 
 TO PABSAGE TO THE RIGHT OR TO THE LEFT, 
 THE HEAD TO THE WALL. 
 
 134.— The two columns marching at the walk upon tbe 
 long sides, the instructor causes to be executed the move- 
 ment to the right, or to the left, as prescribed, No. 1 2i\ ; 
 but he causes the troopers to halt when the horses reach 
 the opposite track, their heads to the wall, and he com- 
 n^ands: 
 
 1. Right {qv left) pass. 
 
 2. March. 
 
 At the command right pass, bear the shouldei-s of th«= 
 fiorse to tbe right, in opening a little the right reins. 
 
n SCHOOL OP THE 
 
 This mavenuiit is only preparatory; it iudictitos to the 
 trooper that the shoulders of Iiis horse slioulJ always 
 commence the march, and precede the movement of tlie 
 haunches. 
 
 At the command xlvrcq,. open the right rein to ijielinp- 
 liie horse to the rights closing at the same time the left, 
 leg that the haunches may follow, without leaning the 
 body to the left; make use of the left rein and the right 
 ug to support the horse and moderate his movement. 
 
 ■ After bome steps upon the si<le, the instructor halts the 
 s«]uad. 
 
 At the conimaud halt, cause to cease insensibly the ef- 
 fect of the right rein and the left leg, en:ploying\he op- 
 ijosite rein and leg ; straighten the hoicc and replace th« 
 .vvri:?t8 and legs by degrees. 
 
 To passage to the left, and to halt, employ the pam.e 
 {■dnciplcs and iii verse means. 
 
 J 35, — ^The vnstrnetor tauses this movement to be exe- 
 cuted in the commencement by each man separately, and 
 lli*.:i by all at the same time. He explains to each on^e 
 \he means to be employed. 
 
 The trooper f^houUl hold his horse obliquely to the 
 tra.'k. to render his movement more easy. He ought to • 
 conjirience this movement moderately, and look to the 
 side towards which he passes, without inclining the body 
 to the oppoaile side, which would derange his seat and 
 ,;cns'train the movement of the horse. 
 
 The ItorsQ having obeyed the aids, th-2 trooper should 
 keep up the efteet by gentle means. 
 
 If the liorsc steps Too quickly to the side towards which 
 the trooper .pf?«^«es, diminish the effect of the right u^'ia 
 
 and kft \cg. . , ,i .. • 
 
 If the horse moves forward ajjainst t!ie wall, it is ne- 
 /•eesary to diminish the effect of the legs, and incrense 
 •',.,t of the hands, in yielding and checking the horse al- 
 U:raalely, . 
 
 If, on the contrary, he steps back, it i^ necessary to in 
 creaae the effect of the legs and diminish that of the hands, 
 
TROOPER, JI0UNT1:D. 9T 
 
 inclining nhva} s the sboiili^lers of the horse to the side 
 towardu wliich he passes; for it is gonernlly the con- 
 fitraint that he experiences when the movement of th»' 
 ehouldora does not precede that of the haiiuchca, ^vhi^■h 
 causes him to back. 
 
 TO TASSAGE TO THE RIGHT, OR TO THE LEFT, 
 BEING IN COLUMN. 
 
 136. — After having executed the passages, the head io 
 the wall, tlic troopcr.-s having rcfuruod to iho. track, and 
 mnrching to the right hand ov to the left hand, the in- 
 ^?tructol• orders a change of direction iu the longtli of {ham 
 riding house; and when the two eojumns are "by the-side * 
 of each other, he hal(,s l!iem and causes them to execut" 
 passage to the right (or to the left.) ^ 
 
 Whou the trooper.5 have nearl}' arrived at the track, 
 the instructor halts them again. 
 
 The horses being quioteti, he orders the pn&sage to th«^ 
 left, and each trooper returns' to the place he occupiej 
 before halting in the middle of the riding-house. 
 
 When the trooper.-i have reached the track, tJic in- 
 structor may, if he thinks proper, cause them to march 
 iu column upon this same track, in order not toJicep thi" 
 horses too long at the movement of passing. 
 
 137. — When the troopers "haYC passed, the head to the 
 toall, the instructor cau'^os them sometimes to rein bacl\ 
 and to cease reining back, as prescribed, No. 97. 
 
 1S8.— During the last days of this lesson, (he instruc- 
 tor requires, from time to time, the reins to be held iu 
 tlie left hand, so that tlie troopers, conducting their lior- 
 ces with this hand alone, may be somewhat prepared for 
 the exercises in llie cmb bridle. He observes that each 
 troops* keeps himself square upon the horse. 
 
 139.— To terminate the lesson, and return to quarters, 
 tlie instrij^tor conforms tawhat is prescribed, No. 125. 
 
 110. — The troopers being proficient in the third and ' 
 
&8 SCHOOL OF THE 
 
 tbui'th lessons, tliey are repeated wiihout stirrups ; these 
 being crossed, nfttr mouutiug, iu front of the saddle. 
 
 riFTII LESSON. 
 
 141. — The same number of troopers are united as for 
 t!;e third lesson. 
 
 The horses arc saddled and in both curb and suafiie. 
 tn all other respects conform to what is prescribed, Ifo. 
 I ] 5, and following. 
 
 . The troopers are conducted to the riding-house as pre- 
 jScribed, ^o. 118. 
 
 In entering the riding-house the instructor conforms 
 to what is prescribed, No. 119; and when the two col- 
 umns are upon the long sides, and exactly opposite, he 
 commands : 
 
 1. To the right (or to the left.) 
 
 2. Makch. 
 
 3. Halt. 
 
 lie explains then the position of the bridle hand as 
 prescribed, No. 82. 
 
 TO TAKE THE SNAFFLE IN THE RIGHT HAND. 
 
 142. — The inbtructor commands: 
 
 Snaffle — In right hand. 
 
 I Cifne. 
 
 Xi the last part of the command grasp the snafllo at 
 Ihe middle of the rcijis with all the lingers of the right 
 hand, the nails downward, without lowering the bodj; 
 hold the reins of the snafHc over those of the curb, and 
 lower the left hand bo as not to bear upon the hiU 
 
 143. — In using alternately the curb and snaffle, the 
 trooper relieves T,he bars of th(*-hor3e'8 mouth ; lie shouW 
 never use both ut the same time. 
 
TROOPEK, MOUNTED.. -» 
 
 The troopers are required to take the Bi.nffle in tbo 
 rit'-bt hand during tbie commencement of the exercise in 
 [he curb bridle, in order to make the change of position 
 of the rider less abrupt, and to bring up his right side, 
 which is apt to remain in rear. 
 
 TO DROP THE SNAFFLK 
 
 144. — The instructor commands: 
 
 Drop — Snaffle. 
 
 At the last part of the command, which is snaffle, re- 
 place the left hand, and 4et fall the reins of the snaffle at- 
 that tliey will be under those of the curb, the right band 
 to the aide. 
 
 TOE PRINCIPAL MOVEMENTS OF THE BRIDLE 
 HAND. 
 
 * 145. — lu raising slightly the hand and drawing it iit 
 lo-wards the body, the trooper gathers his horse ; in draw- 
 ing it in still more, the gait is made slower. By increa 
 »iug the effect of the hand, the horse is stopped ; if in- 
 ereased still more, the horse is reigned back. 
 
 In lowering slightly the hand, the horse is at liberie 
 i4,^ move forward. 
 
 tn carrying the hand forward and to the right, tUe 
 liorse is turned to the right. 
 
 In carrying the band forward and to the left, the hore^ 
 id turned to the left. 
 
 As soon as the horse obeys, the bridle hand resumes- 
 it-s original position. 
 
 lu all the movements of the hand, the arm should act 
 freely, without comtnunicating conslraiat to the shoulder 
 or body; the effect of the curb being more powerful than 
 that of the snaffle, it should be used progressively, par- 
 ticularly in stopping and reining back. 
 
 The instructor causes the following movements to be 
 executed by the con^mands prescribed in the first lesson, 
 
100 SCHOOL OF THB 
 
 V ♦»r. -TO GATHER THE JIORSE. 
 
 14C. — Elevate elightly the hauil, drawing it at lli«» 
 SiiiiQe time towards tlie body, ftod close the lega. 
 
 TO MARCH. 
 
 14V. — Lower sliglitly tbo Land, the wrist always op 
 posite the middle of the body, aud close the legs pvogrei-- 
 !-ively. As soon aa the horse obeys, replace the hand 
 and legs by degrees. 
 
 TO HALT. 
 
 . 148. — Th<j trooper braces himself in the saddle; olevatt 
 the hand by degrees in drawing it in towards the bodX: 
 and close the lega to keep the horse straight and j>revenl 
 him from stepping back. As soon as the horse obeys, re- 
 place the hand and the legs by degrees. 
 
 TO TURN TO THE RIGHT IN MARCHING. 
 
 1-49. — Carry the hand forward and to the right, ac-"" 
 cording to the sensibility of the horse; dose the legs, t)i* 
 left leg the most. The mo.veuient being nearly liniished, 
 replace the hand and the legs by degrees. 
 
 TO TURN TO THE LEI-T IN MARCHING. 
 
 ■" 150. — Carry iho. hand forward and to the left, acootd- 
 ing to the sensibility of the horso; doge the leg'^, the right 
 leg the most. The movement being nearly linished, r<'- 
 place the hand and legs by degrees. 
 
 TO TURN-ABOUT TO THE RIGHT AND TO TH K 
 LEFT MARCHING. 
 
 151. — The same principles as prescribed to execute h 
 lurn to the riglit, or to the left^ observing (n pass over u 
 scmicii-cle. 
 
TKOOPER, MOUKtED. U'l 
 
 TO MAKE AN OBLIQUE TURN TO THE RIGHT 
 AND TO THE LEFT MARCUING. 
 
 162. — ^The same principles as prescribed to execute t* 
 turn to the riglil, or to tlie left, observing thftt tlie nioVe- 
 ment of the h.uul does not require the horse to do raoF< 
 than make a third of a turn to the right, or to the left. 
 
 TO REIN BACK", AND TO CEASE REINING BACK. 
 
 lofi. — The same priuijiples as prescribed for the hal:, 
 observing, as soon as the horse obeys, to lower audrais*r 
 the hand alternately that the movement may bo regular. 
 
 To cease reining back, relax the effect of the hand nn'l 
 close tlie legs ; as soon as the horse obeys, .replace tb'. 
 hand and the legs by degrees.. 
 
 15L — The instructor does not require these different, 
 movements to be executed simult-nneoualy, but obBcrves 
 particularly the manner in which each trooper cmi)loys 
 his bridle hand. He always rectifies it-s position beforv 
 pa&sing from one movement to another. 
 
 EXERCISE OF THE FOURTH LESSON WITH THE 
 ^ CURB BRIDLE. 
 
 165. — When tlic troopers begin to understand th* 
 movements of the bridle hand, the instructor caiises them 
 to march upon the track, first ac lite walk, and then at 
 the trot. lie requires the squad frequently to lialt.to 
 move off, to change direction, and to execute suceessivei 
 ly the different movements of tlie fourth lesson, observim'; 
 that each trooper makes an exact application of the prii.- 
 cifdcB prescribed when at a hnlt. 
 
 The habitual fault with the troopers being to carry 
 the left hand forward, and to throw back the riglit slioul- 
 der, tUo instructor is particular in requiring. thj^m to keep 
 Mie hand above the pommel of the sai]d]e withp^it jlc- 
 ranging the position o( ihe body. - • • 
 
102 SCHOOL OF THE 
 
 TO PASSAGE TO THE RIGHT, AND TO THE LEFT. 
 
 156. — The instructor causes the squad to passage to 
 VUe right, and to the left, the head to the wall and in 
 column. • 
 
 To passage to the right, bear the slioulders of tlw 
 liorso to the right, by inclining the hand to the right, at 
 the same time bear sufficiently on the bit to prevent the 
 liorse from njoving forward ; close th« left leg that the 
 haunches may follow, keep the right leg near, to sustain 
 I he horse. 
 
 In order to cease passaging, stvaighten the horse, hold 
 tJ\e right leg near, and replace theliand and the legs by 
 degrees. 
 
 To passage to the loft, and to cease passaging, employ 
 the same principles, but inverse means. 
 
 "SIXTH LESSON. 
 
 PIllNCIPLES OF THE GALLOP. 
 
 157. — A horse gallop* on the right foot, when the right 
 fore and bind leg move in advance of the left fore and 
 iiiud leg. This gait is generally divided into three dis- 
 tinct times or treads. The It^t time is marked by the loft 
 hind foot, which reaches the ground first; the 2d by th« 
 lert fore and wght hind foot, which touch at the same in- 
 ,i*tant ; and the 3d by the riglit fore foot. 
 
 A horse gallops ou the left foot when the loft fore and 
 hind big move in advance of the right fore and hind leg. 
 In this case, the right hind foot first reaches the ground, 
 then the right fore and left hind foot, and lastly the left 
 fore foot. 
 
 A horse gallops (rue when he gallops on the right foot, 
 in exercising or turning to the right hand, and on the left 
 foot, in exercising or luriJing to the left hand. 
 
 A horse gallops false when he gallops on the left foot, 
 in exercising or turning to the right hand, and on the 
 r'ght foot, in exercising or turning to the left hand. 
 
TROOPER, MOUNTED. 104 
 
 A horse is "disunited" when he gallops with the near 
 lore leg followed by the off hind leg, or with the off fore 
 lea; followed by the near hind leg. 
 
 When the horse is disunitcil, the trooper experiences 
 in his position irregular movements; the centre of gravity 
 of the horse is deranged, and hig strength impaired. 
 
 EXERCISE AT THE GALLOP UPON RPGHT tiNES. 
 
 158. — When the troopers preserve in the Ith lesson 
 their proper position nt the gallop, they are taught to 
 move off on a straight line to either hand. 
 
 After the troopers of the 2d division are formed, as 
 proscribed, No. 133, the instructor causes the men of the 
 front rank to take the distance of 4 paces from each oth- 
 er; these troopers marching to the right hand upon one of 
 Hie long sides, the instructor commands : 
 
 1. Gallop. 
 
 2. March. . - 
 
 At the command gallop, gather the liorsc, increasing 
 the pressure of the legs, and restraining him witli tli« 
 reins. 
 
 At the command march, carry the hand slightly to thd 
 left, feeling both reins equally, to enable the right shoul- 
 der to move in advance of the left, and close the right; 
 leg. "The horse having obeyed, hold a light hand and 
 the legs i^ear, to keep him at his gait. To make him gal- 
 lop on the left foot inverse means are used. 
 
 159. — The instructor requires the troopers to be calm, 
 to conduct' their horses with mildness, auH particularly 
 to preserve a light hand that the gallop may be free and 
 regular. 
 
 During the first days of the exercise at the gallop, the 
 t roopers are required to take the reins of the suafde ih. 
 the right hand, in order to calm their horses;. this is dis- 
 eontinned wlien they have acquired th6 habit of mana- 
 ging thti\i with the curb bridle alone, 
 
.01 SCHOOL OF TifE 
 
 To prctioi've llic movenicnl ot' tlie horsfvtrue, it is ne- 
 CL?-iivy for the trooper to accoinmo<late himself to all hh 
 niolluus, j>articularly in passing the corners, where the 
 slightest dera-ngcment in the scat would render the action 
 »>f the horse irregular. 
 
 When a horse gallops false, if to ttie right, the troop<:i' 
 will feel both reins to the left, in order to bring hi^ 
 weight to that side, the horse's h<>ad reinaioing bent t<^ 
 ihe right, and close firmly his left leg, to bring his haun- 
 elies in again, and then as iu Ko. luH. 
 
 IC)0. — The troopers are pcrniittol to make only a tiU'B 
 Mi- two at iho gallop to each h;and, and always required 
 \<> pa-s to the Irot or walk iu order to change hand. 
 
 When the horses have become quiet, and the troopers' 
 begin to mannge them well, the distance between tl>ern 
 is gradually diminished to 4 feet.- 
 
 The '2d tli vision is carried through the same exeroise-, 
 *and tht^n both at the same time. 
 
 EXERCISE AT THE GALLOP ON THE CIRCLE. 
 
 1»11. — AVhon the troopers have been siifRciently exor- 
 cised at the ff all 02) upon straight lines, theinsJructor cau- 
 res them to make a few turus on the circle, following "the 
 prineipicr, pr.escribed, IS'o, X24. 
 
 Till"? -exercise i.=; c-omnienced on very larga circles; tl>f 
 diameter is dimiiiished as the troopers become mor* 
 stilful. 
 
 , To tcrtriiuate the lesson, and return to the quarter*. 
 conform to what is prescribed, No, 129. 
 
 SEVENTH LESSON. 
 
 1G2. — ^The same number of troopers compose tiic squad 
 a=^ for the 6tli lesson; they have their arms. 
 
 The in-truclor is mounted. He has an assistant iiv 
 etructor. 
 
 The assL^^tant iustructor, also nioviutcd, is armed lik«» 
 
TROOPER, MOUNTED. 105 
 
 the troop«i*t>, in orJcr to execute tlie maviual of nrms, a* 
 jivcQ in detail by tho iustructor. 
 
 HXERCISE OF THE SIXTH LESSON, WITH THE 
 SABRE ONLY. 
 
 163. — ^Tl)e flist days of the Vth lesson ure employed m 
 »'t^>cating all the niovcmcnts of llie Cth, the troopers be- 
 ing nrmed with the ?abre only. The troopers arc then 
 tnniished with nil the arms. Before commencini^ the 
 manual of nrius, a few movements atVie v;alJc ai\^ i!<9 
 trot are executed, in order to calm the horses; during the 
 remainder of the lesion, the exercise at a hall js inter- 
 rupted by movements at the different gaits. The ili- 
 *tructor requires them to be executed with the greatest 
 'regularity, so that tlie troopers, in learning to manage 
 their arms, perfect them-.elvei? at tho same tiiftein con- 
 d noting their horses. ••«■*# -•-^■;* v 
 
 MANUAL OF ARMS AT A 1L\LT. 
 
 ! 04.— The troopers are formed by the commanda paoxi 
 imd HALT, as prescribed, Xo. 125, and are 4 inches from 
 knee to knee. 
 
 The instructor commands: 
 
 T>rav} — Babrev 
 2 tw)e!9. 
 
 U)o. — 1. At the command draw, incline oli^ditly the 
 head to the left, carry the right hand above tlie rein?. 
 f ngagc the wri?t in the .sword-knot, seize the gripe, dis- 
 «agage the blade 6 inches from the scabbard, and trrn 
 the head to the froiil. 
 
 2. At the commaud .sabric^ draw quickly the sabre, 
 raising the arm to its full length at an angle of 45 de- 
 grees, the sabre in a straight line with the arm; hold the 
 <abre in this position an instant, then carry it to the right 
 'boulder, the back of the blade supported agalns^ tlie- 
 
IOC SCHOOL OF THE 
 
 hollow of Ihe shoulder, the wriet upon the t^p of thp 
 thigh, the little linger on the outside of the gripe. 
 
 Present — Sabrb. 
 
 1 time. 
 
 1C3. — At the command SAimE, carry the sabre up ami 
 to the front, the thumb opposite to and 6 inches from 
 the nect; the blade perpendicular, the edge to th« left., 
 the thumb along the right side of the gripe, the littlo 
 finger joined to^the other three. 
 
 Carry — Sabrk. 
 
 1 time, 
 
 167. — At the command sabre, replace the gabre, tJie 
 back of the blade supported against the hollow of th« 
 m^houlder, the wrist upon the upper part of the thigh, the 
 little finger outside of the gripe. 
 
 Charge — Sabre. 
 
 1' time, 2 motions. 
 
 168. — 1. At the command babre, raise the hand in 
 tierce as high as the right ear and 1 inchea fi'om it, tba 
 right shoulder and elbow well back, the thumb on the 
 back of the gripe, the point of the sabre to the front and 
 slightly below the horizontal, the edge up. 
 
 2. Thrust to the front, the edge up, the arm at its full 
 extent 
 
 Carry — Sabre, 
 1 time, 
 
 169. — At the command babre, draw back the arm and 
 replace the sabre as in No. 165. 
 
 Return — vSabre. 
 
 2 times, 
 
 170.— 1. At the command rf/itrn, execute th« more- 
 ment of preser^t »abre. ' ' , 
 
2f'JS. 
 
 /k^ /i?0 
 
TROOPER, MOUNTED. 10-? 
 
 2. At the command SAr.r.K, carry the wrist opposite t<> 
 and 6 inches from the left shoulder, lower the blade in 
 passing it near the left arm, the point to the rear, raising 
 at the same time the right liand; incline the hefld sliglil- 
 ly to the left, and fix the eyes upon the mouth of th** 
 scabbard; return the blade, disengage the wri.-t frotn 
 the sword-knot, turn the head to the front. 
 
 The instructor commands; 
 
 Draw — PiBTOT., 
 17 1. — This is executed as prescribed, K"o. 62. 
 
 TO FIRE THE PISTOL. 
 The instructor commands : 
 
 Rkady. 
 172. — This is executed as in No. 03. 
 
 Aim. 
 
 1 time. 
 
 178. — This is executed as in No. 64. 
 
 Fire, 
 
 1 time. 
 
 174. — At this command, fire, and raise pistol. 
 
 175. — At the position of aim, the instructor may com- 
 mand, raise — pistol ; the men will rafie the pistol tt> t^e- 
 position. No, 62. If the pistol is not fired, at the com- 
 mand return — pistol, first let down the hammer. 
 
 . • 
 
 176. — ^To cock the pistol rapidly, without the use ol' 
 
 the left hand, whilst pressing back the hammer with th« 
 right thumb, to assist its action throw forward the muz- 
 zle with a quick motion, 
 
 TO LOAD THE PISTOL. 
 
 177. — ^The horses must be quiet ; at the position of 
 raise pistol, the instructor command^* 
 
Va SCHOOL OP THB 
 
 Zoau at — "Wjij« 
 
 ' At tlji9 command, let the roins rest on the. portYnel, 
 ::h]f code the pietol, take it by the stock 'svith the left 
 hnnJ, the gr.r:r 1 ti> the right, nncl lower it until the hand 
 •.''?ts upon tho inner side of the left thigh, the butt of th* 
 £ Istol toucliin:^ the ."addle, tho hand and cylinder restinj^ 
 Hgainet the s*;de of the pommel, the pistol being inclined 
 to clie front and right; with the right hand take a cnr- 
 trlde and place it in a chamber, tnrn the cylinder and 
 force in the ball ; repeat this until all the chambers are 
 Ipaded. Then hold the pistol against the right side of 
 the pommel, pointing downward, to the right and front, 
 and put on tlie caps. Take the i)0!^\iior\'oi' raii^e pi fitoL 
 
 Rehirn- — Pistoi . 
 
 ,1'?8. — At the coinmandprsTOL, place it in the hokler^ 
 and button the flap. 
 
 The manr.al of a -ecoud pistol carried in a saddle hol- 
 ster is th-c same ; whore it is furnished, the manual nxnin 
 tod applies to it; and it will be the fiwt used. 
 
 IN.SPF.CTrOX OF ARMS. 
 
 179.— The inbtrnctor comiv.ands: 
 
 Inspection — Pistot.. 
 » 1 I'mu^ 3 motions. 
 
 1. At the command PISTOT,, draw the pistol and' iak? 
 the position, raise — pistol. 
 
 2. . Lower the pistol into the left hand, to half cock it 
 then hold it by the right hand vertical, guard to tho 
 -left, about three inches above the bridle hand, in front 
 of the micMle of tlie body ; the right fore-arm touehioij 
 the side. 
 
 3. Place the pistol in the bridle hand, to let down th> 
 hammer, return it to the holster or belt, button the iJap, 
 and bring the right hand to the side. 
 
 The instmctor commanda: 
 
TROOPER, MOUNTIT. 10^ 
 
 Inspection — Sabrb. 
 
 1 time, T motions, 
 
 180, — 1. At the command sabre, execute the first time 
 of drato sabre. 
 2. Execute the eeoond time of draw sabre. 
 8. Present sabre. 
 
 4. Move the thumb to the back of the gripe, turn it in 
 the hand, the edge turning by the front to the right. - 
 
 5. Carry sabre. 
 
 6. Execute the first time of return sabre. 
 
 7. Ileturn the sabre. 
 
 181. — "When troopers execute correctly the inspection 
 of arms, they are exercised at it without detail, at the 
 command : 
 
 Inspection — Arms. 
 
 At this command tlie troopers execute the first and se- 
 cond motions of ijiapection of pistol. 
 
 As soon as the inspector has passed the man on Lis 
 left, each trooper execiites the third motion of inspe€tio?i 
 of pistol, and the first and second motions of inspection 
 of sabre. 
 
 Each trooper, as the inspector reaches him the second 
 time, executes the third and fourth motions of inspection 
 of sabre. 
 
 As soon as the inspector has passed the n§xt man od 
 his left, he executes the fifth, sixth, and seventh motions 
 of inspection of sabre; the inspector governs himself as in 
 No. 73. 
 
 SABRE EXERCISE, AT A HALT. 
 
 182. — ^The troopers marching at a walk in two columns, 
 the instructor causes them to take the distance of two 
 paces one from another, and when the two columns are 
 OB the long side, he commands: 1. yh the right, (or left.) 
 2. Makch, 3. Halt. He causes them to exercise the 
 sabre exercise, as taught on foot. 
 
110 SCHOOL OP THE 
 
 EIGHTH LESSON. 
 
 MANUAL OF ARMS, IN MARCHING. 
 
 183. — Tlie troopers are requTred to draw sabre, ntid to 
 return sabre, "while marclung in column at a wplk. 
 
 The instructor obseiTes that neither tlie seat nor the 
 position of the bridle-hand is deranged. He also re- 
 quires the troopers to keep the legs near, in order to 
 prevent the horses from slackening the gait. When the 
 troopers have the sabre down, the instructor observes 
 that they do not throw back the right shoulder. 
 
 As the troopers become more skilful, they are required 
 to draw sabre, in marching first at the trot, and then at 
 the gallop. They also take the position of chanje sabre, 
 in marching at the different gaits. 
 
 The sabres arc returned in marching at a lealk; for 
 this purpose the troopers are directed to support the 
 1 ack of the blade against the left arm, until the point 
 Las entered the scabbard. 
 
 The troopers are exercised, sabres draioji, in turning to 
 the right and to the left at the trot and at the gallop, and 
 to the right-about and left-about at the trot only. 
 
 SABRE EXERCISE AT ALL GAITS. 
 
 184. — The troopers execute progressively, at the dif- 
 ferent gaits, the exercise of the sabre, taking care to pre- 
 serve between each other a distance of 2 paces. 
 
 LEAPING. 
 
 185. — For this exercise the width of the ditch should 
 Toe from 3 to 6 feet, and the height of the bar or fence 
 frona 1 to 3 feet. The width and height of each are in- 
 creased as the troopers and horses become more habitua- 
 ted to leaping. 
 
 The instructor forma the squad 80 paces in rear of the 
 obstacle. 
 
TROOPER, MOUNTED. Ill 
 
 At the warning of the" instructor, each trooper moves 
 off at a loalk, directs liis march towards the obstacle, and 
 at a third of tlie way commences the trot. 
 
 TO LEAP THE DITCH. 
 
 186. — On arriving near the ditch, give the hand and 
 close the legs, to force the horse to make the leap. The 
 moment he reaches the ground, raise slightly the Jiand 
 in order to sustain him. 
 
 TO LEAP THE FENCE. 
 
 18*7. — On arriving near the obstacle, rein up the horse 
 slightly and close the legs, ' At thfc moment of making 
 the leap, give the hand, and elevate it slightly as soon 
 as he reaches the ground on the other side. 
 
 The trooper, in leaping, should cling to thehorseVilh 
 the thighs and calves of the legs, taking care to lean a 
 little forward as the horse is in the.act erf springinn;, and 
 to seat liimself well by leaning to the rear at the mo- 
 ment the horse reaches the ground. 
 
 188. — Each trooper, after having made the leap, con- 
 tinues to move at the trot, and tjflces his place in the rank 
 which is formed SO paces beyond tlie obstacle, taking 
 care to pass to the walk just before halting. 
 
 During the first days of this exercise the troopers leap 
 without arms; the horses i>idden on the snixffle. 
 
 "When the troopers have leaped without arms, they 
 repeat the same exercise with arms, and finally with the 
 sabre drawn. 
 
 The horses employed in the scliool of the trooper should 
 be trained and accustomed to leaping. If, however, a 
 horse-refuses to leap, the instructor aids the trooper with 
 the whip. 
 
 INDIVIDUAL CHARGE. 
 
 189. — ^To exercise the troopera at the charge, they are 
 conducted to the extremity of a ground which presents 
 
112 SCHOOL OF THE 
 
 a course of surticieut extent without obstacle. There 
 they are formed in line and required to draw the sabre. 
 
 The instructor fdaces himself 150 paces in front of the 
 right of the troopers; a corporal, 60 paces further; and 
 a corporal or trooper, 20 paces bej'ond him ; he serves 
 as the point of direction for the trooper on the right. 
 
 The assistant instructor remains at the point of depar- 
 ture, to see that the troopers move bff one after another, 
 and ^peat to them what they are required to do. 
 
 To execute well the charge, the troopers should be 
 careful to march strnight forward, not to change the gait 
 before arriving at the points indicated, and to increase 
 or diminish the gait calmly. 
 
 Each trooper marches 15 paces, and takes the trot. 
 
 Having trotted 50 paces, the assistant instructor com- 
 jnands the gallop. 
 
 "When h& reaches the instructor, the latter commands: 
 
 CUAUGE. 
 
 At this command, quicken the gallop to nearly full 
 speed, keeping the horse at the same time under control; 
 bear upon the stirrup, and take the position of charge 
 
 SABKE. ♦ 
 
 Abreast of the corporal the trooper retakes the trot 
 and carries the sabre. 
 
 At 10 paces from the second corporal he takes the ivalk, 
 and halts abreast of him. 
 
 All the other troopers execute successively the same 
 movement, the assistant instructor causing each one to 
 set, off when the trooper who precedes him has halted. 
 Each trooper takes for his point of directjon the place he 
 is to occupy in the rank, and places himself on the left of 
 tke troopers already formed. 
 
 190. — The first charge being completed, the instructor 
 breaks the squad by file to the right, and reforms in/a- 
 cing to the rear, by the commands front and halt. 
 
 The troopers thoc charge in the opposite direction on 
 the same principles. 
 
TROOPER, MOUNTED. 118 
 
 '191. — The charge should bo executed only twice the 
 same day. It usually terminates the exercise ; after exe- 
 cuting it the squad marches at a ival/c a sufficient time 
 to enable the horses to becomCcalin before entering the 
 stables. 
 
 CIRCLING OX THE FOREHAND AND HAUNCHES, 
 AND DEMI-PIROUETTE. 
 
 192. — The troopers are now taught on instructed hor- 
 ses to circle on the forehand and haunches, and the de- 
 ini-pirouctte, conforming to Article 7, Title 1st, all el 
 which article they are mode to understand and practice. 
 
 The practice of new horses at the paces for manoeuvre 
 is made useful for the instruction of the recruits, as well 
 as for their practice in riding. 
 
 TARGET PRACTICE. 
 
 193. — For the target practice on horseback, the target 
 should be 8 feet high and 8 feet broad ; at 6 feet of its 
 height it is marked with a black band 3 inches wide, 
 with a square at its centre — white. 
 
 The troopers are first practiced at 10 paces, firing at a 
 halt, to the front, right, left, and rear. 
 
 In tiring to the front, aim directly over the horse's 
 head, as in that position a smaller mark is presented to 
 an enemy, and the trooper's person is partly covered by 
 the horse. 
 
 The distance is increased to 20, 80, 40, and to 50 
 paces. 
 
 Afterwards the ti-oopers are exercised, at the same 
 distances, at the toalk. 
 
 In firing the troopers must not halt, or at all change 
 gait or direction. 
 
 They are then practiced ab the same kind of target, 
 and on the same principles at the trot. 
 
 For the most advanced practice, a cylindrical post, 12 
 inches in diameter, and 8 feet higli, will be use^ i^a a 
 
114 SCHOOL OP THE 
 
 target, a barrier will extend out 12 feet, so as toroqufi*e 
 tke trooper in passing to ride rather more than that dis- 
 tahce off; In a line with the target, and parallel with 
 the track, a small post will be set up, 10 paces on each 
 side. 
 
 The troopers will first be exercised a little at a ^oalk, 
 and at a trot. The trooper will be instructed first to 
 inarch past with the target to his right, and wilhoiit 
 disturbing the motions of his horse, to fire to the right 
 front, choosing his point anywhere from the small post 
 to the barrier. 
 
 Next he will pass with the target on his left, firing to 
 the left front, at any point in his course between the 
 small post and the barrier. 
 
 Next he will pass, with his. right to the target, and 
 iire between the barriers and the small post, to his right 
 rear. 
 
 Finally, with his left to the target, he will fire to his 
 left rear, within the prescribed limits of his course. 
 
 This practice at a gallop is the final and principttl ex- 
 ercise of the target firing. 
 
 .EECORD AND REPORTS OF TARGET FIRING. 
 
 194. — Beside the foregoing progressive instruction for 
 recruits, there will be target firing in eveiy three months 
 in every squadron ; on each occasion, the best practiced 
 troopers firing at least 12 shots mounted; every member 
 of the squadron, not a capital prisoner, will join in the 
 exercise. 
 
 There will be a record of target firing in each squad- 
 ron kept in a book, giving the name and performance of 
 each member. In the s^rnu/Jweaswrc, each miss at dis- 
 mounted practice counts 24 inches, at mounted practice, 
 30 inches. 
 
 The book will be in printed blanks of the folio wiiig 
 form, and ruled for the number of members of the squad- 
 rons, (companies,) viz: 
 
TROOPER, MOUNTED. 
 
 115 
 
 C5 
 
 * 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 5-a 
 
 C 3 
 
 
 J2; <n 
 
 
 e« 
 
 a> 
 
 :3*:; o 
 
116 SCHOOL OF THE 
 
 195. — On the 1st of May and 1st of November, annu? 
 ally, the captains will report to the regimental com- 
 mander an abstract giving the totals from this record. 
 At the same time he will make report of the names of 
 the first and second best performers of the squadrou, at 
 the gallop practice at the round target. 
 
 On receipt of these reports the commander of the regi- 
 ment shall publish, in regimental ordere, the first and 
 second best squadrons, and the names of the two best 
 3ihot8 in each squadron of the regiment. 
 
PLATOON, MOUNTED. > IIT 
 
 SCHOOL or THE PLATOON, MOUNTED. 
 
 1%. — ^The troopei-8 being sufficiently instructed to 
 manage their horses and use their arras, are passed, to 
 the school of the platoon, the object of which is to teacti 
 thein to exercise properly together, and execute all the 
 movements of the platoon in the squadron, whether in 
 eolumn or in line. 
 
 Each movement, after having been correctly executed 
 by the right, is repeated by the left. 
 
 When the movements are all executed at the walk, the 
 instructor causes them to be repeated at the trot, requir- 
 ing always the same simultaneous action and the same 
 precision. This gradation is also followed for the exer- 
 eise at the gallop; but the horses are not kept a long lime 
 at this gait. 
 
 The platoon is composed of frt)m 1"2 to 24 men, inclu- 
 ding 2 corporals; the instructor moves wherever his pre- 
 sence is most required; the platoon is under arms. 
 
 197.^— The platoon formed in line, the troopers at the 
 head of their hordes, the instructor commands : 
 
 1. Attentiok. 
 
 2. Right — Dress. 
 
 3. Front. 
 
 He then commands^: 
 
 Count fours. 
 
 At this command, the men, in a firm voice, commen- 
 cing on the right, count, one, two, three, four, from righA 
 to left. « - 
 
lis SCHOOL OF THE 
 
 The troopers tbcu mount by the thnes, and without 
 explanation. • 
 
 ARTICLE FIRST, 
 
 GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF ALIGNMENT. 
 
 198. — The troopers, to align themselves, should regu- 
 late their shoulders upon those of the men on the side of 
 the alignment, and for this purpose they should turn the 
 head, remaining square upon their liorses, and so'corroct 
 their positions as just to perceive the breast of the se- 
 cond trooper, from them, and keep the horses straight in 
 the ranks, that all may. have a parallel direction. 
 
 SUCCESSIVE ALIGNMENT OF FILES IN THE 
 PLATOON. 
 
 199. — The two files ^ the right or of the left are 
 moved forward 10 paces, and aligned parallel to the pla- 
 toon by the commands: 1. Two files from right (or left) 
 forward; 2. Marcb; 3, Halt; 4. Right {ov left) T>b.vs»\ 
 5. ^RO^T. 
 
 The instructor commands : 
 
 1. By file — right (or left) Dress. 
 
 2. Front. 
 
 At the command dress, the files move forward succes- 
 sively and steadily, the troopers turning the head lo the 
 right, and taking the last st^ps slowly, in order to arrive 
 abreast of the files already formed without passing be- 
 yond the alignment, observing then to halt, give the 
 hand, relax the legs, and keep the head to the right un- 
 til the command front. 
 
 Each file executes the same movement when the pre- 
 
PLATOON, MOUNTED. 119' 
 
 ceding one has carrived on the base of aligumont, so that 
 only one file may align itself at the same time. 
 At the command fr<>nt, turn the head to the front. 
 
 200. — When the ti-oopers execute correctly these align- 
 ments, this instruction is repeated in giving the two files 
 of the right an oblique direction. For this purpose, the 
 two files having marched forward 4 paces, as has been 
 prescribed, execute a half turn to the rigltt^ or to the Uft, 
 and march C paces in this new direction. 
 
 The platoon being unmasked, the remainder of the 
 movement is executed by the commands aud following 
 the principles prescribed, No. 199, each file, as it arrives 
 nearly opposite the place it is to occupy, executes a lialf 
 turn to the right, or to'iJtc left, so that having left tlie 
 platoon by one straight line, it arrives upon the new 
 alignment by another. 
 
 201. — The two files of the right, or of the left, are 
 made to rein back 4 paces, and align themselves parallel 
 to the platoon and opposite the place they occupied in 
 it, by th« commands: 1. Two files from right {ov left) 
 backwards; 2. March; 3. Halt; 4. Right {ov left) DRme; 
 5. Front. 
 
 The instructor commands : 
 
 1. By file — right (or left) backward — Dress, 
 
 2. Front. 
 
 At the command tjress, each file reins back successive- 
 ly, keeping perfectly straight, the troopers turning the 
 head to the right, and passing q, little to the. rear of the 
 files already formed, in order to come up abreast- of them 
 by a movement to the front, which renders the align- 
 ment more eas}-. 
 
 At the conunand front, turn the head to the front. 
 
 The alignment of the rear gives the means of repairing 
 a fault by returning to the alignpient when, it has been 
 passed over; but it should be avoided as much as possi- 
 ble. . ^ 
 
120 SCHOOL OP THE 
 
 202. — The alignment is then executed by twos (or by 
 fours.) For this purpose, the two or four files of the right 
 move forward as has beeu prescribed, and the instructor 
 conomande : 
 
 1. By twos (or bi/ fours) — rigJU (or le/i) — Dcess. 
 
 2. Front. 
 
 At the command dress, the files align themselves suc- 
 cessively by twos (or by fours) following the principles 
 prescribed for the alignment by file, being particular to 
 set out and arrive upon the alignment together. 
 
 At the command front, turn the head to the front. 
 
 203. — The instructor observes that the troopers align 
 themselves on the breast of the second man towards the 
 side of the alignment, and not upon the extremity of the 
 rank, (which would prevent their remaining square in 
 their seats;) that they are neither too much opened nor 
 closed. The troopers are also required to align them- 
 selves promptly, that the horses may not be kept a long 
 time gathered. 
 
 204. — When a platoon is not aligned, it arises from 
 the fact, generally, that the horses are not straight in 
 the ranks. 
 
 When a platoon dresses to the right, if the left wing 
 is in rear, it is presumed that most of the horses are 
 turned to the left ; it is necessary to observe if this is 
 the case, and to command the troopers to carry the hand 
 slightly to the ri^ht, at the same time closing the right 
 leg, which brings the horse upon the alignment. 
 
 When a platoon dresses to the right, if the left wing is 
 in advance, it is presumed that the horses are turned to 
 therigUt; the troopers are then req,ui rod to, carry the 
 iiand to the left, closing at the same time the left log, 
 •which causes the horse to step back to his proper place* 
 
 In dressing to the left the same faults are corrected by 
 inverse means. 
 
PLATOON, MOUNTED. 121 
 
 205. — During the alignment, the instructor places liim- 
 self in front of the troopers, to be assured that they exe- 
 cute the movement steadily, and do not turn tiie head 
 more than is prescribed; that they preserve their inter- 
 vals of 4 inches between the knees; that thoy take the 
 last steps slowly; that they align themselves without 
 losing time as they arrive; an4 that the^- give the hand 
 and replace the logs immediately after being aligned. 
 
 206. — The instructor insists upon all these principles; 
 but the alignments will be occasionally interrupted by 
 marches in eolumn, in order to calm the horses. 
 
 ALIGNMENT OF THE PLATOON. 
 
 207. — The platoon being in line, the instructor places 
 the corporal of the flank on which he wishes to align it 
 in such a position that no trooper will be forced torein. 
 back, and commands; 
 
 1. Right (or /^T?)— Dkess. 
 
 2. Front. 
 
 At the command dress, all the troopers align them- 
 selves promptly, but with steadiness. 
 At the command front, turn the head to the front. 
 
 208. — In all the alignments, the non-commissioned offi- 
 cer on the flanks of platoons align on each other, with- 
 out respect to the individual alignment of the troopei*8. 
 
 TO BREAK THE PLATOON BY FILE, BY TWOS, 
 AND BY FOURS. 
 
 209. — The platoon being in line the instructor com^ 
 mands: 
 
 1. By file, by ttoot, (or by fours.) 
 
 2. Mabcs. 
 
122 SCnOOL OF THE 
 
 At the first commnnd, the first file, or files, gather their 
 horso^. 
 
 At the command MARcn, the right file, or set of twos 
 or fours, motes straight to the front ; the next moves for- 
 v,-aY<}, when the croups of tlie horses of tlie first are even 
 ■vs'it h the heads of their horses, or — which is liie same — 
 when the first file or set has marched o paces ; they march 
 ;; paces straight to the front, then make* an individual 
 oblique turn to the right, (SO degrees,) march in that di- 
 rection until they are in column ; then they make an ob- 
 lique turn to the left to follow the first; the other files or 
 sets do the same, in succession. 
 
 . A second set of fours, commencing the oblique move- 
 ment one length behind the first, marches 2-1 feet, and 
 gains 20.78 feet to the front, to enter the column; losing 
 the fraction in the two turns, there will be 4 open feet 
 between them ; the same difference in the distances to bo 
 marched exists with other sets. This is the distance to 
 be preserved, in each of the three columns. 
 
 If the platoon be marching, at tlie command march, 
 the right four, or two, .move on: and all the others halt, 
 and then proceed as described. 
 
 DIRECT MARCH IN COLUMN BY FILE, TWOS. 
 AND BY FOURS. 
 
 210. The troopers sbould keep their horses straight, 
 
 and their eyes to the front; marching exactly behind 
 each other in the column, preserving the distance of 4 
 feet from croup to head. The greater the depth of the 
 column the more attention is necessary to the equality 
 of the gait, and the preservation of distances. 
 
 The trooper on the left of the first set, right in front, 
 or on its right, left in front, is guide of the colunm ; he 
 moves straight forward, and — ^when the platoon is led — 
 preserves a gait which keeps the set one pace behind the 
 chief of the platoon. The troopers behind him are the 
 guides of their sets ; they preserve the distance ; and the 
 
PLATOON, MOUNTED. 128 
 
 others align themselves on him, preserving from tlmt side 
 their intervals. 
 
 CHANGE OF DIRECTION. 
 
 211. — The column marching by file, twos, or four?, the 
 instructor commands : 
 
 ie/if— Turn; or, Tti^Af— Turn. 
 
 At the first part of the command, the leading trooper, 
 or set, gathers the horses. 
 
 At the command turn, the leading set turns, the pivot 
 taTjing care not to slacken his gait, and to march over a 
 quarter circle of five paces extent, thus gaining both to 
 Uie front, and to the new direction, a distance of 10 feet. 
 The trooper on the opposite side trots — increasing his gait 
 so that.tlic set shall be squarely aligned duiiiig the turn ; 
 the dressing is to this side ; intervals are preserved from 
 the pivot. Having made a full turn, the troopers who 
 have increased their gait resume the same gait they had 
 been marching, and which is preserved by the pivot?. 
 
 Each fraction marches steadily to the point where the 
 first commenced the turn ; and it should be explained to 
 them that the distance on the outer flank must/ properly 
 be much increased during the turn. The pivots are apt 
 to lessen their speed, which, with the error of attempt- 
 ing to preserve distance unchanged, causes those in rear 
 gradually to oblique. 
 
 TO HALT, AND TO COMMENCE THE MARCH IN 
 COLUMN. 
 
 212. — The column marching, the instructor commands : 
 
 Column — Halt. 
 To move off, the instructor commands : 
 jFbrwart?— March. 
 
TW SCHOOL OP THE 
 
 INDiyiDUAL OBLIQUE MARCH. 
 
 213. — The column marcliing by file, by twos, or by 
 fours, the instructor commands: 
 
 1. Left (or right) oblique. 
 
 2. Marcu. 
 
 At the command march, eacli trooper executes indi' 
 vidually a third of a turn, or face, to the left, without 
 checking his motion. 
 
 The trooper on the left of the first set, who is guide of 
 the column, moves straight forward in the new direc- 
 tion ; the trooper on the left of each of the other sets, 
 who is its guide, moves forward also in the new direc- 
 tion, keeping in a perpendicular line to the proper front, 
 passing through the guide of the column, and moving 
 in a parallel direction with him. 
 
 The other troopers having turned, ancj marching in a 
 parallel direction with their guide, align by him and 
 keep .their persons in a line parallel with that of their 
 front before commencing to oblique ; thus the horse's 
 head of each will be opposite the shoulder of the next 
 horse towards the guide, who, during the movement, is 
 always on the flank towards whicli the oblique march 
 is made. 
 
 To return to the primitive direction the instructor 
 commands : 
 
 Forward. 
 
 At this command the troopers return to the original 
 direction by an oblique turn while advancing, and move 
 forward. 
 
 THE PLATOON MARCHING IN COLUMN BY FILE, 
 BY TWOS, AND BY FOURS, TO FORM LINE 
 FACED TO THE FRONT, TO THE LEFT, AND 
 TO THE RIGHT. 
 
 214. — ^The platoon marching in column, right in front, 
 to form line faced to the front, the inttruotor coramandi : 
 
PLATOON, MOUNTED. 125 
 
 ,1. Front into line. 
 ^ 2, March. 
 '8. Halt. 
 
 4. Drkss, 
 
 5. Front. 
 
 At the command march, the leading file or set contin- 
 ues to march forward, the othei-s oblique to the left, 
 march in tliat direction, and when opposite their places 
 in line make an oblique turn to the right. 
 
 When the first files have marched twenty paces, the 
 instructor commands: 1. Halt. 2. Drkss. The other 
 flies come up successively on their left, halt, and dres3 to 
 the right until the command front. 
 
 215. — A column marching left in front, the movement 
 is executed on the same principles, but by inverse meaD8> 
 at the same commands. 
 
 216, — The column marching left in front, to form liiTe 
 faced to the left, upon tlie prolongation and in advance 
 of its left flank, the instructor commands. 
 
 1. On left into line. 
 
 2. March. , ^ 
 
 3. Halt. 
 
 4. Dress. 
 
 6. Front. 
 
 At the command march, the first file or set turns to 
 the left and moves straight forward, the others march 
 straight on, and each turns successively, one, two, or four 
 paces beyond the point where the preceding one bas 
 turned. 
 
 When the first files have marched twenty paces, the 
 instructor commands: 1. Halt. 2. Drkss. The other 
 files successively halt and dress to the left until the com- 
 mand front. 
 
 217. — ^The column marching right in front, to form line 
 faced to the right, upon the prolongation'and in advance 
 
 8 
 
126 SCHOOL OF THE 
 
 of its right flank, the movement is executed on the same 
 principles, but by inverse means, at the commands: 1. 
 On right into line. 2. March. 3. Halt. 4. Dress, 
 • P. Front. 
 
 '218. — A column marching by file, or by twos, right in 
 front, to form line faced to the left, the instructor com- 
 tij^anuB: 
 
 1. Left into line. 
 
 2. March. 
 
 3. Halt. 
 
 4. Dres3. 
 
 5. Front. 
 
 At the command march, the first file or set of twos 
 turns to the left and moves str.iight forward, the others^ 
 continue to march on, and turn successively to the loft 
 three paces before arriving opposite the places they arc 
 to occupy in the lino, which is each on the left of the 
 Yreoeding one. 
 
 When the first files have marched twenty paces, the 
 instructor commands: 1. Halt. 2. Dress. The other 
 l^files come up, halt in succession, and dress until the com- 
 mand FRONT. 
 
 219. — The column, bj^'file or by tw^os, marching left 
 in front, to form line faced to the right, the movement 
 is executed on the sauie principles, but by inverse means, 
 at the command: 1. Right into line. 2. March. 3. Halt. 
 4;^ Dress. 6. Front. 
 
 220, — A column of fours right iu front, marching cr 
 halted, to form line, faced to the loft, on its left flanlc, 
 the instructor commands : 
 
 1. Left into line wheel. 
 
 2. March. 
 
 8. Right — Dre63. 
 *4. Front. 
 
PLATOON, MOUNTED. , 127 
 
 -At the (iominand march, each set of fours executes its 
 wheel to the loft, ftccording to the ]>rinciplcs of the wheel, 
 on a fixed pivot, No. 283 ; Nos. 4, <fec., turn upon the 
 fore feet of their horses ; the o< her troopers, preserving 
 their intervals from the pivot Hank, regulate Iheir align- 
 ment by the marching flank. At the command right— 
 PRESS, the troopers halt, 'straighten their horses, and 
 align themselves until thr command front. 
 
 221. — A column of fours left h\ front is formed in Jine, 
 faced to the right, on its right flank, on the same princi- 
 ples, by inverse menus, at the commands ; 1. Bight into 
 line wheel; 2. Map On ; 3. X</^— Drkss; 4. Front. 
 
 222. — Line iwg also be formed to either side, without 
 regard to right or left being 'in front. Wheij the move- 
 ments are executed with regularity at the loalk, they are 
 repeated at the trot and at the gallop. 
 
 MANUAL OF ARSIS. ■ 
 
 22". — The troopers being in line, execute at a halt the 
 manual of arms, as prescribed. No. 165, and following. 
 
 224. — The exercise being finished, the troopers are 
 commanded to dismount and file off. The instructor 
 remains mounted until the last horse in the platoon has 
 filed off. 
 
 ARTICLE SECONP. 
 TO FORM TWOS AND FOURS AT THE SAME GAIT. 
 
 225. — The platoon marching in column by file, right 
 in front, to form twos the instructor commands: 
 
 1. Form twos. 
 
 2. March. 
 
12S SCHOOL OF THE 
 
 At the command march, the first trooper contiuues to 
 march oo, and halts when he has marched 12 paces^ th« 
 second obliques to the left, and comes up abreast of the 
 first; on arriving there, he halts and dressea to the right. 
 All the others continue to march straighl forward, Noe. 
 2 and 4 executing their movement in the samcf manner, 
 but successively, and when Jfos. 1 and 3, upon wliich 
 they should form, have nearly arrived at their proper 
 distance, and are about to halt. 
 
 226. — The platoon marching in column by twos, right 
 in front, to form fours the instructor commands: 
 
 1. Form fours. 
 
 2. March, 
 
 - At Ihc command marcu, the first two troopers con- 
 tinue to march on, and halt when they have marched 12 
 paces ; the two following oblique to the left, and come 
 up abreast of the first two; on arriving there, they halt 
 and dress to the right. All the others continue to march 
 straight forward, Nos. 8 and 4 executing their move- 
 ment in the same manner, but successively, and when 
 Nos. 1 and 2, upon which they should form, have nearly 
 arrived at their proper distance, and arc about to halt. 
 
 227. — When the column is at a trot the formation ol 
 twos and fours at the same gait is - executed, following 
 the same principles. The first two troopers pass to the 
 walk, at the command march: the others continue to 
 march at the trot, until they have arrived abreast of 
 those on which they should form ; then they pass to 
 the walk. 
 
 "When the column is at a gallop the movement is exe- 
 cuted, following the same principles. The first, or first 
 two troopers, pass to the trot at the command march ; 
 the others continue to march at the gallop, until they 
 have executed their formation ; then they pass to the trot. 
 
 When twos or foui-s are formed at the trot or at the 
 gallop, the guide is announced as soon as the first files 
 
PLATOON, MOUNTED. 129 
 
 have doublecl. In executing the same moYements at a 
 loalk, as the liead of the column halts, the guide is not 
 announced. 
 
 The column marching left in front, these movements 
 are executed, following the same principles and by in- 
 verse means, nt the same command. 
 
 TO BREAK BY TWOS AND BY FILE AT THE 
 SAME GAIT. 
 
 .228. — The platoon marching in column by fours, right 
 in front, to break by twos, the instructor commands: 
 
 1. By twos. 
 
 2. March.* 
 
 At the command by twos, all the troopers prepare to 
 halt, except the firet numbers, 1 and 2. 
 
 At the command jtarcu, these continue to march at 
 the same gait ; all the others Imlt. Nos. 3 and 4 of the 
 leading rank oblique to the right the moment they are 
 passed by the croup of the horses of Nos. 1 and 2, and 
 place themselves in column behind them. 
 
 Each set of fours executes successively the same move- 
 ment, Nos. 1 and 2 breaking as soon as files 3 and 4 of 
 the rank which precedes them have commenced 
 obliquing, in order to enter the column. 
 
 229.— The platoon marching in column by twos, right 
 lu front, to break by file, the instructor commands: 
 
 1. Byjile. 
 
 2, March. 
 
 This is executed on the same principles as the pre- 
 ceding. 
 
 280. — When the column is at the trot, to break by 
 twos or by file is executed on the same principles ; the 
 right files of the leading rank eontinue at the trot; all 
 
130 SCHOOL OP THE 
 
 ihe others take the walk at the commaud march, and re- 
 sume the trot, in order to enter the column ; when the 
 column is at the gallop, the files which arc to break 
 take the trot at the command march, and afterwards re- 
 sume the gallop on entering the column. 
 
 The instructor observes that the files which break, 
 halt, change gait, and put themselves again in motion, 
 with steadiness; that they keep their horses sti*aight, so 
 as not to retard the movements of those which only 
 march forward, and that they retake successively their 
 distances, their directions, and their original gait. 
 
 231.— The eohtmn marching left in front, the move- 
 ment is executed, following the same principles but by 
 inverse means, at the commands: 1. By ihe left, by 
 twos (or by file) ; 2. March. 
 
 TO FORM TWOS AND FOURS' IN DOUBLING THE 
 '; GAIT. 
 
 232. — ^The platoon marching in column bj' file, right 
 in front, to form twos, the instructor commands: 
 
 1. Form twos — trot. 
 % March. 
 
 At the first command all the even numbers prepare to 
 take the trot. 
 
 At the command march, numbers two and four 
 throughout take the trot, oblique to the left, and conie 
 up abreast of Nos. 1 and 8 ; then al! trot except the first 
 twos, who continue the walk ; the others trot, until th.ey 
 arrive at their proper distance, when they pass to -the 
 xoalk. 
 
 233. — The platoon marching in column by twos, right 
 in front, to form fours the instructor commands : 
 
 1. Form Jours — trot, 
 2i. ]Marcil 
 
PLATOON, MOUNTED. I8l 
 
 At the first command all the nnmbei's three and four 
 prepare to take the irot. , ., i 
 
 At the command >f arch, nimiLora 3 and 4 thvouga- 
 out take the trot, oblique to th« left, and come up 
 abreast of numbers 1 and 2; the first set of fours con- 
 tinue the walk ; all the others trot, until they arrive at 
 their proper distance, when they pass to the wallc. 
 
 234._Wh^n the column is at the trot, the movemei^t 
 is executed on the same principles. At the command 
 M\RCH, numbers 3 and 4 throughout take the gMlop, 
 d'c.; and all resume ^Ae trot when their formation J s 
 executed. 
 
 When the column is at the gallop the movement to 
 form twos or fours is always executed at the same ga>t, 
 as prescribed, No. 227. 
 
 285. — ^The column marching left in front, the tfiove- 
 ment is executed, following the same principles but by 
 inverse means, at the same conamands. 
 
 TO BREAK BY TWOS AND BY FILE, IN DOtFB- 
 LINO THE GAIT. 
 
 236. — The platoon marching in eolurim by fours, the 
 instructor commanSs-: 
 
 1, By twos — trot. 
 
 2. MAaon. 
 
 At the command march, numbers 1 and 2 of the leal- 
 ino" set of fours commence the trot ; all the others coe- 
 tinue to march at the walk ; numbers 8 and 4, the mo- 
 ment the croups of the horses of numbers 1 and 2 pass 
 their horses' head^, oblique to the right at the trot, to 
 place themselves in column behind them ; then the next 
 numbers 1 and 2 take the trot; then the next numbers 
 8 and 4 trot and oblique as soon as they are passed, and 
 eo on. 
 
132 SCHOOL OF THE 
 
 23'?.— The platoon marching in column by twos, to 
 break by file the instructoi- commands : 
 
 1. By jlle^-trot. 
 
 2. March. 
 
 This is executed on the same principles, No. 2SG. 
 
 238. — When the column is at the trot, to break in 
 doubling the gait the instructor commands: L By twos 
 (oi* hyjUe) — gallop; 2. March ; which is executed on the 
 same principles. 
 
 When the column is at the gallop the movement to 
 break by twos or by file is executed at the same gait iis 
 prescribed, No. 230. 
 
 In these movements, the instructor observes that the 
 head of the column changes gait with moderation, and 
 that the troopers who follow do not p6rroit their horses 
 to move off before the moment prescribed. 
 
 289. — The column marching left in front, the move- 
 ment is executed on the same principles, by inverse 
 means, at the commands: 1. By the left — hy ttvos (or by 
 file;) 2. March. 
 
 SABRE EXERCISE. 
 
 240. — The instructor causes the sabre exercise to be 
 executed at a halt; for this purpose he orders the odd 
 niumbers to march forward 6 paces ; he then commands : 
 
 1. By the left (or by the right)—ropen files. 
 
 2. March. 
 
 . At the command march, the right trooper of each rank 
 moves forward 6 paces ; the second and third oblique to 
 the left, and come up abreast of the right file^, with in- 
 tervals of 4 paces ; the others first turn to the left, march 
 forward, and turn to the right so as to come into each 
 line with the same intervals. 
 
PLATOON, MOUNTED. 133 
 
 241. — When the instructor wishes to foiTO the^pktoon, 
 he commands: 
 
 1. Second rank into line. 
 
 2. March. 
 
 At the second command, the troopeis ride into the 
 middle of their intervals ; the instructor then commands : 
 
 1. Close Jiles to the right (or left.) 
 
 2, March. 
 
 At the command march, the right file moves forward 
 6 paces ; the second and third oblique to their places; 
 the others turn to the right, march forward, and turn to 
 the left, into their places. 
 
 ARTICLE THIRD. 
 DIRECT MARCH OF THE PLATOON IN" LIXE. 
 
 243. — The most important point, in the direct march 
 being to keep the horses straight in the ranks, it is in- 
 dispensable that the troopers shoiild preserve the head 
 direct. ^ ^ 
 
 The troopers should yield to all pressure coming from 
 the side of the guide, and resist that coming from the 
 opposite side. 
 
 The guide should always march afa free and steady 
 gait, and change it with steadiness, in order to avoid 
 irregularity in the ranks. 
 
 If the troopers are too near or too far from the man 
 on the side of the guide, they move from or approach 
 him very gradually, and in gaining ground to the front, 
 but not immediately ; the irregularity generally results 
 from errors which will correct themselves, and which 
 precipitancy will only aggravate. 
 
184 SCHOOL OP THE 
 
 When the guide feels himself thrown out of his direc- 
 tion, he extends his arm to the front to. indicate that 
 there is too much pressure towards hini. Then the 
 troopers carry . the bridle hand towards the opposite 
 side, give a glance to the guide, and straighten their 
 horses as soon as the guide is relieved ; but the troopers 
 must be taught to correct the intervals of files more by 
 the leg than by the hand, 
 
 244. — The corporal of the flank opposite to the guide 
 is not required to preserve the head direct. He aligns 
 himself upon the guide and the general front of the 
 platoon. 
 
 The guide is commanded alternately to the right and 
 to the left, that the troopers may have the habit of 
 dressing equally towards eitlier direction. 
 
 When the instructor wishes to exercise the platoon at 
 the direct march, it is conducted to the extremity of a 
 ground of sufficient extent to admit of its marching some 
 time without changing the direction. 
 
 245. — The platoon being in line, tlje instructor com* 
 
 mands : 
 
 1. Open files to the left (or to the right.) 
 
 2. March. ^ 
 
 3. Right (or left) — Press. ^ 
 
 4. Front. 
 
 At the comnaand march, all the troopers, except the 
 right file, passage to the left, as prescribed, No. 134 ; the 
 second trooper straightens his horse and halts as soon as 
 he has gained an interv^al of one pace between himself 
 and the trooper of the right. 
 
 Each of the other troopers executes the «ame move- 
 ment, regulating the interval, by the trooper on his right. 
 
 The troopers being aligue^, the instructor indicates to 
 the guide of the right, or of the left, a fixed point in a 
 direction perpendicular to the front of the platoon,- he 
 mstructs him to take an intermediate point, never t» 
 
PLATOON, MOUNTED. 1$5 
 
 lose sight of these two points, in order to keep himself 
 always in the proper direction, and to select a more dis- 
 tcint point as he approaches the one nearest to him. 
 
 To give a point of direction, the instructor places 
 himself^xactly behind the right file, or the left file, and 
 indicates to the trooper of the front rank an object on 
 the ground which is immovable and can be distinctly 
 seen, such as a tree or a rock. 
 
 2-1 <7. — To march the platoon forward, the instructor 
 commands: 
 
 v. ' Forward. ~ 
 
 2. Guide riff hi (or left.) 
 
 3» March, 
 
 At the command march, all the troopers mpve straight 
 forward at the same gait with the men on the side of 
 the guide. 
 
 The troopers should give a glance from time to time 
 towards the guide. 
 
 During the march the instructor is sometimes at the 
 eide of the guide, to assure himself that the troopei"9 
 march on the same line ; and sometimes behind the guide, 
 to observe that he follows the direction indicated. 
 
 24*7. — ^Tq halt the platoon, the instructor commands : 
 
 L Platoon. 
 
 2. Halt. 
 
 'S. Biff hi (or left) — Dress. 
 
 4. Front. 
 
 At the command halt, the troopers stop. 
 
 At the cofumand riffht — dress, they align themselves. 
 
 At the command front, turn^the head to the front. 
 
 248. — The troopers having been sufficiently exorcised 
 in marching with open iiles, the instructor halts the pla- 
 toon, and commands : 
 
186 SCUOOL OF THE 
 
 1. Close files to the right (or to the left.) 
 
 2. Marou. 
 
 8. Right (or /e/0— Dress. 
 4. Front. 
 
 _ At the command march, all the troopers except the 
 right "file passage to the right, and resume their places. 
 
 249. — When the troopers begin to manage their hor- 
 ses properly at the loalk, they are required to open and 
 close files, marching at the same gait, taking care not to 
 repeat these movements too often, but to make them 
 march some tioie after having opened the files, before 
 closing them, and after having closed the files, before 
 opening them ; for this purpose the instructor commands: 
 
 1. Open files to the left ipv to the right.) 
 
 2. Marcu. 
 
 At the command march, all the troopers* except the 
 right file vciuVe &.u oblique turn to the left, ai the same 
 time advancing and preserving their alignment. When 
 they are at one pace from the man on the right, they 
 straighten their horses and move forward. 
 
 250. — To close files, the instructor commands : 
 
 1. Close files to the right {ov to the left.') 
 
 2. March, 
 
 This movement«is executed following the same princi- 
 ples, but by inverse means. Each trooper should close 
 the leg in sufficient time to preserve his interval from 
 the file to which he closes. 
 
 251.— These movements having been executed to the 
 right and to the left yi marching at the walk, they are 
 repeated at the trot. 
 
 Tlie platoon is then exercised in commencing the trot 
 from a haltj and in halting while marching at this gait. 
 
PLATOON, MOUNTED. 187 
 
 252. — After the troopers have been exercised Buffi- 
 ciently in the direct march to confirm them in the prin- 
 ciples, the instructor makes use of the following means, 
 which consist in causing fiiults to be connnitted that the 
 troopers may learn how to correct them. 
 
 The platoon being on the march, the instructor directs 
 the guide to augment or slacken his gait by degrees, and 
 from time to time, without command. He irives notice 
 to the troopers that they must employ the means pre- 
 scribed to replace themselves upon the alignment. 
 
 The iusfcji'uctor next instructs the guide to take a di- 
 rection which carries him a little out, repeating to the 
 troopers that they should gain ground to the side only 
 in advancing. 
 
 When the troopers learn to reclose with steadiness, 
 the instructor directs the guide to take a direction that 
 will cause crowding in tlie ranks ; then the troopers 
 yield to the pressure, and gain insensibly ground towards 
 the opposite direction. 
 
 The instructor reminds them that to repair irregular- 
 ities too rapidly would ci'cate new ones. 
 
 When the troops have acquired, in the execution of 
 these movements at the walk, the necessary skill to avoid 
 confusion, they are repeated at the trot. 
 
 25B.— As one of the most necessary instructions for 
 preparing the soldier to act in squadron, is the method 
 of marching perfectly straight, by keeping in line two 
 objects, for this purpose each man will be successively 
 placed on the directing flank. 
 
 264. — To exercise the troopers in the direct march at 
 t?ie gallop, the progression established for the exercise at 
 the walk and at the trot is followed, except that the 
 ranks are neither opened nor closed, nor are faults com- 
 mitted to be again repaired. 
 
 When marching at a gallop, the platoon should habitu- 
 ally pass to the trot and the walk before being halted ; 
 but when the troopers are masters of thej^ horses, it 
 may be halted Bometimea without changing tho gaiU 
 
138 SCHOOL OP THE 
 
 COUNTERMARCH. 
 
 255. — The platoon having arrived at the extremity of 
 the grouiul, in order to change its direction to face to the 
 rear, the instructor conamands ; 
 
 1. Countermarch — bu the right fiank. 
 
 2. March. 
 8. FPvOiiT. 
 
 At the command march,, tlie non-commissioned officer 
 on the right turns to the right-about, No. 93, moyes to 
 the rear, and turns to the right, and moves forward, so 
 as to pass one pace in rear of the croups of the horses of 
 the platoon ; arriving near the flank he turns to the left, 
 and halts behind the^ left file, with two paces between 
 the croups of their horses. The other troopei's move, 
 each when the one on his right has gone five paces, 
 (nearly completed his about turn,) performs his right- 
 about and right turn from his own ground independent- 
 ly', and will thus find himself one pace behind the troop- 
 er who had been on his right; and each turns to the left 
 so as to come into his place in line as before, halts, and 
 dresses to the right. But the troopers who are at the 
 left of the centre of the platoon, make at first a right turn, 
 moving so as to fiollow each other with distances of one 
 pace, and turn again to the right opposite their places, 
 and move up into line, dressing by the right. 
 
 At the command front, all turn their eyes to the front. 
 
 •256. — The countermarch is executed by the left flank 
 on the Bame principles. 
 
 The countermarch should generally be executed at 
 the trot; the instructor adding that word to the first 
 ccwnmand. 
 
 WHEELINGS. 
 
 257. — ^Th^re arc two kinds of wheels : the wheel on a 
 f zed pivot, and the wheel 07i a movable pivot. 
 
PLATOON, MOUNTED. 189 
 
 The wlieel is always on a, fixed jnvot, except when the 
 command is right (or left) — turn. 
 
 The troopers should execute this movement without 
 disuniting, and without ceasing to observe the align- 
 ment. 
 
 In every kind of wheel, the conductor of the march- 
 ing flank should measure with his'eye the arc of the 
 circle he is to pass over, so that it may not be necessary 
 for the tiles either to open or close. He turns his heail 
 occasionally towards the pivot ; if he perceives that the 
 troopers are too much crowded, or too open, he increases 
 or diminishes gradual!}' the extent of his circle in gain- 
 ing more or less ground to the front than to the side. 
 
 Each trooper should describe his circle in tlie ratio of 
 the distance at which he may be from the pivot. As 
 these different arcs are all passed over in the same time, 
 it is necessary that each trooper should slacken his pace 
 in proportion to the distance from the marching flank. 
 
 During the wheel, the troopers should turn the head 
 slightly towards the marching flank, to regulate the 
 rapidity of their march, and to keep themselves aligned ; 
 they inust also preserve the intervals of files on the side 
 of the pivot, in order to remain closed to that side. They 
 should nevertheless yield to pressure coming from the 
 pivot, and resist that from the opposite direction. The 
 horses are slightly turned towards the pivot, in order to 
 keep them upon the circular line they have to pass over. 
 
 When the -troopers have opened, they should approach 
 the pivot insensibly, diminishing their circle by degrees, 
 in gaining more ground to the front than to the side. In 
 this case, they give alternately a glance to the pivot 
 and to the marching flank, taking care not to force the 
 pivot 
 
 When the troopers, have closed too much, they should 
 endeavor to correct the fault gradually in increasing 
 their circle by degrees, in gaining more ground to the 
 front than to the side. For this purpose, they give al- 
 ternately a glance to the marching flank and to the pivot. 
 
 In every kind of wheel; the troopei-s should cease 
 
140 SCHOOL OF THE 
 
 wheeling and retake the direct march at the command 
 FORWARD, at whatever point of the wheel they may be. 
 It is necessary to observe, also, that the flanks which be- 
 come pivots, or marching flanks, do not slacken or aug- 
 ment the pace before the command of execution, a very 
 common fault, arising chiefly from want of care in giv- 
 ing the coiiimands with exactness as to time. 
 
 TO WHEEL ON A FIXED PIVOT. 
 
 258. — The use of a wheel on a fixed pivot is, when 
 the platoon forms a part of the squadron, to pass from 
 the order of battle to the order of column, and from the 
 order of coltimn to the order of battle. 
 
 The trooper who forms the pivot of the wheel turns 
 his horse upon his fore feet, keej^s his ground, and comes 
 gradually round with the rank. 
 
 When the platoon is marching, the pivot halts, and 
 the marching flank executes its movement at the same 
 gait as before the wheel. 
 
 If the* instructor indicates a new gait, in order to 
 wheel, the marching flank wheels at this gait ; all the 
 other troopei*8 regulate the rapidity of their march in 
 accordance with their distance from the marching flank, 
 and take freely the new gait at the command forward. 
 
 When the platoon is halted after a wheel on a fixed 
 pivot, the alignment is always ordered towards thd side 
 of the marching flank. 
 
 269. — ^The platoon being formed in line, the instructor 
 commands: 
 
 1. In circle rigid (or left) wheel. 
 
 2. Mabco, 
 
 At the command march, the troopers put themselves 
 in motion ; the non-x;ommissioned officer who conducts 
 the moving flank marches at a walk, measuring with the 
 eye the extent of the circle he is to p^sa over, that nei- 
 
PLATOON, MOUNTED, l4l 
 
 tlier opening nor closing may be caused in the rank, 
 and that the troopers may keep aligned. The pivot 
 man turns upon his own ground, regulating himself 
 up6n the marching flank. 
 
 260. — "When.tlie platoon has executed several wheels, 
 to halt it, the instructor commands: 
 . » 
 
 1. Platoon. 
 
 2. Halt. 
 
 3. Ze/e (or right) — Dress. 
 
 4. Front. 
 
 At the command HALT, the troopers straighten their 
 horses and halt with steadiness. 
 
 At the command left (or right) — dress, they align 
 themselves towards the side indicated. 
 
 At the command front, turn the head to the front. 
 
 201. — The platoon is then marched forward, and 
 made to recommence the wheiel. When the instructor 
 wishes the platoon to take the direct march, he com- 
 mands : 
 
 1. Forward. 
 
 2. Guide left (or right.) 
 
 At the command forward, the pivot resumes the gait 
 at which it was previously marching. 
 
 All tlie other troopers straighten their horses, and the 
 two flanks move forward at the same gait, conforming 
 to the principles of the direct march. 
 
 At the command guide left (or right'^ the troops regu- 
 late their movement towards the side indicated. 
 
 262. — When the troopers have executed several 
 wheels to the right and to the left, interrupted occasion- 
 ally by direct marches, and when the horses become 
 calm, the instructor causes them to pass to the trot ; 
 after several wheels at tlie trot, thoy resume the walk. 
 
U2 SCHOOL OF THE 
 
 263. — If the platoon is ^vheeliDg to the right, and 
 the instructor wishes it to change the "wheel to the left 
 without halting, he commands: 
 
 1. In circle left wheel. 
 
 2. March. 
 
 At the command march, the left flank halts, and be- 
 comes the pivot. The right flank, assuming the gait ftt 
 which the left flank was marching, describes a circle 
 proportionate to the extent of the front. All the other 
 troopers, first straightening their horses, guide them so 
 as to pass over the new circles, 
 
 264. — ^Tlie platoon being halted, to place it in a direc- 
 tion perpendicular to the original front, the instructor 
 commands : 
 
 1. Itig?U (or left) wheel. 
 
 2. March. 
 
 3. Halt. 
 
 4. Ze/t (or right) — ^Dress. 
 6. Front. 
 
 Which is executed on the same principles of the wheel 
 0Z1 a fixed pivot. 
 
 The instructor gives the command halt, when the 
 marching flank has nearly terminated its wheel. 
 
 265. — ^The platoon being halted, to wheel it about, or 
 to place in an oblique direction to the right or left, the 
 instructor gives the command : 
 
 1. Right about (or left about) wheel ; or, right half {ov 
 left half ) wheel ; 2. March; 3. Halt; 4. Ze/t (ov right) 
 — T)rk8s; 5. Front. 
 
 Which is executed on the principles of the wheel on a 
 fixed pivot, No, 258. 
 
 Before dressing the platoon, the trooper on the march- 
 ing flank is made to come up, if necessary, abreast of the 
 pivot man, so that the other troopers will not have to 
 rein back in order to align themselves. 
 
PLATOON, MOUNTED. I43 
 
 266.— The plnloon being on the mnrch,' the same 
 movements are executed at the communde: ], Iii(jht (or 
 left) 2vh€el; right about (or left about) wheel ; right half 
 {ov left half) tohecl ; 2. March; 3. Forward. 
 
 At the command MARCH, the wheeling flank wheels at 
 the gait at which the i)latoon was marching; the pivot 
 flaiik halts. ^ 
 
 At the command forward, the pivot resumes itsonVi- 
 nal pace, and the two flanks move forward at the same 
 gait, with the guide as before. 
 
 Those movements being properly executed from a halt 
 and at the walk, are repeated at the trot. 
 
 TO WHEEL ON A MOVABLE PIYOT. 
 
 26'7.— The wlioel on a movable pivot is employed in 
 the successive changes of direction in column. 
 
 lathis wlieel, the object of the movable "pivot is to 
 leave by degrees the ground on Avluch the movement 
 commences; it allows each platoon to wh«cl on the-^ame 
 ground, without nltoring distances or retarding the 
 column. /^ ; 
 
 The conductor of the marching flank should increase 
 hi3 gait and describe his arc of circle so as to cause the 
 files neither to open nor close. The pivot describes an 
 arc of a circle, the radius being about 10 feet- and con- 
 sequently, ma right ov. left ^wrn, the trooper on the 
 flank gams about 10 feet to the front, and as much to a 
 flank, his quarter circle being 5 paces. The troopers 
 from the centre to the marching flank increase the kiit 
 progressively; the centre man preserves the gait at 
 which the platoon was marching.. The troopers' from 
 the centre to.the pivot slacken the ^ait progressively • 
 the pivot trooper slackens his gait, 8o\n8 to pass over his 
 5 paces in the same time that the centre man takes to 
 pass round his arc without clianging his gait At the 
 end of the wheel on a movable pivot, the portion of the 
 rank which had augmented its gait should slacken it 
 
144 SCHOOL OF THE 
 
 and that wliich liaJ sluckened its gait should augment 
 it. All the troopers straighten their horses; the march- 
 ing flank and the ^^ivot resume the gait at which they 
 originally marched. 
 
 268. — The platoon being on the marcli, to cause if to 
 change direction, the instructor commands : 
 
 1. Left (or riyhl) — Turn. 
 
 2. Forward. 
 
 At the lirst command, the platoon turn? to the left or 
 to the right, tiie pivot slackening its gait, in describing 
 <oi arc of Jive paces ; t!ie marching tlaiik augments its' 
 gait, and regulates itself by the pivot dviriug the whole 
 of the wheel. 
 
 . At the command forward, all the troopers straighten 
 their horses, the [livot and marching flank moving for- 
 wai'd in the gait at which the platoon was originalljr. 
 marching.. 
 
 The troopers not having been exercised to wheel at 
 the gallop on a lixed pivot, they are made to wheel on a 
 movable pivot only in marching at the icaik, that the 
 marching flank, which should increase its gait, will 
 have to take only the trot. 
 
 2.69. — To exercise the troopers in wheeling at the (gal- 
 lop on a fixed pivot, the progression established for the 
 exercise at the walk and at tfte trot is followed ; but the 
 platoon is always halted before changing the direction 
 of the wheel. 
 
 The instructor thanges the gait frequently, and avoid* 
 galloping too long to the same hand. 
 
 The platoon is exercised also to wheel at the trot ond 
 at the gallop, in setting out from a halt, and to baft 
 while wheeling at these gaita. 
 
PLATOON, MOUNTED. 14S 
 
 INDIVIDUAL OBLIQUE MARCH. 
 
 270. — The platoon marching in Hue, to cause itiogaiu 
 ground towards one of its flanks, without changing the 
 front, the instructor commands : 
 
 1. Rlfjht (or left) oblique. 
 
 2. March. 
 
 At the command mat^cii, the troopers execute, all at* 
 tJve same time, a turn of 30 degrees to the r'u/ht, so 
 tliattlie head ofieach horse may be opposite the shoul- 
 der of the horse on his right, and that the right' knoc of 
 each trooper may be in roar of the left knee of <hc 
 troopor on his right. This first movement being execu- 
 ted, the troopers move forward in the new direction, 
 regulating themselves upon the guide. 
 
 When the platoon has obliqued sufficiently, the in- 
 structor commands : 
 
 Forward. 
 
 At this command, the troopers straighten their horses 
 and move forward, regulating themselves upon the guide. 
 
 la the oblique march, the g^dc Is always on the ob- 
 liquing side, without being indicated; and after the 
 command forward, the guide returns, without indica- 
 tion, to the side on which it was originally. 
 
 When the troopers are not closed, they should m- 
 erease progressively the ^gait, in order to approach the 
 side towards which they march ; they should insensibly 
 slacken the gait if they are too much closed, or more 
 advanced than the flank towards which they oblique. 
 
 2*71. — The platoon marching at. //*e wa?^-, to execute 
 the oblique at the trot the instructor commands: \'. Right 
 (or left) ohliqxie — trot ; 2. March. 
 
 AVhen'the platoon has obliqued siifliciently, the in- 
 structor commands : Forward. 
 
146 SCHOOL OF THE. 
 
 The guide observes particularly to commence tJie trot 
 without precipitatiou. 
 
 The same course is observed if the platoon is mnrchiDg 
 at the txot, and the object is to oblique at the gaUop. 
 
 THE PLATOON MARCHING IN LINE, TO BREAK 
 IT BY FOURS OR BY TWOS AT THE SAME 
 GAIT. 
 
 272.-^The instructor commands: 
 
 * » ■ 
 
 1. By fours (or hy tivos.) 
 
 2. March. 
 
 ^ At the command march, the first foiir (or two) files tQ 
 the right continue to march forwra'd at the' same gftit; 
 the other files halt and breat successively by fours (or 
 by twos) as prescribed, No. 209. 
 
 The platoon marching in line, to break it by file the 
 njovemcnt is executed on the same principles, the first 
 file only continuing to march forward. 
 
 273. — The platoon majjchiug at the trot, it is broken 
 en the same principles, the first files continuing to march 
 at the same gait, all the other files assume the ivalk at 
 the command march, and resume the trot as they break 
 fi'om tlie platoon. 
 
 The same course is observed' when the platoon. marches 
 at the gallop ; the first files continue to march at that 
 gait; the others assume the trot at the command makcii, 
 and resume the gallop as they commence to oblique. 
 
 274. — To break the platoon by "the left, tlie move- 
 ment is executed following the same principles, but by 
 inverse means, at the commands; 1, By tlie left — hy 
 fours (or by twos.) 2. March. 
 
PLATOON, MOUNTED. 14t 
 
 THE PLATOON M ARCHIIf G IN COLUMN BY TWOS 
 OR BY FOURS, TO FORM IT AT THE SAME 
 OAIT. 
 
 275.— The platoon marching in column, right or left 
 in front, the instructor commands ; 
 
 1. Form platoon, 
 
 2. March. 
 8. Halt. 
 
 The. movement is executed as prescribed for /ron* wfo 
 line, No. 214. 
 
 . 216. — ^The platoon marching in column at the trot, 
 j-ight or left in front, the instructor commands; ^ ;- 
 
 1. Form jjlatoon. 
 
 2. March. 
 
 3. Guide rigjit (or left.) 
 
 At the command march, the first two (or four) files 
 pass to theivalh; the other files continue to march at 
 the same gait, oblique immediately to the left, march 
 straight in this direction, make an oblique turn to the 
 right on coming opposite the place they are to occupy 
 in the platoon, and pass to the xcalk on arriving upon 
 the alignment of the first. 
 
 At the command guide right, they correct their align- 
 ment towards the right. 
 
 2*77. — -When the command is at the gallop, the platoon 
 is formed on the same principles. Tlie first two (or four) 
 tiles take the trot at the command march ; the other files 
 eontinue to march at tlie gallop, and take the trot on 
 ai'riving upon the alignment of the first. 
 
 "When the column is marching by file, the platooB^is 
 formed on the same principles. ♦ 
 
14S SCHOOL OF THE 
 
 THE PLATOON MARCHIKG IN LINE, TO BREAK 
 IT BY FOT^RS OR BY TWOS IN DOUBLING 
 THE GAIT. 
 
 2*78. — The instructor commands : 
 
 1. By fours {or by twos) — trot. 
 
 2. March, 
 
 At the command makcu, the first four (or two) files of 
 'the right take the trot ; the others continue to inarch- at 
 the walk, and take successively the trot when they ob- 
 lique to the right; in order to enter the column. 
 
 279. — The platoon marching at the trot, the instructor 
 Gommands : 
 
 1. By fours (or by twos) — gallop. 
 
 2, MARcn. 
 
 Whicli is executed as prescribed, No. 2'78. 
 
 The platoon marching in line, to break it L^- file, the 
 movement is executed on the same principles. 
 
 When the platoon marches at the gallop, it is always 
 broken -without doubling the gait. 
 
 280, — To break the^platoon by the left, the move- 
 ment is executed on the' same principles, but by inverse 
 means, at the commands: 1. By the left, by fours [ov by 
 twos) — trot {ov gallop.) 2. March. 
 
 THE PLATOON MARCHING IN COLUMN BY TWOS 
 OR BY FOURS, TO FORM IT IN DOUBLIN(^ 
 THE GAIT, 
 
 281. — The platoon marching in column, right op left 
 in front, the instructor commanrja: 
 
PLATOON, 5I0UNTED. 149 
 
 1. Form platoon — irot. 
 
 2. March. 
 
 3. Onide right (or hft.) 
 
 At the command march, the first two (or fuiir) file;? 
 "continue to march forward at the same gait ; the other 
 files take the trot, oblique immediately to the left, march 
 in this du'Cction, make an oblique turn to the right ou 
 coming opposite to the place th<^ arc to occupy in the 
 platoon^ and pass to the ivalk on arriving upon 'the 
 alignment of tlie first. 
 
 282. — The platoon marching in columii at the trot, 
 right or left in front, the instructor commands : 
 
 1 . Form 2'>laioon — gallop. 
 
 2. March. 
 
 3. Giiide right (or left.) 
 
 Which is executed as prescribed, No. 281. 
 
 AVhen the column is at the gallop, the platooii is al- 
 ways formed at the same gait. 
 
 When the column is marching by iile, the platoon is 
 formed on the same principles. 
 
 MOVEMENTS BY #OURS, THE PLATOON BEING 
 IN COLUMN OR 1^" LINE. 
 
 283. — The. platoon being in line,* to form it in a col- 
 umn of fours the instructor commando :, 
 
 1. Fours, right, (or left.) 
 
 2. March. 
 
 3. Halt. 
 
 At the command march, each set of fours executes its 
 wheel of a quarter of a circle, on the principles pre- 
 scribed for the wheel on the fixed pivot ; No3. 1 or Nos. 
 4. turn upon the fore feetof their horses gradually, keep- 
 
150 SCHOOL OF THE 
 
 ing E(]^uai'e witl) the otheV flauk; the others preserve 
 their mtorvals from the pivot, and alec regulate their 
 aligtinient by the marching flank. At the command 
 HALT, the troopers straighten their horses and ha,lt. If 
 the command halt is omitted, they move off straight in 
 the new direction -at.the gait of the marching flank. 
 
 284. — The platoon marching in column of fours, to 
 march it in line to a ffank, the instructor commands : 
 
 1. Fours — Right, (or Fours — Left.) 
 
 2. Guide left (or right.) 
 
 At the first command the piN'^ots halt, and the -wheels 
 are executed on the same principles (No. 283), and at 
 the moment of their completion all move forward in 
 
 ]inc. 
 
 285. — ThQ platoon marching in line, to cause it to 
 march to either flank, the instructor commands: 
 
 Fours— v^iGHT, (or Fours — Left.) 
 
 "This command is executed on the same principles as 
 in the preceding. No. 284. 
 
 - 28.6.— The platoon being inline, or columnpf fours, to 
 face it to the rear, the instructor commands : 
 
 1. Fours left, (or right) about, 
 
 2. Makcu, ' - 
 
 3. Halt. 
 
 At the command march, each set of fours wheels to 
 the left ahont, on the principles prescribed for the wheel 
 to the right or left, No. 283. 
 
 At thocommand halt, the troopers straighten their 
 horses and halt in line or column, faced to the rear. 
 
 .If the command halt be omitted, they move straight 
 off in the new directiot, at the gait of the wheeling 
 
PLATOON, MOUNTED.. IM 
 
 flank of the fours. If ihey-iii'e in line, the instructor 
 then adds, gtiide right. 
 
 287. — The platoon marching m line, or column oi 
 fours, 'to cause it to face aud march in the opposite di- 
 rection, the instructor commands : 
 
 1. Fours — Left ABOUT (or right about.) 
 And if in line : 
 
 2. Guide right (or Iffi.) 
 
 At the command left about, or iiicnx abouiv each set 
 of fours, its pivots halting, executes the -wheel of a half 
 circle, oil the principles prescribed, JSTo. 283, and having 
 completed it, moves off in the new direction. The 
 wheel being nearly completed, the instructor may com- 
 mand : 2. II alt. 
 
 288.'^The wheels by fours must be executed with 
 care and steadiness, regulating, in wheels from line, by 
 the left when wheeling to the left, by the right when 
 wheeling to the right;, in the about wheels from column, 
 the tirst half of the wheel by the fours in front, and tlie 
 last half by those that are becoming the front. Thus all 
 the wheels, commenced gently, must be- completed by 
 the fours at the same moment. It is absolutely neces- 
 sary that th« pivots should not move, except to turn 
 their horses on the fore feet. When previously in mo- 
 tion, it is the more important that the instructor should 
 observe and insist upon this jioint. 
 
 , 289. — These movements being correctly executed jvt 
 the u-alk, they arc taught at the trot. Not at the gallop. 
 
152 SCHOOL OF THE 
 
 AnnOLE FOURTH. 
 
 * RUNNING AT tllE HEADS, AND PISTOL 
 pilACTICE. 
 
 290, — To perfect the troopers in the use of their arms 
 and in managing tlieir horses, they arc exercised at run- 
 ning at heads aiul ring?, connected with target firing. 
 
 For tliis purpose a quadi-angular track will be laid 
 out, yo yards long and 30 wide, or larger; movable posts 
 will be prepared — two, 9 feet high,, will have a hori- 
 zontal bar fiom the top, about 3 feet long, from the end 
 of which an iron ring about three inches in diameter 
 is suspended — for the practice of the points ; one post 
 feet liig'h, with a vertical pin in the top, on which will 
 revolve a block of wood about 18 inches long, balancing 
 a light }iole about 5 feet long, inserted in one end, to 
 represent a lance or sabre, and which will be easily 
 turned by a parry,. but will have tlie end blunted; one 
 post 4 feet high, made otherwise the same, the pole to 
 T-epresent a bayonet; there will also be three posts 7 feet 
 high and throe 4^ feet Idgh, to represent horsemen and 
 infantry; these six to be surmounted by rawhide or 
 canvas heads (balls) stuffed with hay. 
 
 Heads will also be used, resting on the ground, for 
 tlio practice of the points against infantry; (they, and 
 more commonly Indians or other irregulars, often 
 throM'ing themselves flat to escape the blows, <fec,, of 
 cavalry.) 
 
 For blank cartridge firing smaller balls may be used, 
 placed ui)on the posts. 
 
 At 3 paces diagonally outside an angle of the track, 
 a round post, 12 inches in diameter, 8 feet high, will 
 stand fur a pistol target. 
 
 The posts will be placed about 3 feet fi-om the track, 
 on' either side .or end ; the polo, representing a bayonet, 
 will be placed perpendicular to the track, reaching 
 
' PLATOON, MOUNTED. 153 
 
 aboiit one foot from it ; that representing a sabro, point- 
 ing towards the rider, but noarly parallel with Ihc 
 track ; rext to each will be placed a post witli n head, 
 for the delivery of a thrust or cut; these will be the 
 closer as the troopere improve in skill, \mtil they are .13 
 near as 6 feet 
 
 The track should turn the angles in a quarter circle of 
 15 feet; the disposition of posts, at or very near thp 
 turn, will be suitable to advanced practice; the target 
 post being placed as directed, the balls will range within 
 one quarter of the surrounding grounds. 
 
 The platoon will be formed in two lines near the 
 ends, facing the centre. At first not more than two 
 troopers exercise at once; moving, at the same time, at 
 the signal of the instructor, from the left of eacli line — : 
 if to ride to the right hand" — and returning to their 
 right flank. They will, in general, at the uniuter' 
 rupted canter, first draw pistol and fire a blank car- 
 tridge at a head, return pistol, draw sabre, and com- 
 mence its use as soon as possible — the decreasing dis- 
 tance from the firing point marking the improvement 
 and skill of the trooper, as also his promptnc-ss in firing 
 after using the sabre. 
 
 In every squadron, at a period of exercises, there will 
 be exercises in this article for one hour and a half one 
 day in every week. 
 
 The captains will, on the 1st of June and 1st of De- 
 cember, each year, report to the commander of tlie regi- 
 ment, in writing, the names of the two best troopers at 
 these exercises. Tliey will be announced in regimental 
 orders. 
 
 On application the colonel may grant trials of skill 
 between squadrons, and also between members of dif- 
 ferent squadrons. He will preside and judge, or ap- 
 point judges, who will make report to him. 
 
 TO LEAP THE DITCH AND THE FENCE. 
 291. — The instructor causes the troopers to leap 
 
l^i SCHOOL OF THE 
 
 Jitcllos an(I low fences, by twos and by foiiis, and then 
 by platoon; observing the principles prescribecl, No. 185 
 and following. 
 
 TO charctE by platoon. 
 
 292. — The charge will be practiced by twos, four.-t, 
 and half platoons, before the charge by platoon. 
 
 To charge by platoon, the instructor orders the sabres 
 to be drawn ; he commands : 
 
 1. Forxoard. 
 
 2. Guide riff hi (or feft.) 
 3._March. 
 
 When the platoon has marched 20 paces, the instructor 
 commands: 
 
 1. Trot 
 
 2. March, 
 
 At 60 paces further, he commands : 
 
 1. Gallop. 
 
 2. March. 
 
 At 80 paces further, he commands: 
 Charge. 
 
 At this command, the troopers take the position of 
 charge— bkh^-b. They give hand and lengthen the gal- 
 lop without losing control of their horses or disuniting. 
 
 When the platoon has charged GO paces, the instructoi 
 CommandB: 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Platoon, 
 
 3. Halt. 
 
 4. Might (or lefty-DRES^. 
 
 5. Front. 
 
PLATOON, MOUNTED. 165 
 
 At the command afte7ition, the troopers carry the 
 sabre to the shoulder. 
 At the command platoon, they take the trot. 
 At the command halt, they stop. 
 
 ' 293. — Tlie troopers- should be exercised at tho^ change 
 with the greatest care, without being required to repeat 
 it too often. 
 
 The instructor requires the gallop to be kept up ; he 
 sees that the troopers preserve ease in the ranks; tlxat 
 they hold a light hand, so that the horses not being con- 
 strained in their movements, may not become too rcsf 
 tive;and, on the other hand, tliat tbe intervals between 
 files is not increased ; the guide must at first have an 
 object pointed out, towards which to direct his whole 
 course. 
 
 RALLYING. 
 
 294.— To "exercise the troopers in rallying, the platoon 
 is formed at the extremity of the ground, the sabres are 
 drawn, and the signal charge as foragers is sounded ; at 
 this signal, the troopers gallop forward in couples and 
 charge as foragers ; the instructor and the flank files 
 remain in place, to mark out the rallying point. When 
 the troopers have marched 150 or 200 paces, the in- 
 structor orders the raUy to be sounded. At this signal, 
 the troopers wheel to the left ahoiit, and, as rapidly as 
 possible to be well in hand, pass to the rear outside of 
 the flanks, to return again and resume their places in 
 rank. As soon as two-thirds of the troopers have joined, 
 the instructor commands the platoon to move forward. 
 At first Ihe platoon is rallied at the' trot, and then at the 
 gallop. This movement is repeated without retaining 
 the flank files; in this case the troopers rally behind 
 the instructor. 
 
 SKIRMISHINa. 
 
 296. — The objects of employing skirmishers are to 
 cover movements and evolutions, to gain time, to watch 
 
1S«- SCHOOL OP THE 
 
 the movements of the enemy, to keep him in check, to 
 prevent his approaching so close to the main body as to 
 annoy the line of march, and to weaken and harass him 
 %y their lire ; to prepare the \r&y for the charge on in- 
 fantr}^ by rendering them unsteady, or drawing their 
 fire. - 
 
 In flank movements they cover the fr6nt and flank of 
 the column nearest to the enemy. The ti'ooper skir- 
 mishing is much thrown upon his own intelligence and 
 resources ; as much coolness as watchfulness is required 
 of him; and he should especially guard against exciting 
 his horse. 
 
 On service, regularity in skirmishing and correctness 
 of distance cannot always be maintained, on account of 
 the movements of the enemy, and the nature of the 
 ground ; but the general rules and practice will be easily 
 conformed to, and applied according to circumstances. 
 
 Skirmishers should be much practiced in conforming 
 to changes of front- or position and movements in col- 
 umn, without requiring orders and commands for the 
 purpose. Above all, they must be instructed to look to 
 the nature of the ground, and the supposed opposite 
 movements of the enemy. Skirmishers must be very 
 exact and alert in noticing and instantly obeying the 
 signals made for their guidance, whether proceeding 
 from their immediate commander — as by a wave of the 
 arm and sabre — or from the trumpet. It should be im» 
 pressed upon the troopers on all occasions to level low, 
 and never to fire without deliberate aim, having first 
 come steadily to a halt. The fire-arms will never be 
 cocked until the time comes for firing ; and on aotual 
 service, ofiicei's and non-comraissioned officers, when the 
 signal to commence firing is beard, must watch that 
 only those men fire who see the enemy within suitable 
 range. 
 
 296.— The platoon being supposed to form a part of 
 the squadron, it is dispersed as ekirmishei's, in order to. 
 cover the front and flanks of the squadron. 
 
PLATOON, MOUNTED. ifeT 
 
 T[]0 platoon being in line at the extremity of the 
 ground, arms loaded and sabres drawn, the instructor 
 marches the platoon forward, and when.he wishes to 
 disperse the troopers as skirmishei's, he commands: 
 
 1. Eight files from right, as skirmishers. 
 
 2. Maucu. 
 
 At tlje command march, the left guide commands the 
 four or more files," of the left, to halt ; they constitute 
 the reserve. At the same command, the eight files ol 
 the right continue to march fon-ward; after going ten 
 paces, they disperse as skirmishers, extending themselves 
 so as .to cover the supposed front of a squadron, and some 
 paces beyond each of its flanks. The right trooper? 
 oblique to the right, the left troopers to the left. As 
 soon as they arc in line they return sabre, and take the 
 position of raise — pistol. They continue to marcH until 
 the signal half, No. 2. The instructor causes the halt to 
 be sounded, when the skirmishers are 100 or 150 paces 
 from the reserve. The troopers keep 10 paces interval, 
 regulating themselves towards the guide during the whole 
 timo they act as skirmisher?. 
 
 If a less or greater interval is desired, the command 
 would be given: 
 
 1. Eiglit files from right as skirmishers, at (so, 
 
 many) jjaces. 
 
 2. March. 
 
 The guide for lines of skiriuishers will habitually be 
 at the centre, and so need not bo designated in the com- 
 mand; the instructor names the man. But if it be de- 
 sired that the guide should be right or left, it will be 
 expressed after the command march. 
 
 297. — ^The chief of the platoon, followed by his trum- 
 peter, places himself habitually half-way between the 
 skirmishers and the reserve ; he moves along the line 
 wherever he thinks his presence most necessary. 'The 
 
 10 
 
158 SCHOOL OP TUE 
 
 reserve unci the skirmisherB execute their movements at 
 irhe'signals of the trumpeter, who follows the oflicer, or 
 at his commands. 
 
 If the chief of the platoon wishes the skirmishers to 
 mo¥e forward, he causes ihc forward, No 1, to be sound- 
 ed ; each skirmisher moves forward, regulating his move- 
 ments by those of the guide, and preserving his interval ; 
 the reserve follows them, keeping at its proper distance. 
 To move the skirmishers who are at a halt, or moving 
 forward, by their right flank, to the right, l^o. 4 is 
 sounded; each trooper turns to the right and marches 
 in the direction of throse who precede him, preserving his 
 distance ; the reserve also turns to the right. 
 
 To face the skirmishers again to the front and to move 
 forward, to the left, No. 3 is sounded ; the skirmishers 
 and the reserve turn to the left. 
 
 To move the skirmishers who are at a halt,^ or moving 
 forward by their left flank, to the left, No. 3 is sounded ; 
 each skirmisher turns to the left and marches in the 
 direction of those who precede him, preserving his dis- 
 tance ; the reserve also turns to the U-ft. 
 
 To move the skirmishers again to the front, to the right, 
 No. 4 is sounded; the skirmishers and the reserve turn 
 to the right. 
 
 The direction of the flank march of the skirmishei-B 
 will be clianged at the order of their commander. 
 
 To change the front of the line, change direction to the 
 right, No 6, or change direction to the left, No. 7 is 
 sounded ; the first flank will half, and the wheeling flank 
 continue its previous gait. 
 
 At the sigual ?talt, under all circumstances the skir- 
 mishers face to the front, (to the enemy.) 
 
 If. the skirmishers are to retire without firing, the about 
 No 6 is sounded. 
 
 During the flank movements, if the troopei's are to fire, 
 they leave the column a few paces and face the- enemy 
 for that purpose; as soon as they have fired, they re- 
 sume their places in the column in doubling the gait. 
 
PLATOON, MOUNTED. 150 
 
 298. — When it is desired Ibat a line of skirmishers 
 engaged should retire firing, the commander of the pla- 
 toon orders the retreat to be sounded. At this signal all 
 the troopers who are numbers 1 and S, fire, if loaded, 
 together, then turn to the left about and move to the 
 rear. They turn by trooper to- the rightabout on the 
 most favorable ground from 40 to 60 yards in rear, to 
 cover the retreat of the line of twos and fours; which 
 then immediately fires, (an enen5y being within fire,) 
 and turns by trooper to the left about and retires 
 through the intervals of, and turns when it is 40 to CO 
 yards iu rear of, the line of ones and threes ; who then 
 fire and retire, and so on. The troopers of the line next 
 to the enemy keep up the fire if opportunities offer ; and 
 it is only the fi^les which have opportunity of effective 
 fire, who fire at the moment before the line turns about, 
 which it does all together. 
 
 The reserve retires and faces to the front, regulating 
 its movement by that of the skirmishers, so as to be abor.t 
 60 paces from the 2d line. 
 
 At a ^gnal, /onrar J No. ], or haWNo 2, the liae of 
 ekirmisJiere in rear move up. 
 
 If the line be retreating without firing, at the signal, 
 coinmence firing, Nos. 1 and 8 would move on, whilst N"o. 
 2 and 4 would halt and face the enemy, and all would 
 act as prescribed for firing in retreat. If the line be 
 firing in retreat, at the signal to ceasefire the line most 
 retired would await the other, and the retreat would be 
 continued In one line. 
 
 299. — Tiie rallying of skirmishers is alwayB made on 
 the point occupied by the officer. 
 
 To rally the skirmishers, the officer places himself 
 habitually in front of the reserve, and causes the rally 
 to be sounded. At this signal the skirmishers turn left 
 about, rally on the reserve by the shortest route, and 
 draw sabre^ 
 
 If the officer is not with the reserve when the rally ie 
 sounded, the Bkirmishers rally upon him, and the reserve 
 
160 SCHOOL OF THE 
 
 comes -lip and joins them. The trocj^ers are thus exer- 
 cised toji'ally upon any point whaleYor of the .line. 
 
 IJOO. — If a defile is- prcsented-in ailvance of Ihe front 
 of tiie line, and orders arc given to pass it, the troopers 
 ■\^io are opposite first cuter it; they are followed by tlie 
 other* troopers, who ,tur7i, by trooper, to the left and ^o 
 the right for that pm*pose. 
 
 As soon as the first have passed the defile, tliey move 
 50 or GO paces to the front and halt; the others come up 
 abreast of therfl*by obliquing, those of the right to the 
 right, and those of the l^ft to the 'left. The reserve fol- 
 lowt. 
 
 If the skirmishers are to pass a defile in their rear, the 
 reserve passes it rapidl}^ and postf? itself 50 or GO paces- 
 on the side of its outlet, facing it. "When the liiic is 
 vs'ithin 50 or CO paces, the tvs'o troopei's, \v\io {\vq on the 
 flanks, turn about and move toward the entrance of the 
 defile, and entering together immediately' pass it.' They 
 are followed closely by the other troopers, who execitte, 
 in succession, the same iuovements; the centre troopers, 
 who cover the passage o"f the defile being last. 
 
 On emerging from the . defile, the trooj^ers oblique'to 
 the right and left, refovining the line with the same in- 
 tervals. 
 
 301. — These movements are first executed at the wall-, 
 then at the trot, and finally at the gallop. When the 
 troopers have learned to perform these movements well, 
 they are exercised at them in firing. When the troop- 
 ers are at the tvaik or gallop, and the instructor wishes 
 them to pass to the trot, the trot No. 8 is sounded ; when 
 at the trot or gallop, and he wishes them. to wa/Ar, he 
 Orders the halt No, 2, and iha fonmrdl^o.l to be sounded. 
 
 302.-^To cominencc, or cease firing, the signal is 
 
 sounded. AH the troopers do not fire at once, but OnQ 
 
 after another, commencing at the guide. They after- 
 
 ' ward continue firing without waiting for each other, 
 
 except by couples Nos. 1 and 2, and Nos. 3 and 4 ; thege 
 
PLATOON, MOUNTED. 161 
 
 have an imdei'stHncling tliat tliey fire al^rrrtitely, giving 
 each other a mutual support. • • 
 
 303,-^When the platoon skirmishes without gaining 
 ground to the front, the skirmishers sho\ild nevcrlhelcsp, 
 ■when under fire, if not behind a cover, keep in motion, 
 each about his own ground. 
 
 304.— If the commander of the'platoon wishes the skir- 
 mishers to charge, he orders the charge as foragers, jSTo. 
 12, ^to bo soimded; the troopers return pistol, draw 
 eabrc, and charge. 
 
 In the charge as foragcrs,*the even numbers approach 
 within 2 or '3 paces of their companions, Nos. 1 and 3, to 
 bo able to siipport and protect each other. ^ 
 
 As soon as the skirmishers charge, tlie reserve moYes 
 forward to support tUem. ' - '■" 
 
 The skirmishers retire hj turning aboul^ t'o the left, and 
 face again to tlie front by turning about to the right. 
 When they have reformed in platoon, they retui;n the 
 pistol to the holster and draw the sabre. 
 
 S05. — To relieve skirmishers, the instr\ictor commands 
 to the reserve,: 
 
 1. As slirmishers. 
 2. ' March. 
 
 At the command marcti, the reserve disperses and 
 moves with regular intervals five paces beyond the line 
 of old skirmishers. Tlie old skirmishers turn left about 
 and rally at a trot on the officer, who during the move- 
 ment is placed at the point where the 8 files now become 
 the reserve should reform. 
 
 The platoon right guide then takes command of them. 
 
 306. — The troopers having been sufficientl}' exercised 
 in all the movements of skirmishing, will be taught to 
 dismount and form with celerity to fight on foot. ' 
 
183 SCHOOL OF THE 
 
 At the commencement all the movcmenta of thi3 in- 
 struction will be decomposed, in order to make them 
 better understood. 
 
 The platoon bfeing inline, the instructor command;? : 
 
 Prepare tofght — On Foot. 
 1 time^ 3 motions. 
 
 1. At the command, all prepare to dismount, except 
 
 ?f09. 4. ■ . 
 
 2. I)ismount,«-except Noe. 4, «ind form rank. 
 
 3. Nos. ], 2, and 3 pas^ the reins with the'right hand 
 over the horses' heads ; IS^os. 3 hand their reins to Nos. 
 4 to hold, and Nos. 1 and 2 tie their reins to the clicek 
 piece and nose band of the halters and bridles of the 
 liorses of Nos. 2 and 3 by a tight slip knot, and with 
 only about one foot play ; then all face to the front, and 
 hook up their sabres. 
 
 T4ie instructor then commands: 
 
 I7lt0 Ll.NE, 
 
 1 time. 
 
 A"t thia command, move twelve papes to the front, ^nd 
 close in on the centre. 
 
 Nos. 4, who remain on horseback, have charge of tlie 
 dismounted horses ; they take the end of the reins of the 
 first dismoiinted horse in the left hand, holding them 
 near the bit with the right hand, the nails downward; 
 a non-commissioned officer remains with the dismounted 
 horses to direct them. 
 
 The troopers having been sufficiently exercised at the 
 different movements of this instruction, will be required 
 to execute them rapidly without stopping at the several 
 motions, and at the single command prepare tojiffht — o-n 
 Fooi^ given by the instructor. 
 
PLAlTOON, MOUNTED. 163 
 
 Tlie platoon being formed, it -will be conducted where 
 it is to fight on foot. • a • 
 
 The dismounted horses Vvill also be exercised m - 
 changing po:?ition, by marching by rank and by fours. 
 
 Wlien the instructor wishes the troopers to remount, 
 lie will r.ally them if they are dispersed as skirmishers. 
 
 The platoon being rallied and formed, the instructor 
 commands: 
 
 About — Face. 
 
 He conducts the platoon to within twelve paces of the 
 horses, and commands : 
 
 Mount. 
 
 At this command the troopers return to their horses 
 rapidiy, without alarming them; return pistol, mount, 
 and draw sabre. 
 
 The command mou>t, at the commencement, will be 
 executed in 4 motions, and from a halt, that the troopers 
 may better understand it. For this purj>ose, the platoon 
 being rallied and marching to the -rear, is halted twelve 
 paces from the horses; the instructor then commands: 
 
 Mount. 
 1 tiinc, 4 motions. 
 
 1. At the last part of the command, which is Mount, 
 return pistol. 
 
 2. Rejoin the horses, untie the horse, pass the reins 
 ov-er the neck, unhook the sabre and take the position 
 of the trooper before mounting, prescribed, No, 1'J. 
 
 0. Execute the two times of prcjyar^ to mount, as pre- 
 scribed. No. 80. 
 
 1. Mount, as prescribed, No. 80; adjust the reins, and 
 draw the sabre. 
 
lU SCHOOL. OF THE 
 
 When bi'i41e3 arc fiirnislied with liaks, instead of tying 
 the reins to the nose bands of the halters, Nos. 1 and 2 
 should Hnk to the horses of Nos. 2 and, 3, as follows: — 
 After dismounting, -the man stands to horse, faces about 
 to the rear, takes the link ■which hrfngsfrom the halter- 
 ring of the horse of his left file in his right htind, seizes 
 his own horse, by the bit near the mouth and drav.s the 
 liorsc of his left tile towards his own until lie can liook 
 the snap into the curb ring; in hooking, the nails of hie 
 right hand are down. 
 
 When he dismounts, ho leayes the reins over the 
 pommel of the saddle. To facilitate the linking, the 
 horse-holder should bear his horse well towards Xo. 3. 
 
SQUA'DRON, MOUNTED. 1G5 
 
 SCHOOL OF THE SQUADRON, 
 MOXJNTED. . 
 
 SOY.— ^Tlie object of the school of th'e squac^ro'H is to* in- 
 struct the platoons to execute together what they have 
 been taught separately ; and so, to prepare the squad- 
 ron to act independently, or perform what it will be re- 
 quired- to do wlien a part of the regiment. 
 
 The squadron, is composed' as prescribed, titlp 1st, ar- 
 ticle 1st. .- 
 
 The school, of the sqxiach'on being the base of the evolu- 
 tions of the rrgivitnt, the Captain observes thnt the cliiefs 
 of platoons execute with regulaiity what is require'dof 
 them, and that they give the eommaiuls at the propjcr 
 time and in the proper tone. lie requires the guides to 
 act witli calmness and without hesitation in the different 
 movements. 
 
 The Captain causes the officers to alternate in the 
 command of the platoons, that they may become familiar 
 with all the' positions in the squadron. He observe? the 
 same course with the non-commissioned officers who 
 command platoons.- 
 
 To make the formations in line better understood, they 
 are executed at first from a halt. In this case eao^ 
 platoon performs its movements separately and^ucces- 
 sively, at the coramfind of its chief, on receiving notice 
 from the Captain. 
 
 Each movement, after having been corruptly execiit$d 
 by the right, is repeated by the left.. Habitual fornia- 
 tions.and dressing by the right, cause the horses to oari^-' 
 a habit to a. vicious extreme, aud crowd and press that 
 flank, - • ... 
 
 -When the squadron has acquired calmness and eOnfi- 
 dence, and one article is well understood, this article is 
 
166 SCHOOL or THE 
 
 repeated with sabres drawn, and alternately at all the 
 gaits, except the ivheels to the right, to the left, to the right 
 abput, and to the left about by fours, the co^mier march, 
 the wheels on a movable pivot by squadron, the individual 
 oblique marehcs when marehing by squadron, which are 
 executed only at the walk and at the trot. 
 
 The troopers rnount and dis?nount by the times, but 
 without explanation. 
 
 The squadron is exercised at the manual of arms and 
 sabre exercise once a week. 
 
 The Captain requires the distance between the pin- 
 toons to be observed exactly in all the movements ; he 
 sees that the troopers preserve the required intervals 
 between the knees; the distances in column of fours ; 
 and especially the pivots of platoons, who must under- 
 stand the necessity of, aud practice, exactitude. 
 
 The Captain moves wherever his presence is most re- 
 quired ; .the troopers are required to observe absolute 
 silence, and all rectifications are done by signs, or in a 
 low voice. After the command halt, every individual 
 must remain motionless. 
 
 All columns right in front having the guide left, and 
 when left in front having the guide riglit', as a general 
 rule, the troopers will understand it ; aud the guide is 
 not commanded unless in exceptional cases, "VVhen a 
 commander sees it necessary, he will direct attention to 
 the alignment by commanding: Guide left, or guide right, 
 
 A platoon being an integral force, it can march or 
 fight, equally, whether at the right or the left of any 
 other platoon. 
 
 The squadron will be accustomed to feel equally con- 
 fident in sudden formations in every direction. 
 
 Coluraus arc right in front when the subdivisions orig- 
 inally on the "right in line are in front ; and left infrant 
 when those of the original left are in front. 
 
 308. — The squadron being formed in line, the non- 
 commissioned officers and troopers at the head of their 
 'horses, the chiefs of platoon mounted, at 8 paces from, 
 
SQUADRON, MPUNTED. Wl 
 
 andfaciug the centre of their platoons, the Captain com- 
 mauds : 
 
 1. Attctition. 
 
 2. Jiight — Dress. 
 
 3. Front. 
 
 He then commands; 
 
 In each platoon — count — Fours. 
 
 At this command the troopers count off in the four 
 platoons at once, commencing on the right. 
 
 The Captain then gives the command to mount. 
 
 At the command form — rank, the cbiefs of platoon 
 move forward, face to the front by turning to the right 
 about, and place themselves before the centre of their 
 platoons, the croup of their horses one pace from the 
 heads of .the horses of the platoon. 
 
 SUCCESSIVE ALIGNMENT OF BLATOONS IN THE 
 SQUAI>RON. 
 
 309. — The squadron being in line, the Captain places 
 the two non-commissioned officers, guides of the right 
 and left, upon a line parallel to, and SO paces in front of, 
 the squadron, facing each other, and 3 platoon fronts 
 apart. 
 
 On receiving notice from the Captain, the chief of the 
 first platoon commands; 1. Forward; 2. Guide right ; 2 . 
 March. 
 
 At the command march, the platoon moves forward ; 
 at one pace from the guide, the chief of the platoon com- 
 mands: 1. Halt; 2. Iiight—X>R^sa. 
 
 At the command halt, the chief of the platoon moves 
 on and halts with the head of his horse against tlic boot 
 of' the guide of the right. The platoon is aligned so that 
 
1-«S SCHOOL OF THE 
 
 the heads of tbcir horses nrc ia a line on« pace behind 
 the croup of the horse of the chief of plajtoon. 
 
 The first phvtoon being correctly aligned the Captain 
 commands: 
 
 1. 'By platoon — Dress. 
 
 At the first command, the chiyf of the second platoon"" 
 commands: 1. Fonmrd ; ,2. Guide right i 3. March. 
 The heads of the platoon horses having reached the line 
 of the croups of the horses of the platoon on the right, 
 he command:' 1. Halt; 2. Dkess; and, at the 6am« 
 time, moves forward on ^he line of the chief of that 
 platoon. 
 
 At the command halt, the platoon stops. At the com- 
 mandj)ni:ss, all tfie troopers move forward togetker upon 
 the alignment. 
 
 Each chief of platoon executes suecessiveTy the same 
 raoveaient, commanding makcii wl^en the one who pre- 
 cedes hiin lias commanded halt. 
 
 The chief of the fourth platoon brings the head of his 
 horse to the boot of the left guide. * ' ■ ' 
 
 The squadron being. aligned, the Captain commands: 
 
 Front., 
 
 31:0. — The Captain observes that the officers align 
 themselves promptly on the base of the alignment; that 
 they do not suffer too much time to elapse between 
 the commands halt and dress, so as not to retard th-e 
 successive alignments; he also observes that the non- 
 commissioned officers pay attention to the general and 
 not individual alignment, 
 
 ALIGJTMENT OF THE SQUADRON. 
 
 311. — The Captain, after iiaving, placed the right guide 
 so that no trooper will be conLiji,clied' to rein-back, cou> 
 mands : •** 
 
SQUADRON, MOUNTED. 160 
 
 . 1. Rigid — Dkes3. 
 2. Front. 
 
 At the command right — dress, all J;be troopers correct 
 their distance from the chiefs of platoon, and align ^hem- 
 selves steadily but promptly to the right, * * " 
 
 THE SQUADRON BEING IN LINE, TO. FORM A 
 COLUMN OF FOURS. ' 
 
 312. — The squadron heing in lino, the cnptain com- 
 mands : . • 
 
 1. Fours right {pv left.) 
 
 2. March. 
 
 -;^ 3. Halt. ■ 
 
 At the command march, each set of fours \sheels to 
 to the right as presftribed, No, 283; the chief of the 
 fii'st platoon places himself in front of tlie column, the 
 right guide oil his right. The chiefs of the otli^r pla- 
 toons one pace from the flank of the heads of their 
 platoons. ■ ' 
 
 If the captain omit the command halt, the column 
 moves forward. 
 
 The squadron marching in line, the captain comman<j^^ : 
 
 Fours — Right (or Left.) 
 
 The squadron conforms throughout to what is pre- 
 scribed. No. 2So. 
 
 TO BREAK THE SQUADRON BY FOURS TO 
 THE RIGHT OR LEFT TO MARCH TO THE 
 ' FRONT. 
 
 813. — The squadron being in line, the captain cotiT- 
 mands: ■ * 
 
lift SCHOOL OF THE 
 
 1. Right (or left) forward— fours right (or lefi.) 
 
 2. March. 
 
 At the iirst command, the chief of the platoon and 
 guide place themselves in front of the four on the right 
 (or -left) of the squadron. 
 
 At the command march, they move straight forward ; 
 every other set of fours in tlie line wheels to the right 
 (or left) and moves forward; but that next to the flank 
 set tnrus when it has made two-thirds of its wheel (four 
 yards), following the flank set; and all the others, in 
 succession, tarn on the same ground. 
 
 314. — The squadron marching in line, the captain 
 commands : 
 
 Right (or left) fonoard — Fours Kioht (or Left.) 
 
 Which will be executed on the same principles. 
 
 TO BREAK THE SQUADROJS' BY FOURS FROM 
 THE RIGHT TO MARCH TO THE LEFT. 
 
 315. — The squadron being in line, the captain com- 
 mands : 
 
 1. Fours from the right — to march to the left, 
 ' 2. March. 
 
 At the command march, the four on the right move 
 forward, and having marched six paces, the chief of the 
 first platoon commands : Left — Turn. When the turn 
 is half completed the next set of fours moves forward, 
 and so each, in succession, marching 6 paces forward 
 and turning to the left without command. 
 
 The squadron will break from the left to march to the 
 
SQUADRON, MOUNTED. 171 
 
 right, on the same principles, at the commancl : 1. Fours 
 from the left — to march to the right. 2. Makch. 
 
 This is a movement of mere occasional oonvenience. 
 
 DIRECT MARCH IN COLUMN OF FOURS. 
 
 816. — When the column \a halted, the captain assures 
 himself that tlie officers and men are -placed as pre- 
 scribed ; he commands : ' 
 
 1. Fortoard. 
 
 2. ilARCH. 
 
 317. — The object of this march in column being to 
 calm tho horses and make them uniform and steady in 
 the different gait?, the troopers "will endeavor to keep 
 their horses as qiiiet as possible ; but the captain re- 
 quire? them to conform to all the principles of the direct 
 marcn ; ho observes that the ranks of fours are exactly 
 aligned f'tliat the files march in the same diivction ; that 
 the troopers preserve intervals and distances; conduct 
 their horsv.-* wihfcout employing more force than neces- 
 sary, and preserve the proper position of the body and 
 bi'idle-hand. 
 
 318. — The column having marched a quarter of an 
 hour at least, the captain commands: 
 
 1. Trot. 
 
 2. March. 
 
 At the commaml march, the troopers take the trot, al- 
 ways taking care not to fret their horses. 
 
 When the column has marched about 1*)00 paces at 
 the trot, the captain commands : 
 
 1. Walk. 
 
 2. March. 
 
1T2 SCHOOL OP THE 
 
 Hftving marcbod some time at ilte 7i:all\ tliey resume 
 the trot, and after marcliiug , agn.in about 1000 paces, ' 
 t!ie3f,pass to the walk. 
 
 To change the gait, tlio captain selects a moment 
 when tlie horses are cahii and march uniformly; all the 
 troopers assmne, at the same time and with steadinea?, 
 the gait indicated. 
 
 319. — To halt the cohim'ii the captain commands: 
 
 1, Column. 
 
 2. Halt. 
 
 . . CHANGE OF DIRECTION, v" 
 
 820. — The squadron marchingnu .column of fours, or 
 twos,. or file, to change the diU^^t-the captain aom- 
 mands-: '.-^feb^t' 
 
 Qplupin left {ov right.) 
 J . ■ ' '' ■^' 
 
 •Which is executed as proscribed, No. 211, the chief. of 
 the leading platoon giving the command : 
 
 INDIVIDUAL OBLIQUE MARCH. 
 
 321. — The squadron marching in column of foura or 
 twos, -to cause it to execute the individual oblique 
 march, the captain commands : 
 
 1. Left (or right) oblique. 
 
 2. March. 
 
 , Which is executed as prescribed, No. 213. 
 
 THE SQUADRON MARCHING IN COLUMN OF 
 FOURS, TO MARCH TO THE RIJ^AR. 
 
 322.— ^The squadron marching in column of fours, the 
 captain commands: 
 
SQUADRON, MOUNTED. 17» 
 
 J^(??o'5— Left About (or Rigut About.) 
 
 The foui-3 wheeling about •and moving forward ; the 
 column being changed from right to left in front, or the 
 reverse. 
 
 TO BREAK 6y FOURS TO THE RIGHT, COLUMN 
 HALF LEFT, RIGHT, OR HALF RIGHT. 
 
 323. — The squadron being in line, the captain com- 
 aiands : 
 
 L Fours right — column half left {right, or half 
 right.) 
 
 2. March. 
 
 At the command march, each set of fours wheels to 
 the right, and the chief of the lirat platoon instantly 
 commands : L J^eft — Turn. 2, Forward. (Omittin<^ 
 the 2d command if it be a full turn — to the "right.") 
 
 The squadron is broken to the left, and the direction,, 
 changed to the half -right, left, or half-Uff, on the same" 
 principles. 
 
 THE SQUADRON MARCHING IN COLUMN BY 
 FOURS, BY TWOS, AND BY FILE, TO FORM 
 LINE FACED TO THE FRONT, TO THE LEFT, 
 Tp, THE RIGHT, AND TO THE REAR. 
 
 324. — The squadron marching in column by fours, 
 right in front, the captain commands: 
 
 1. Left— front into line. 
 
 2. March. 
 8. Drkss. 
 
 4. Front. 
 
 At the command march, the first fo«r files continue-to 
 11 
 
lU SCHOOL OF THE 
 
 march straight forward ; when they have marched 30- 
 paces, the chief of the first platoon commands : halt. 
 
 At this command the first four l>alt square to the 
 front; the right guide returns to the right of the squad- 
 ron* All the other files oblique and come up success- 
 ively, and without the commands of the chief of platoon, 
 form to the left and upon the alignment of- the firsts as 
 prescrfbed, N"o. 214. 
 
 The captain, ^vho moves to the right flank after the 
 command makch, commands the alignment when the 
 chief of the first platoon commands halt. 
 
 As soon as the chiefs of platoon arrive upon the line, 
 they place themselves at the centre of their platoons, 
 and align themselves. 
 
 The left guide takes hia post on the left of the squad- 
 ron, when the four last files arrive upon the line. ' 
 
 The columns of twos, and by file, are formed into line 
 by the same principles and at the same commands. 
 
 325. — The column of fours marching right in front, or 
 at a halt, to form if in line, faced the left, on its left 
 flank, the captain commands : ' - 
 
 1. Left into line wheel. 
 
 2. March. 
 
 3. Might — Dress. 
 
 4. Fkont. 
 
 It is executed throughout as prescribed, Ko. 220- 
 The chiefs of platoons not repeating the commands. 
 
 they align themselves, and the guides take their places 
 
 on the right and left. 
 
 S2(>.^-The column of fours marching right in fro^nt, 
 to form line faced to the right, upon the prolongation 
 and in advance of its right flank, the captain commands; 
 
 1. On right into line. 
 
 2. March. 
 
 3. Dress. 
 
 4. Front, 
 
SQUADRON, MOUNTED, 175 
 
 .At the command march, the leading four turn to the" 
 right, and march -straight forward; when they have 
 marclied 20 paces, the chief of the first platoon com- 
 mands HALT. 
 
 At this command they halt, and the right guide takes 
 his place on the right of the squadron. All the other 
 foui'8 continue to march forward, and turn and come up 
 successively, without the commands of the chiefs of pla- 
 toon, forming to the left and upon the alignment of the 
 first, as prescribed. No. 217, observing to keep them- 
 selves square in the same direction before turning to the 
 right, 60 as not to approach the new line- before the 
 proper time. 
 
 The captain, the chiefs of platoon, and the left guide, 
 conform to what is prescribed for left— front into line, 
 No. 324. The column tiy file, or twos, forms line on the 
 same principles, and at the same commands. 
 
 327. — The column of fours, inarching, night in front, 
 to ftn^m line faced to the rear, on the rear of the column, 
 fho captain first commands: Fours — Left About; which 
 is executed as in No. 277; and then: 1. Right— front 
 ■into line ; 2. March ; 3. Dress ; 4. Front ; which is ex- 
 ecuted as prescribed, No. 324. To form the line on tlic 
 head of the column, the captain fii-st commands: 1. 
 Right— front into line ; 2. March; 3. Dress; 4. Front; 
 and then: 1. Fours left about; 2. March; 8. Halt; 4. 
 Right — Dress ; 5. Frojit. , * 
 
 328. — The columns marching left in front, to form 
 line faced to the front, left, right and rear, Nos. 324, 
 325, 326 and 327, is executed on the same principles, by 
 inverse commands and means. 
 
 329, — A squadron in column of fours, right in front, 
 having occasion to make instant face to the right, the 
 captain commands: 1. Right into line wheel ; 2. March; 
 3. Right — Dress ; 4. Front ; {\nd there being a necessity 
 to form front into line, with an obstacle to the left-front, 
 
176 SCHOOL OF THE 
 
 the captain commands: 1. Right— front into line-, 2. 
 March; 3. Dress; 4. Fuont; which would be executed 
 as has been prescribed ; the proper left would be consid- 
 ei;ed the " right;" the left, the "right guide," Ac, as 
 long as that -formation continued. 
 
 The column being left in fronts xinder inverse circum- 
 stances, . lines would be formed on thie same principles 
 as above, and by inverse commands and means. 
 
 The same principle applies to the formation of line 
 faced to the rear, but generally with an obstacle to the 
 left — right in front — line might be formed on the. head 
 of the column; or, with obstacle to the right, on the 
 rear of the column ; and left in front, the reverse. 
 
 330. — ^The squadron marching in column bj twos, or 
 by file, right in front, to form line faced to the left the 
 
 aptain commands : 
 
 1. Left into line. 
 
 2. Makch. 
 
 3. Dress. 
 
 4. Front. 
 
 Which is executed by the leading platoon, as pre- 
 scribed, No. 218, the chief giving the command halt, 
 only ; the other platoons form also the same, but with- 
 out any further commands; the chiefs of platoon align 
 themselves, and the guides take their posts on the right 
 and left. 
 
 331. — The-column bj^ twos, or by file, left in front, to 
 form line faced to the right the captain commands: ]. 
 Right into line; 2. March; 3. Dress; 4. Front; which is 
 executed on the same principle by inverse means. 
 
 332. — In all these formations greater regularity is re- 
 quired in the execution, as the troopers become more 
 habituated to them, and the horses become more calm. 
 
 The first instruction is repeated several successive 
 days: and when the prindples of the direct march in 
 
SQUADRON, MOUNTED. 1T7 
 
 column by fours, the changes of direction, the obliques, 
 ^and the different formations in line, are firmly impressed, 
 oil til esc movements are executed at the trot, and tken 
 &t'i/ie gallojy. 
 
 TO REGULiiTE THE RAPIDITY OF THE GAITS'. 
 
 333. — "Whea the marches and formations, prescribed 
 above, have given sufficient uniformity and precision to 
 the gait, the captain will regulate their rapidity. For 
 this purpose he measures off a mile, if practicable, and 
 marches over it at all tlie gaits ; the mile at a walkyjm 
 sixteen minutes; at a trot, in eight minutes; and at the 
 gallop, in six minutes. 
 
 SABRE EXERCISE. 
 
 834. — To practice the sabre exercise at a halt, the 
 squadron being in line, the captain commands: 
 
 For sabre exercise — Call off. 
 
 At this command, the trooper on the right calls out. 
 "20;" the next man calls out, "15;" the third mani 
 "10;" the fourth, "6;" the fifth man, "stand fast;" the 
 sixth, "20;" the seventh, "15;" the eighth, "10;" the 
 ninth "5;" the tenth, "stand fast;" and in the same 
 manner through to the left. 
 
 The captain then commands : 
 
 Sabre exercise — March. 
 
 At this command, those troopers who have called out? 
 *'20," march forward 20 paces and halt; those who 
 have called " 15," march forward 15 paces apd halt,.aii.d 
 so on, the fifth man standing fast. 
 
 During the exercise, the commander of tlie 2d platoon 
 is placed 10 paces in front of the right of it ; of the third 
 
ITS SOHOOli.OF THE 
 
 platooD, 10 paces in front of its left; thfty face their pla- 
 toons. The commanders of the 1st nnd 4th platoons 
 superintend their platoons from the ri;;^ht and left Hank; 
 
 335. — The exercise being concluded, the captain com- 
 mands : 
 
 1. Into Zin<?— tMarch. 
 
 2. Jiigkt—D&Eaa, 
 8. Front. 
 
 At the command march, the troopers -who advance^ 
 20 paces standing fast, the others move forward ■and halt 
 al^reast of them. 
 
 336. — The squadron being in line, the captain "com- 
 mands it to dismount, and to tile off. The captain and 
 chiefs of platoons remain mounted in order to superin- 
 tend the movement; the latter until the last trooper of 
 their platoons has filed off. 
 
 ARTICLE SECOND. 
 
 XHE SQUADRON BEING IN LINE, TO. FORM IT JN 
 OPEN COLUMN. 
 
 337. — The captain coipmands : 
 
 1. Platoons right wheel. 
 
 2, March. 
 
 8. Halt (or 8. Foewar©.) 
 
 At the command march, each plat^oon executes it^ 
 wheel to the right, following the principles of the wheel 
 oh a fixed pivot, the marching flanks taking care to step 
 -»>ff promptly together; the three loft plMoons earcfullj 
 
SQUADRON, MOUNTED. IW 
 
 regulating bj the right, so that they all complete the 
 quarter circle at tlve samo moment. 
 
 At the command italt, the marching flanks and all the 
 troopers halt at the Siime instant, and remain raotionles?. 
 
 The captain commands halt, so that^ when executecl, 
 the wheels will be completed. *:' 
 
 The chiefs of platoon, without leaving the centre of 
 their platoons, observe that the movement is correctly 
 executed ; after the wheels, if any guide finds himself 
 not in the direction of the one preceding him, he should 
 not endeavor to correct his position until after .the 
 march is commenced. 
 
 During the movement, the guide passes to the rear of 
 the second file from the left of the fourth platoon. 
 
 The captain assures himself that each officer and non- 
 commissioned officer preserves the place assigned to him 
 in this order of column. (Title let, article 2d.) 
 
 If the captain inste.id of halt, gives the command, 3. 
 Forward, the platoons move straight forward ; the com- 
 mand FORWARD being given the moment before the 
 wlieels are completed. The captain then gives a point 
 of direction to the guide of the column. 
 
 338. — The squadron marching in line, to form it in 
 open column, it is done on the same principles, at the 
 «ame commands, the pivots halting at the command, 
 
 MARCH. 
 
 To form the open column left in front is executed on 
 the same principle, by inverse means, at the commands^ 
 1 . Platoons left wheel ; 2. March ; 3. Halt. 
 
 TO MARCH IN OPEX COLUMN. 
 
 339. — In this order of column, the guides should pre- 
 serve between them a distance equal to the front of their 
 platoons, and regulalc their gait upon that of the prece- 
 ding guide; his gait is regulated by the chief of the 
 leading platoon.. 
 
ISO SCHOOL OF THE 
 
 The presoi'vatioii of the distances Leii^ the most es- 
 sential point of the march in coluiuu, everything else 
 should yield to it ; but the guides must endeavor to 
 'dvojd changing the gait as much ns possible, without 
 the command; and if it happens that their distance i- 
 increased or diminished, the fault is repaired gradually 
 and "vvith steadiness. 
 
 The chiefs of p]atoo;i are answerable for the preserva- 
 tion of the distance, which, measured from the croup of 
 the horses of one platoon to the head of the horses of the 
 next platoon, is §• paces or yards less than the number of 
 troopers in the platoon. 
 
 The unevenness of the ground may make it sometimes 
 impossible to preserve the direction of the guides; it i.- 
 then sufficient to require the guide of each platoon to 
 pass by the same points as the guide of the preceding 
 platoon. 
 
 The leading platoon of a column should always com- 
 mence the march moderately, in order to give the column 
 time, from head to foot, to take a uniform and regular 
 •movement. 
 
 S-iO.— The squadron being in open coluiun, the captain 
 commands: ' - 
 
 1. Forward. 
 
 2. March. 
 
 At the command march, all the platoons put them- 
 selves in motion at the same time. 
 
 Before the column commences the march, the captain 
 gi\^eB the guide of the first platoon a. point of direction ; 
 this non-commissioned officer selects intermediate points, 
 so as to be sure of marching straight. The fixed object 
 given to the guide of the first platoon is also pointed out 
 to the guide of the second. These two non-commissioned 
 officers preserve, during the march, the direction which 
 •has been given to them. 
 
SQUADRON, MOUNTED. 181 
 
 The guides of the third nud fourth platoons keep ex- 
 actly in the same direction. 
 
 CHANGES OF DIRECTION BY SUCCESSIVE 
 WHEELS. 
 
 341. — In the open column the changes of direction are 
 executed by successive wheels on a movable pivot, so that 
 Uie march of the column may not be retarded. The arc 
 of circle described by the i^i'^pts should be of Jive paces 
 torn. 
 
 The column being in march, to change tlie direction, 
 the captain commands ; 
 
 Column left, or half left, (or riffht or half right.) 
 
 » 
 
 At this command, the chief of the leading, platoon 
 commands: 1. Left — Turn; 2. Forward; which is ex- 
 ecuted on the principles of the wheel upon a movable 
 pivot. % , 
 
 Each chief of platoon gives the same command succes- 
 sively, so that his platoon may turn upon the same ground. 
 
 Immediately after having changed the direction pf the 
 'columb, the captain gives a new point of direction to 
 the guido of tlie first platoon. 
 
 The exact preservation of distances, after the, changes 
 of direction, depends upon the equality of thcMn crease- 
 given to the gait by the marching flanks. It is then 
 important that the leading platoon yhonld turn neither 
 too rapidly nor-too slowly ; and that each platoon should 
 regulate the rapidity of its wheel by that of the one 
 which precedes it. 
 
 INDIVIDUAL OBLIQUE MARCH. , 
 
 342. — The squadron marching in open cohimn, right 
 iu front, to cause it to gain ground towards one of its 
 
182 SCHOOL OP THE 
 
 flanks, without changing the front of the column, the 
 captain commands: 
 
 !. Left (or right) obliqw. 
 2. March. 
 
 Which is executed at the same time, in each platoon, 
 as prescribed, No. 270. 
 
 -" The guides of the three last platoons pay attention to 
 preserve their distances, tin d to keep in a direction ex- 
 actly parallel to that of the guide of the first platoon. 
 
 To resume the primitiye direction, the captain com- 
 mands : 
 
 Forward. 
 
 which is executed at the same time, in each platoon, 
 «s prescribed, No. 270. 
 
 CHANGE OF GAIT IN OPEN COLUMN. 
 
 S43. — The column is made to pass from the wa^A: to 
 the trot, and from the trot to the walk ; and when the 
 platoons execute these changes of gait with uniformity 
 and steadiness, the column is made to commence the 
 inarch at a trot; and to "halt while marching at the trot. 
 
 The captain observes that the platoons halt, step oif, 
 and change the gait at the same instant. 
 
 He directs the head of the column, sometimes to increase 
 or diminish the gait slightly, without coiiuiMind, to judge 
 of the attention of the guides, and to habituate them to 
 conforming to the movements of the guides who precede 
 them. 
 
SQUADRON, MOUNTED. 166 
 
 TO BREAK BY FOURS, BY TWOS. AND BY 
 FILE, TO FORM TWOS, F0UR8, AND PLA~ 
 TOONS, AT THE SAME GAIT. 
 
 344. — The squadron marching in open column, right 
 in front, to break by fours at the same gait, the captain 
 commands : 
 
 1. By fours. 
 
 2. March. 
 
 At the first command, the chief of the first platoon 
 places himself one pace in front of the third file froili 
 the right; the right guide places himself on his right. 
 
 At the command march, each platoon breaks by four?, 
 as prescribed, No. 209. 
 
 346. — The squadron marching in column by fouii?, 
 righfin front, to break by twos, at the same gait, th'^ 
 «aptain commands : 
 
 1. By tims. 
 ■2. March. 
 
 Tliis is executed throughout the squadron, as pro- 
 scribed for the platoon, No. 228. 
 
 _ 346.— -The squadron marching in column , by twos, 
 right- in front, to break by file at the same gait, the 
 captain commands: 
 
 1. Byjile. 
 
 2. March. 
 
 Which is executed as prescribed, No. 345, to break 
 by twos; the right guide placing himself behind the 
 chief .of the firet platoon. 
 
134 SCHOOL OF TUE 
 
 34?.— The squadron marching in open column at the 
 trot, right in front, to break by fours, at the same gait, 
 the captain commands : 
 
 l! Byfonrs. 
 
 2; March. 
 
 ■*% 
 
 At.the command march, each platoon breaks by fours, 
 as prescribed, JSTo. 273. 
 
 The same principles are applicable to breaking by 
 tjros and by file, throughout the squadron, as in the 
 platoon, No.. 230. 
 
 G48. — When the open column is at the oalloj), these 
 movements are executed on the principles just pre- 
 scribed, each platoon, except its right set of fours, pass- 
 ing t6 the trot, and resuming successively the gallop, as 
 the fours oblique, in order to enter the column ; and to 
 break by twos or file, the whole column, except the 
 leading tY,'o, or one, passing to the trot, and resuming 
 the gallop as the files break, in oVdev to enter the column. 
 
 349. — The squadron marching in column by file, riglil 
 in front, to form twos at the same gait/ the caplain 
 ^cominands : 
 
 1. Foryn twos. 
 
 2. March. 
 
 This is exeduted throughout the squadron, as pre- 
 scribed for the platoon, No. 225, 
 
 3'50. — The squadron marching in column by twQS, 
 right iu front, to form fours, at the same gait, the cap- 
 tain commands : 
 
 1. Form fours. 
 
 2. March, 
 
SQUADRON, MOUNTED. 165 
 
 Which is executed as prescribed, *N.o. 349, in order to 
 form twos. r . 
 
 ^ 351. The squadron marching in column by four?, 
 right in front, to form platoon at the same gait the cap- 
 tain commands: 
 
 1. Form platoons. 
 
 2. March. 
 
 3. Halt. 
 
 At the command makcii, each platoon is formed as 
 prescribed, No. 2*75 ; after marching 20 pac^s, the cap- 
 tain gives the command ualt, -when each platoon halts. 
 
 852. — When the column of fours is at the frof, each 
 platoon at once conforms to No. 276 ; the captain omitB 
 the command ffuide left. 
 
 In the column by file, or by twos, at the (rot, to form 
 two9 or fours, those leading the squadron pass to the 
 walk. 
 
 When the column is at the gallop, to form twos, fours 
 and platoons; t!ie same principles are obseryed. 
 
 TO BREAK BY FOURS, BY TWOS, AND BY FILE ; 
 TO FORM TWOS, FOURS, AND PLATOONS, IN 
 DOUBLING THE GAIT. 
 
 * 353. — The squadron marching in open column, right 
 in front, to break by fours, in doubling the gait, the 
 captain eommands : 
 
 1. By fours'—trot. 
 
 2. March. 
 
 At the first command, the chief of the first platoon and 
 the right guide place themselves as prescribed, No. "44. 
 
 At the command march, each platoon breaks by fours, 
 as prescribed, No. 21 B. 
 
136 SCHOOL OF THE 
 
 To break by twos and hy file is executed througLoul 
 tJie squadron, as prescribed for the platoop, numbers 
 
 ^^'C< 287 
 
 o54. — When the column is at the trot, to break at th^j 
 f/qllop, the same principles are observed at the oom 
 jtn'ands : 1. By fours — gallop; 2. March. 
 
 When the column is at- the gallop, these movement* 
 are always executed at the same gait, as prescribed, 
 ^'o. 348. 
 
 355.— The squadron marching in column by file, to 
 form twos, in doubling the gait, the captain commands ; 
 
 1. Form twos — trol. 
 
 2. March. 
 
 Tlxis is executed througliout the squadron as pre- 
 'scribed for the platoon, No. 232. 
 
 356. — The scjUftdron marching in column by twos, to 
 form fours, in doubling the gait, the captain commands 
 
 1. Form fours—trot . 
 
 2. Marcu. 
 
 Which is executed as prescribed, No. 355, in order to 
 form twos. 
 
 367. — The squadron marching in column by foui-a, to 
 form platoon, in doubling the gait, the captain com 
 mands : 
 
 1. Fortn platoons — tro!. 
 
 2. March. 
 
 At the command mauch, caoh platoon is formed at 
 oace, as prescribed. No. 281. 
 
 358. — ^When the column is at the trot, these formations 
 are executed at the gallop, following the same principles. 
 
SQUADRON, MOUNTED. 187 
 
 When the column is at the ^ra/^op, these movements 
 are executed as prescribed, No. 352, the head of the col- 
 umn, or the heads of platoon?, as the case naay be, pass- 
 ing to the trot at the command march. 
 
 The open column marching left in front, it breaks by 
 fours, by twos and by file, at the same gait, and in 
 doubling the gait, on the same principles by inverse 
 means, at the commands : 1. By the left — by fours {bi/ 
 twos or by file.) 2. March. 
 
 369. — The foregoing movements are employed in pass- 
 ing defiles, the captain placing hifnaelf always at the 
 head of his squadron, in order to direct the movemcnta 
 of it according to the localities. 
 
 THE SQUADRON MARCHING. IN OPEN GOLUMN, 
 TO MARCH TO THE REAR. 
 
 360. — The squadron marching in open column, the 
 captain commands : 
 
 1. Platoons left about wheel {or right about wheel.) 
 
 2. March. 
 
 3. Forward. 
 
 At the first command, the trooper on the kft of each 
 platoon, who becomes the pivot, prepares to halt, with- 
 out, however, slackening his pace. 
 
 At the command march, the pivots halt, and the 
 marching flanks wheel at the gait in which the column 
 was marching, regulating themselves upon the outer 
 flank of the platoon at the bead of the column, so as to 
 complete the first half of the movement at the same 
 ia»tant. 
 
 The marching flanks are then governed by tfco platoon 
 which becomes the head of the column after the move- 
 ment is completed. 
 
lo8 SCHOOL OF THE 
 
 The movement being nearly finiphed, the captaiaoom* 
 mauds : Forwaud. 
 
 During thia movement, the right and left guides of 
 the Bquii(h-on invf-rt their positions; the one in front 
 )>eing al'wa3'3 aligned with the platoon, the one in rear 
 behind the last platoon. 
 
 TO HALT THE COLUMN. 
 
 361. — The column being on the racarch, to halt it the 
 captain commands : 
 
 1 . Colnmn. 
 
 2. Halt. 
 
 At the first command, all the platoons prepare to hall. 
 
 At the command halt, all the platoons halt at the 
 same time. 
 
 After the command halt, there should be no move- 
 ment in the platoons ; the distances and dir^tions 
 should be corrected only in marching. 
 
 The capt-ain places himself behind the guide of the 
 second platoon, to see if the guides of the first and sec- 
 ond platoon have marched upon the point indicated; 
 he also observes if the prescribed distances have been 
 preserved. If they have not been, and if the guides 
 have not marched upon the point indicated, the column 
 is put again in march, in order to correct their distances 
 and direction. 
 
 THE SQUADRON MATCHING IN OPEN COLUMN, 
 TO FORM LINE, FACED TO THE LEFT, TO 
 THE RIGHT, TO THE FRONT, AND TO THE 
 REAR. 
 
 362. — ^The squadron being in open column, right in 
 front, to form it in line faced to the left, on its left flank, 
 the captain commands: 
 
SqUADRON, MOUNTED. 189 
 
 1. I^ft info line uhficl. 
 
 2. March. 
 
 3. Jiigfd—T>KKBS. 
 
 4. Front. 
 
 At tho first command, the right guide moves upon the 
 prolongation of the direction of the guides of the col- 
 iimti, at the distance of the front of a phitoon, facing 
 the side towards wliich the line will he formed. 
 
 At the command M.u'.cn, the squadron wheels into lino, 
 the trooper on the left of each platoon serving as pivot^ 
 iind turning upon hi3 own ground and the fore feet of 
 hifl horses. 
 
 The captain comma nrls, liir/ht — Dress, the moment 
 the marching flanks have nearly completed their move- 
 ment. 
 
 At this cohin-iAPd all the platoons, align tlicmsclves. 
 
 The squadron being aligned, the captain command.'*,.. 
 Front. 
 
 During the wheel the left guide resujttes liis place in 
 line. 
 
 8ij3. — The captain bhscrves that the pivots execute 
 their movements properly, and that the officers and 
 troopers align themselves coi'rectly. 
 
 Th^ guide, who moves upon the prolongation of the 
 Cuiiles of the column, sliould take rather too much 
 ground than not enough. Tlu- conductor of the march- 
 ing flank of the leading platoon should alitjn himself 
 upon this guide, -without er.deavoring to approach hira. 
 
 ci)i. — To fonvi lino to the left, on its left flank, from 
 open column, left in front, the commands are the same, 
 and are executed in the same manner, except tliat the left 
 guide tAkos his place where the right of the fourth pla 
 toon J8 to rest ; and the right guide resumes his place in 
 line (on the left). 
 
 365. — To form the squadh-on in open colnran, left in 
 front, the captain commands : "l. platoons hft whetl ; 
 
 12 
 
190 SCHOOL OP THE 
 
 '2. March; 3. Halt; Avhich is executed as prescribeO, 
 is'o. 3S7, but by invoree lucnrtS.^ 
 
 360. — The squadron lioitig in open column, left in 
 fcont, to fonn it in line, faced to the right, on il? right 
 flank, the captain connmands : 1. liiyht into line vheel ; 
 2. Marcii ; 3. Left — Dress ; 4. Front- which is executed 
 as. prescribed, No. 3G2, but by inverse means. 
 
 367.--- To form line to the, right, on its right fia-nk, 
 from open column^ right in front, the oomuiands are thf 
 same, and are executed in the same manner, -wini tl)e 
 exception of No. 304; the action? of the riglit and k-ff 
 guides being inverse. 
 
 368. — ^The column marching, the formTiViotis of lino 
 fo the left and riglit may be made the sJime, and at tho 
 same commands ; the pivots halting at the command 
 
 MAKCII. 
 
 360. — The squadron marching in open column, right, 
 or l^ft in front, to form line to the left or vight, witli- 
 out halting, the captain commands: 
 
 1. Platoons left {or right) V heel. 
 
 2. March. 
 
 3. Forward. 
 
 4. Qicide right {ov left.) 
 
 The tuarching flanks will regulate by that of the pla- 
 toon at the head of the column. The pivots, halting at 
 the word MARCH, promptlj- tnove off tog^'ther at the eom- 
 
 man^^ FORWARD. 
 
 ^his movement is executed at all the gaits. 
 
 "<j';(j,__The squadron marching in open column, to 
 form line, faced to the right or left, on the prolongation 
 and in advance of its right ♦r left flank, the captain 
 commands: 
 
m/si. 
 
 Ih^ /M 
 
SQUADRON, MOUNTED. 1(^1 
 
 l^ On right info line (ov' on- left into line.) 
 
 2. March. . . 
 • 8, Guide right (or left.) 
 
 •i. I^'kont. 
 
 At the first corama«(], the chief of the llvst platoon 
 commands : Rigid. 
 
 At the command march, he commands: Turn; the 
 platoon turns to the right and moves forward at the 
 command forward; when it has marched 20 paces, its 
 chief comaiands: Halt, and then: Right — Drkss. 
 
 The other platoons continue to march forward with- 
 out approaehiiiar the line; as soon aa eaeli one arrives 
 abreast of t!io fourth file fj-om the left of the platoon 
 which should be on its right, its chi'Cf commands: ''i. 
 Right — Turn; 2. Forward; this jdatoon. then directs 
 itself^ towards the place it is to occupy in line, and on 
 arriving abreast of the croups of the horses in line its 
 chief commands: ]. Halt; 2. Dress. The squadron 
 being aligned, the capt«\iu c6mmands : Front. 
 
 37 1.— The squadron being in open column, halted or- 
 marching, to form it in line, faced to the front, upon 
 the helid and to the left, or to the right, of the column 
 the captain commands : ' 
 
 1. left front into line (or right front into live ) 
 % March. • ' 
 
 3. Front. 
 
 At the first command, the chief of the platoon in 
 front, commands, if at a halt, Forward; the chiefs of the 
 other platoons command: Left oblique. 
 
 The command march, is repeated by these officers ; 
 (the chief of the leading platoon omits it if his platoon is 
 m motion;) when it lias marched 80 paces, he com- 
 mands: 1. Halt; 2. J?t^A^— Dress. 
 
 Each of the other chiefs of platoon, when his platoon 
 arrives opposite its place in line, commands, foewabd ; 
 when his platoon arrives with it» horees' bends in line 
 
1^ SCnOOl OF THE 
 
 of the er.oupB of \ho hordes on the right, he conaninnJ? : 
 1. Halt; 2, Dress. 
 
 The equacfron being aligno.!, the cnptnin cpmmands : 
 Front. 
 
 r,7'2. — The sqnaJron being at a halt; or in motion, in 
 open column, to form line faced to the rear, on the rear 
 and to the left, or on the rear and to the right, of th*.- 
 column, the captain first wheels the platoons about, No. 
 360, and then commands : Right— front into line; or 
 left— front into line ; which are executed as prescribed 
 in No. 371. 
 
 In the first ease, he should usually wheel the platoons 
 to the left about; in the last, to the rightabout ; in cither 
 case, he may first halt, or he may "give the command to 
 be executed at the moment the wlicels are completed; 
 or he may move forward a space before beginuiivgthe 
 .second movement. 
 
 373 — ^The squadron being halted, or in motion, in 
 open column, to form line faced to the real", on the head 
 and to the right of the column, the captain forms, right 
 — &ont into line, No. 21 1, and theu commands : ^ 
 
 1 . Platoons left about (or right abovt) wh^el. 
 
 2. Maucu. 
 
 3. Halt. 
 
 4. Hight — Dress. 
 
 5. Front. 
 
 To form the line on the head and to the loft of the 
 c<:ylumn, the captain i&VTua, left— front into line; and 
 then wheels the platoons to the right about. 
 
 TO BREAK BY PLATOONS TO THE FRONT. 
 
 974. — ^The squadron being in line, the oaptain com 
 itaando : 
 
SQOADRON, MOUNTED. W8 
 
 1. By platoon. 
 
 2. March. 
 
 At the first comnmnJ, the chief of the first platoon 
 (•ominauds, forward; the others command, right oblique. 
 
 The chief of the first platoon repeats the command, 
 march; the chief of the second platoon, and successively 
 those of the third and fourth, command march, when 
 the pl-atoon on his right has moved a distance equal to 
 three-fourths of a platoon front. 
 
 When the second platoon arrives directly in rear of 
 the first, its chief commands, forward ; and so in suc- 
 cession with the" third and fourth platoons, at the mo- 
 anenta of their arrival directly in rear of the second 
 and third. 
 
 When the movement is to be made at the trot, that 
 word is added to the preparatory command. 
 
 The squadron is broken by the left on the same prin- 
 ciple, by inverse means, at the commands: 1. By the 
 left — by platoon ; 2. March. 
 
 ' If, in line, the fourth platoon be on the right, the 
 third next, and so on, and the command be by platoon, 
 the fourth platoon, on the right, leads; if the command 
 he by the Irfi — by platoon, the fivBt platoon, on the lefr, 
 I'eads. 
 
 TO BREAK BY PLATOONS TO THE REAR FROM 
 THE RIGHT TO MARCH TO THE LEFT. 
 
 '6l5. — The squadron being in line, the captain cara» 
 mands : 
 
 1 . Platooiiafrom right to rear — to march to the lefL 
 
 2. March. 
 
 At tlie first command, tho' chief of the first platoon 
 commandp, tight abovt wheel. 
 
I9i • . SCHOOL OF THE 
 
 At tlie command march, repeated by him, this platoon 
 exeeutea its wheel to the right about; when nearly ter- 
 minated, its chief commands: 1. Forward; 2. Guide left. 
 After marching 10 paces straight forward, he com- 
 mandsv i. liigkf — ^Turn; 2. Forward. 
 
 The chief of the second platoon, and successively those 
 of the third and fourth, commands, right about xvheel, 
 when the chief of the platoon on liis riglit commands, 
 MARCH, when that platoon has passed over two-thirds of 
 its first wheel ; each wheels about, marches 10 paces to 
 the rear, and turns the same. 
 
 The squadron being in line, it is broken from the left 
 to the rear to march to the right, on the same principle, 
 by inverse meana, at the eomman-ds : 1. Platoons from 
 left to rear- — to march to the right ; 2. March. 
 
 MOVEMENTS- BY FOURS, THE SQUADROIS" 
 BEING IN OPEN COLUMN. 
 
 , 376. --Tha squadron being in open column, to cause it 
 to move to its left flank, the captain commands : 
 
 1. Fours—Left. 
 
 2. March. 
 
 8. Guidff right. 
 
 At the corainaud march, the whebls -are execute'd in 
 each platoon by foul's, and the column marches by its 
 left flank, as prescrihed, No. 283. 
 
 377. — If the column be marching, the commands are: 
 1. Fours — Left ; 2. Guide right', No, 284. - 
 
 To resume the direct march, in open column, the cap- 
 tain commands : 
 
 F&>ir.s — ^RiGHT. 
 
SQUADRON, MOUNTED. 195 
 
 At this command the fours oil wheel to the right, and 
 ino.ve forward, with the guide left or rirjht, as the right 
 01' left may be in front. 
 
 The open column gai-n3 ground to its right flank by 
 inverse means and commands. To resume its first direc- 
 tion, without moving forward, the commands arc : ^1. 
 Voum — Left ; 1. Halt. 
 
 r578. — The squadron being in open column, it may gaii: 
 ground to the rear by a movement by fours"; the cap 
 tain commands : 
 
 1. Fours — Left about. 
 
 2. Mauch. 
 
 8. Guide right. 
 
 If the left is in front, the command habitually would 
 be : 1. Fours — Right about ; and 3. Guide left. - • 
 
 The column being in motion to the rcai-, to resume the 
 inarch to the frout, the captain commands: Fours — 
 Right about. 
 
 If he wishes it to halt, he adds: 2. Halt. 
 
 J^79 --In these movements, to the left, or to the right 
 \,y fours, tlic chiefs of platoons move abreast of the first 
 /ours; the right and left guides preserve their places, 
 facing in the new direction. . 
 
 The fours being wheeled about, the chiefsvof platoons 
 march behind their platoons; the squadron guide with 
 the jilatoou that has become in front, marches now on 
 its flank as its guide; the other keeps his place on the 
 flank of the platoon now in rear. 
 
 During the march by flank, the captain observes that 
 the fours preserve their distances of four feet, and that 
 the chiefs of platoons preserve the proper intervaj, to- 
 ward the side of the guide . • 
 
m SOHOOL OJP THE 
 
 ARTICLE THIRD. 
 DIRECT MARCH OF THE SQUADRON IN LINE. 
 
 380. — The principles of the direct march, prescribed, 
 No. 242, and following, are applicable to tlie" squadron. 
 
 When the troopers keep their horses' heads, and their 
 own, square to' the front, the alignment, as well as the 
 steady march, will be easily preserved; -whether too far 
 advanced or retired, or -whether their interval be too 
 great, is readily ascertained by a glance of the eye, with- 
 out moving the head. 
 
 The non-commissioned officers on the flanks of pla- 
 toons will endeavor to preserve the general alignment, 
 by aligning themselves on each other instead of the next 
 tiles towards the guide ; and with the object of keeping 
 the line of horncs' heads one yard behind the line of the 
 croups of the horses of the platoon commanders. 
 
 The guide should not put himself in motion with pre- 
 cipitancy, but commence the gait rather slowly ; and the 
 same in passing from a quick to a slow^er gait. 
 
 The direction taken by the guide has the greatest in- 
 dueucc on the regularity of the march ; a distant fixed 
 point sRould be given him, in a line perpendicular to the 
 front of the squadron; this is done by the captain, and 
 the object is selected v/ith the greatest accuracy from a 
 jposition some distance in rear of the guide ; but the non- 
 commissioned officers must learn by great attention anfl 
 practice to judge themselves, and select an object direct- 
 Jy to the front ; for greater accuracy, sonic slight inter- 
 mediate object, or » succession of them, should be kept 
 in the eye, in the line to the distant object. 
 ' The captain should observe that the whole line moves 
 together at the command of execution. 
 
 ■During the march if it is seen that the troopers carry 
 the bridle hand to the left, it is proof that the point of 
 direction is to the left of a perpendicular, and the re- 
 ,verse. ' ' ' 
 
SQUADRON, MOUNTED. 1»7 
 
 38]. — The platoon officers remain aligned-tdwards tli« 
 jTuide; the one nearest is responsible for the gait; and 
 ihe next, the most responsible for the alignment, as he 
 regulates its base. The troopers in the platoons keep 
 abreast with the flauk file:?. 
 
 When the guide is centre, the sergeant on the left of 
 the second platoon, who bears tlic guidon, becomes tjie 
 guide ; the chief of the second platoon regulates the gait, 
 and the chief of the third platoon regulates the base of 
 the alignment. 
 
 882. — The regularity of the march in line depending 
 much upon, the officers and flank files of platoons, they, 
 with the right and left guides, should be exercised and 
 practiced as a "skeleton" squadron ; much attention must 
 be paid to the preservation of intervals; absent platoon 
 commanders will be replaced by sergeants. 
 
 This exercise becomes more important when the num- 
 ber of privates in a squadron may bo so reduced as to 
 preclude the exercises ofMhe school .of the squadron; 
 then other squadron movements Avill also be practiced. 
 
 383. — The squadron being in line, to move forward, 
 the captain commands: 
 
 1. Fm'toard. ^ 
 
 2. Guide right, or Guide hft, or Guide centre. 
 
 3. Marc:h. 
 
 At the command harcii, the squad rcn moves forward. 
 
 384:. — To halt the squadron, the captain comnwinds: 
 
 1. Squadrofu 
 
 2. Halt. 
 
 3. Hight — Deess, or S. Centre— Dv.fs.s. 
 
 At the second command, the squadron halts. 
 At the third command, the squadron aligns itself as'- 
 prescribed, No, 3U> 
 
133 SCHOOL OF THE 
 
 ^The squadron being aligned, the captain commands : 
 raoNT. 
 
 385. — The squadron marching at the loalTc, before 
 passing to the trot, the captain assures himself that the 
 .point of direction is good, and that the squadron marphea 
 with uniformity and steadiness. 
 
 When th'e squadron marches steadily at the trot^ it 
 [.asses to the gallop. 
 
 The captain observes that the troopers keep their 
 hors.es quiet, and do not quicken the gait more than ne- 
 cessary ; a common fault in the march at the gallop. 
 For this purpose the chiefs of platoon, the guide and the 
 flank files pay attention to keep their horses evenly, at 
 the prescribed rate of gallop. 
 
 In the march at the gallop, it is necessary to slacken 
 the pace as soon as disorder is discovered. 
 
 To march at the gallop, the squadron cominenees at 
 i]xQ wall; then passes to tlio trot; the same progression 
 is observed in order to halt when marching at the ^a^^ojo; 
 the squadron is then exercised in movin"; off from a halt 
 at'the trot and at the gallop, and in haltmg when march* 
 ing at these gaits. 
 
 COUNTER-MARCH. 
 
 38G. — The squadron being in line, to face it in th^ op- 
 posite direction, the captain commands: / 
 
 1. Qounter-march by the right JianJc. 
 
 2. Makch. 
 
 3. Fkoxt, 
 
 . At th'e first comman'd, the chiefs of platoons turn to 
 the right and place themselves in. front of and near their 
 right files ; the members of the squadron behind the line 
 pass into line on its left. 
 
 At the command maech, tlie chief of the first platoon 
 
SQUADRON, MOUNTED. 199 
 
 leads the movement, which is executed as prescribed, 
 No. 255 ; the right guide folIo-A-ri the lieutenaiit, but 
 turns to place himself behind the left guide, with two 
 paces between the croups of their horses; the chief of 
 platoon taking place on his right, and superintending 
 .the alignment of hia platoon; the cliiefa of the other 
 platoons move with their right files and h.dt, faced to 
 the right, near the centre of their platoons in the new 
 line, and close to the heads of the horses. 
 
 Those who took post on the left of the line follow the 
 morement, and take their prOper positions as they ar- 
 rive at them ; at the command i'RONT, the chiefs of the 
 platoons take their usual positions. 
 
 The counter-march should be executed generally at 
 •the trot. For this purpose, after the first cou^mand, the 
 captain indicates the gait. 
 
 This movement is executed by the left flank on the 
 same principles, but by inverse means, at the com- 
 raauds: \. Counter-march by the left fank ; 2. MAKta^; 
 3. Front. 
 
 WHEELINGS. 
 
 o87. — ^The principles prescribed for the platoon, N.os. 
 So7 and following, are applicable to the squadron wheel- 
 ing on a fixed or a movable pivot. The execution of it 
 becomes more difficult as the front is extended ; it, re- 
 quires, on the part of officers and troopers, a particular 
 and constant attention. 
 
 During the wheel, the chiefs of platoon keep at the 
 centre of their platoons, and correctly- aligned upon 
 each other, keeping their lioa'ses upon the arc of circle 
 more or less great, in. proportion to their distance from 
 the pivot. The chief of the platoon on which the wheel 
 is niade regulates himself upon the chief of the platoon 
 on the marching flank, observing to move progressively,, 
 .1H the latter advances in the new direction. 
 
m SCHOOL OF TU& 
 
 The chief of the platoon on. the marching flank de- 
 scribes his circle so as neither to move from, nor ap« 
 proach, the other chiefs of platoon. 
 
 The files on flanks of platoons dress upon each other, 
 all observing the progression of the marching fiank, 
 4iud keeping upon the arcs they should describe. 
 
 The guide placed on the side of the pivot is the actual 
 }'ivot, although he is not counted in the rank. 
 
 In every kind of wheel, the marching flank of a squad- 
 ron should measure with accuracy its arc of circle; if it 
 is too great, the files are made to open and disunite, 
 and the wheel becomes longer; if it is too small, the file? 
 are crowded, there is confusion, and the pivot -is forced, 
 
 TO WHEEL ON A FIXED PIVOT. 
 
 388. — The squadron is exercised in wheeling on a fixed 
 pivot, first at the walk, then at the trot; also at the gal- 
 lop, when the troopers are confirmed in all the principles. 
 
 The squadron being halted and correctly aligned, the 
 captain commands : 
 
 1. In circle right xohecl. 
 
 2. March. 
 
 Which is executed on the principles prescribed, Nos. 
 
 257 and 38>.- 
 
 389.— To halt the squadron during the wheel, tbe» 
 captain commands: 
 
 1. Squadron. 
 
 2. Halt. 
 
 3. Left— ^Dv.E6s, 
 
 4. Fkont. 
 
 At the second command, all the troopers halt. 
 
 390.'— If, instead of halting, the captain wishes to 
 resume the direct march, he commands: 
 
3QCADR0N, MOUNTBD. 80 i 
 
 1. FoRWAnn. 
 
 2. Ouide left. 
 
 At the first command, the whale squadron moves foi-- 
 vrard at the gait in which it was marching before the 
 wheel. 
 
 391. — ^The squadron is halted if confusion arises du- 
 ring the wheel ; the captain explains the origin of t!ie 
 fault, and the means of repairing it. 
 
 When the troopers begin to understand these move- 
 ments, the whole circle is passed over several time a 
 without halting. 
 
 392. — The squadron wheeling steadily at the wall', 
 to pass to the trot, the captain chooses a moment in which 
 the horses are calm. After one or two turns, the squad- 
 ron is made to resume the wflfX;. The squadron whed- 
 ing well at the trot is exercised to wheel at the gal/op, 
 upCm the same principles. After one or two turns, it 
 passes to the trot, then to the xoalk. 
 
 The squadron is afterwards exercised to wh^el at tli'.' 
 trot and at the gallop, in commencing from a hnlt, and 
 to halt while wheeling at those gaits. 
 
 393. — The squadron is also exercised to connnencc the 
 wheel, when marching. The captain commands: 
 
 1. Right (or left) wheel. 
 
 2. March. 
 
 3. Halt (or Forward.) 
 
 ^ Which is executed on the same principles as in No. 266. 
 
 ^Theee movements are executed at the different gaits; 
 but they should not be repeated too frequently at the 
 tfallop, in order not to fatigue the horses. 
 
 394.— The squadron being^on the march, to canse it 
 
202 SCHOOL OP THE 
 
 to wlieel in doubling the gait, the captain giyes the 
 command trot or gallop before that of march. 
 
 "At the command march, the pivot stops short ; the 
 marching flank takes the gait indicated. 
 
 /At the command fouwaud, both move forward at the 
 gait indicated for the wheel. 
 
 TO WHEEL ON A MOVABLE 'PIVOT. 
 
 39o.-:-In Avhecls on a movable pivot, the-pivot moves 
 m an arc- of a circle of 13 paces radius, (gaining about 
 13 paces to tlie front and the same distance to the right, 
 in a right — wheel) at the same time it slackens the 
 %ait; the marching flank increases its gait. The sixth 
 file of the second platoon from the pivot, which is the 
 middle of the radius of the wheel, preserves the gait at 
 which the squadron was ntarching. The troopers placed 
 between this file and the pivot diminish proportionally 
 their gait ; those placed between this file and the march- 
 ing flank augment proportionally theirs. 
 
 The troopers preserve their intervals from the pivot, 
 and their alignment by the opposite flank. After the 
 V7heel, the guide remains where it was before the wheel, 
 and is given a new point of direction. 
 
 396. — The squadron marching in line, tp change di- 
 rection to the right, the captain commands : 
 
 1. Right — Turn, 
 
 2. Forward. 
 
 At the command right, the pivot prepares to slacken 
 and the wheeling flank to increase the gait. At the 
 command turn, the latter trots; the pivot decrease? 
 his gait, so that he shall pass over a quarter circle 
 of dfy paces in the same time that the middle of the 
 second platoon passes its quarter circle (about 47 paces). 
 
SQUADRON, MOUNTED. 203 
 
 witbout change of gait. "Whatever error occurs, the 
 pivot Bhould not leave, or alter his quarter circle. 
 
 When this wheel is executed at the trot, the march- 
 ing flank gallops. 
 
 To change the direction to the left, the movement i? 
 executed on the eainc principles, but by inverse meanp, 
 at the commands: I. Left — Turn"; 2. Fok-ward. 
 
 INDIVTDUAU OBLIQUE MARCH. 
 
 d97. — The squadron marching iu Ime, to cause ft to 
 gain ground towards a flank, without changing the front 
 of the squadron, the captain commands : 
 
 1. Right oblique (fir left oblique.) 
 
 2. Makch. 
 
 To resume the primitive direction, the captain com- 
 mands : 
 
 Forward. 
 
 Which is executed as prescribed Xo. 270. 
 
 During the oblique march, the captain observes that 
 the chiefs of platoon keep on th-e same line, preserve be- 
 tween them the same interval, and follow parallel di- 
 rections, in order to preserve the general alignment. ' 
 
 This movement is executed at the walk or at the trot ; 
 not at the gallop. 
 
 OBLIQUE MARCH BY PLATOONS. 
 
 398. — ^The squadron being in lino, to cause it to gain 
 gvound towards a flank, by the oblique maroh by pla- 
 toons, the captain commands : 
 
204 SCHOOL OF THE 
 
 1. Platoons right half-wheel {ov left half-%cheel.) 
 
 2. March. 
 
 3. FORWART). 
 
 At the command march, each platoon executes its Aa//" 
 ■loheel to the right, on a fixed pivot. 
 
 At the third command each platoon nioYes forwai*a, 
 conforming tot'ie principles of the direct march. 
 
 To cause the squadron to resume the primitive direc- 
 tion, the captain commands: 
 
 1. Platoons left half-wheel. 
 
 2. March. 
 
 3. Forward; 
 
 4. Guide right (or left.) 
 
 Which is executed as just prcscribedf but by inyerse 
 means. — 
 
 In the oblique march by platoons, the pivots of the 
 platoons should all halt at the same instant, at the com- 
 mand march,, so that all' the wheels may terminate at 
 the same time. 
 
 At the command forward, the right guide on-the riglit 
 of the first platoon, marches straight forward, or upon 
 the point which ia indicated to him; the guides of 
 the other platoons follow the fourth trooper from the 
 lift of the platoon which precedes them, and keep at 
 tive paces from him; (this for a platoon of 12 files.) 
 
 The captain places himself habitually at two paces 
 outside and abreast of the second platoon. 
 
 The chiefs of platoon at the centre of their platoons. 
 
 The guides remain at their j^laces in line. 
 
 The oblique march by platoons is executed at the 
 valk, at the trot, and at the gallop, the squadron bein^ 
 litilted or in motion. 
 
SaUADRON, MOUNTED. 206 
 
 THE SQUADJION BEING IN LINE, TO CAUSE- IT 
 TO GAIN GROUND TO THE REAR, AND FACE 
 IT AGAIN TO THE FRONT, BY FOURS, 
 
 899. — The captiin commands : 
 
 1. Fours left about {ov right about.) 
 
 2. March. 
 
 3. Guide right (or left.) * 
 
 Which ia executed as prescribed, No. 286. 
 
 The chiefs of ])latoon3, guides, trumpeters, <tc., wheel 
 about individuallj'- ; the first named marching in rear of 
 their platoons, the latter in front. 
 
 (The squadron marching thus: at the command /e/if 
 forward — fours left, it marches in colttmn, right in 
 front.) 
 
 The squadron marching in line, to cause it to march 
 to the rear, the captain commands:"!, Fours — Left 
 ABOUT, (or right alout ;) 2. Guide right (or left.) 
 
 These movements by fours are executed also at the tvot. 
 
 THE SQUADRON MARCHING IN LINE, TO MARCH 
 IT TO THE REAR BY WHEELING THE PLA- 
 TOONS ABOUT. 
 
 400. — Tlie squadron marching in line, the captain 
 commands: 
 
 1. Platoons rightabout wheel, (or left about wheel.) 
 « 2. March. 
 
 3. Forward. 
 
 4. Guide left, {or right.) 
 
 At the command march, the pivots halt short, and tura 
 upon themselves ; the marching flanks regulate them- 
 
 1& 
 
206 SCHOOL OF THE 
 
 selves by the right during the first half of the wheel, 
 so'iis to arrive together in column, and by the J oft dur- 
 ing the eecond half, so as to arrive together in line. 
 
 At the command koew-ard, the equadron resumes the 
 lirect march. 
 
 If, after wheeling about, the captain wishes to halt, 
 he commands: 8. Halt. 4. Left — Dress, 5. Front. 
 
 In- the wheels to the right «6o?ii, the right guide turus 
 to the right, moves straight forward, a platoon front 
 and turns again to tlie right, and places himself on the 
 l^ft of the squadron ; the left guide executes the same 
 movements, which place him on the right of the squad- 
 ron. - 
 
 These movements are executed from a halt, and at 
 4he trot and gallop. 
 
 THE SQUADRON MARCHIl^^G IN LINE, TO BREAK 
 .,- IT TO THE FRONT BY. PLATOON, AND TO 
 REFORM IT. . 
 
 404. — The captain commands: 
 
 1. By platoon. 
 
 2. March, 
 
 The first platoon marches on, its chief giving no words 
 of command. The chiefs of the other platoons command 
 halt; and each, in succession, connnanids : I. Right 
 oblique, and adds, 2. March, when the platoon on his 
 right has marched three-fourths of a platoon front; the 
 •rest of the movement is executed as in No. 374. 
 
 At the ^ro^ or gallop the movement is executed on the 
 ^ame principles ; the cliiefs of the 2d, Sd and 4th pla- 
 toons commanding, instead of halt, iMilk — march, or 
 tfot — marcu ; and when the platoon on Iho right has 
 gained the prescribed distance, indicating the original 
 gait in the next command. 
 
SQUADRON, MOUNTED. 207 
 
 402. — The squadron marcliing, or at a halt, -in o\yen 
 <xtlumn, right or left in front, to form it at tlie saiiie 
 gait, the captain commands : 
 
 1. jFbrwi squadron — hft, (or right.) 
 
 2. MARClf. 
 
 TVhidi is executed as in No. S71. 
 
 •103. — The column marching at the trot, this move- 
 ment is executed on the Fame principles, exoept tbatths 
 chief of the iirst platoon commands: 1. Walk; S. 
 jVlAncii; and each of the other chiefs of platoon com- 
 mands : r. Walk; 2. MAncn; on arriving in line. The 
 movement is executed in the same manner when the 
 column is at the gallop, each platoon passing, successive- 
 ly to the trot. 
 
 .The squadron marchins; in line, it is broken by the 
 left, on the same principles, but by inverso means, at 
 the commands: 1. By the left — hi; platoon. 2. M.^jpcir, 
 
 THE SQUADRON MARCHING IN LINE, TO BREAK 
 IT TO THE FRONT BY PLATQON, IN DOUB- 
 LING THE GAIT ; AND TO REFORM IT. 
 
 . 404. — The captain commands : 
 
 1. By platoon — trot. 
 
 2. Marcu. 
 
 At the first command, the chief of the first platoon 
 commands: Tvot ; and he repeats the command, march; 
 the chief of each of the otlier platoons commands, in 
 snccession, 1. RigJit dhUque — trot; and adds, 2. Maeof, 
 when the platoon on his right has marched a distance 
 equal to three-fourths of a platoon fronj. 
 
 The squadron marching in line at the trot, the move- 
 ment is executed at the gallop, on the eame principles, 
 
203 SCHOOL OF THE 
 
 405. — The squadron marching in open oalitmn,- riglit 
 or left in front, to form it in doubling the gajt, the cap- 
 tain conunands : 
 
 1. Form sqHadro7i. — left (or right) — trot. 
 
 2. Makch. 
 
 At the first command^ the chiefs of the three last pla- 
 toons command : JOeft oblique — trot. 
 
 At the command march, repeated by the chiefs of the 
 three last platoons, the firat platoon continues to march 
 straight for wai\i at the walk, and the rest of the move- 
 ment is executed as in JN"©. 403. 
 
 The column being at the trot, this movement is execu- 
 ted on the same principle at the gallop. 
 
 Tiie squadron marching in line, it is broken by the left 
 by platoon, in doubling the gait, on the principles pre- 
 scribed, No. 404, but, by inverse means, at the com- 
 mands: 1. By the left by platoon — irot,{oi' gallop;) 2. 
 MAncn. 
 
 PASSAGE OF OBSTACLES. 
 
 40Q. — -The squadron marching in line and encounter- 
 ing an obstacle impassable hy either of the platoons in 
 iiue, its chief will oblique it behind the next platoon, 
 (if it be a" central one, behind a flank platoon,) in the 
 manner and by tlie commands of JSTo. 401. The obstacle 
 being passed, the chief of the platoon will return it to 
 its position^ as in No. 405. If the obstacle admit of it, 
 the chief of platoon will, instead, command, by fours, or 
 bythe left — by fours. 
 
 407. — The squadron marching in line, to pass broken 
 •groimd by the head of each platoon, the captain com- 
 mands : 
 
•SQUADRON, MOUNTED. 209 
 
 1. In each platoon, — by fours, (or by tu)cs.) 
 
 2. March. 
 
 3. Guide right, {or left.) 
 
 At the command march, each- platoon breaks by fours 
 as prescribed, No. 278 ; th« chiefs of platoon march in 
 front of the first set of fours or twos; the rigbt and left 
 guides as in column by fours or twos, trum;^eter8, <fec., 
 in rear of their platoons. 
 
 If the ground rcv^uires-a platoon to deviate from its 
 direction, it should return to it as soon as possible, and 
 vecovTir its proper interval and alignment. 
 
 In marching thus, the captainnuay cause the squad- 
 ron to break by twos and by fie, observing to form twos 
 and fours as soon as the ground will permit. 
 
 These movements arg executed in increasing the gait, 
 or when the squadron is marching at the trot or at the 
 gaUop. 
 
 408.-^To reform the squadron, the captain commands: 
 
 1. Foi'm platoons. * 
 
 2. March. 
 
 Or he will add to the first command the indication of 
 the increased gait. 
 
 These movements are executed by the left, or. the 
 same principles, but by inverse means, at the commands: 
 1. In eachplatoon, by the left — by fours (or by ticos ;) 2. 
 March; 3. Guide ieft {or right} 
 
 ARTICLE FOURTH. 
 CHARGE. 
 
 40p.— In the charge, as in every other direct niarch, 
 it is important to keep the horses straight, • As soon a« 
 any confusion is observed, it ie.necessary to halt and re- 
 commence the movement. 
 
210 SCHOOL OF THE 
 
 . The equa<5rt>n is exercised at the eliargo: 1. In line ; 
 2. Li column; 3. As foragers. 
 
 The chargs in line is executed b}" the squnuron wben 
 in line ; it should be as short as possible, so ns to reach 
 an enemy in good order, aud without fatiguing the 
 horses. 
 
 The charge in column is executed by the squadron 
 broken in open column. 
 
 To execute the charge as foragers, all the troopers of 
 the squadron disperse,, aud direct themselves in couples 
 upx>n the point each wishes, to attack, observing not to 
 lose sight of their ofnx^ers, who charge with them. 
 
 410. — The squadron being in line,' the captain orders 
 tlie sabres to be drawn, and the platoons to charge one 
 after another, commencing by the right. 
 
 For this purpose the captain advances 240 paces to 
 the front, taking the squadron guides, to make the line 
 on which the platoons halt and dress after charging ; aud 
 when he v»'ish€s the movement to commence, lie gives a 
 sign al. 
 
 "The first platoon tlien moves forward at the com- 
 mands of its chief, as prescribed, No. 292. It pasaes 
 successively from the walTi: to the trot, from the irbt to 
 the gallops and fioni the cjallop to the charge. 
 
 The three other platoons break in their turn, when 
 the preceeding one has halted. 
 
 411. — To execute the charge by the entire squadron, 
 the captain places himself in tront of the centre of his 
 squadron, and commands : 
 
 1. Forward. 
 
 2. Guide centre. . 
 
 3. Mahch. 
 
 When the squadron has marched forward 20 paces, 
 he commands: 
 
 1. Trot. 
 
 2. MakcHc 
 
SQUADRON, MOUNTED. 211 
 
 At 60 paces further, he commands : 
 1. Gallop. 
 
 At 80 paces further, he couimauda*: 
 Chauge. 
 
 At this command, repeated Lj the chiefs of platoon, 
 the troopers take the position oi charge sabre. 
 
 ■\VJieu the sqiftiJron has passed over 60 paces at the 
 charge, the captain commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 
 2. , Squadron. 
 
 3. Halt. 
 
 4. Centre — DnESS. '" 
 
 5. Front. 
 
 At the command attention, repeated by the chiefs of 
 plato6n, the troopers slaclieu-the pace, and carry sabre. 
 
 Ki the command squadron, the chiefs of platoon oom- 
 mand, platoon, and the troopers pass to the trot. 
 
 At the command halt, repeated by the chiefs of pla- 
 toon, the troopers halt. * 
 
 At tlje command centre — dress, they align themselves 
 to the centre. 
 
 The squadroa being aligned, the captain commands: 
 Fr.oNT. 
 
 To assure himself that the principles prescribed, No. 
 2^8, -are exactly followed, the captain sometimes places 
 himself in front of the sqimdron, facing it, and at the 
 distance that will enable him to remark better the faults. 
 In this case, the next in command gives the commands, 
 
 412. — When the squadron executes the cliaiije cow^ 
 rectly, instead of halting when the charge is tluished, 
 the captain commands: ^ 
 
212* SCHOOL OF THE — 
 
 1. Attention. 
 J2. Trot. 
 3. March. 
 
 At these commands, repeated by the chiefs of platoon, 
 the squadron passes'1;o the trot, and at 20 paces beyond 
 he commands: 
 
 1. First {or fourth) platoon — as foragers. 
 
 2. March. 
 
 At the first command, the chief of trhe platoon com- 
 mands, gallop ; he repeats the command maecii, andliav- 
 ing gained 20 yard^ in advance of the line, lie com- 
 mands, CHARGE AS FORAGERS. The platoon then disperses 
 and' charges as foragers. The trumpeter follows the 
 chief of the platoon. 
 
 The squadron follows this platoon at the trot ; when 
 it has passed over 150 paces, the captain causes the 
 rally to be sounded. At this signal, repeated by the 
 truixipeter of the platoon dispersed as foragers, the lat- 
 ter rallies upon the squadron, as prescribed, No. 294, 
 and when three-fourths of the platoon have rallied, and 
 arc in line, the captain commands : 
 
 1. Attention. ♦ ■ 
 
 2. Gallop. 
 
 3. March. 
 
 4. Charge. 
 
 The squadron executes again the charge in line ; the 
 troopers who have not been able to raljy charge upon 
 the flanks of the squadron. 
 
 The captain may order, two right (or left) platoons as 
 foragers. , 
 
 413, — To exercise the troopers in rallying upon any 
 point whatever, the captain, during the march at the 
 trot, causes the squadron to gain ground towards one of 
 ii^ flanks, by executing a half- wheel to the right or to 
 
SQUADHON, MOUNTED. 2i8 
 
 the left, or by breaking by platoons to the right or to the 
 ?e/^, and reforming immediately in a new direction. 
 
 414. — The squadron marching in open column at the 
 trot, the captain commands : 
 
 1- 7b the charge, 
 2. March. 
 
 At the first command, the chief of the first platoon 
 commands, gallop. 
 
 At the command march, repeated by the chief of the 
 first platoon, this platoon commences the gallop. 
 
 The other platoons follow at the trot, each taking the 
 gallop when the platoon which precedes it is- at the dis- 
 tance of 60 paces. 
 
 When the first platoon has passed over 80 paces at 
 the gallop, its chief commands, charge. 
 
 At this command, the platoon executes the charge : 
 and when it has passed over 60 paces, its chief causes 
 it to pass to the <ro< by the commands: 1. Attention; 
 .2. Trot ; B. March. . 
 
 The. other platoons pay attention tor the-moveitienta of 
 the platoon which precedes them, so as to change the 
 gait in time, and to resume their ordinary distance ; the 
 captain halts the column when he thinks proper. 
 
 These charges are executed, each platoon taking in 
 its turn i\\e head of the column. 
 
 A platoon that has failed in this charge, or is dis- 
 persed, would rally in rear of the column. 
 
 415. — The squadron marching in open column at the 
 trot, the captain commands : 
 
 1. First platoon — as foragers. 
 
 2. March. 
 
 At the first command, the chief of the platoon com- 
 
214 SCHOOL OF THE 
 
 mands, gallop; he rejpeats the command march, and hav- 
 ing gained 20 yiii'ds, he commands, charge as foragbbs. 
 * The squadron continues to march at the trot, and 
 Avhen it has passed over 100 or 150 paces, the captain 
 causes the ralhj to be sounded. 
 
 At this signal the i:>latoon rallies and reforms at the 
 rear of the column, or at its place in line if the squad- 
 ron has been put in line. 
 
 The charge as foragers is used against artillery, or in 
 pursuit. -A squajdron skirmishing, or from line, ordered 
 to charge a battery, might, when within range of grape, 
 especially if hidden by smoke, open from the centre, and 
 make for its flanks. The reserve advances to charge, if 
 neoessary, the support of the battery. ' 
 
 RALLYING. 
 
 416. — To give the troopers the habit of rallying 
 promptly, after having been dispersed, the captaip 
 places the squadron at the extremity of the ground; 
 and after giving notice to the jBies on the flanks of pla- 
 toons to remain upon the line with him, he causes the 
 chargi as foragers to be sounded. At this signal the 
 troopers disperse and charge as foragers ; when they 
 are at the distance of .150 or 200 paces, the captain 
 causes the rally to be sounded, which is executed as 
 prescribed, Iso. 29-i. 
 
 The captain observes that the troopers disperse with- 
 out confusion; that, in rallying,' they direct themselves 
 to the right and to the left, outside of the flanks of the 
 squadron, in order to unmask promptly the front of the 
 squadron, and to reform in passing by the rear. 
 
 When the troopers rally without confusion, this move- 
 ment is repeated without requiring the flank files to re- 
 main on the line of the squadron. 
 
 At the signal to charge as foragers, the squadron dis- 
 perses in every direction to the front. 
 
SQUADR9N, MOUNTED, 215 
 
 Wlicn the squadron is dispersed, the captain causes 
 the ndly to be sounded. 
 
 At this signal, the officers, the non-commissioned offi- 
 cers, and the troopers, rejoin rapidly ; tlie officers aligu 
 themselves pi-omptly upon the captaiH, and the non- 
 commiBsioncd officci^ mark immedisttely the flanks of 
 the platoons. 
 
 As soon as ttie captain has formed two-thirds of the 
 squadron, he moves forward, chai'ges again and halts. 
 
 When the squadron is dispersed as foragers, tlie cap- 
 tain should sometimes establish himself <o t]ie rir/fit or to 
 the left of the direction followed by the troopers, and 
 then order the rallr/ to be sounded, to accustom them to 
 rally upon any point lie ii^ay select. 
 
 These movements are flrst executed at the trot, and 
 then at the gallop. 
 
 Troopers being dispersed and closely pursued, must 
 avoid the defenceless confusion of a crowd. They must 
 scatter as they go, and will thus soon put themselves 
 on an equality with their pursuers. Thc^e may, in their 
 turn, be the'p'.irsued. 
 
 SKIRMISHIXG. 
 
 417. — When the squadron acts indcpendejitly, it a^ ill 
 usually send out one platoon to skirmish; circumstances 
 may require two or three jdatoous to be sent. 
 
 When the squadron is in sight of the skirmishers, the 
 captain orders no signal except the rally. The chief of 
 the skirmishers observes the movements of the squad- 
 ron he covers, and conforms to them as soon as practi- 
 cable, requiring his trumpeter to sound the necessary 
 signals. 
 
 When the squadron changes front, the chief of tlie 
 skirmishers moves upon the new front, unless the cap-, 
 tain gives orders to the contraryr 
 
 The trumpeter who follows the chief of the- skirmish- 
 era should give the signals only upon" the order of that 
 
2ie SCHOOL OF THE 
 
 officer. The skirmishers should execute their move- 
 ments only by the signals of the trumpeter who accom- 
 panies the officer- who commands them. 
 
 What is prescribed in the school of the 2)latoo7i, 
 mounted, is conformed to by the troopers, and by the 
 squadron line of skirmishers. 
 
 When several platoons act as skirmishers, the firing 
 commences at the guide in the centre of the line, pro- 
 gressing to the right and left. 
 
 When .a squadron is acting as skirmishers, the captain 
 is always followed by a trumpeter ; the other is placed 
 several steps in rear of the centre of the lifie of skir- 
 mishers, in order to repeat as soon as possible the sig- 
 nals given by the trumpeter of, the ca^jtain. 
 
 41.8. — The squadron being in line, the captain com- 
 mands 4 
 
 1. Mrst {ov fourth) platoon as shlrmishers. 
 
 2. March. 
 
 At tlie first command, the chief of the first platoon, if 
 not already drawn, orders sabres to be drawn, and then 
 commands: 1. Forward; 2. Ti'ot. 
 
 At the command march, repeated by the chief of the 
 platoon, it moves forward. After marching 100 paces 
 to the front, the chitf of the platoon' commands: 1. 
 Eight jxles from right {ov from left) — as shirmishers ; 2. 
 March ; which is executed as prescribed, No. 295. 
 
 419, — When llie captain wishes the 8kirmishGi*s to re- 
 enter the squadron, he causes the rally to be sounded. 
 
 >At this signal the chief of the skirmishers, joining the 
 reserve, or placing himself conveniently for resuming 
 his place in the squadron, repeats the signal, and the 
 platoon being rallied, he joins it at the gallop ov trot. 
 
 420. — When the captain wishes to r.elieve a platoon 
 which is skirmishings ■ tjie chief of the new platoon 
 
SQUADRON, MOUNTED. -21T 
 
 mores forward upon the reserve of the platoon which is 
 acting as skirmishers. On coming up abreast of it, ho 
 orders out 8 files as skirmishers, as has been explained. 
 As soon as the new skirmishers have passed 5 paces 
 beyond those they are to relieve, the latter irtm about 
 and rally upon their reserve at a trot. The platoon 
 having rallied, is conducted back to the squadron at ther 
 Irot. 
 
 421. — "When the eijtire squadron is to act as skirmish- 
 ers, the captain orders the sabres to be drawn. He then 
 eommunds : 
 
 1. Fonoard — trot, 
 
 2. March. 
 
 Having arrived at the point where the reserV^e is to 
 be established, about 100 paces from the front of the 
 body to be covered, and more if it has been command- 
 ed, the captain commands: 
 
 1. Three right {ov three left) 2-)latoon$ — «.s skir- 
 mishers. 
 
 2. March. 
 
 At the command MARcn, the chief of the platoon, 
 which is to support the skirmishers, halts that platoon ; 
 the right guide joins the skirmisherf, and when they de- 
 ploy, takes his place iq.- the centre, there to be the 
 guide of the whole line; the left guide accompanies the 
 aaptain. The chiefs of the three right platoons continue 
 to march on, each directing himself by the shortest 
 route, 100 paces to the front towards the part of the 
 line his platoon is to occupy, and having reached it, ho 
 deploys his platoon at the commands : 1. As skirmish- 
 ers; 2. Harch. 
 
 The right platoon covers the right of the regiment, 
 and extends 20 or 30 paces beyond it ; another platoon 
 tovers the centre, and the left platoon covers the left, 
 extending also 20 or 80 paces beyond ; the extremities 
 
218 SCHOOL OF THE 
 
 of -the line are Ihrown back. The cliiefs of these pla- 
 toons remain 25 paces'ln rear of the line of skirmishers, 
 and pass over the extent occupied by the troopers of 
 their platoons. 
 
 The reserve takes position in r^^ar of the centre oi 
 the line of skirmishers. The captain's habitual post is 
 Ijalf-way from the reserve to the skirmishers. 
 
 422. — If the extent of the'regimentand circumstances 
 i:e,quire it, two squadrons are sent as skirmishers. Six 
 platoons, "as skirmishers at 4 paces" will cover six 
 squadrons in line. Thus a squadron from each flank, 
 with a platoon in reserve, would cover each its wing of 
 the regiment. The colonel would order the skirmishers 
 to be commanded by the senior captain, or by a field 
 officer ; but they always rally by squadron, and at the 
 flank from which they come. 
 
 The proportionate strength of reserves will depend 
 upon circumstances, especially the distance of strong 
 support. The chief objects of a reserve are their moral 
 effect — for rallying points — for suppl^'ing vacancies and 
 re-enforcing, and for relieving the skirmishers. The 
 main body may be so neiar that sometimes skirmishers 
 may be deployed without a reserve. 
 
 423. — The squadron being dispersed ae skirmishers, to 
 rally it the captain orders the rally to be" sounded ; at 
 this signal the officers, the skirmishers, and the reserve 
 rally upon the point occupied by the captain. 
 
 If the rally sounds from the commander of the regi- 
 ment, it will be repeated by the commander of the skir- 
 mishers, at a position ordered by the colonel, or chosep 
 by his own judgment of the circumstances. XTnless 
 otherwise ordered, the squadron, or squadrons, having 
 rallied, will then be conducted at the trot in the nearest 
 and quickest way to their place in the regiment ; if the 
 regiment be advancing, they would not retire to re- 
 join it. 
 
SQUADRON, MOUNTED. 219 
 
 424. — The troopers being dispersed as skirmishers, if 
 the captain wishes them to charge «,<? foragers, he. causes 
 the signal to be sounded. 
 
 At the signal the chiefs of platoons move forward in- 
 to line, and the skirmishers draw sabres ; they charge 
 immediately. The reserve follows at the ^ro^ or at the 
 gallop, as may be necessary. 
 
 After the charge the captain orders the rally to be 
 sounded, when the troopers rally in rear of the reserve, 
 if he is with it; the reserve [may liave changed. The 
 captain may rally the ivoo])QVi advancing. 
 
 425. — If, in a squadron, one or two platoons are to 
 dismount to fight on foot, the captain commands: 
 
 1. First {or fourth) platoon y (or such platoons) — 
 
 to fight on foot. 
 
 2. March. 
 
 At the firgrt command, the commander orders the sa- 
 bres to be returned, and gives the command /brwar^. 
 
 At the command march, repeated by him.'the platoon 
 moves forward ; having marched 20 paces, the chief 
 halta it and commands : 
 
 Prepare to fight — on foot. 
 
 Whicb is executed as prescribed, No. 806. The pla- 
 toon being formed on foot, it is conducted to the point it 
 is to defend. 
 
 The horses without riders will be led in rear of the 
 centre of the squadron. 
 
 "Wlien the captain wishes the dismounted platoon to 
 remount, he orders the rally to be sounded. At this 
 i?ignal, the chief of this platoon places himself at tl>e 
 point on which he wishes to rally, if dispersed as skir- 
 mishers, and the rally is executed as prescribed, 'No. 399. 
 
 The platoon being formed, is conducted to within 12 
 paces of the ground occupied by their hoi'ses, and t-fee 
 
220 SCHOOL OF THE 
 
 cbief of this platoon gives the command, mount, vfhich. 
 is executed as prescribed, No. 306; it resumes its place 
 ia the squadron. 
 
 When two platoons dismount, the junior commander 
 remains "with the horses. 
 
 If the Tvhole squadron dismounts to fight on foot, the 
 captain commands : 
 
 Prepare to fight — on foot. 
 
 Which is executed by the whole squadron, .as pre- 
 scribed for a platoon, No. 306. 
 
 An officer remains with the horses ; the left guide, one 
 trumpeter, and the right and left troopers of the squad- 
 ron remain mounted. The horses of the officers who 
 dismount are held as follows : Those of the captain and 
 chief of the first platoon, by the trumpeter ; those of the 
 other chiefs of platoon, the right guide and dismounted 
 trumpeter, by the right and left troopers. - 
 
 The captain moves his dismounted squadron to per- 
 form the duty required of it, Ko. Yo. 
 
 The squadron remounts by the commands, and on the 
 principles prescribed for a platoon, No. 306. 
 
 426, — A* column of twos or fours, passing a defile, if 
 suddenly attacked or threatened on either flank, if they 
 receive the command, prepare to fight — ox foot, would 
 instanlly-dismount, leaving their horses with the num- 
 bers 4, who remain mounted, and form a line of skir- 
 mishers, with from two to three paces intervals, faced 
 toward the enem}'. ^ 
 
 Generally the skirmishers should charge with the re- 
 volver ; they have the sabre for the last resort. 
 
CAVALRY TACTICS 
 
 PART SECOND. 
 
 TITLE FOURTH. 
 EVOLUTIONS OF A REGIMENT. 
 
 GENERAL RULES. 
 
 427. — The colonel is in the position in which he 
 judges his presence most important, and from whence 
 his command? can best be heard. He is accompanied 
 by the adjutant, the regimental quartermaster, and a 
 chief trumpeter. 
 
 When the colonel gives the command itai.t, he at the 
 tame instant raises his right arm and sabre vertically 
 i4} their full extent. 
 'VThe commands, attemion and pront, are not repeated. 
 
 The preparatory commands are immediately re-peated 
 by the field ofiicers. 
 
 The field officers superintend the due execution of 
 the evolutions, and of commands generally, in their 
 wings, or under their observation ; correct errors, care- 
 lessness, itc. They assist the colonel in giving tiie de- 
 sired direction to lines, and to 'guides the direction of 
 
 14 
 
5 EVOLUTIONS OF A REGLAIENT. 
 
 the nlarch. When the colouel does not, they "will super- 
 intend the dressing and alignment of the regiment. 
 
 The markers for evolutions are tlie sergeant major, 
 the regimental marker, and the squadron right and left, 
 guides. 
 
 In the formatfon of lines, the base consists of the ser- 
 geant major, a guide of the base squadron, and the regi- 
 mental marker. 
 
 On the preparatory command, the sergeant major and 
 the squadron guide are posted by the adjutant or the 
 nearest field officer; the former to mark the position of 
 the flauk of the base squadron, which will become the 
 flank of the regiment — or in central formations its rigb'' 
 flank^-and facing toward the other flank of that squad- 
 ron ; the latter — the guide of that other flank — to mark 
 its position, and at three platoon fronts distance, facing 
 the sergeant major. 
 
 At the same time the regimental marker will gallop^ 
 to the most distant flank, and will there take post un 
 der the direction of the colonel, the adjutant or the field 
 officer, on the prolongation of the base line, and facing 
 the base. 
 
 At the approach of the squadrons, the squadron guides 
 of the flank which will be most distant from the point 
 of formation will rapidly take post on the prolongation 
 of the base line, and face toward the other flank of their 
 squadron, (or the point of formation). "^ 
 
 The regimental marker serves to mark the general 
 direction of the line, for the government of the squadron 
 columns in their marck 
 
 All these maikers, on taking post, will raise the hilts 
 of their sabres as high as the cheek, keeping the eabrc 
 vertical, the edge to their left. 
 
 ■ Chiefs of platoons corresponding to the positions of the 
 markers will vary somewhat from their central posi- 
 tions, if necessary, so as to bring their horses' Iwads to 
 the boot of the marker. 
 
 In all formations of lines the squadron commaudera 
 face their squadrons i» their poeitions opposite their 
 
EVOLUTIONS OF A REGIMENT. S 
 
 centres, until the command front, from the cohjnel op 
 field officer; they then all face about, turninc^ toward 
 the side of formation, and all the markers of the line 
 then take their posts. 
 
 In all successive formations of line, the dressing being; 
 toward the side of formation, the command dress will 
 be 90 uu'lerstood. Marching in line, the squadrons al- 
 ways regulate iutervuls and alignment hy the squadron 
 of direction. 
 
 The command front will be given, on the alignment 
 of the regiment, by the senior field officer; in the ab- 
 sence of field officers, bj the adjutant. This being in- 
 variable, it will be oinittod in the evolutions. 
 
 The guide of a flank squadron, which forms on the 
 regimental marker, will not take position to tnark 
 the line. 
 
 Ih the formation. of a close column on a ilank squad- 
 ' ron without changing front, and in the change of di- 
 rection of a close column bj a flank, the regimental 
 marker is posted on the new line of direction of the 
 guides, a little beyond the new position of the most dis- 
 tant squadron from the one which determines tlie move- 
 ment. In the flank niovement he always marks the 
 nearest flank of the new position. The field officer at 
 the rear of the column superintends his j)lacing. 
 
 The guide being on the left, when tlie right is in front, 
 and on the right, when the left is in front, it i- not an- 
 Qounced; the colonel may, however, remind them of it 
 when he thinks proper; but only wliile the column is 
 mai'ching. If for any reason the qolonel wishes the 
 guide, on the side opposite to the established rule, he an- 
 nounces it in his command. 
 
 In each ease the indication of the guide is repeated by 
 the field officers and the captains. 
 
 When a line or colnmi^ is to move at the same time 
 by .the same movement, the captains immediately repeat 
 the preparatory commands. 
 
 In the case of successive movomenta, they repeat the 
 preparatory commands sufficiently soon to give that of 
 
4 EVOLUTIONS OF A REGIMENT. 
 
 execution at the moment when tlie movem'cnt should- 
 oommence in ll;eir sqiiadion. 
 
 If an evolution requires a particular movement of 
 some squadron, the captain commands this movement 
 instead of repeatiug tire preparatory Command given by 
 the colonel. ^ 
 
 The commands of execution are repeated simulta- 
 neously by the lield officers. They are repeated in the 
 tame manner by the captains comma ndiug, except in 
 the movements which require successive commands. 
 
 In successive alignments, llie captains command, 
 tRONT. These invariable rules j-ender repetition unne- 
 i:essary in the details of the evghition?. 
 
 If it should happen that a^ command is cot heard, each 
 captain conforms as promptly as possible to the niove- 
 iXicnts of the squadron which_precedes him in the diree» 
 lion of tlie formation or breaking. 
 
 To change the gait- of the regiment marching, the" 
 colonel commands it by trumpet signal. 
 
 The regiment draws the sabre, retur?is it, or pre&enfs it, 
 at the command of the colonel, which is not repeated. 
 
 In a formation in line, or in a deployment, when -one 
 or several fractions of the troop cannot find room lo enter 
 the line, these fractions remain, or pass in rear of the 
 line. ■ ._ 
 
 When the colonel wishes the regiment to march, cith^' 
 fn lin.e or column, he gives the poini of direction if he 
 thinks it necessary. A field officer points it out to the 
 guide, or gives him one, if the colonel does not direct it 
 iiimself, or Ijy the adjutant. 
 
 A base line may be marked at a distance from the reg- 
 iment by the sergeant major and regimental marker, 
 posted hj the colonel, a fieid officer, or the adjutant. 
 
 The re'gimcntal marker is a non-commissioned officei', 
 selected for the duty by the colonel from one of the 
 squadrons present. * 
 
 Markers are not used in correcting the alignment of 
 ihe regiment; nor for the line formed by the simulta- 
 neous wheel of svibdiYieions— that from double column 
 
EVOLUTIONS OP A REGIMKNT. 
 
 in?iu(3ed. The eonimanders of the flnnk platoons of thi- 
 squadron to which the alignment is Uirected, raise thclv 
 sabres vertically, the hand as high as the cheek, the edgj? 
 to the front. 
 
 If the command do not prescribe the gait, the simpl.^ 
 march of. the regiment, including the movements in ech- 
 elon, is at the icalk. 
 
 Movements Avhieh change tlie ordc.r of the regiment 
 are executed at the trot, unless specially excepted, .or 
 unless the colonel's command designate a ditfevent gait. 
 
 That gait is recommended for all, except the forma - 
 tions front into iwc ; for this the gallop maj' be used; 
 and perhaps, in, some cases, for the deployment of a 
 close column. "• 
 
 In all formations of line to the right of a column right 
 in front, or left of a coluiiin left in front, the colonel 
 will, before the preparatory command, or as soon as con- 
 venient, pass to that side of the column ; tlie field officers 
 will do so at the preparatory command. ' 
 
 While a squadron is acting in line, with its .original 
 fourth platoon on the light, the original left, guide will 
 be " right guide," (and the right, the left). 
 
 W-iien a column changes direction, each subdivision 
 commander fixes his eyes on the spot which the guide 
 of the division before him was passing at the instant 
 of the command txiryi; and is very careful to give his 
 comma !id when his guide reaches it. 
 
 Platoon commandere are answerable for the distances 
 in open columns. 
 
 Columns formed for changing front may be by fo-ur? 
 or platoons, according to circumstances ; but never by 
 fours when the column, right in front, is to form right — 
 front into line; or left in front, left— front into' line. 
 Columns of platoons are safer near the enemy, unless, 
 by possibility, he should appear towards the original 
 front, when the columns of fours can be instantly con- 
 verted into echelons, (the safest is the movemcrit by 
 squadrons, in oblique eohelou). 
 
 The order of battle, according to the strength or organ- 
 
6 EVOLUTIONS OF A REGIMENT. 
 
 ization. of the regiment, being known, in all forraatiohis 
 of line, the colonel, when he wishes it in a line of battle, 
 gives or senda orders accordingly, or annoimcea it in hig 
 eomraand; for instance: Left—front into line of battle; 
 then, if it be two lines, the second is formed at the bead 
 of its leading squadron ; by the shortest route and sim- 
 plest means the flanking squadrons move to their posts. 
 The squadrons which are to form the second line will 
 seldom move to the rear, for distance, without orders ; 
 for the first line may immediately advance. 
 
 428. — If commanded, it is always easy in the squad- 
 ron column to form in two ranks; it is onJy necessary to" 
 ordef the2d, 4th, 6th, <fec., squadrons from the front to 
 clo'ie to one pace from the 1st, 3d, 5th, &c., squadrons. 
 If there be two captains present, the junior takes place 
 in rear of the centre ; the platoon commanders of the 
 even numbered squadrons take place upon the flanks, 
 and as file closers. • 
 
 At the command CHARGE, the guide of the squadron, 
 under all circumstances, if not so previously, instantly 
 hecomes centre ; the troopers carefully preserve their 
 intervals by that point. 
 
 ARTICLE FIRST. 
 
 FOilMATION OF COLUMNS, THEIR MARCH AND 
 . CHANGES. 
 
 Alignment of the Regiment. 
 
 429. — The regiment being in line, as prescribed, (Tift 
 1, Art. 1,) the colonel causes the platoon commandei*s of 
 one oftho.flank squadrons to be aligned, nnd in a direc- 
 tion by which no portion of the reginaent will hnve to 
 rein back, and commands : 
 
E^'OLUflONS OP A RBOIMENT. 7 
 
 1. Attention. 
 » 2. Right — Dkess, oi* Left — Dr.ESS. 
 
 At tlie second command, repeated by the field off.cer«, 
 (only,) the squadron commanders turn to the right 
 about, to sriperintead tlieir squadrons; the chiefs of pla- 
 toons aligu themselves, as also the flank files and troop- 
 ers one pace in their rear. 
 
 At Ihe command front, th« captains turn to the left 
 about. 
 
 4S0. — For insti'uction and practice the colonel will es 
 tablieh a base line 30 paces in front of the regiment, 
 marked by the sergeant major, the inner guide of a flank 
 squadron, and the regimental marker opposite the other 
 flank of the regiment, and caiTse a euccessive alignment 
 of the squadrons', by similar commands, and on the same 
 principles as in tho successive alignment of platoons in 
 the squadron, N'o. 309. 
 
 TO FORM A COLUMN OF FOURS— ITS MARCH, 
 AND CHANGE OF DIRECTION. 
 
 431. — The regiment being in line, the colonel coSi- 
 mands: 
 
 i. Attention. 
 ' 2. Fours right, (or Uft.) 
 
 3. March. 
 
 4. Halt. 
 
 It is executed ia each squadron as prescribed for th« 
 f*quadron, No. 812. 
 
 If the colonel wish the regiment to move forward, h€ 
 omits the command halt. - 
 
 The colonel observes that all have their preecribe<3 
 positions, (Tit. I. Art. I.) 
 
§. ETbLUTIONS OF A REGIMENt! 
 
 432. — To put the column in motion, the colonel com- 
 mands': •' - 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Forwafd. 
 S. March. 
 
 To 'change the direction of the column, the colon ei 
 commands; 
 
 (Jolumn left, {ov right.) 
 
 This command is only repeated by the field officer 
 near the head of the column ; (the remark applies to all 
 similar cases.) The movement is made as pi^eseribed. 
 No. 320. 
 
 433. — ^The regiment marching in a column of fours, to 
 face and march the column to the rear, the colonel com- 
 mands: 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Fours — Left about ; or Fours — Right about. 
 
 ^m FORM AN OPEN COLUMN—ITS MARCH, ANfv 
 CHANGE OF DIRECTION. 
 
 4,34. — The regiment at a halt, or marching in line, the 
 colonel commands : 
 
 1. Attejition. 
 
 2. Platoons right ivheel, (or left wheel.) 
 
 3. March. 
 
 At the second command the captains command, pla- 
 toons rigid wheel — trot. The wheel being nearly com- 
 pleted they command halt. 
 
KVOLUTIONS OF A REGIMENT. # 
 
 The movement ia executed at the same time ia eaeli 
 squadron as prescribed, No. 837. •» 
 
 If the colonel wishes the column to move forward im- 
 mediately he commands, after three-fourths of the 
 
 dWhecl : 4. FORWARD. 
 
 If the colonel commands platoons right wheel — Col- 
 umn right {or left, etc.) the wheels being nearly com- 
 pleted, tlie captains cominand [eorwato), thi> colonel 
 omitting it. 
 
 435% — To put th-e column in march, the colonel com- 
 mands: 
 
 1. Attention. 
 '2. Forward. 
 3. March. 
 
 486. — To change the direction of the column, the col- 
 onel commands : 
 
 Column left, (or right.) 
 
 The movement is made throughout as prescribed, No. 
 341. - 
 
 437. — To halt the column, the.eolonel commands: 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Column. 
 
 3. Halt. 
 
 4S8. — The regiment being in line to forna open ■ col- 
 umn by successive movements, and to march by the 
 rear — which is done to make' the passage of a defile in 
 rear of a flank — the colonel commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Flmtoons, froryi right to rear — io march to the 
 
 left. 
 
 3. March. 
 
n EVOLUTIONS OP A REaiME^TT. 
 
 The movement is made in each sqtiadron as prescribed, 
 Jfo. 376 ; the captains add to the second command trot. 
 The captains not at the flank give the command marcd, 
 when the chief of the last platoon of the next squad- 
 ton, after marching ten paces to the rear, comraaflds. 
 ri[/ht — TURN. 
 
 The regiment is broken Iby the left to the rear to 
 march to the right, on the sam^ principles, by" inverse 
 commands and means. 
 
 439. — The movement may be made from both flanks 
 at once ; to cover, by the centi-e squudrona, the passage 
 of a defile behind them, the colonel then commands: 1 
 Attention; 2. Platoon from the Jianks—^to the rear pasi 
 defile; 3. makch. At the command march, the move> 
 ment is commenced from right and left, as prescribed 
 above ; the columns opposite the defile turn to pass it 
 abreast, and after passing it turn to the left and right,^ 
 at the point which the colonel directs ; they halt and 
 wheel into line athis commands. 
 
 440. — The regiment at a halt or marching in open 
 column, left, or right in front, to face it and move in the 
 opposite direction, the colonel commands: 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Platoons right (or left) about loJieel. 
 S. March, 
 
 4, Forward; (or Halt.) 
 
 The movement is executed in each squadron as pre- 
 scribed, No. 860. .The sergeant major and regimental 
 marker change to the head of the column. (This is a 
 geaoral remark.) 
 
 441. — The regiment marching in open column, to gain 
 ground to one of its flank?, the colonel commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. JPours — RiGBT, or Left. 
 
EVOLUTIONS OP A RKCaMENT. 11 
 
 If the column is at a halt, he comraands: 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Fours — right, or Left. 
 
 3. March. 
 
 Th'6se movcraenta Arc exeeutod as in. the squadron, 
 Nos. 876 and 377. 
 
 442. — The regiment marching in open column to gain 
 ground obliquely to the right or left, without changing 
 front, the colonel commands : 
 
 1. Attention. • 
 
 2. Jiight (or left) oblique. 
 8. March. 
 
 It is executed as in the squadron, No. 342. 
 
 To resume the direct march, the colonel coraraanda : 
 
 Forward. 
 
 TO FORM A COLUMN OF SQUADRONS, AND A 
 CLOSE COLUMN. 
 
 443. — ^The regiment halted," or marching in line, to 
 form a column of squadroiis, faced to the left, the col- 
 onel commands; 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Squadrons left U'hcoi. 
 8. March. 
 
 At the second command, the captakis command, lejc 
 wheel — trot; when the wheels are completed they com- 
 mand, HALT. 
 
 Each squadron executes the wheel as. prescribed, Nos. 
 388, 393; bnt'they regulate their wheels by the left 
 Bquadron. 
 
n EVOLUTIONS OF A REGIMENT. 
 
 If the colonel desires a more accurate alignment, ho 
 eommauds : 
 
 Dkess. 
 
 The captains command: 1. Right — Drkss; 2. Front; 
 and take post, as in line: 
 
 If the colonel desires the column to move forward, 
 without halting, when the wheels are three-fourths 
 completed, he commands : 
 
 - 4. Forward. 
 
 Which the captains repeat at the completion of thf* 
 wheels. 
 
 The column is formed face to the right, on the same 
 principles, by inverse commands and means. 
 
 <444. — The colonel wishing to close a column of squad- 
 rons, commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Close colvmn. 
 
 3. Makcii. 
 
 The captain of the leading squadron proceeds to the 
 pivot flank of his squadron ; and, if he deems it neces- 
 eary, corrects its alignment. ■ 
 
 At the second command, the other captains command : 
 i. Forward; 2. Trot; they repeat the command march. 
 At platoon distance from the preceding squadron, eacli 
 oonunauds: 1. Halt; 2.. Dress; 3. Front. 
 
 The column of squadrons being in march, the colonel 
 closes tlie column by the same commands. 
 
 At the second command, the captain of the leading 
 squadi'on proceeds to its flank. . " 
 
 The other captains command: 1. Trot, and repeat the 
 oommHud MARCH,. At platoon distance each commands. 
 
 VjalJc MARCH. 
 
 Ifthecolun»n is marching at the trot, the captain of 
 
EVOLUTIONS OP A REOIMENT. 10 
 
 flie leading squadron command^, walk — march; and 
 the other captains the same, on reaching their proper 
 distance. 
 
 diS.— ^The regiment marching or halted ia close col- 
 umn, to take squadron distance the colonel commands: 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Take squadron distance. 
 
 3. March. 
 
 At the second command, the captain of the leading 
 squadron commands, JFht^uard — trot (omitting /orii'artf if 
 the column be in motion). He repeats the command 
 MARcii, and takes post at the centre of the squadron. 
 
 Each captain, in succession, gives the same commands, 
 when the squadron which precedes him has got the di?* 
 t^nce of five platoon fronts. 
 
 446.— If the close column be trotting, and the colon ol-s 
 command^ are the same, at the second command all but 
 the leading captain command, walk, and repeat the com- 
 mand MARCH ; they are then governed as in the forego- 
 ing paragraph. 
 
 If the close column "be trotting, the colonel codi* 
 mands : • 
 
 3. Attention. 
 
 2. Take squadron distance — Gallop. 
 
 3. March. 
 
 At tlie second command, the leading captain com- 
 mands, gallop, and repeats the command march. Each, 
 in succession, commands, gallop — march, when the 
 squadron before him has got its distance. 
 
 447. — The regiment being in line, to fo)'m it in close 
 column, faced to the right, the colonel conamands : 
 
14 EVOLDnONf OF \ RKOIMEST. - 
 
 1. Atf<ntion. 
 
 2. S'/ua'^ronx .-iifht fchtfl^-forrn cfoie column. 
 
 3. MAKrii. 
 
 At Uto Focond command, the- captains coinmaud, rufh' 
 *nhe€l — trot. 
 
 At the third commnml, (ropca* J, ofisourao, under the 
 rule,) all tho pquadrons wbcel to the right.. 
 
 The -whoL-ld bcjng nearly completed, the captain of 
 thti let squadron commands: 1. Halt; and being nl 
 the left of tlic squadron, 2. Dais?; 8. Front. 
 
 The caplnlns of the other squadrons cojnmand, rfvR 
 ward; and nt platoon di>»tance irom the sq'; • 
 
 l)recedpe .nnd has halted : I.Hai.t; 2. Dki 
 
 The forrTiation of the clos<' column, to fuc<' i<» ll>e U-fl, 
 IS- executed on tho sr.mc principle?, by invi^r?-- oommnn<lH 
 .and menus. 
 
 The regiment marching in line, the eokniel gives th'' 
 same commanda Aft«r tht? first squadron lias com- 
 pleted it« w licc), its captain commands, icalk — march. 
 The captains of the other squadrons command, rvfllk — 
 MARCH, when thoy havo reached platoon disln'Tice. 
 
 448. — Tli< :»t 1'oing in line, clo^o column i^ 
 
 formed witli' "iging front, on the right, left, or a 
 
 central pquiidron. 
 
 The colonel commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. On right squadron — dose column. 
 S. Maroi. 
 
 At the hccond couiu)and, the captain of the righi 
 squadron moyes to the left of his squadron, ana, i'. 
 accessary, eorrc^ is its dre6«jin}^. 
 
 The captainH of the other squadrons command: 1. 
 Fours right — Column half right ; 2. Trot At tho corn- 
 raand march, all their equadrons exer\ite the mo?e- 
 ment as in the school of tljc squadron. The eecond 
 i».(uadron turns more ihrtn half-rinht ; the commnndeY 
 
EVOLUTIONS OP A REGIMENT. 15 
 
 of ita first platoon, at the head of tlie columu, conducts 
 it 80 as to turn, witliout command from the captain, 
 behind and parallel to the first squadron, at a point 10 
 yards in rear of its left guide; (or a little outside of it.) 
 The captain halts at this point, and when the rear of 
 his column is opposite, he commands: 1. Left into line 
 ioheel ; 2. March; 3. Dekss ; 4. FnoNx. The left guide 
 being immediately behind that of the first squadroo, at 
 platoon distance. 
 
 All the other squadrons are conducted over the near- 
 est lines, each to turn or pass at the same distance be- 
 hind the left of the preceding one, the captains con- 
 forming to what is prescribed for the second squadron. 
 
 The captains direct the columns. If one judges his 
 passing too far to the rear, he commands : Oolwnn — 
 half-left. The column is always formed in rear of the 
 right. 
 
 449. — To form close column on the left squadron, the 
 colonel commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. On left squadron — chie coIvpt.k 
 8. March. 
 
 It is executed on the same principles, by inverse nieflfi? 
 and commands. The column is always formed in reav 
 of the left squadron. 
 
 450. — ^The regiment being in line, to form close coU 
 nmn on a central squadron the colonel commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. 0:1 fifth (or other) squadron — close column. 
 8. March. 
 
 At the second command, the captain of the fifth 
 squadron takes post on its left 
 
 The captains of the right squadrons comojftnd : 1 
 Fourg left— Column halfright—Trof. 
 
!«• EVOLUTIONS OP A REGIMENT. 
 
 The captains of the left squadrons command : 1. 
 Fburs right — Column half-right — TVot. 
 
 At the command march, the movement commences on 
 both flants. The chief of platoon at the head of the 
 fourth squadron conducts it so as to turn in front of the 
 rigbt of the fifth squadron, or, at a point a little out- 
 side, into a direction parallel with it, and so as to pass 
 about three paces from the heads of its officers' horseg. 
 The captain marches at the head of the column, and, 
 when it reaches the flank of the fifth squadron, he com- 
 mands : \. Right into line wheel; 2. March; 3. Dress; 
 4. Front ; correcting, if necessary, his left guide to pla,- 
 toon distance in front of the one behind him. 
 
 " The other squadrons on the riglit are conducted over 
 the nearest lines, turn, and pass at an equal distance in 
 front of the preceding one, the captains conforming to 
 what is prescribe'd for the fourth squadron. If neces* 
 sary, they all command: Column half -lefty to enter the 
 column at the right distance. 
 
 The left squadrons are conducted and placed in rear 
 of the fifth, by the same commands and means pre- 
 scribed for the left squadrons, No, 448. 
 
 The right squadrons always go in front, no matter 
 the order in which they stood. 
 
 - 451. — The regiment marching in line, to form close 
 column without changing front and without halting, 
 the eolonelcommands: 
 
 1. A'tUntion. 
 
 2. On right (or hft) squadron — dose column. 
 '6. March. 
 
 The named squadron continues to walk. (If the line 
 33 trotting, its captain commands, walk — march.) 
 
 The captains of the other squadrons command, at 
 the second command, 1. Fours — Might; 2. TVot; (omitting 
 Uie second command if the line is trotting) and repeat, 
 3. March. 
 
EVOLUTIONS OF A REGIMENT. ll 
 
 Each captain halts directly in rear of the leftof tRc 
 first squadron, and commands: Fours — Left, when the- 
 pcar of his column reaches him. 
 
 The squadrons then marching to close distance, each 
 capitain commands: 1. Walk; 2. Maucu, when his 
 squadron aurivcs at platoon distance from the one 
 which precedes him. 
 
 To form the close column on the 'kft squadron, th,e 
 principie^is the same; the commands and means inrerse. 
 
 TO MARCH IN A COLUMN OF SQUADRONS AND 
 IN CLOSE COLUMN, AND TO CHANGE THEIR 
 DIRECTIONS. 
 
 452. — The principles of the direct march of the squad- 
 ron in line, No. 380, are applicable to the regiment in 
 column of squadrons or close column,' If the colonel do 
 not himself, or by the adjutant — the field officer at tho 
 head of the cokimn will, if necessary, give direction to 
 the leading guide, and observe the correct march of the 
 next one. 
 
 463, — To{)ut either eolumn in march the c'^lonel com- 
 mands: 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Forward. 
 
 3. Marcu. 
 
 If the colonel wishes the guide centre, he commands : 
 3. Guide — centre; 4, March, 
 
 464. — To change the direction of the march of the 
 column of squadrons, or the close column, the colonel 
 commands: 
 
 Column le/t, (or right.) 
 16 
 
13 ETOLUTIONS OF A REGIMENT. 
 
 Tlie 'captain of the leadincf- squadron immediately 
 commands: Left (or righi) — Turn ; and when the wheel 
 is nearly completed, foiwakd. 
 
 Each captain, in succession, gives the command to 
 turn on tlie same ground ; and forward, when his turn 
 is nearly complete. 
 
 In the column of squadrons, the regimental marker 
 Instantly places himself facing, and his horse's head o'ne 
 pace from, the pivot flank, to mark the point' of turn- 
 i-ag for each squadron. 
 
 Each squadron performs its wheel in the mamier pre- 
 scribed ibr the squadron, I^o. 89ft» 
 
 45^. — The regiment being in close column, to change 
 direction by a flank movement, the colonel commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Change direction by the right (or left) flcinl:. 
 
 3. March. 
 
 At the second command, the captain of the leading 
 squadron commands : Fours right — cohimn left, (or half 
 left) — trot. The captains of the other squadrons com- 
 mand : four^ righl-rcolumnhalf left — trot. 
 
 At the command mauch, the movement"* commences 
 throughout. 
 
 The squadi"on in front turns parallel with the new 
 front, at whatever angle, which has been established by 
 the colonel's direction. 
 
 The oth(5r squadrons conducted by their captjiins, 
 move by the shortest line to the point at which ihey 
 should enter the column. 
 
 All the captains halt at these pointe, where tlie left 
 flanks of their squadrons shall rest — in a lino with the 
 left guide leading squadron, and the regimental marker 
 —and, in succession as the rear, of the columns roftch 
 them, command : \. Left into line wheel ; 2. March ; 3. 
 Z(7/<— Drbss ; 4. Front. 
 
EVOLUTIONS OF A REGIMENT. 19 
 
 The chiefs of leading Matpons command a second tuin, 
 if necessary. 
 
 The change of direction by the Jeft flank is executed 
 bj the same pnuoipl«;s, by inverse nncans. ' 
 
 45^ — To change the direction of a close column, or a 
 O'dutnn of squadrons to face to thf' rear, the colonel com- 
 niand«: 
 
 1, Attention. 
 - 2. Countermarch by the right {or left) flank. 
 3, Maivch. "^ 
 
 # 
 
 Tlio countermarch 13 exeeute'd at the same time in 
 each squadron, as prescribed, No. 386; the captains ad- 
 dincj trot, to the second command. 
 
 The column of squadrons may be wheeled about, by 
 squadron, or by platoons. 
 
 45*7. — The regiment marching in column of squadrons, 
 or close column, to gain ground to one of the flanks, 
 the colonel commands: 
 
 1. Attention.. 
 
 2. Fours— 'RiQwr, (or Left.) 
 
 If the column is at- a halt, the eolonel adds: 
 
 3. MAiicii. 
 
 These nioyemenfs are executed throughout as in the 
 squadron ; "but the chiefs of the leading platoons march 
 by the side of the leading set of fours, and preserve di«- 
 tances and alignment with the squadron that was in 
 front. 
 
 458. — The regiment marching in column of squadrons, 
 or close column, the colonel commands: 
 
20 EVOLUTIONS OF A REi^IMENT. 
 
 1. . Attention. 
 
 2. Eight (or left) ohli^ite. 
 
 3. Marph. 
 
 WhicTi is executed throughout, ts in squadron, No. 
 397. To resume the iirst direction, the colonel com- 
 mands : 
 
 Forward. 
 
 469. — The regiment being in close colu'inn, to gain 
 %; ground to the rear, the colonel commands: 
 
 1." Attention. 
 
 2. Fown — Left about, (or right about) 
 
 3. March. 
 
 "W'fiicli is executed throughout as prescribed for the 
 6.q,uadroD, No. 399. 
 
 TO FORM A DOUBLE COLUMN— ITS MARCH, AND 
 "- - CHANGE OF DIRECTION. 
 
 4gO, — The regiment being in line, double colun:in is 
 formed on the left platoon of the right, and right pla- 
 toon of the left centre squadrons ; if the number of. 
 squadrons be uneven, it is formed in the same manner 
 ^)n *he centre, and next squadron to its left. 
 
 To advance in double column, the colonel commande : 
 
 ■1. Attention. ' . ■ 
 
 * 2. Advance i7i double column. 
 
 3. March. 
 
 4. Guide right, (or left.) 
 
 At the second command, the captain of the right cen- 
 tre squadron commands: Platoons left wheel — left pla- 
 toon formafd. 
 
...,.,.i 
 
 r 
 
 J^f^i^ M JhrLU '^ 
 
 
 
EvoiUTieNs or. a REGIMBNT. 21 
 
 Tbc ;|^ftptain3 to his, right cOBimand : Platoons lefi 
 v^eel. 
 
 The captains of the left centre squadron commands : 
 Platoons right wheel — right platoon forward. 
 
 Tlie captaiDB to his left command : Platoons — right 
 wheel. 
 
 At the command march, the movement begins through- 
 out ; the chief of tlie platoon next to the lett of the right 
 centre squadron commands right — ttikx, Avhen the flank 
 of hig platoon ■would have three paces to 'march to com- 
 l.kte its wheel; in turning it gains three paces,- which 
 brings its right flank on the line of march of that of the 
 left platoon ; the next to the right platoon of the left 
 centre squadron is conducted on the same i^rinciples, by 
 inverse means ; the other platoons of each equadrou 
 turn on the same ground as these platoons. ' 
 
 The captains of the squadrons to the right and iM, 
 when the wheels bj platoon are completed, comnland 
 forward; and all, in succession, command the turn to 
 the front, on. the same,ground that the rear platoons of 
 the ce;itral squadrons have turned on ; and tiheir squad- 
 rons 'follow them in open column, with the prescribed 
 distance. 
 
 The guide being commanded right, it fs so iVi each 
 column; the right squadron guides of the left column, 
 ou the right of the leading platoons, approach- to within 
 10 paces of the left squadron guides of the right column, 
 who are on the left of the leading platoons. This give? 
 an interval of platoon front between the flanks of the 
 other platoons ;» all the guides of the left column pre- 
 serve the intervals from the right column, and align 
 themselves on the corresponding platoons. If the guide 
 be Ze/if, interval and alignment is regulated on the pla- 
 toons of the left column. The chief of the leading pLi- 
 too^ on the side of the giiide regulates the gait. 
 
 46J. — The double column is advantageous for the for- 
 mation /?-on^ info Zwfi more prompt than in the single 
 open colQmn; and also to the rear, to the rfght' ov left. 
 
2-2 EVOLUTIONS OP A liPGIMENT.* 
 
 in a single Ifce^ or in two lines, or inecbeltu; iU^ ihei'c- 
 fore especially safefor the passage of defile? to^ie front, 
 where the enemy's dispositions are unknown. If the 
 defile is too narrow, tlie interval can be reduced to one 
 pace, and the column reduced to fronts of Coura and kwos, 
 
 4,62.^-The iiegiment marching iu double column, to 
 reduce the front to a double column of fours, the colonel 
 conamands : 
 
 1. Attent(07i. 
 
 2. By fours. 
 
 3. March. 
 
 At the second command, the captuins of the Left col- 
 iijiin command: By fours— trot ; the captains of tlie 
 right column command: By the left—^iiy fours— trot. 
 
 At the command march, the movement is executed in 
 each sq^uadron as prescribed in the school of the squad- 
 ron. ' ' 
 
 To reduce the front to columns of twos, and to reform 
 them in fours and platoons, is executed in each column, 
 as prescribed/or tlie single column. 
 
 468. — Thejiouble column. marching, tp change direc- 
 tion, the colonel commands: 
 
 1. Attention. 
 _2. Column right (or left); halfric/hj, {ov half- left.) 
 
 The second command being repeated o;//v/ by the seui- 
 <rr captain of the leading squadrons, the senior chief of 
 front platoons commands: 1. Jiic/ht — turn; 2. Forward; 
 and so with the subdivisions \liroughout. Th^ piyot 
 describes a quarter circle of 12 yards; the inner ilauk of 
 the outer platoon continues to march at the same gait; 
 all preserve intervals from the pivot, and alignment by 
 the wheeling flank. 
 
EVOLUTIONS OF A REOIMENT. 2S 
 
 464. — The regiment being in double column li.iiteJ 
 or marching, il is faced and marched in the opposite di- 
 rection by the same commands, and in the sanie man- 
 ner as llie open column, No. 440. But the colonel com- 
 mands ihe guide anew; and if the columns are of un- 
 equal length, he commands ^jt/o^c left, (on the outer flank 
 of the longest column,) and the column remains as it 
 wheeled about. 
 
 405. — ^Tlie double column roarching gains' grouad t& 
 one of its llaaks, and gains ground to the right or left, 
 without changing front-, by the "Samc commands and 
 means as in the open column, Nos. 441 and 442. 
 
 TO PASS FROM A COLUMN OF TWOS TO A COL- 
 UMN OF FOURS, TO AN OPEN COLUMN, AND 
 TO A COLUMN OF SQUADRONS, AN-D A CLOSE 
 COLUMN. 
 
 466. — The regiment, marching in a column of twos, 
 to pass to a column of fours, the colonel commands: * 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. J^orm fours. 
 
 3. Maucii. 
 
 At Die second command, the captain of the leading 
 squadron commands : Form fours — trot. 
 
 Tlio other captains commands: Trot. 
 
 At the third command, the leading squadron executes 
 the formation as pr.escribed, No. 856 ; that squadron 
 being formed, t^ie captain of the next squadron com- 
 mands: 1. Form fours; 2. March; which is executed 
 as. prescribed, No. 362. And- so each -captain in succcs- 
 siofl. 
 
 If the column is trotting, and the" colonel wishes to 
 fgrm fours by galloping, his second command is, yorm 
 fours^gallop ; and it is done on the same prinoiples. 
 
24 EVOLUTIONS .OF A REGIMENT. 
 
 467. — ^The column of twos trotting, tli^ colond gives 
 the same commands, No. 406. 
 
 The second and third commands are repeated inime- 
 diatelv by t4ie captain of the leading squadron, and by 
 each of th6 others, in succession, when the squadroi; 
 preceding him is formed. It is executed in each squad- 
 ron as prescribed, No. 852. 
 
 ^ 46§. — ^The regiment, marching in a column of foui's, 
 
 to pass to a' column of platoons, the colonel commands : 
 
 -^ 
 
 1. Atieivtion. ' 
 
 2. Form platoons. 
 
 3. March. 
 
 Ail the captains, in repeating the second command, 
 add,- trot, ■ -.' ■ 
 
 At the command march, it is executed in each platoon 
 and squadron throughout the regiment, as , prescribed,. 
 No. 357. ' 
 
 The intervals between the squadrons re-tnnin correct. 
 (Tit. I, Art. II.) 
 
 The column of fours marching at the trot, unless the- 
 command indicate the gallop, the colonel gives Uic same 
 commands. Tliey are repeated and execxitcd in each 
 gqnadron as prescribed, No. 362. 
 
 459. — ^The regiment being in open "column, -halted or 
 marching at a vmlk, to form an Opea 'column of squad- 
 rons the colonel commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 
 ' 2. Form stquadrons — left {or r>rj hi.) 
 3. Makcu. 
 
 The captains, in repeating the second command, 
 add, trot^ 
 
 At'the third command, each squadron is formed as in, 
 the school of the squadron, No 402. 
 
EVOLUTIONS OP A REGIMENT, 25- 
 
 If the column is trotting, to make the formation in 
 doubling the gait, the colonel ad Jp, <7a/?o/:), to the sec- 
 ond command, and the movement is executed on the 
 same principles. 
 
 The open column trotting, if the colonel give the com- 
 mands without indicating the gait, they are repeated by 
 the captains without addition ; the squadrons are formed 
 throughout at the same time, as prescribed, No. 40o. 
 
 470. — The reginaeut being in open column, to form 
 close column the colonel commands: 
 
 -1. Aticntion. 
 
 2. For7n close column — left (or ripht.) 
 
 3. March. 
 
 ^t the second command, all the captains commancf. 
 for)n, sqicadron — left — trpt. , ' 
 
 At the command march, the gquadrons are all formed 
 us in the school of the squadron ; the; captains of all but 
 the leading squadi'on command: 1. Forward — trot, ifi 
 time to add, 2. March, so that their rearmost platoon 
 shall not halt. On reaching, ii^ succession, platoon dis- 
 taifce, they command: 1. Halt; 2. Dress; 3. Front. 
 
 The open column marching at a Avalk, the colonel's 
 commands and the captains' first commands are the 
 same as above; the squadrons being formed, the cap- 
 tains of all but the one leading command, trot — uh^CH, 
 just "before their last platoons should be commanded to 
 walk; and reaching their distance, each, in succession, 
 loalh — march. 
 
 The open column marching- at a lrot,.and tl«? colonel 
 commands : 2. Form close colum^i — left (or right) ,* S. 
 March. All the captains' commands are the same. 
 
 At the command march, Till the squadrons are formed 
 as prescribed, No. 352, and then all but the leading 
 captain commands, trot — march ; and on reaching their 
 distance, walk — march, as above. 
 
M EVOLUTIONS OF A REOIMENT. 
 
 TO PASS FROM A COLUMN OF SQUADRONS AND 
 A CLO^E COLUMN, TO AN OPEN COLUMN, 
 AND A COLUMN OF FOURS AND TWOS. 
 
 . 4*71.-^The regiment being in, column of squadrons 
 halted or marching, to diminish the front of the column 
 the co'Ionel commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Bt/ platoon (or 63/ the hft-^'i^ platoon), 
 '■i. March. 
 
 In repeating the second command, each captain adds 
 trot. " ' 
 
 At the command march, the movement is executed 
 throughout as in the squadron, • 
 
 If the colonel add?, xoalk, to the second, command, the 
 captains command by platoon. 
 
 if the column be trotting, and the colonel f\.<\.^& gallop, 
 to his second command, it is repeated by the captains, 
 and the movement is executed on the same principle. 
 
 If the column be trotting and the colonel gives the 
 same commands, they arc repeated by the captains, with- 
 out addition, and the movement is executed as in No. 
 402. 
 
 472, — The regiment being in a close column, to march 
 by platoons, the colonel commands: 
 
 L Attention. 
 
 2, By platoon, [or By the left — by platoon.) 
 
 3. March. 
 
 The second and third commands are repeated by the 
 captain l)f the leading squadron, adding trot to the 
 Becond." 
 
 The captains of the other squadrons repeat them with 
 the same addition, in succession, giving the c(immand 
 
EVOLUTIONS OF A REGIMENT. 2? 
 
 MARcn, when the lust platoon of the preceding squadron 
 has obliqued about two platoon fronts, so as to take it8 
 place in colunih at proper distance. If tlie colonel addi^ 
 ««a^^ to the second command, the captains command t^ 
 platoQ;i. 
 
 If tlie dolumnbe marching at the walk, the comuiandiP 
 of. the colonel and captains are the same, and are exe- 
 cuted as prescribed for the squadron, the captains givifig 
 the command of execution when the last platoon of the 
 preceding sqijadron has increased its distance about two 
 platoon fronts. 
 
 If the column be trotting, the movement in doubling 
 the gait is made on the same principle. 
 
 But if, the column trotting, the colonel gives the sainc 
 commands as above, , the second and third commands 
 are repeated by the captain of the leading squadi-oq; 
 the other captains, at the second command of the colonel, 
 command walk, and repeat the command march. They 
 then, in succession, command : \. By platoons — trot ; ?. 
 March, as above. 
 
 4'73. — The regiment being in open column, halted or 
 marching, to»reduce the front the colonel commands: 
 
 1. Attention, 
 
 2. By fours (or by the left — by fovrs). 
 
 3. March. ■ 
 
 At'the- second command, each captain' comma n^s,^;?,' 
 fdurs — trot. 
 
 At the third command, the movemei>t is executed in 
 each-squadron at the same time, as iij the school of ^\e 
 squadron. 
 
 If the colonel add aalk to his second command, the 
 captains command, by fours. 
 
 If the command be trotting, the movemenC in doub- 
 ling the gait is made on the same principle ; but if the 
 colonel give the same commands, \,hQ captains repeat 
 them, and the movement is executed throughout as in 
 squad rori. 
 
2S EVOLUTIONS OF A REGIJIENT. 
 
 474. — The regiment, marching in column of fours, to 
 reduce ita front the colonel commands: 
 
 1/ Attention. 
 
 2. By twos (or by the left — by twos). 
 
 3. Marcu. 
 
 At the second command, the captain of the leading 
 squadron commands, by twos — trot'; and he repeats the 
 third coniiiiaCnd. 
 
 The other captains give tlie same commands in suc- 
 cession, when the rear of: the preceding squadron be- 
 gins to trot. • 
 
 If the colonel adds walk to his second command, the 
 leading captain commands, by twos; the others com- 
 mand, Halt, and break in succession when the rear of 
 the preceding squadron moves. 
 
 If the column be trotting, the movement in doubling 
 the gait is made on the same principle ; but if the gait is 
 not indicated, the captains do not add trot to the 
 colonel's second command; and the other captains com- 
 mand walk, and they afterwards conform to the above. 
 
 4'76. — If the necessity arise, the column is reduced to 
 ihe//e ; it is done on the same principles as the foregoing, 
 and the same commands, substituting Jile for " twos." 
 And it is reformed by twos, on the same principles, of 
 Ko» 466, and following, 
 
EVOLUTIONS OP A REGIMENT. 25 
 
 ARTICLE SECOIST). 
 
 FORMATION OF LINE FROM THE DIF^ 
 FERENT COLUMNS. 
 
 r • 
 
 TO FORM LINE FROM THE COLUMN OF FOURS, 
 ■AND OPEN COLUMN, FACED TO THE FRONT, 
 OBLIQUELY, TO THE LEFT, RIGHT, AND 
 REAR. 
 
 476. — The regiment being in colunan of fours, or open 
 column, halted or marching, to form line to the front 
 and left, or front and right, the colonel commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. left— front into Urn; or, right— front into Hiie. 
 
 3. March. 
 
 At the second command, the captain of the leading 
 squadron commands : Left (or right)— front into ihie 
 — trot. 
 
 The other captains command; Forward, (if halted)-- 
 column half-left (or right) — trot. 
 
 At the command march, the leading squadron con- 
 forms to the school of the squadron. 
 
 The captains of the other squadrons, in repeating the 
 third command, add, Guide right (or left) ; and cacli di- 
 rects the diagonal march of his column so as to pass 
 about 30 yards more than the depth of the column in 
 rear of the point where its right (or left) will rest in line. 
 
 At these points they command : Column half -right 
 (or left) ; and then left (or right)— front into line, in 
 time to command march, when the head of the column 
 is 30 yards in rear of its place in line. 
 
CO EV0LrTI0N3 OF A REGIMENT, 
 
 Tf4.1ie colonel adcle walk to tlie second command, or if 
 tli£ colnnm is tit the trot^ the cftptains do nof ftdd "trot" 
 to their commands, as in the f>)rcgoing paragraph. If 
 tl^e colonel comnmads gallop, it is repeated in their com- 
 mands. ' . 
 
 When the regiment is in column of fours, right in 
 tVQut, to form right — front into line, the colonel fir?t 
 fon«ms platoons; the same wfletCleft is in front, to ferm 
 left — front into line. 
 
 If the colonel desire to form a line of squadron col- 
 iHnns, he commaiids: 2. Left {ov right) — front iiUoJine 
 of columns; the "loading squadron moves forward 30 
 paces and halts; the other captains, proceeding asabovo. 
 direct the heads of columns their depth in rear of their 
 positions in line," turn half-right, and -halt on the line. 
 
 47*7. — The line may be formed obliquely. "When to 
 the left front, the lefc may fee back or forward forty- 
 f.re degrees, or better, any Icp.? angle. When the 
 colonel wishes the line back, he himself, or by a field 
 officer, or the adjutant, commands to the leading squad- 
 ron, in column of .platoons: \. Platoons — left wheel ; H. 
 Mabcii; and when the leading j)latoon has the required 
 obliquity, commands, halt. If in column of fours: 1, 
 Fours— left ; 2. Makch ; 3. Halt. 
 
 The commands are then given as in No. 476; adding 
 to the second command, if the obliquity be great, left 
 back; the leading platoon, or set of foui-s, marches 
 straight forward, and the squadron is formed at the 
 same angle; the other sqi>adron3 make their first turn 
 greater; and if the left he far back, may form line with- 
 out a second turn. 
 
 478. — If the colonel wish to throw the left forward, a 
 large angle beyond the perpendicular line to the direc • 
 tion of his column, he first causes the leading squadron 
 to march and turn its depth perpendicular to the desired 
 line ; he adds to the second command, the obliquity be- 
 ing so great, left foritard. The squadrons in this case 
 
¥!^J/. 
 
 Fa^'3(y. Jl 
 
 d. 
 
 \ 
 
 
 :^' 
 
 / / 
 / / 
 
 // 
 
 . / 
 / 
 
 
 L-- 
 
j'':^i'i' 
 
 N. 
 
 Faye 
 
 M n '^' 
 
 1 
 
 / 
 
 / A' 
 
 / X 
 
 / 
 / 
 
 ^ ■ 
 
 » 
 
 % 
 
 • 
 
 
 1 — I 
 
 S; — ' 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 \ 
 
 X 
 
 <._. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 —^ 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 i i 
 
 
 m- 
 
 ! 
 1 
 
 , 1 
 
 
 
EVOLUTIONS OP A REGIMENT. 31 
 
 make a less turn than in the square fcn'raatlon/^and all 
 make a second turn. 
 
 To form obliquely to the rigJit- front, is done oxT the 
 same principles, and inverse means. 
 
 In these cases, if the column be marching, (he colonel 
 indicates to the captain to take, while in motion, the ne- 
 cessary obliquity for his position. 
 
 479. — The regiment being iu column of fours, or open 
 column, halted or marching, to form .line en eitlior flank, 
 the colonel commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Left {or right) into line wheel. 
 S. March. 
 
 A.t the second command, each captain commands; 
 Left (or right) into line wheel— trot, (omitting trot'm the 
 column of fours.) The wheels being near completion, 
 they command : Right, (or left)'—DvcE9,s. (In this case 
 the captains do not command front. ) When the lieuten- 
 ant colonel or adjutant command? front, they turn about 
 to. the front. 
 
 If the column of fours right in front, the colonel forms 
 line by wheeling fours to the right, only in emergency ; 
 the same as to forming the line to the left, left in front. 
 In either case he accomplishes his object best by first 
 forming platoons. 
 
 480.— -The regiment marching in column of fours, or 
 open column, to form line to the right or left, beyond 
 the head of the column, the colonel commands: ^ • 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. On right (or left) into line. 
 8. March. 
 
 The captain of the leading squadron adds trot, to th» 
 a«coud command. 
 
«a EVOLUTIONS OF A REGIMBNX. 
 
 The ofcher captains cominanu trot. 
 
 At the commniiJ march, tli^^ leading squadron forme 
 linonri in the school of the eqnadron. 
 
 The other captains, if the guide is not there already, 
 anuounct! him on the flank uext to the new line, and 
 proceed to the heads of their squadrons. 
 
 They command, in succession; 1. On right {ov left) into 
 line ; 2. March, when the head of the squadron arrives 
 at the point where it should turn to form the line. 
 
 481. — When the. regiment is in a column of fours 
 right ill front, to form on left into line, the colonel first 
 forms platoons ; the same left in front, before forming on 
 right into line. 
 
 482.— -The colonel may v a vj;^ the* direction of the line 
 considerably to the riglit or left; the captains change 
 the direction of their columns to the necessary degree as 
 they pass the right, (or left) of the line, without orders. 
 
 4331- — The regiment being in open column, or column 
 of fours to form line faced to the right-rear, or left-rear, 
 on the rear of the column, the colonel first wheels by 
 platoons or fours about, Nos. 440 and 433, and immedi- 
 ately command? as in No. 47ri ; he governs himself by 
 the numbers following it. 
 
 484.-— The regimeiit being in open column, to form 
 line faced to the rear, on the heaa of the column, the 
 colonel first forms line to the front; and then wheels pla- 
 toons about. 
 
 T0JORM LINE FROM A COLUMN OF SQUADRONS, 
 (OR COLUMN OF ATTACK,) FACED TO THE 
 FRONT, LEFT, RIGHT, AND REAR. 
 
 486.— -The regiment marching, or at a halt, in column 
 of squadrons is to form liue "to the front, the colonel com- 
 mancLs: 
 
I'£3 
 
 \. 
 
 ., — -v^... 
 
 -i L 
 
 I 
 
 r-i 
 
 ■"'•-] 
 
EYOLtlTIONS OP A REGIMENT. S$ 
 
 1. JLttention. 
 
 2. Left (or right) front into line, 
 
 3. March. 
 
 At the second command, the captain of the leading 
 squadron commands, (if at a halt,) forward, and repeats 
 the third command ; he marches thirty paces and com- 
 mands: 1. Halt; 2. Right, (or left) Dress ; 3. Front. 
 
 The captains of the other squadrons command, left {6): 
 right) wheel — trox; they repeat the third command; and 
 having made a half wheel (46 degrees) command for- 
 ward ; and»if the guide is not'already on tlie side of for- 
 mation, command it there. 
 
 As each squadron arrives with its advanced flank op- 
 posite its pjace in line, each captain in succession com- 
 mands: i. Right, {ov left) Wheel; 2. March ; 3. For- 
 ward ; 4, Halt ; 5. Dress ; 6. Front. ^ 
 
 If the nature of the ground prevent this evolution, 
 the colonel would form close column, and deploy it. 
 
 •186. — The regiment ])cing in column of squadrons, to 
 fonnjine to tlie left or right, the colonel commands; 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Left (or right) iniOt^line wh^eU 
 
 3. March. 
 
 The captains in repeating the second command, ndd 
 trot. ■ 
 
 The wheels arc executed as in the school of the squad- 
 ron ; being at the point of completion th,e captains com« 
 mand; 1. Halt; 2. Right (or hft) — Dress. 
 
 487. — The regiment being in column of squadrons to 
 form line, on the rear of the column, faced to the rear, 
 the colonel commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Left—rear into lint, (or Right— -rear into line.) 
 
 3. March. 
 
 16 
 
34 EV0LUTI0K3 OF A REOI5IENT. 
 
 At the second commaud, the captain of the rear squad- 
 ron commands, countermarch by the right (or left) fank 
 — irot. 
 
 The captains ofthc other squadrons commaud, platoons 
 left (or right) wheel- — trot — eohann half left, (or right) 
 
 Except that the captain of the squadron next to the 
 rear, omits column half left (or right,) his squadron 
 marches 10 yards and makes a full turn. 
 
 At the coffimand march, the movement commences 
 throughout; when the wheels are near completion, the 
 captains command : 1. Forwaud ; 2. Guide left, (guide 
 next to the side of formation; the chiefs of flie leading 
 platoons at the command forwakd, commanding left- -■ 
 •TURN ; and forward, when the half wheel is complete.) 
 Each of these squadrons then conforms, to what is pres- 
 cribed for forming right (or left) fr wit i^to line., No. 476 
 
 -*■' 488. — ^The regiment being in column of squadrons to 
 form line faced to the rear, on the head of the column, 
 the colonel first forms line to the left front ov right frovt. 
 No. 484, and then wheels about by squadron, or platoon. 
 In all cases of the formation of line faced to the rear, 
 on the head^of the column, if there be occasion for the 
 squadrons to face promptly to the new front-, the col- 
 onel directs the captain of the leading equadron, who 
 wheels about as soon as tne first platoon of the next 
 Bquadi'on is halted on the -line ; it is then the^^duty of the 
 other captains to do the' same in succession, without any 
 further order or intimation. 
 
 489.— -In forming front or rear, into line from the col- 
 umn of squadrons, or open column, in a regiment of ten 
 squadrons, if the'colonel adds, of battle, .to tlie second 
 command, the second line, of squadron columns, formed 
 on the bead of the seventh squadron fropi the front, in 
 the sannie manner that the leading squadrons are formed. 
 In all similar cases^in tlie eight squadron regiment, the 
 two squadrons at the rear march over the most direct 
 lines to cover the flanks; the foremost one, always to 
 the flank first formed. 
 
EVOLUTIONS OF A REGIMENT. - 35 
 
 TOfFORM LINE FROM CLOSE COLUMN, FACED 
 'TO THEHJRONT, OBLIQUELY, LEFT, RIGHT, 
 AND REAR. 
 
 490. — The regiment being in close column, to foi-m 
 line faced to the front, on, and to the right of, the lead- 
 ing squadron, the colonel commands : 
 
 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Deploy to the right. 
 
 3. Marcu. 
 
 At the second command, the captain of the leading 
 squadron commands: 1. Left — Dress; 2. Front ; the 
 squadron is dressed on the markers. 
 
 The captains of the other squadrons command, /o«rs 
 riffht — trot. • • 
 
 At the coiiKuand makcit, all the rear squadrons wheel 
 by fours to the right, and march forward at the trot: 
 tlie captains halt personally in rear of the point whorv^ 
 thu left of their squadrons will rest in line ; and when 
 the rear of their columns reaches them, command, in 
 succession ; 1. Foiirs — left; 2. Guide left; and on arriv- 
 ing, the horses' heads on a line with the croups of the 
 next squadron,^ 1. Halt; 2. Drkss ; 3. Front. At the 
 command halt, the chiefs of platoons continue on, to 
 ali^jn themselve.'. 
 
 The close column is deployed on, and to the left of, 
 the leading squadron on the same principles, and by in- 
 verse means at th« command; 2. Deploy to the left. 
 
 491. — The regiment marching in close column to form 
 line on, and to the right of, the leading squadron with- 
 out halting, the colonel commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Deploy to the right. 
 
8e EVOLUTIONS OF A REGIMENT. 
 
 At-thc second coraniand, the captain of tlie kading 
 squadron proceeds to the centre of the squadron, and ff 
 the column is at the trot, commands, walk ; guide riyht ; 
 (if he commands walk, he repents the Hd'command.) 
 
 At the second command, tlie captains of the other 
 squadrons command, /ours right — trot ; (omitting trot if 
 the column be trotting; and they repeat tlie command 
 Makoii.) 
 
 When their squadrons are oj)positc their places, they 
 command, in succession: 1. Fo\irs — Left; 2. Ouideleft] 
 and when in line, icalk — march ; when the central squad- 
 ron reaches the line, the colonel commands: Regulate by 
 central squadron. 
 
 The captains command the guide accordingly, (No. 
 627.) 
 
 The regiment marching in cloee columns, line is form- 
 ed on, and to the left off the leading squadron on the 
 same principle and by inverse means ; at tbe commaud.e: 
 2. Deploy to the teft, 3. March. 
 
 492. — The regiment being in close column, to deploy 
 it on one of the central squadrons, the colonel com- 
 mands: 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Deploy on fifth squadron, 
 
 3. March. 
 
 At the second command, the captains of squadrons in 
 front command. Fours right — trot; 
 
 Those of squadrons in the rear of the fifth, Fout^ left 
 —trot; 
 
 The captain of the fifth squadron, Forward, guide ceri' 
 tre — trot. 
 
 At the command marcd, the movement of the front 
 and rear squadrons commences ; the left guide of the 
 fifth proceeds to place himself opposite the sergeant ma- 
 jor, who has been posted to mark the line, 12 paces in 
 front of the leading squadron. The captain of the fifth 
 commands marou, when hiu squadron is unmasked. 
 
EVOLUTIONS OF A REOIxMENT. 3T 
 
 • The captain of the next squadron in front, and the 
 others in his front, in <>ucce3sion, and on the same princi- 
 ples, at tlie moment*the rear of hia squadron has gained 
 squadron interval from the right flank of the fifth squad- 
 ron, comraands: 1. Fours ■LKrr; 2. Halt; and 1. For- 
 ward—trot; 2. March; 3. Guide left, the moment his 
 squadron is unmasked; and ou arriving at the line, 1. 
 Halt; 2, Dress; 3. Pront, But the squadron in front, 
 not being masked, marches immediately forward, after 
 its flank movement. 
 
 The squadrons in rear of the fifth squadron conform 
 to No. 490. 
 
 The squadrons in fronfalVays go to the right. 
 
 493. — The regiment being in close column, to fbrm line 
 obliquely to its front, the angle being 45 degrees or less, 
 by depTbyiug on a central squadron, or to the right or 
 left of the column, the colorvel first commaude: 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Squadrons riffht (or le/i) wheel. 
 "3. March. 
 
 4. Halt. 
 
 The deployjoaent is then <?oramanded, and executed by 
 the same commands, and in the same manner, as in para- 
 . graphs 490 and 492. 
 
 494. — The regiment being in close column, to formliafe 
 on the left flank, faced to the left, or right flank, faoed 
 to the right, the colonel commands: 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. 071 rear squadron — left (or right) into line. 
 
 3. March, 
 
 At the second command, the captain of the rear squad- 
 ron commands : Left into line wheel — trot. 
 ^ The other captains command, Forward — trot. 
 
 At the command march, the rear squadroa makes its 
 wheel, and the captain commands: 1. Halt;; 2; Left— 
 
88 EVOLUTIONS OF A REGIMKNt. 
 
 dress; 3. Front. Tjio markers aro so placfeJ that tht 
 squadron sliall dress forward three poccS! 
 
 The other pquadrons marching Tdt-ward are wheoltd 
 into line in the same manner, as they 8uocc?si.vrty gain 
 their distance for the proper interval, which will be 
 when the next squadron in rejir has made about two- 
 thirds of its wheel. . 
 
 When the close column, is marcliing the formation jp 
 •made in the same manner, except that the captains .9! 
 the squadrons that continue to march do not command 
 forward, 
 
 495. — The regiment marcliing in close column, to form 
 line to the right, beyond tlie head of the colbaro, the 
 colonel xommande; 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 On rlgh 
 
 March. 
 
 2. On right into line. 
 
 At tiie second command, the. captain of the leading 
 !?q^adron commands trot. 
 
 Immediately after repeating the command m.vrch, he 
 commands: 1. Eight — tiuk; 2. Forward; and having 
 marched forward 20 i>aces, •!. Halt; '1.1-iight — drejs: 
 5. Front. 
 
 At the command MARcn, all the other captains com- 
 mand the guide on the side of the "formation, if not al- 
 ready there. When the leading squadron has made 
 about oiie-third of its turn, the captain of the next squad- 
 I'on commands; Trot — march; and each of the others, 
 in 6tKicos>ion, c;ive the same command wiien the squad- 
 ron in his front has increased its distance by six ptfoee ; 
 each captain, in guccesi ion, when the heads of his squad- 
 ron horses a|^ as far advanced as the farthest; flank of 
 the squadron last for..med in line, commands: Eighth 
 turn; and tkeif, 1. Forward; 2. Halt; 3. Dulss. 
 
 If the column be trotting, at the second cummand the 
 captain of the leading f-quadron commands right; the 
 othw* captains, walk; at the couunand march, the Jead- 
 
EVOLUTIONS OF A REGIMENT. o% 
 
 ing captain coramands turn; tlie otbera, in repeating 
 mARCiT, add the command for the guide, if necessary. All 
 then proceed as above described, 
 
 Wh'cn the guide has to be changed, tho captains pro- 
 ceed, in succession, to the front of the centre. of their 
 squadrons, to comma^nd the increased gait, and remain 
 there. 
 
 The regiment marching in close column, to form line 
 to the left, beyond the head of the column, is executed 
 on the same principles by inverse means and commands. 
 
 The regiment marching in column of squadrons, line 
 is formed to the right or left, at the same commands oi 
 th«. colonel; at the second, the loading captain con:- 
 mands right (or left ;) the others, trot ; at the third com- 
 mand, \vhich they ix^peat, the leading captain commands 
 TURN ; then all proceed as prescribed above after their 
 distance is increased. If the column be trotting, it is 
 the samcs but with th(r omission of the command trot. 
 
 406. — 'The regiment being in close column, to form a 
 lino fiiccd to the rear, the colonel countermarches the 
 column, and then deploys. 
 
 The countermarch is a dangerous evolution if exposetl 
 to the possibility of being attacked by cavalry durirfg 
 its progi'^ess. It would be safer to wheel about by pla- 
 toons; in so doing the squadrop guides are governed by 
 No. 400. 
 
 497. —The regirnent marching in close column, to form 
 a line of squadron columns, faced to either flank, the 
 colonel commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. On rear squadron — by platoon left, (or rigjii) 
 
 into line of columns. 
 
 3. March. . . 
 
 At the second command, the captain of the rear squad- 
 ven commands : Platoons left telicel — trot; after its eie- 
 
40 ivOLUTroNS or a regiment. 
 
 cution, 1>€ commnnda : Fo&waud; and haviag marched 
 20 paces, Halt. 
 
 The other" captains, in succession ns th-^y gain squad- 
 ron interval, perform the samo ujovenieut as the captain 
 in roar. 
 
 The evolution may be executed by fours on the sam^ 
 principles; the colonel substitutes, in his command, th-. 
 word /o^^r» for p/a^oon. 
 
 498. — Cavalry should never surrender. If orerpow- 
 ered or surrounded it can cut its way by charging at full 
 speed, in close column. 
 
 A close colunan, which may chance to be suddenly at- 
 tacked in flank, may defend itself by instantly Avheoling 
 and advancing to meet the enemy, the flank platoon? of 
 alternate squadrons. It will be understood that the 1st, 
 .'i4, and other squadrons with od-d nuDibers are indica- 
 ted. The commands are r 
 
 1. Right (or left) platoons, alternate squadrons — 
 
 right (or left) wheel — gallop. 
 
 2. March. 
 
 3. FOKWAP.D. 
 
 -The chiefs of the platoons immediately charge. 
 
 According to circunistances, the commander may send 
 to support the charge of these platoons the corresponding 
 platoons of the other squadrons, by the commands : 
 
 1. First {or fourth) platoons — right (or lef{) wheel 
 
 gallop. 
 
 2. March. 
 
 3. Forward. 
 
 They advance,, with 60 paces distance, and charge if 
 aecessarv. 
 
EVOLUTIONS OF A REOIMENT. « 
 
 TO FORM LINE FROM DOUBLE COLUMN FACED 
 TO THE FRONT, RIGHT, LEFT, AND REAR. 
 
 499. — Tlie regiment being in double column halted or 
 marching, to form lino, faced to the front, the colonel 
 commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Front into line. 
 ' 3. Makcu. 
 
 At the second command, the leading captain of the 
 right column commands: Right— front into line — trot. 
 Of the left column, left—f)'ont into line — trot ; and all in 
 each column are governed bj* wliat is prescribed in No. 
 476; but the chiefs of the two leading platoons cause 
 them to oblique slightly, to regain the two paces of re-, 
 duced interval ; the sergeant major is posted in front of 
 the left platoon that led the right column, and faces to 
 the right. 
 
 500. — The regiment halted or marching, in double col-" 
 umn, to form line through the right ilank, faced to the 
 right, the colonel commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Right into line. 
 
 3. March. 
 
 At the second comnvind, the captains of the right col- 
 amns command: Right into line wheel — trot. '• 
 
 Tlie captains of the left column conform to what is 
 prescribed, No. 480. 
 
 At the command MiVRcn, the movements are executed 
 as prescribed in that number, and in No. 4*79. If the 
 colonel Avish to attack immediately with the line formed 
 by the right column, he sends instructions to the field 
 officer ; he may charge in echelon, as the squadrons foroo^ 
 or by the wing in line. 
 
42 EVOLUTIONS OP A REOIMEN'T. • 
 
 Line is formed, through the left flank, faced to the 
 left, on the same principles, by inverse means, at the 
 commands: 2. Left into line ; 3. Maroii. 
 
 501. — The regiment being in doiible column, halted or 
 marching, to form line in rear" of the column, faced to 
 the rear, the colonel first commands j^^^^ioons right (or 
 left) about wheel, march,, halt, or foravard ; and then 
 proceeds as in No. 499. 
 
 If the left column be short of the other, tlie leading 
 captain, after wheeling about, at the comiiiandj/Voni i?i- 
 to line, commands, first, forward, if at a halt ; he form? 
 •iin the line of the first squadron. i| 
 
 If the colonel wish to form but one column faced to i 
 the rear, with the support of a second line, he commands, 
 right column — platoons right abo-at wheel, and left front 
 ■rnto.line of battle ; or gives inverse commands to the left 
 column; or, instead of adding the words "of battle,'^ giv- 
 Jag orders to a field ofiicer. The lieutenant colonel or 
 major, as the case may be, immediately puts his column 
 in motion, or continues it in motion, and changes direc-' 
 ..tion to the right or left, to march behind the other wing ; 
 .and there forms a line of squadron columns, No. 623; in 
 this ease, the fifth squadron would cover the left flank, 
 last formed^of the first line; and the commander of the 
 second line would order his last squadron, the tenth, to 
 cover its right flank, (getting position by simply wheel- 
 ing platoons right about.) If the left column be formed 
 into the first line, the inverse would take place ; and the 
 Bixth squadron line cover its right flan^, and the first it- 
 'left flank. 
 
 502. — If the colonel, marching in double column, 
 forms line to the right (sv left, tp attack immediately, be 
 commands, right {ov left) into line of battle; in which 
 case both columns wheel into line, and the first advanc- 
 ing, the field ofiicer in command of the second retains it, 
 for distance. 
 
EVOLUTIONS OF A UKaiMENT. 4S 
 
 603. — The regiment in double column, the colonel may 
 form line of battle with either column while advancing; 
 the field officer with the other column halts it until the 
 first passes, and then commands, left (or right) front 
 into line. The colonel commands, left (or right) cohnnn, 
 form line — left (or right)— -trot ; {ov gallop.) At this 
 command the lejiding captain commands, form squadron 
 — trot (or gallop ;) the others, column half— left (or 
 right) — trot (or gallop ;) and proceed at the commau^ 
 MARCH, as to form left— front into line, except that when 
 their heads of squadrons are in line with the leading 
 squadron they comm&Tid,form sqtiadron-^lcft, {ov right.) 
 
 504. — The regiment in double column, marching, br 
 halted, and the colonel desiring to use it a^ a column of- 
 attack, to the front, he commands: 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. form. squadron 8. 
 
 3. March. ... 
 
 At the second command, the captains commai^d form 
 squadron — right — trot, and form Isqtcadron — left— trot, 
 respectively. - 
 
 At the command MARcri, each equadron is formed as in 
 the school of the squadron ; tlie captains of the right 
 squadrons command ^rurtZe left; those of the left com- 
 mand guide right, and their right guides preserve inter- 
 vals and align by the right squadrons. 
 
 The colonel may add gallop to the second command^ 
 
 The colonel may send a field officer to command the 
 ohai-gc of the leading squadrons; the column following 
 with interval of 60 paces between the squadrons that 
 charge and the next. 
 
 TO FORM LINE FROM^ OPEN" COLUMN BY COM 
 BINING TWO OR MORIi: MOVEMENTS. 
 
 505. — The first clause of the colonel's preparator3^ 
 commands always applies to tlic leading squadrons. 
 
44 EVOLUTIONS OP A RKOIMENT. 
 
 The regiment marching in open column, a part haa 
 changed direction to the right, and the colonel wishes to 
 form line faced to the left of the part that has turned, he^ 
 halts, or not/at will and commands: 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Left into Knc and left front into line. 
 
 3. MARcn. - 
 
 . At the Eecond command the captains, in the new di- 
 rection, command : Left into line wheel — trot. 
 
 The captain who commands the leading squadron, not 
 turned, commands: Left front into line; the others: 
 Column half-left — trot. 
 
 At the command march, both movements are executed 
 'as prescribed, Nos. 470 and 476. 
 
 506. — The open column having turned to llie right, 
 and the colonel wishes to form line on the right flank of 
 the part that has turned and faced to the right, he com- 
 mands : 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Right into line and left front into line. 
 8. Ma^ch. 
 
 Each part of the column conforms itself to what has 
 been prescribed for right into line lohe&l and left front 
 into line ; but the captains of the squadrons that per- 
 form the latter movement wheel left .about by platoon, 
 as soon as the leading platoon of the next squadron is 
 halted, without orders or intimation. The colonel's com- 
 mand should, if possible, be given just as the last platoon 
 of. a squadron is turned in the new direction. 
 
 If the colonel commanded right into line qfhatlle, the 
 part of the column still marching to the new rear vrould 
 continue on to form a second line, or flank supports 
 only. 
 
 507. — The open colutpn having turned to the left, 
 .part only being in the new direction, to form line 
 
EVOLUTIONS OF A REGIMENT. 45 
 
 through the right flank of that part, and faced to the 
 right, the colonel commands the halt, or not, at will, and 
 then commands: 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Right into line and right front into line. 
 8. March. ^.'\ 
 
 \^ich movements are executed as has been prescrib- 
 ed for right into line wheel and right front into line, by 
 the two parts of the column. The head of the first 
 squadron forming right front into line must oblique to 
 the right. 
 
 508. — Part of the open column having turned to the 
 left, to form line through the left flank of that part, and 
 faced to the left, the colonel commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Left into line and ri^t front into line. 
 * 9. March. 
 
 Each part of the column conforms to what has been 
 prescribed for left into line wheel and right front into 
 /ine ; but the captains of the squadrons which perform 
 the latter movement wheel right about by platoon, 
 without waiting for orders, as soon as the leading 'pla- 
 toon of the next squadron to form, is halted. 
 
 609. — In the four last combined evolutions, the Col- 
 umn may have turned at an angle much greater or less 
 than a right angle. The oblique line is formed on the 
 same principles as in Nos. 477 and 478, the colonel omit- 
 ting ''right (or left) forward ;" and the leading captain 
 of the column, in the original direotion, himgelf, firsifc 
 wheels his platoons to the new angle. 
 
46 EVOLUTIONS 0? A EEG-IMENT. 
 
 ARTICLE THIRD. 
 
 THE LINE— ITS CHANGES AND MARCH. 
 
 613- — The regiment being iir line, to change front to 
 tiie right or left, 45 degrees or less, the colonel com- 
 
 laands : T 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Change front — Left (or riffht). forward. 
 
 3. Marcu. 
 
 f At the second command the captain of the right squad- 
 ron commands: Jiiqht wheel — trot. 
 
 The captains of the other squadrons command: For- 
 ■>:iard — Guide right — trot. 
 
 At the command march, the movement commeftces 
 throughout. The first squadron having wheelcd^Jesa 
 tliaa 46 degrees, its captain halts it and dresses it^'n the 
 markers.- - * ' 
 
 As the other squadrofife arrive in succession, their 
 right flanks opposite the points they should occupy in 
 line, their captains command: I. Right wheel; 2. Mahcji; 
 G..";FoR\>'AUD ; aind near lhe~line:~l. Halt; 2. Dress; 3. 
 Fr.oNT. 
 
 To-'change front to the left is er^^ecuted on the same 
 -prl^Biples by inverse commands and means : 
 
 514. — Th^regiment being in line, to' change front ob: 
 liquely on ft central*squadron, the coloael commands: 
 
 ^^ 1. Attention. 
 
 % Change front — on fourth squadro7i — left (or 
 
 right) forward. 
 3. March. 
 
 At the second, command, the cftptain of the fourth 
 aquadron commands, Jiight wheel — trot, aad he and the 
 
EVOLUTIONS OF A REOIMENT. Cf 
 
 captains to the left conform to what is prescribed for the 
 right and other squadrons in the preceding No, 513. 
 
 At the second command, the cnptnir.s of . the right 
 squadrons command, Fours — right about. • " * 
 
 The fours having wheeled about, and JliP squadrons 
 marching to the rear, these captains cotnmand Oui<jk 
 right. As the squadrons, in succession, arrive with their 
 (present) right opposite the point it should occupy in the 
 now line, they command: 1. Right wheel. 2. Marck. 
 3. Forward, And having passed the line : \, Foiits- — 
 Jtight about. 2. Halt. 3. Dress. 4. Front. 
 
 To change front, right forward, is executed on the 
 ^aoie principle by inverse commands and means. 
 
 The next squadron to the central in retiring must al- 
 low for lessening its interval three paco-i by 'wheeling 
 fours about towai'd the central squadron. 
 
 515. — The regiment being in line, to change front to 
 the left or right, 45 degrees or less, by throwing back a 
 flank, the coh>nel commands : 
 
 1. Attention, , 
 
 2, Change front-^lcjt (or right) back. 
 3. Majicu, 
 
 .» 
 
 At the second. command, all the captains command, 
 Fours — right about. 
 
 When the fours have wheeled about, the captain of 
 the right squadron commands: 1. Left wheel. 2. March. 
 i;. Forward. 4, Fours — Right about. 5, Halt. 6. Eighi 
 — Dress, 7. Frokt. 
 
 The other captains, when the fours have wheeled 
 about, -command Guide left; and when, in succession, 
 their squadrons arrive with their (present) left opposite 
 the point it should occupy in the novr line, they com- 
 mand: 1. Left wheel. 2. M\Vi.ca. 3. Forward. And hav- 
 ing passed the line : 1. Fouri right — About. 2. Halt. 3. 
 Drb9s, 4. Front. 
 
48 EVOLUTIONS OF A REGIMENT. 
 
 The markers for the right squadron are posted when 
 it has completed its wheel to the rear ; the colonel or 
 officer superintending their position, indicates to the 
 captain when to cease wheeling. 
 
 To change front, right back, is executed on the same 
 principles by iliyeree means and commands. . 
 
 516. — To change the front of the regiment in line, at 
 a greater angle to the right, faced to the right or left, 
 pr to the left, and faced to the left or right, the colonel 
 wheels the regiment by platoons to the right or left, and 
 then forms left or right front into line; th^n if it is to face to 
 the opposite direction, it is wheeled about by platoone ; 
 all of which evolutions have been fully described. 
 
 517. — The regiment being in line, to advance in squad- 
 ron columns, the colonel commands: 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Forward by platoons. 
 
 3. March. 
 
 At the second command, each captain command^ bi/ 
 platoon. 
 
 At the command march, each squadron marches for- 
 ward in column of platoons, as prescribed in the school 
 of the squadron, except that the captains of squadrons to 
 the right of the 'squadron of direction, after command- 
 ing MARCH, add guide left, and those to its left, guide 
 right. The central or right centre squadron is the 
 squadron of direction ; the chief of its leading platoon 
 regulates the gait; the cliief of the next on the left es- 
 tablishes, with him, the base on which the commanders 
 of the leading platoons of all the other squadrons regu- 
 late their alignment ; the squadron guide on the flank of 
 the leading platoon of the regulating squadron is charg- 
 ed with the direction of the march ; this, with the base 
 of the alignment, is superintended l3y the colonel, or by 
 the adjutant or a field officer, as he may direct Tb« 
 
EVOLUTIONS OF A TIECHMENT. 49 
 
 ^qjaadrou giilde with" tlie leading platoon of the other 
 3((|}j(idron3 marches on the flank of the leading platoon 
 next toward the regulating squadron ; they preserve the 
 i&tervals under correction of the captains. 
 
 If anj cuptain find it necessary to reduce the front of 
 hils eolumu, he commands by fours; and when the neces- 
 sity cfeases, reforms platoons. 
 
 518.— If circumstances ren<3er it ncce33ary,the coloDel 
 commands : 
 
 • 1. Attention. 
 2. By fours. 
 . 3. March, 
 
 ^ Which is executed throughout as in the school of the 
 fkiuadron, except that each squadron guide with the 
 flank that is leading marches on the flank; of its leading 
 seit of fours ; that of the squadron of direction on its 
 V;i^ht, the others on the flank next toward the squadron 
 of. direction ; the march is conducted on the satne prin- 
 ciples and ineans as by platoons. To reform platoons, 
 the colonel comraatids : • .» 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Form platoons. * . 
 
 3. March, 
 
 At the second command, the captains command : Foryn 
 platoons — trot. 
 
 -At the command march, the movement is executed 
 thiKJUghout as in the squadron. 
 
 51.9 — The march by the left of squadrons is executed 
 the same as has been prescribed, except in the commands. 
 The colonel commands : 2. By the left-^forivard by pla>- 
 tKtons. To reduce the front, the colonel's commands ay,e 
 the same ; but the captains command ; 2. By the left^ty 
 fours. 
 
 It 
 
JM EVOLUTIONS OF A REGIMENT. 
 
 * 
 620. — To change direction while marching in line" of 
 
 columns, the colonel commands : 
 
 1. Attention. ■> 
 
 2. Change direction to the right, (or left) and 
 
 sounds the signal, "to the right," (or *Jito the 
 left.") 
 g» 
 
 The pivot squadron halts; as the movement progress 
 ses, its leading platoon will slowly wheel on a halted 
 pivot ; the other platoons will turn at the commaiid 
 rorvWARn. 
 
 The regulating squadron steadily retains its previous 
 gait, the loalk, directing its march circularly to the right. 
 
 The squadron of the wheeling flank trots, so as to pre- 
 serve alignment with the regulating and pivot squadrons. 
 The leading platoon commanders of these throe squad- 
 rons rais'e their sabres ; those of the other squadrons 
 align themselves upon them. Intervals are preserved 
 from the side of the pivot by the guides ; (which, in-'tbe 
 pivot wing of the regiment, during the wheel, will be 
 the non-commissioned officei's on that flank of the lead- 
 ing platoons.) 
 
 To cease wheeling, the colonel commands forward, 
 and sounds the signal, "forward." The direct march^t 
 the walk is immediately resumed by all. 
 
 521.— The regiment marching in line of columns, to 
 cause it to march to the right, (or left,) the colonel eoca^ 
 mands: 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Squadrons rights (or left) 
 
 3. March. 
 
 At the second command, the captains command right. 
 
 At the command march, they command turn; the 
 chiefs of leading platoons repeating instantly after the 
 captains. Each column t^rns as prescribed in the school 
 
EVOLUTIONS OP A REGIMENT, 51 
 
 of the squ.iidron; the regiment is then marching rn open 
 column. '• 
 
 522. — If after the commaivdi forward by platoo7is, the 
 colonel AclJ regulate by rigJU (or left,) on the same prin- 
 ciple of No. 528, the leading platoon commamder of llie 
 next sqimdron, and of the one on the flank, Avill consti- 
 tute the base of, alignment. The captains will all com- 
 mand the guide toward tlie flank indicated, and the 
 squadron guides, at the Iieads of the column, will march 
 on that flank of the platoon-. 
 
 523. — The rcgimenL^iiarching in open column, or col- 
 umn of fours, to cause it to march to either flanlc in -a 
 line of columns, the-iicrlonel cpmmands: 
 • ■♦■ 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Squadrons rigJn, (or left.) 
 
 3. March. • 
 
 At'the second command, the captains" command right; 
 at the command JiAncn, they command turn ; the chiefs 
 of leading platoons repeating after the captains. It is 
 executed throughout as in the school of the squadron ; 
 and the lino then advances .as has been prescribed, Nos 
 511 and 518. 
 
 5.24. — To cause the regiment marching in line of col- 
 umns to gain ground toward the right, (or left,) and 
 froat, the colonel commands: 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Squadrons half rights (or left.) 
 8. March. 
 
 At the second command, the captains command ri^t; 
 at the command march, they command turn ; (both re- 
 peated by the chiefs of leading platoons.) The captains 
 command forward, 'when the leading platoons have 
 made a half turn, (45 degrees.) 
 
52 EVOHUTIONS OF' A REGIMENT. 
 
 During the oblique march, tUe ooniniand^^fl of the 
 leading platoons are nnBworahle l.^fh-for ali^iyiien: and 
 intervals, which are regiHated toward the flank t. 
 whicli tlioy ol!)li<i[uc; thc^uidos of the Iqadiog philcon- 
 ;5pvern t»Uoir inarch eo that the centre of the plnteor.- 
 mny be one pace behind the couinKnider. 
 
 525.~To resume the, direct march, 4he,cok)nel com- 
 mands : " 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Forti'ard. 
 
 ^ 3. . Mauc H. ^ 
 
 ^ Ati,th« SHjcend conimand, the Cijutains oonmiand !ji; 
 vj the command :marcii, titey comnia-ud turn; and when 
 the columns have turned to the original (direction, th'-y 
 3omm£fhd forward. ■^ 
 
 520.— The rogiment, halted .or marcliing, in line of 
 '^umnSj'Ho face, -or march to the rear, the colonel com- 
 mands: 
 
 1. Ailention. • . 
 
 2. Platoons right about xClicel. 
 
 3. Hargii. 
 
 The .captains add to 'the second command trot; the 
 wh'eel.^. being near completion, they command halt. • If 
 the colonel wishes the regiment to move immediately to 
 -the rear, he commands, in time, 4. Forward. 
 
 Field and staff ofticers, &c,, are posted on the new- 
 front, opposite their old places, and the march is govern- 
 ed in all respects by the rules that Iiavo been prescribed 
 for the march ^o the front. 
 
 527. — The regiment being in line, to march to the 
 front the colonel commands: 
 
EVOLUTIONS OF A. REGIMENT. CS 
 
 1. Aitcniion. 
 
 2. Forward. 
 
 3. March. 
 
 « 
 
 At the second command, a poiiit of direction is giver, 
 to ^i-e*^uidou bearer (left guido second platoon) of "the 
 sqi^a4von of direction, nnloss otlierwise expressed in tlie 
 words of commhnd ; this is always the central, or right 
 centre squadron. 
 
 In repeating the second command, the captain of tlic 
 regulating squadron (if centre) adds, guide centre ; \h( 
 captain on its right, a<lds77tfiJe ^<?/i(; on its left, guidt 
 right. . • 
 
 The commander of the second platoon of the regula- 
 ting squadron gives the gait for the squadron and- I'egi- 
 ment; the commander of the third, regulating himself 
 on that of the second, is most responsible for the base of 
 alignment, corapfesed of the platoon commanders of this 
 squadron ; to mark it, Uiosc of the flaiik platoons of 
 this squadron carry their sabres vertically, the hilt as 
 high as the cheek, edge to the front, whilst tlie line con- 
 tiiriffes to advance; this base is cwefully superintended 
 by the lieutenant colonel or adjutant. 
 
 The squadron guides toward the squadron of direc- 
 tion, preserve the squadron intervals; they regulate 
 tl\eir gait, so that the line of troopers shall be one pate 
 behind the platoon commau'der^, who align, thoinselvcs 
 upon those of the squadron of direction. , * 
 
 528. — If, after t]ie command forward, the colopel-iadd 
 regulate hy right, (or left,) the captains all co^imand 
 guide right, (or left;) the principles of the march are the 
 same; but the outer guide of the flank squadron i< 
 charged with the direction, and the nearest platoon 
 commander with the g:at; the next platoon commander 
 is most answerable for the correctness and a^eadiness oi 
 the base; the flank platoon commanders ^'aise their sa- 
 bres. • " 
 
64 EVOLUTIONS OF A REGIMENT. 
 
 529.~Tlie march in line, especially at raj. id gait:?, be- 
 ing difficult, as well as of the first importance, the col- 
 onel eiiould exercise the regiment at it frequently ; all 
 the principles for the direct march of the squadron arc 
 applicable. 
 
 If at the gallop there should occur an excessive j;>rcs- 
 sure in a squadron, its captain will, order a platooiiHo 
 pull up, and remain in rear until order be restored.- «■ 
 
 530. — If an obstacle occur before a platoon, its com- 
 mander conforms to No. 406^ if it obstruct the squad- 
 ron, the captain will break by platoon to the front; if 
 the whole ground be obstructed, the captain obliqueSj 
 or wheels by platoon, to the right or left, to passini-ear 
 «f -one of the. next squadrons. He returns to the line 
 Avhenl/he obstacle is passed., 
 
 531. — The regiment marching in linef^o halt it, the 
 colonel commands : 
 
 1. Attention, 
 
 % Halt. ■#» 
 
 3. DnESS. 
 
 At the third command, the captains command right 
 (or left) DRESS, ns they may be situated, to the .left oj; 
 right of the regulating squadron; its captaini_ if the 
 guide-be central, commands cen/r<'--DnESS. The lieuten- 
 ant cO'lonel commands front. 
 
 532. — The regimept marching in line, to gain ground 
 to.the.#ont and towards a flank, the colonel commands: 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Platoons Jeft {ov right) half .wheel. 
 
 3. Mahcu. 
 
 4. FoRV,'ARP. 
 
 This movement is executed at the same time in each 
 squadron, as prescribed, No. 398. 
 
EVOLUTIONS ©F A REGIMENI. &5 
 
 533.'— To resuroie the direct march the colonel com- 
 maads : 
 
 1. AtUntion. 
 
 2. Platoons right (or left) half wheel, 
 
 3. March. 
 
 4. Forward. 
 
 Which is executed as in the^chool of the squadi^bn," 
 
 534. — The regiment rtiarching in line, to^ain ground 
 tow";".rd3 a flank, the colonel commands : 
 
 1. Att€nti.on. 
 
 2. Platoons' right (or left) lohcel. 
 
 3. March. 
 
 4. Forward. ^ 
 
 To resume the direct march : 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Platoons left (or right) wheel. 
 
 3. March. 
 
 4. Forward. 
 
 Which movements are executed as in the school of the 
 f^uadron, • 
 
 535. — The reginaent being in line, halted or marching, 
 to face or march it to the rear^ the colonel commands: 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2_ j Squadrons right (or left) about wheel; or, Pla- 
 
 { toons right (or left) ahmit wheel. 
 
 3. March. 
 
 The captains add to the second command trot. The 
 
 ■whcclftbeinguearlycompleted, they command: I.Halt; 
 2. Left — Df{ess. 
 
 If the colonel wishes tlie line to move immi^diately to 
 
5^ EVOLUTIONS OP A REGIMENT. 
 
 the rear, before the completion of the wheels, he com- 
 mands : 
 
 4. .Forward, 
 
 The moyement by platoon is executed in all thesquad- 
 
 rons as prescribed, No. 400 ; wheeling by squadron, 
 they j;egulate their march on tlie pirinciple prescribed 
 for the platoons in that number. Tlie captains do not 
 command front. Field and staff officers, ike, are gov- 
 erned by iS^o; 526. 
 
 • 
 
 536. — ^Tlie regiment being in line, to retife to pas.-> 
 another line, or change its position oh broken ground, 
 the colonel commands: 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Retire hy fours. 
 
 3. Makoh. 
 
 At the second command the captains c&mmahd : Foun 
 left; Column left. ^' ' 
 
 At the command mauch, it is executed throughout as 
 in the squadron, and the march is conducted as pres- 
 cribed, No. 518. _ : ■ ' . . 
 
 To form line of columns, or line, with the original 
 front, the colonel conitnands : 
 
 1. Attention. 
 Q: Fours — Left about. 
 S. Form platoons. 
 4i. March. 
 
 Otherwise, the colonelmay command: 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Left front into',lhi:e. 
 S. Mai^ch. 
 
 And then wheel about by foura* 
 
EVOLUTIONS OP A REGIMENT. 57 
 
 3S7. — The regiment marching in line, to change it to 
 alieo of columns, the colonel commands; 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Bi/ platoons. 
 
 3. March. 
 
 » 
 
 To' reform the line ; * 
 
 * - ft 
 
 • .■ T.' Attention. . ■* 
 
 2. Form squadroHs^-trot. 
 
 3. March. 
 
 Which movements are executed as prescri^beJ for the 
 squadron. The colonel may command : 2. By the left 
 — by platoons. 
 
 538. — To change direction, the regiment marching iu 
 line, the. colonel first forms a line of columns. 
 
 639. — ^The regiment being in line, to relieve and pas.* 
 another line in its front, the colonel conforms to what is 
 prescribed^ No. ST/, if it be not already . in line of col- 
 umns; as it passes the squadron intervals of .the .first 
 line, the squadron guides of both lines rstire behind 
 their adjacent platoons. 
 
 Thje colonel may reduce front to'columns of fours; and 
 this must be done if confusion exist iu the first line. 
 
 ARTICLE FOURTH. 
 ECHELONS. 
 
 540. — The regiment being iu line, to marcli it for- 
 ward, keep back one of its wings, and preserve the pow- 
 er effacing iu every direction, the colonel commands: 
 
58 EVOLUTIONS OP A REGIMENT. 
 
 J. Attentlo7i. 
 
 2; Squadroiis by the right (or left)— forward in 
 
 echelon. , . 
 
 3. March. 
 
 At the second command, the captain of the right squad- 
 ron commands foncard — guide right ; at the corajuand 
 MARCH, it moves forward ; the captain of the next squad- 
 ron commands: 1. Forward — guide right; 2. march, hy 
 the time the squadron on his right has marched the dis- 
 tance of squadron front and interval ; the other captains 
 do the same in succession. 
 
 To march by the left, the movement is made on the 
 same principles, at the commands: 2. Squadrons by the 
 left— foncard in echelon ; 3. march; the captains con> 
 mand guide left. 
 
 The regiment being in..echelon, by the right, to throw 
 forward the left, is executed on the same principles," at 
 the command squadrons by the left — forward in echelon. 
 If marching, the change may be made in doubling .the 
 gait. 
 
 541. — The regiment marching in echelon, to halt it^ 
 the colonel commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Squadrons — Halt. 
 
 To march forward again : 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Forward — March. 
 
 542. — The regiment being in echelon, by the right (or 
 l^t,) to make face in echelon in either case, to either 
 flan]^, the colonel commands: • 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Squadrons left (or right) wheel. > 
 
 3. March. 
 
EVOLUTIONS OF A REGIMENT. 59 
 
 At the eecond command, the captains coramancl, left 
 xohiel — trot ; at the completion of the wheel, halt. 
 
 If. the regimentrbe marching, all the commands are the 
 same; and if the colonel do not wish the halt, when the 
 wheels are three-fourtlis executed, he commands for- 
 ward; to which the captains add, a change of the guide. 
 
 643. — The regiment being in echelon by squadrons^ if 
 required to act by the rear, is wheeled about by platoon 
 or by squadron at the trot or gallop. * 
 
 644. — The regiment being in line, to retire in echelon, 
 the colonel commands: 
 
 1. Attention,- 
 , 2. Squadrons by the right (or left) — retire in 
 ecJielon, 
 3. March. 
 
 At the second command, the captain on the right flank 
 commands jt3?aioons right about wheel ; he repeats march, 
 and adds guide left. 
 
 The captain of the next squadron gives the same com- 
 mands, so that his squadron retires with squadron front 
 and interval distance ; and so the others. "When the 
 next to the last squadron has retired the prescribed dis- 
 tance, its captain, and all the others which are retiring, 
 command: 1. Platoons right — about wheel; 2, March ; 
 3. Halt. 
 
 To continue the retreat, the colonel eommand? : 1. At- 
 tention; 2. Squadrons by the left — retii'e in echelon; 3. 
 March ; which is executed on the same principles by iur 
 verse means. The colonel may cause the left and other 
 squadrons to halt and face the front when they arrive 
 on line with the right squadron. 
 
 545. — The regiment being in column of squadrons, to 
 form it in echelon, faced to the front, by either flank, the 
 colonel commands: 
 
60 EVOLUTIONS OF A REGIMENT. 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. S.quddrons to t]ie right (or left) — in eehehn. 
 
 3. Marcu.. 
 
 4t the second command, tho captains of all but 'the 
 sq\iadron in frorrt command, /ok rs right (or left)-:— trot. 
 
 Each captain, when his squadron has marched until 
 there is platoon fronx interval, frgni. its flank to a per- 
 pendicular line through the ilank of the next in froiit, 
 commands.: 1. Fours — left (or right ;) 2. Halt; 3. L^t 
 (or right) — Dress ; 4. FR0^•t. 
 
 64G. — The reginient bqjn^ in column of squadrons, 
 halted or marching, to form it in echelon, fronting 
 obliquely to the right or left, the colonel commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Squadro7is right {ov left) wheel. 
 8. March, 
 
 .4. Halt (or forward — in echelon.) 
 
 At the second-command, the captains command, right 
 icJieel — trot. 
 
 The colonel gives his fourth command when the squad- 
 rons have wheeled about 55 degrees ; (when the flank 
 of each squadron has become unmasked.) 
 
 The squadrons carefully regulate their wheel by the 
 one in front; on the march, distance and interval are 
 gradually corrected ; they conform to No. 540. 
 
 547. — The regiment being in open column, to form it 
 in echelon of squadi'ons, faced to the same front, by ei- 
 ther flank, the colonel commands ; 
 
 1. Atte^ition, 
 
 2. Squadrons to the right (or left) — in echelon, 
 
 3. March. 
 
 At the second command, the captain of the leading 
 squadron commands, left front into line — trot ; he halts 
 
^<^M- 
 
 Ttiqe OO. Jj 
 
 "rA 
 
 \- \ 
 
If 
 
EVOLUTIONS OF A REO^IMENT. 61 
 
 i\m leading platoon ab 17 pace^; iho obliqnitj;_of march 
 of the others is increased. 
 
 The captains of the other squadrons "coromand, for- 
 ward — column riciht — trot; each-of tlicse captains, When 
 the' rq^r of his squadron has reached itsinterval from 
 the i;ight of the squadron on his left, commands: L Pla- 
 toons left into Ivic — loheel ; 2. march; 3. X^if— Dress; 
 4. Fro NX, 
 
 If the echelons are formed to the left, the lending 
 equadron is formed right front into line, andjthe others 
 are conducted inversely to what is presoiibe'd above. 
 
 If the open column be marching, the leading captain 
 commands, form squadron — Icft^ adding trot, unless al- 
 ready trotting ; the other captains, column right — trot ; 
 and each, having 'marched the proper distance to the 
 rig^t: 1. Platoons left wheel; 2. March; 3. Fohward — 
 Guide left ; and having reached distance from' the next 
 leading squadron, walk — makch. 
 
 540. — The regim'e;it marohing in dlose <5olumn,tofoian 
 it in echelon, faced to the same front, by either flank, 
 without halting, the colonel commands : 
 
 1; Attention.- 
 
 % Squadrons to the. left (or right) — inecheloji. 
 
 3. Makch. ^ 
 
 At the second command, all but the leading captain 
 command, fours — left — trot. 
 
 At the command march, the leading captain com- 
 mands guide nght ; the others repeat, march; and each, 
 when he has gained the proper interval, commands, 1. 
 F*our9 — Right; 2. 'Guide right ; and IFa/yt— March ; so 
 as to be at his prescribed distance from the line of the 
 squadron to his right. If the close column bo trottiqg, 
 the leading captain commands, wa^A: — march; (unless 
 the colonel commanded gallop) and the others omit the 
 command trot. 
 
 The regiment being at a halt in close column, to de- 
 
&2 EVOLUTIONS OF A REGIMENT. 
 
 ploy it instantly in edition, No. 545 is conformed to; 
 except tlifvt atlbe colonel's third command, tlio loading 
 squadron marches forward a distance of its front and 4 
 paces. In ajilyancing, (he third squadron from the front 
 and other squadrons to its rear would not niofe until 
 those in front had gained the prescribed distance. • 
 
 550. — ^The regiment being in echelon, right or left 
 forward^to form line to the front, the coloDel command?: 
 
 1. Attention.- 
 
 2. Forward into line. 
 
 3. Marcd. 
 
 At the second command, the captains of all but: the 
 leading 'Squadron command, forward — guide right, or 
 left, (as tUe right or left be leading) trot. 
 ' At fhe command march, the squadrons move forward 
 to their places in line, are halted, and aligned on the 
 leading squadron. 
 
 If the echelons he marching, the colonel gives the 
 same commands,' which /ire repeated only bj' the field 
 officers; he sounds the signal for doubling the gait, oi 
 otherwise the leading squadron halts. 
 
 551. — The regiment being in echelon by squadrons, 
 right or left forward, to form line to the right or left on 
 the modt advanced squadron in the new direction, the 
 colonel commands: 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Right (or left) into line. 
 ■*^\ 3. March. 
 
 At the second command, the captains of all the 
 squadrons command right (or left) wheel-— trot. 
 
 At the command march, all wheel ; and the wheel Be- 
 ing completed, they all command forward; and immedi- 
 ately after the captain on the Hank of formation halta 
 
EV0LUTI0H6 OF A REGIMENl!. 68 
 
 and aligns his squaclron on tkc markers, the others c 6m- 
 mand the guide — toward that, squadron, and halt and 
 aligA their squadi'ons in succession. 
 
 t- 
 552. — The regunent being in echelon, right or left, for- 
 ward, to form line faced to the front- on a centrar^r 
 other squadron, the colonel commands : 
 '* ' «- ' 
 
 . . 1. Attention. * ^ : * 
 
 V '2. 0;f (sxich a) squadron into line. 
 3. Marcu. 
 
 At the second c6mmand, the captains of squadrons ih 
 advance of the name'd squadron comiiSand fours right 
 'about. 
 
 At the command march, the fours wheel about, ,the 
 captains command guide — toward 'the squadron of for- 
 mation ; they march a horse's length beyond the line of 
 that squadron, wheel right about by fours and dress. 
 
 The other squadrons conform to Np. 550. 
 
 554. — The regiment in echelon, right forward, if sud- 
 denly required to form an oblique line towards the left, 
 the colonel commands: 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Oblique line to tJie left, . - 
 8. March. 
 
 At the second command, the captains command l&ft 
 wheel — trot. 
 
 When the squadrons have wheeled into line, which 
 passes through tbo squadron left guides, the captains 
 ©ommandHALT. 
 
 If the colonel wish to advance without halting^ he 
 sounds the signal /orward, before the completion of the 
 wheels ; the regiment moves forward on the principle's 
 that have been prescribed. 
 
 The left being forward, oblique line to the right i« 
 foitned by inverse meana 
 
U EVt)LUTIONS OF A REGIMENT. 
 
 655, — The regiment bciag in line, to advance ki-e^Ii*- 
 
 lon by half regiment Ih c-colqn el* comma nds: '^ 
 
 •'*',' • ' *■•• 
 
 1. Attention, 
 
 2. Wings by the right (or icft) foyjirirrj "n f-helon. 
 .' 3. March. 
 
 ♦* *- ' , 
 
 At.tlie second' comraand, the captains of the designa- 
 ted wing commaud yb;;i/.'arc? — grade right (or left.) "^ 
 
 The movement being commenceci, if theije be two field 
 officers present, the lieutenant colonel takes comrtiand of 
 the right wing. The right wing includes the central 
 squadron of direction. 
 
 ■ If tliere be orily one ^eld officer, he Sbmmands «the 
 loft wing. When the right wing has gained n distance 
 oqiial to its front, . he commands left wing forioard — 
 march; the guide in both wings is to the right when the 
 right is advanced, and the inverse. The colonel may 
 add to tiie second aommand,' at- half distance. 
 * ..,.-■ 
 
 556._-.The reginient being jn echoJon by wing, and 
 the colonel wishes to form, or to march by echelon of 
 equadi'onSjhe commands as in JSTo.^S-iO.to which the move- 
 ment is conformed, commencing by the right or left of 
 ench wing at the same time. 
 
 Tlje colonel wishing to change the order of only one 
 wing, he sen'ds orders to its commander,, who confoiins 
 to No. 540. ■ When the squadrons are in echelon, he 
 conamands the halt. ^ . 
 
 557. — The regiment being in echelon, by gquadroD,'to 
 form one wing in line the colonel sends orders to its 
 commander, who commands : 1. (such a) wing forward 
 ■Into line; 2. March. The captains conform to No. 550, 
 If it have no separate commander, the colonel gives the 
 above command. 
 
 If he wish to form both wings in echelon bywing, he 
 commands : 1. Attention; 2. On t?Le right (or left) of 
 uings— forward into line; 8. March. 
 
EVOLUTIONS OP A REGIMENT. 66 
 
 At thft second command, each field officer gives to liJs 
 wing the command, (such a) wing forward into line. 
 
 558. — The regiment nharching in echelon by squadron, 
 to form column of squadrons on the leading squadron, 
 the colonel comnlands: 
 
 1. Atte7itton. 
 
 2. Form column. 
 
 3. March. 
 
 At the secbnd command, the captains of all but the **■ 
 ioadipg squadron commands, fours right (or l^ft) — trotj 
 I hey repeat the command march. 
 
 The squadrons g«in the rear of the leading squadron 
 by the flank movement, and are wheeled inta line, 
 moved forward until the proper distance is gained, then 
 tlie captains command the^gait of the leading squadron. 
 
 At the halt, the column is formed on any squadix^noB 
 the same principles, gaining no lost ground to the front, 
 at the colonel's command :- 2. On (such a) squadron—^ 
 form column. 
 
 559. — Echelons can very readily attack (and thereby 
 •defend themselves) in every direction ; are manoeuvred 
 and changed to lines with great simplicity. 
 
 In echelon, whilst you attack, or prepare -to "attack, 
 the enemy, you secure your awn flank, or you prepare 
 to turn his flank. 
 
 Leading echelons are very effectually covei'ed in flank. 
 Echelons being contiguous, and unmasked, they wjth ad- 
 vantage follow up a successful charge, or cover one 
 which is repulsed. If successful, whilst the rest of the 
 enemy's line is engaged with you, the successful echelon 
 attacks him in flank or rear. 
 
 They are ever ready to improve an opening given by 
 the enemy ; and you can attack one of his wings, or any 
 part, without engaging all your troops at once. 
 
 18 
 
66 EVOLUTIONS OF A REGIMENT. 
 
 Echelons are useful in pftsaiog out of a defile to sup- 
 port troops already engaged — successful or defeated. 
 
 560, — ^The regiment being inline,^ retire by ajtei- 
 nate squadrons the colonel commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Retire by alternate squadrons — trot. 
 
 3. March, 
 
 At the second command, the captains of the second 
 
 and other even-numbered squadrons command, fours — 
 
 right about — trot. At the command mafsCii, they wheel 
 
 ♦about by fours, and the captains command guide left. — 
 
 The lieutenant colonel commands thip retiring line. 
 
 Having retired one hundred paces, or the distance or- 
 dered, or at the sound of trumpet signal halt, the lieu- 
 tenant colonel commaods/owrs — right about. The cap- 
 tains repeat the command, and add halt. 
 
 The colonel then commands retire ^ at which the cap- 
 tains of the alternate squadrons in front immediately 
 give the same commands as prescribed for the others. 
 The colonel then commands march ; they pass to an 
 equal distance in rear of the other. line, and at the com- 
 mand or signal of the colonel, face about to the front, 
 ae pi'escribx^d for the squadrons that first retired. 
 
 The direction of the line may be changed during the 
 retreat. If necessary, columns of fours will be formed 
 vrhilst retiring. [See No. 399.] 
 
 ARTICLE FIFTH. 
 
 CHARGE. 
 
 5^1. — The charge is th6 decisive action of cavalry. 
 
 Cavalry, like each of the three great arms, dependent 
 on the others, the battle once begun awaits their action. 
 Its opportunities pass in moments. Its succeasful com- 
 
EVOLUTIONS OP A REGIMENT. OT 
 
 mander must have n cavalry eye aiM rajiid decision; 
 once Iftunched, its bravery is. successful. 
 
 Infiintvy colnmns, battered by artillery, have failed in 
 their attacks upon a position. The cavalry charges the 
 batteries and supports; the infantry hastens to make 
 ^ood the advantage; the cavalry, .disunited and attack- 
 ed, or threatened by Uie enemy s, rallies under cover of 
 the other arms. 
 
 At the moment of the enemy's first success — he has 
 perhaps broken the first line, and makes a disorderly 
 pursuit^ — the cavalry seizes the moment to overthrow 
 his battalions. 
 
 An enemy expecting a charge should be deceived, if 
 passible, by some' demonstration. If lie attempt to 
 change his order, then instantly begin the gallop. 
 
 If popir^iblc, at the moment of a charge, assail your 
 enemy in flank; — or charge him in flank, when serious- 
 1 J engaged with your infantry in front. 
 
 Cavalry charges tlie enemy's cavalry .to drive him 
 from the field, to return against his battalions with more 
 liberty. 
 
 Meeting an enemy by supprise, the cavalry should in- 
 statitly charge his. This decision will give the advan- 
 tage. _ - " " . • 
 
 A line of cavalry should meet the rapid and disorder- 
 ed charge of another at the trot. The enemy's lino, al- 
 rjcady broken, will recoil — be thrown off from its impos- 
 ing order. 
 
 The pursuit o^ cavalry broken by. 'a charge depends 
 upon the relative oircumstances of the armies,"but spec- 
 ially upon the cavalry reserves. Every effort of impet- 
 uosity should be made to throw a defeated line upon a 
 second, so as to disorder and involve it in defeat. It is 
 well to push the defeated until they are thoroughly.dis- 
 organized in flight; but this may be carried out by th« 
 flanker squadrons. It is generally important to rally 
 promptly. This can be done with advantage while ad- 
 vancing. Then attack the enemy in rear or flank. 
 
 The conipaander of cavalry sends two well-mounted 
 
63 EVOLUTIONS OF A REGIMENT. 
 
 officers or iion-conieoissione J ofTiccrs to precede his ad- 
 vaaceand reconnoitre ground ovfci: which he is likely to 
 charge, and of which he is i^tioj'ant; if (he enemy id in 
 sightj^they will gallop, strniirh't toward l.im, and as near 
 as th<"'y can without risk of being captured ; they may 
 discover fea'uues of ground of which advantage may be 
 taken, or which ma}' have been ruinous or destructive in" 
 a charge. 
 
 Cavalry never charges without a reserve. 
 
 The charge is made with the greatest velocity a"nd 
 reguh'-rity possible; in speed and order there must be a 
 mutual sacrifice; seek in the charge, with a judicious 
 proportion, to attain the maximum of each. 
 
 Circumstances permitting, the line approaches within 
 200 paces of the enemy at the trot, then galloping . with 
 increasing speed, the charge is commanded at 50 or*~6p 
 y&,rds. . . . • 
 
 Crowding and pressure, when the horse is exerting 
 his powers, inipedes him, and makes him uncontrollable; 
 every jostle or rub diminishes his strength. Although 
 rapidity in the approach to tlse enemy is gonernlly im* 
 portant, very ioipprtant too it is that the horses should 
 not arrive exhausted, or even distressed and blown, .w 
 
 Tlie centre of the squadron exactly follows the cap- 
 tain ; the troopers do tlieir best to preserve their inter- 
 vals and alignmenVby. the centre ; the flanks must not 
 be in advance. 
 
 .562. — The formation for attack depcn^s^upon the des- 
 cription and dispositions of the enemy, uidou the nature 
 of the groun.l, and upon the composition of your force. 
 
 The first line formed for attack should seldom consist 
 of more than a third of the cavalry ; the second, or sup- 
 port, disposed in squadron columns oOO to 400 yards in 
 rear ; the reserve equally in their rear in close column. 
 If the enemy be deficient in cavalry, this third body is 
 more dispensable ; (and it is. here considered as a dis- 
 tinct body from those whose movementa are prescribed.) 
 
EVOLUTIONS OF A REGIMENT. 69 
 
 563. — Under circumstances wliich require and adroit 
 of a more conoeiftrated attack^ the regiment chaigcs in 
 column of sqjiadrons, (or of attack.) 
 
 564. — The charge as foragers, from close ordts-r oi? vby 
 skirmishers, haa the advantage-^ of great freedom of tna- 
 tion and will in the troopors ;of less loss from fire ; it 
 prepares the way for a decisive shock of the charge in 
 line; it is the'u.sual charge against batteries, the gunners 
 being more or less <;overed by tlieir pieces and isolated ; 
 the pistol is used in it at will; the flanking squadrons 
 will sometimes* second the charge of the line by thus 
 charging the enemy in flank. '' 
 
 565. — The regiment being in order of battle, the col- 
 onel wishing to charge, if -the sabres be not drawn com- 
 mands then\ to be drawn ; he then commands : 
 
 1. Attention to charge-. 
 
 2. FORWAUU. 
 
 3. M.vRcn. 
 
 The regiment being in regular motion, he commands : 
 
 !^ro^— March. 
 > _ ■ 
 
 Min' passing oyer luOopaces at- this gait, (according 
 to circumstances,) he commands : 
 
 Gallop— Ma^cu. 
 
 After galloping about 150 pace.?, he directs the charge 
 to be sounded — it is repeated by all the trumpeters — he 
 commands: 
 
 Charge.;, • 
 
 "Wliich is repeated by all the officers. 
 The troopers conform to the school of tlie squadron.. 
 The second line preserves its distance; at the .pom - 
 raeneement of the charge it is commanded to trot ; 
 
70 EVOLUTIONS OF A REGIMENT. 
 
 clo^ng again to ile distance from the line of battle, it is 
 lialted. • 
 
 If there had been a' line of skirmishers, when the 
 charge is aunounced, or the regiment begins the trot, 
 they =are rallied at full s}>eed in advance of the flanks, 
 and if possible charge as foragers upon the enemy's 
 flanks ; otherwise they rally at, or behind the flanks to 
 be ready to support — to charge in flank the enemy who 
 has repulsed the charge, or to pursue. 
 
 The flanking squadrons retain their position inline oi 
 battle in the charge until they receive orders, or oppor- 
 tunity of action occurs. It is their important duty to 
 protect the flanks of the r-cgiment. 
 
 In charging infantry, the troopers shout ; against cav- 
 alry, silence is recommended. 
 
 '566. — In the exercise of the regiment, at the com- 
 mand charge, the squadrons. do no more than increase 
 the speed of the gallop, and charge sabce,, '• ' 
 The colonel then commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Squadrons. 
 
 3. Halt. 
 
 4. Dkess. 
 
 At the command attention, repeated by all officers, 
 the squadrons 'b'egin to lesseji t^e *pace, and all carry 
 sabre. •» 
 
 At the command squadrons, repeated ^by the captains, 
 the chiefs of platoon command platoon, and the squad- 
 rons trot. r ^ t 
 
 The comrnand halt is repeated by all. If the Jine be 
 advancing, the. colonel's commands are : 1. Attention to 
 charge; ^. Trot {or f/dlop;) 3. Uwxn. 
 
 '56*7.— The enemy being routed, when the colonel 
 causes the ra% to be sounded the troopers halt and rally 
 
EVOLUTIONS OP A REGIifENT. 71 
 
 oa their captains and officers, -who take their places in 
 Mne, if circumstances permit. 
 
 668. — Tiic colonel and field officers charge, oj^osite 
 their places, aligned with the captains ; but the colonel 
 does not charge unless the whole regiment charge at 
 the eame time. 
 
 The standard-bearer changes places with the corpo- 
 ral in his rear, and follows him. 
 
 When about to charge, the colonel may order the 
 left flank trumpeters of the fiquadrons to assemble in line 
 under a chief trumpeter, 25 paces in r^ar of the centre 
 of the lino. In action a trumpeter accompanies each 
 field officer and the* colonel (in addition to the chief 
 trumpeter.) 
 
 569. — If a cliarge is repulsed, the officers endeavor to 
 prevent the troopers from being thrown on the second 
 line or the supports ; they are rallied in their rear. - 
 
 The second line, then advancing in columns' until 
 they are clear of the rout, form litre to repeat the charge, 
 or execute the orders they may receive. 
 
 The flanking squadrons, if possible, charge -the pur- 
 suing enemy in flank. 
 
 670. — The regiment of ten squadrons in order of- bat- 
 tle, the colonel may cause the flanking squadrons, one or 
 both, to skirmish in front of. the line; previous to 
 charging, he may order them to charge as foragers., 
 
 The colonel, to prepare for the charge, may order the 
 flank squadrons to be deployed as skirmishers with- 
 out a reserve, at WO paces in fi^out of the line ; imme- 
 diately on passing the line the captains command : 1. 
 Squadron as skirmishers — at tioo paces ; 2, March. The 
 outer flank of each squadron advancing straight to the 
 front, the troopers of each squadron will form a line 
 from the flaiik of the regira'ejit to its centre. 
 
72 EVOLUTIONS OF A REGIMENT. 
 
 After firing, or not, the colonel conimanda the charge 
 as foragers. 
 
 In the eight squadron regiment tlie colonel sometiojeR 
 ord>'M'3 the flank squadrons from the line, to conform to 
 what has been prescribed for the flanking sqiuadrons. 
 
 Untler some circumstances the colonel orders the fovi'rth 
 j)latoon, or even the two left platoons, of all the squad- 
 rons in line ta charge as foragers ; a field ofBeer •com- 
 mands them ; the line moves forward to support them. 
 
 571, -^The charge in column'may be used in any cir- 
 canutances, but especially against infantry squares and 
 columns. ' ^ 
 
 The column of squ.adrons advancing, th« cdlo"nel or- 
 ders the two leading squadrons to charge. Their cap- 
 tains immediately order the gallop. The second squad- 
 ron, with about 60 paces distance, is ordered to charge 
 at the moment of the collision &f the first squadron; it 
 will find the enemy devoid of fire. 
 
 The colonel follows the charge at a slower gait, retain- 
 ing-r-the power of acting as events may require *, he send& 
 two more squadrons when and where eircumstaneea in- 
 dicate. 
 
 If any troopers of .tlie first,, squadron are in the way 
 of the second, they^avoid the danger of being run do\Yn 
 by facing and spurring towards the enemy. 
 
 The cliarge is.also made from close column, in which 
 case the captain of tli'e second takee the increased gnit 
 of-thje-first squadron when that has gained 60 paces dis; 
 •taQce. In. either case the coloners comraainda are *. 1. 
 Attention; 2. First Jtvo squadrona — to the charge; S. 
 March. ■ At the second command the captains- ord<3r the 
 increased gait, trot or gallop; (the captain second squad- 
 ron in close column waiting till the first hrfs-got its dis- 
 tance.') 
 
 When there is choice between exposure to the right 
 or left obliq»e fire.pf infantry, choose the rigJit; the left 
 ia the most formidable. • • 
 
 It. charges from column and echelon, the lieutenanti 
 
EVOLUTIONS OF A REGIMENT. 12 
 
 colonel and major charge at the head of the squadrons 
 which the colonel designates. 
 
 572. — The colonel edmetimes orders stirmishera, or 
 the leading £X[nadron, to eliarge as foragers ; the two 
 next charge together, if necessary. The troopers ^^i!o 
 . have charged -as foragers rally in rear of the column. 
 
 The enemy's infantry once struck, the cl)arge is suc^ 
 cessful ; but charges which fail utterly approach very 
 near ; they slacken the gait — take time to turn about — 
 or turn in frifct of other infantry in line — or pass by 
 other faces of the square ; thus adding twofold to their 
 exposure to fire ; besides the disgrace of defeat, doiibling 
 the individual chances, of being shot dovtv?.. 
 
^4 BPECIAL SERVICE OF 
 
 SPECIAL SERVICE -OF CAVALRY 
 IN THE V^EST. 
 
 THE CAMP, 
 
 573. — The selection of the cavalry camp on the march 
 18 very important; the more especially in view of the 
 supjwrt of the horses, exclusively or even principally, 
 by grazing. 
 
 The guide, or a staff officer, or both, should precedo 
 the column, sometimes miles, accompanied by escqrt if 
 necessary, to be assured of the best body of grass, suf- 
 ficiently near to water and to the road. 
 
 It is sometimes necessary to encamp without water, 
 chiefly with a view to grass. On such occasions all ani- 
 mals must be carefully watered within an hour of the 
 halt, and provision made for the night for the men -by 
 means ,of canteens m* kegs^ or both. 
 
 It is vev^ certain that bodies of cavalry, performing 
 the same amount of marches and duties— one, under a 
 commander ignorant, or injudicious and careless in this 
 respect, will have broken down horses, whilst the other 
 may maintain them in good condition. 
 
 A commander in the West is subject commonly .to the 
 great difficulty and risk of necessarily grazing his ani- 
 mals at night, whilst they must be protected from an 
 enemy. The C:^mp should be formed early ; sometimes 
 it is protected in rear by a wide river, and the squad- 
 rons disposed on three sides of a parallelogram ; suffi- 
 cient space is included for night grazing. 
 
 To encamp regmarly, the squadrons are formed in 
 line with squadron intervals; they arc dismounted.; 
 without forming rank, the troopers ui^saddle and un- 
 

 dD 
 
 
 
 r 
 
 
 LJ 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 dD 
 
 oD 
 
 an 
 
 dH 
 
 dQ 
 
 
 ^ 
 > 
 
 ^ 
 
 © 
 
 
 
 
 ( 
 
 o 
 
 
 o 
 
 ( 
 
 ....0. 
 
 
 r "o" ■ 
 
 I o { 
 
 i 
 
 I o 
 
 i-R 
 
 ^\ ?^ 
 
 
 I' 
 
 -..ij 
 
 S' 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
CAVALRY IN THE WEST. t5 
 
 bridle ; tliey deposit the saddles in Uuo iu fi ont of all 
 the horses, and place upon them their sabres; the horse, 
 blankets are retained surciagled to the horses ; if to be 
 picketed, under charge of an officer, they are led out as 
 far as is safe, in order to preserve the nearer grass for 
 the night. The position which has been assigned to the 
 videttes from the advance guard indicates the liniits. ' 
 
 The troopers then pitch the tents, on the line which 
 has been marked, in front of the saddles ; with intervale,. 
 they cover the extent of each squadron mounted in line, 
 leaving the squadron interval clear. 
 
 ' If the picket rope is to be used, it is ten yards in rear 
 of the tents; it is usually suspended to posts a^out six 
 feet high, and the horses tied by the head ; it piay lie 
 on the ground, the ends secured, and the horses be tied 
 te it by straps, by the ankle, with from 20 to 30 inches 
 play; or by the head. The tents of company officers 
 are 30 paces in rear of the picket rope ; the line of cook 
 fires 20 paces in front of the men's tents. 
 
 It is in some parts of our desert interior: necessary, op. 
 account of deficiency of grass, to herd the horses ; but 
 veri/ rarely by night. This must be commenced with 
 much caution, and is not safe until the horses arc some- 
 what broken to the routine of service, and hav.e suffered 
 fatigues, and are hungry. ^ ' ' 
 
 There is little risk of their escaping or being driven 
 far off if they are hoppled, which should be done ; and 
 then, a very few of the best horses, or those known to 
 be leaders* among them, or to be easily frightened, 
 should be picketed. * 
 
 About an hour after encamping the horses should be 
 watered ; then the blank^ets are removed.' . '^ 
 
 Orders are given what. dispositions are to be mad% in 
 case of a night alarm ; the^^laces^of assembly of differ- 
 ent squadrons or platoons, dismounted ; ' and who. are to 
 be charged exclusively with the security of the horsey. 
 
 In an enemy's country, the camp should not be. within 
 gun shot o'f cover for an enemy ; or it should be very near, 
 and the cover be occupied by tbe guard or sentinels. 
 
76 SPECIAL SERVICE OP 
 
 ^o,<ilwai/s there is dautrer of losing horses I)}' prowl- 
 ing Indians, .notwithstanding the vigilance oF ecntinels, 
 if ihey are picketed at night in proximity to cover. 
 
 If the night grazing has not been good, and generally, 
 particularly iii sumimr, it is necessary that the hoi-ses 
 sliould graze nnliour or two in the morning; and they 
 should not be allowed to be disturbed until the last mo- 
 ment, and at the signal. 
 
 THE MARCH. 
 
 574.— iTKe march sliould generally be in column of 
 fouro, the squadrons with 40 or 50 paces intervals, in 
 order that a check in one column should not extend its 
 disturbing intluonoe by causing the next, to stop; it also 
 tends to the avoidance of dust. 
 
 From 10 minutes to an hour after the march, a halt 
 of five minutes should be made, the squadrons to be dis- 
 mounted, informally in column, at the command dis- 
 mount, from their captains. If there be grass, the 
 squadrons should oblique from the road before die- 
 ftiountiug. The horses should be encouraged to feed at 
 the shortest halts; at those for ten minutes or more, as 
 when watering, the commander should givo the com- 
 mand, nubit. 
 
 Every hour, a hdt of from two to five minutes should 
 be made. ^ 
 
 Troopers are" prohibited to leave the ranks for any 
 purpose on the march, unless on foot, leaving the 
 Horse led. ^ * . 
 
 About noon, or about the m'iddle of the march, when 
 circimistances allow a choice of time, the "watering 
 call" should be sounded; the Jtroopers should generally 
 dismount and unbit. The watering is superintended by 
 the offioers; Often the hor^ would f»ul to be watered, 
 from the impatience or want of perseverance of the 
 tioopcr. This halt is from 20 to 45 minutes. Videttes 
 or sentinels from tlie advance guard are posted. 
 
 After one of the halts the troopers should load, ablbut 
 45 minutes; or twice for 30 minuteSr 
 
CALVARY IN THE WEST. 77 
 
 There are several advantages in trotting a part of tlic 
 march : 
 
 By it the horses are sooner reUoved of the saddle and 
 burden, and have longer time for feed and rest, 
 
 Hoi-se and man are relieved from the constant motion 
 and fatigue of the same muscles and parts. 
 
 It avoids a bud carriage of the person of the trooper, 
 sometimes injurious to the horse; it awakes and relicvep 
 him. 
 
 It is found, from experience, to lessen the liability to 
 Boro backs. 
 
 It is seldom, in any great prairie plain, that a creek 
 bed or a ravine, or a swell, does jnot render a small ad- 
 vance guard a proper precaution ; it may be very small; 
 the main body of the guard is with the baggage in rear; 
 flankers are occasionally necessary. . • 
 
 Long marches or expeditions should be commenced 
 very moderately. The horses, if untrained, must be 
 gradually inured to their labors; in other, words, the 
 march must first be a training. Fifteen miles a day at 
 first; — afterwards they will be equal to twenty-five. 
 
 ESCORTS.- 
 
 575. — Cavalry is costly, and very valimble for it.s, 
 proper service; it is, from its liability to the deteriora- 
 tion of the horses from many causes always existing, a 
 very delicate arm. Its officers must exercise great 
 judgment, as well as incessant vigilance, to maintain, 
 with economy, its efficiency under;general, western, or 
 any other service. The commanding officer of the 
 troops is also responsible for their condition in the na- 
 ture of his orders. 
 
 The use of the cavalry portion of the escort of a train 
 being chiefly to ascertain and report the approach of an 
 enemy under cover of woods, broken ground, (fee, it is 
 the less needed for that duty on the prairies and on the 
 desert slopes of the mountains, where the eye habitual- 
 ly commands many miles. 
 
79 SPECIAL SERVICE OF CATALRY IN THE WE3T. 
 
 It tfr.ill not be Employed alone on such service without 
 an absolute necessity. By night, and in long halts by 
 day, ■when, as n«ual, without grain, the horses of caval- 
 ry must graze over much space, it is exposed to risk of 
 los3, and is unequal to the safe defence of it? oivn horses. 
 d-corts, too, are always on the defensive; but cavalry is 
 very weak on the defensive ; it defends itself only by 
 attacking : thus infantry is by fnr the stronger arm . for 
 that duty, even by day. It is also a service of slow and 
 often interrupted marches, and' thus the most injurious 
 to cavalry horses. 
 
 Personnges, mails, <fec., cannot be escorted far, faster 
 than at the rate oT 25 miles a day, by cavalry, (uulessit 
 ]>e dismounted and disposed in light wagons.) 
 
 It will be avoided, _if possible, to make cavalry detach- 
 ments less than a platoon, or greater than half and less 
 than ji whole squadron ; (company.) These details will 
 be furnished from the same squadron at one time. This 
 saves time, and even difficulty, in the preparation of 
 equipage and rations, and adds to general convenience 
 and comfort. 
 
TITLE FIFTH. 
 EVOLUTIONS OF THE LINE. 
 
 PRELIMINARY RULES AND REMARKS. 
 
 676. — The evolutions of the line do not caaentiaily dif- 
 fer from the evolutions of the regiment. All the move- 
 ments described in Title IV are applicable, with the mod-* 
 ifications given under the present title, which supposes 
 a brigade of two regiments, each of eight squadrons. 
 
 •If two brigades be united under the command of a 
 major general, each of the brigadier generals repeats the 
 general commands of the commander of the division ; 
 they are executed in each brigade as is detailed in the 
 present title. When the brigades are to execute an ev- 
 olution which requires a particujar.comraand for one o? 
 them, the brigadier gives that command, instead of re- 
 peating the general command ; conforming to the like 
 case for the second regiment of the brigade. 
 
 The interval between the regiments in line is two pla- 
 toon fronts. In line of close columns, with " closed in- 
 tervals," it is 6 platoon fronts ; (always 3 less than the 
 number of squadrons of 4 platoons ;) at '• full intervals," 
 it is half a squadron less than full front. Full interval 
 is understood, unless the command express, " closed in- 
 tervals." 
 
 In the line of battle there is two platoon fronts inter- 
 val between the flanks of the interior flanker squadrons . 
 
 The distance between regiments in close column, mea- 
 sured the same as between squadrons, is two platoon 
 fronts ; injopen column, it is throe platoon fronts. 
 
80 EVOLUTIO!?S OF THE LINE. 
 
 In line the lirigaJier general is fOO paces in front of 
 tli£ ccntiit' (►!' the brigade ; iu the evolutions he goes 
 wheperer ITi? pre<?ouce is neceesMy. 
 
 ^'hc couMuant! attention, is iufnu-illatelj'- repeated after 
 the Drigiiilkir generals. 
 
 Preparulor}; commands are repeated with exactitude ; 
 those of exLCUtion should b(i' repeated with a rapidity so 
 great as 'to he partially simultaneous with the iitterance 
 of the general officer; so that there may be unity in their 
 execution by Llie troops. 
 
 Iq all f^n-mations the regimental markers place them- 
 selves upon the prolongation of the line, at the prepar- 
 atory coin tna ad of their, colonel ; the sergeant majors 
 face toward the regiment of formation. 
 
 The assistant adjutant general traces the lines, when 
 m-dercd by the brigadier general. He indicates to tlie 
 adjutants the principal points of direction for the march, 
 or for formations. 
 
 The cdimnand kront, is not given in one rcgimcnit un- 
 til the markers of the other regiment arc established on 
 the proloiicfation of the line. 
 
 Trumpet, signals apply only to the first line — are tc- 
 psated only by the trumpeters of that line ; commands 
 for the second or other linos are given by the voice. 
 
 To draw or return sabre, the brigadier general com- 
 mands : 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Dram sabre, or Return sabre. 
 
 ,ThQ regiments draw, or return, only at the commands 
 of their colonelrt, (given as prescribed, with the pause.) 
 
 The brigade being in column, the leading regiment jb 
 designated "first;" the one behind, "second." In line, 
 the one happening on the ri(/ht is designated " first ; " on 
 the left, " second." 
 
 Always in forming close column on ft flank squadron 
 of the brigade, all the other squadrons go in rear of the 
 one designated. 
 
EVOLUTIONS OP THE IINE. 8f 
 
 Wlion the brigadier general commanda halt, ]u3 ele- 
 vates his i-)ght arm and sabre to their full extent. ' ^ 
 
 PIo does the same nt the command MARcn, if all the 
 troop?! are to cxeeutc the t?ame movement; in this ease 
 the captains repeat instantly after tlie brigadier general. 
 
 The distnnoc between two, lines of brigades is gener- 
 ally equal to the front of a rqgiment ("half distance"); 
 between the regiments in a brigade in two lines it 
 should seldom exceed 800 paces. 
 
 5i*7T.— rBoth as to commands of all the ofllcers and 
 their c:teculion,- that whiob is prescribed in the evolu- 
 tions of the regiment is conformed to in the following 
 movements : 
 
 To form an open column, its march and change of 
 direction (including the march by botli flanks to the 
 rear to pass a, defile.) 
 
 To form a column of squadrons and a close column 
 (faced to a flank); and an open column, from line. 
 
 To close a column of squadrons. 
 
 To form a close column from an open column. ' 
 
 The march and change of direction of a close column ; 
 its counter-march ; and to gain ground to flank or rear : 
 and its wheel by platoons to repel a sudden attack in* 
 flank. 
 
 To advance in double column, (each regiment forms 
 its own ; the brigadier general commands, regulate by 
 right, or left, and the guides will be ordered accord- 
 ingly). 
 
 To reduce tliem to a doul^e column of fours ; to face, 
 or march, to the rear. 
 
 To pass flora a column of squadrons or a close column 
 to an open column; from an open column to a column 
 of fours ; from a column of fours to an open column ; 
 and from an open column to a columfi of squadrons ; and 
 a close column ; (but the leading squadron, 2d regiment, 
 trots like the rest.) 
 
 The formation of line from an open column, or col- 
 
S3 EVOLUTIONS OP THE LINE. 
 
 limn, of squadrons, to the ■^nght or Irft^ and on rlrjht or 
 on l(ft into line. - 
 
 To form from close column, oji right ov on left into 
 line. 
 
 To form line to the front from double colunin3; .^nd 
 faced to the rear on the head or rear of the columna,^ 
 
 To form line from an oj^en column where a part has 
 changed direction, in the several cases, by combining 
 two or more evolutions; (each -regimental commander 
 gives, or conforms to, so much of the general command 
 as is applicable to his regiment.) 
 
 In some of these movements, one of the colonels does 
 not immediately repeat, or give his commands; but in 
 due and evident order of succession; — as in change of 
 direction of a column ; — or on right into line, d'c. 
 
 In tw© lines, the second line confornis its movements 
 in line of squadron columns, so as to retain its distance 
 and parallel position in rear. 
 
 If the first line retreats by alternate squadrons, the 
 Sd line stands fast until the nncvou nura,bered squadrons 
 (which do not commence the movement) begin to retire, 
 and uioves at the same time. 
 
 In the advance or retreat of the 6rst line in echelons, 
 the squadron columns of the second line conform their 
 movements to those of the corresponding squadrons of 
 the first line. 
 
 ARTICLE FIRST. 
 
 COLUMKS. 
 
 The brigade being in line, to form a general cloM col- 
 umn on a central squadron without changing front-— 
 
 578. ^The brigadier general commands: 
 
 1. Attentio?i. 
 
 % On right of 2cZ regiment — close column. 
 
 8. Marco. 
 

 1 'l ! 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i . 1 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 / 
 
 /. 
 
 1 
 
 / 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 # 
 
 1 
 
 
 ; ;//// ' HI Ij in 
 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 ' ' 1 • : i i 1 1 I ! 1 
 
 1 1 I : i • 1 ! } 1 1 1 1 f 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 / / // '7 //^ /// 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 ' / / / ! ; ! i ' ■ n 
 
 III • • 1 : : i ' 
 
 i ! ! / / / ; A / ; ; 
 II, ' ■ • 1 1 , f < 
 
 ill' ! : : ^ ! ! ! i 
 
 ' 1 1 , . ; / ; / / ; 
 / / / .' / / / ; / / 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 1 ! ' ■ ' '. '• ! ' 1 
 1 11 •'.',' 1 1 1 ■ 
 1 ' ' i : ■ / .' >' 
 ' ' 1 ''!.'! ' 
 
 1 1 ' ! ' ' 1 ' ' • 
 
 • 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 ! 
 
 ' • ' 1 ' • 1 1 
 
 ' ,' ,' ' 1 ' ! 1 
 1 ' ' '.''■',' 
 
 (' * ' ' ' i 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 .' / / 'Si 
 
 ! ! I i i : 
 
 ' 1 : ' 1 *! 
 ;,'■>! 
 
 1 ' 1 1 1 ' 
 
 i > ! 1 ' , 
 
 — ;: — i' ._; — / — \. 
 
 ^ 
 
 
EVOLUTIONS OP THE LINE. 83 
 
 .The 2d regiment conforms ^o'No. 448. 
 
 Tlie colonel 1st regiment, to the second command, adds 
 fours left — trot ; the captains conform to what is pres- 
 cribed for those on the right of the squadron of foima' 
 lion, No. 450. 
 
 .Tlie regiment on the right always goes iii front, ia 
 forming the general close column on a "central squadron. 
 
 Regimental close columns, full interval, are formed on 
 the right (or left) of each regiment at the commands jw 
 each rcf/imcnt — on right {ov left) squadron — close columr.. 
 
 To form a liue of regimental close columns, closed in- 
 terval, the brigadier general commands: 2. On left df 
 Isi regiment, and right of 2d regiment — close columns. 
 The regiments conform to Nos. 449 and 448. The inter- 
 val may be corrected by a flank movement of either col- 
 umn. 
 
 579. — ^The brigade being in line to form general cIobc 
 column on a flank, without changing front — 
 The brigadier general commands: 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. On the right of \st regiment— 'dose column. 
 
 3. March. 
 
 The Ist regiment conforms to No. 448. 
 
 The colonel 2d regiment repeats the above commandtA; 
 the captains conform to what is prescribed for those on 
 the left of the squadron of formation, No. 450, except 
 the captain of the right squadron, omits ''trot;" the 
 other captains, except the last, as they arrive abreast of 
 the right squadron, (with interval to give squadron dis- 
 tance when wheeled into line,) command wa/^'-^•MARCl£r, 
 and regulate by the left ; when they are all abreast, on 
 a line parallel to the flank of the 1st regiment, the mass 
 Will be about 50 paces from the flank line of the let 
 regiment column, and the squadrons opposite their 
 places; the colonel then commands squadrons half left 
 
 When tlie squadron columns, thus parallel with and 
 
84 FV'ODUTIONS OF THE LINE. 
 
 at proper distance from tKe rear squadron, lat Regiment, 
 arrive in its. re ^r, the colonel commands: 1. Fours — 
 Left; 2. Halt; pausing between the -words "fours" and 
 "left," so that the captains can repeat both after him ; 
 they then command: 1. Dress"; 2. Front. 
 
 Close column on the left flank is formed on the same 
 principles by inverse means at the command : 2. On left 
 of 2d regiment — close cohimn. 
 
 580, — The brigade being deployed by regiment in 
 mass at full interval, to form general close column "on 
 light (or left) regiment. 
 
 The brigadier general commands: 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. 071 1st regiment — close cohimn. ^ 
 Z. March. 
 
 The let regiment stands fast. 
 
 The colonel of the 2d regiment commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Fottrs — right; squadrons half right — trot. 
 
 3. March. 
 
 4. Regulate by the left. 
 
 And 60 paces from the column of formation -^s/^««c?- 
 rons half left; — and it is conducted on the principle of 
 Ko. 569 ;*but each captain gives the command irot\ and 
 all the squadron columns are abreast from the first, on a 
 line perpendicular to the front. 
 
 Close column on the second regiment is formed on the 
 same principles, by inverse commands and means. The 
 'moving regiment always goes in rear. 
 
 No. 681. — ^The brigade marching in line, to form a 
 general close column without halting — 
 
EVOtUTIONS "<JF the line. S5 
 
 The brigadier general commandB: 
 
 1. Attention; 
 
 2. 071 left of 2d regiment— ^close colwnn. 
 
 3. M!uicii. 
 
 The 2tl regiment conforms to" No. 451. 
 
 The colonel of the 1st regiment repeats the 2d com- 
 mand, and adds /o?/}-s — left — trot; all the .squadrons con- 
 form to what is prescribed for all but the leading squad- 
 ron, No. 451. 
 
 Close coluniu on the 1st regiment is formed on the 
 same prinoijiles and inverse means at the command o:i 
 rigid of 1st regiment— close column. 
 
 582. — The brigade marching in line by regiment in 
 mass at full interval, to form general close column with-, 
 out halting, the brigadier general commands: 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Oil 1st rcgimeni — close column. 
 
 3. MAucn. 
 
 The colonel 2d regiment commands: 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Fours — right — trot. 
 
 3. March. 
 
 4. Regulate hy tfic left. 
 
 And when in rear of the 1st rfgiraenjt^ 
 ]. Fours — Left, 
 
 And when the regiment has arrived at ita distauce—- 
 
 Walk—-}ilA-Rcn. 
 
 piose column on the 2d rogimdntisformedouthesaDie 
 piinciples, hj inverse commands and meana. 
 
86 EVOLUTIONS OF THE LIN2. 
 
 683.--The brigade being in general close column at a 
 halt, to change direction, to the left or right, by a flank 
 moYement, the brigadier general commands: 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Change direction by the right (or left) flank. 
 
 3. March. 
 
 Tlie 1st regiment. conforms to 2\^o. 455. 
 
 The colonel of the 2d regiment repeats the brigadier 
 general's commands; airits squadrons conform to what 
 is prescribed for the rear squadrons, No. 455----(the lead- 
 ing squadron preserving distance in the column.) 
 
 SSi.-'-'The brigade being in general close colnrai?, to 
 form a line of regimental close columns, closed interval, 
 faced to the left or right, the brigadier general com- 
 mands in each regiment— -change direction by the right 
 (or left)flcml\ 
 
 Each regiment conforms to No. 455. 
 
 A general close column ia formed, faced to a flaijk, 
 from a line of regimental olose columns, on the same 
 principle, and by the sami? commands, it being the re- 
 versal of the above, movements. 
 
 ARTICLE SECOND. 
 
 FORMATIONS OF LINE. 
 
 585. — 'The brigade marching ia open column, to form, 
 front into line. 
 The brigadier. general commands: 
 
 1. Attention, 
 
 2. Left-front (or y^ght-front) into 4ine. 
 
 3. March. * 
 
Wi 
 
 ■Jr 
 
 :f^7<^rM JT 
 
 d 
 
 
 
 y 
 
F^e^ 
 
 1^4 
 
 % 
 
 y 
 
 y 
 
 /^' 
 
 ^ 
 
 ■ ■ . \ V 
 
 
 <-^ 
 
 c>,^ 
 
 yj< 
 
 'A 
 
 ^. 
 
EVOLUTIONS OF THE LINE. 87 
 
 .Tlie leading regiment conforms to No. 4*76. 
 
 At the 2d coramand, the colonel of the 2d (next) rcgi* 
 ment coniuiands : 2. Cotwnii half left — trot, lie re- 
 peats MAHcii, and ad"d, guid<^ right. The head of the 2d 
 regiment is directed to a point half its depth, and 80 
 paces in rear of the place its right will occupy in line. 
 There the colonel commands, columoi half right. Half 
 the coluiim being in the new dii-eclion, the colonel com- 
 mands: 
 
 1. Left front into line. 
 
 2. March. 
 
 Tlie leading squadrons conform to No. 476. The cap- 
 tains, who had not changed direction, eontiriiie their 
 course, and turning half right, opposite their [daces in 
 line, march forward and furm hftfront into line. 
 
 If the column be at a halt at the second command, 
 the colonel 2d regiment commands: 2. Forward trot — 
 column half left. 
 
 To form two lines, the brigadier general commands: 
 2. In each regiment — leftfront into line. Each regiment 
 conforms to No. iVG.—th" 2-1 forming line of columno. 
 
 586. — To form the brigade column on au c^bliquc line, 
 left hack {ov right back,) iha leading regiment conforms 
 to No. 477. The 2d regiment turns as m the preceding 
 paragraph, directing its course about 50 paces to the 
 left of the marker of the preceding rcginicnt; and not 
 turning half right on forming left front info line, the col- 
 onel adds, left forward, and conforms to No. 478. 
 
 587.— To form the brigade in an oblique line left for- 
 ward, the brigadioi- general adds to his commarM 'left 
 forimrd. The leading regiment conforms to No. 'iti'^. 
 The colonel of the next, if the obliquity be grcitt, makes 
 a much less tnrn ; and directing the head of his column 
 nearly to the position of its right in line, commands on 
 right into line ; and conforms to Nos. 480 and 482. 
 
88 EVOLUTIONS OF THE LINE. 
 
 588. — The brigade Being in open column to furm Vine 
 ^aced to the riglit rear or left rear on tlie rear of tlie 
 oolamu,, the platoons are first wheeled about, and then 
 conform to No. 585. 
 
 To form the line faced to the rear on the head of the 
 column /roni irt^o /fw6 is first executed, and then wheel 
 about by squadron, or by platoon. This is executed 
 simultaneously, at the commands of the brig-adicr gener- 
 al, or in succession. (See No, 488.) 
 
 No. 589. — Tlie brigade being in column of squadrons, 
 to form line faced to the front, the leading regiment con- 
 forms to No. 485. The colonel of the second commands 
 bij plutoon or hy the left — by platoon ; and then conforms 
 to No. 585. -J " 
 
 590. — The brigacle being in column of sqi^adrons, to 
 form line faced to the rear on the rear of the column, 
 the brigadier general commands left (or right) — rear 
 into line. The regiment in rear conforms to No. 487. 
 The colonel of the leading regiment wliceLs by platoon 
 to the left, and marches forward until his line of col- 
 umns is opposite the position the left of the regiment 
 shall have in line. He then commands squadrons left, 
 (No. 521 ;) marches forward, and forms right front intc 
 line. (No. 476.) 
 
 591. — The brigade being in general close column, to 
 foi'm line faced to the frotit on and to the right of the 
 luing squadron, the brigadier general commands: 
 
 i< 
 
 1. Attention,. 
 
 2. Deploy to the r.ight. 
 
 3. March. ' 
 
 The leading regiment conforms to No. 490. 
 
 At the 2d Command,*the colonel of the 2d recent 
 .?fcmmands/(;2«-s right — trot^ .ind adds to the conyiiand 
 of execution regulate by the left. 
 
'(^2^. 
 
 Foff^^&IT'^ 
 
 h^ 
 
 
 J i \\cjjj:\ /nx]/:xni!/'V 
 
 /"/ 
 
 // 
 / / / 
 
 / / 
 
 ■' / 
 
 : i. l/ 
 
 // 
 // 
 / / 
 
 / / 
 
 '/ / 
 / 
 
 \ \ \ t 
 
EVOLUTIONS OF THE LINE. 69 
 
 When the regiment is opposite the position for its left 
 flank in line, the colonel commands : 2 Fours — left ; 
 when his leading squadron is about 20 paces from its 
 position, he conforms to No. 491 ; but the leading squad- 
 ron is lialted on the markers. 
 
 If the brigadier general ■wishes to Seplo}^ in twolifics, 
 he commands, in each regiment — deploy to the right. 
 
 If the brigade be in a line of regimental close col- 
 umns—closed interval — to deploy to the right, the brig- 
 adier general commands the same dejyloy to the right, 
 which is repeated by the colonel of the second regiment,^ 
 No. 490 ; but the leading squadron is dressed forward 
 six paces. 
 
 The colonel of the first regiment commdnds the same 
 as the colonel in rear, above; and marching iu mass to 
 the right, gives the commands : 2. Fours — Left ; 3. Hal'j«, 
 when the regiment is opposite the position for its left 
 flank in line, (lessening his previous interval ft'om the 
 flank of the 2d regiment.) lie then conforms to No. 
 490. 
 
 The general close column, or line of columns, is de- 
 ployed to the "left on the same principles by inverse 
 commands and means. 
 
 592. — The general close column, marching, is deploy- 
 ed by regiment in mem, at the command : 2. JBy regiment 
 in mass, (or By regiment in mass — closed interval) — de- 
 ploy to the right, {ov left.) The colonel of the second 
 regiment commands : 2. Fours right (or left,) — froi — 
 JMarcii. 3. Regulate by the left, (or right ;) and having 
 gained his proper interval,' /ot«-5 — leit, (or rigut ;) and 
 on the line, ivalk — MAucn ; or, if the movement be made 
 from the halt, he commands column- — halt. 
 
 To deploy in echelon, the command is, on (such a) 
 regiment — hy regiment inmass — to the rigid (6r left) — in 
 echelon. 
 
 The regiment not named gains interval to the flank as 
 above; is wheeled by fours to the front and halted. 
 
96 EVOLUTIONS OP THE LINE. 
 
 593.----TI1C brigade Leing in general close column, to 
 deploy it to the right aud left, the brigadier general com- 
 mauus : . 
 
 1. Atientioii. 
 
 2. Deploy to the right and left. 
 
 3. March. 
 
 The eoloucl of the first regiment conforms to Xo. 490. 
 
 At the second command the colonel of the second reg- 
 iment commands: 2.. Fours left— -trot. 3. Maecu ; and 
 being -opposite his position, (having marched six platoon 
 fronts to the left,) he commands: 2. Fours- — PiIght. 3. 
 Gnidc right. When his leading squadron is about twen- 
 ty paccs'from its jjosition, he conforms to No. 491; but 
 the captain of that squadron halts and dresses on the 
 markers. 
 
 594." --To deploy the column, on a line oblique to its ■ 
 front, the brigadier general first conimands: 2. Squad- 
 rons right {pv left) viheel. 3. Mauoh, 4, Halt, N"o. 493; 
 he then commands as in No. 593 ; but the eocoud regi- 
 ment, if the wheel has been laadc to the right, marches 
 further in its flank movement ; if to the left, less ; and in 
 its march to the new front its flanks do not cover; the 
 guides maintain their first relative positions. 
 
 595.-— The brigade .being in line of regimental close 
 , columns, elogcd interval, to deploy to the right and left, 
 the brigadier general conjmands : 
 
 1. Attention, . 
 
 2. Deploy to the right and left. 
 
 3. March. '' 
 
 The colonel of the let regiment conforms to_ No. 490 ; 
 but the leading squadron is dressed forward six paces. _ 
 
 At the second command, the colonel of the 2d regi- 
 ment commands; 2. Deploy to the left, No. 490^ but the 
 
EVOLUTIONS OF THE LINE, 91 
 
 markers are stationed to the right of the head of the 
 column, at the proper interval fi*om the left of the 1st 
 regiment; and at the 2d command, the captain of the 
 leading squadron commands foicrs— -right. At the com- 
 mand of execution he marches three platoons front, to 
 the right, wheels to the left by fours, and dresses upon 
 tlxe markers ; the otlier captains conform to No. 490 ; but 
 that of the squadron 7iext io the front will find himself 
 opposite his place when his squadron has inarched two 
 platoon fronts. 
 
 The line of regimental close columns at full hitervaljis 
 deployed at the command in each regiment— -deploy to 
 the right (or left.) 
 
 The line of close columns advances and halts at the 
 same commands, and on the same principles as the deploy- 
 ed line. 
 
 The intervals of a line of close columns is diminished 
 or increased by marching one, or both, along the line. 
 
 590.— -The brigade halted, or marching in general close 
 column, to form line on the loft flank, faced to the left — 
 or right flank, faced to the right—- the brigadier general 
 commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. On rear squadron-— left (or right) into line. 
 
 3. March. 
 
 The regiment in rear conforms to No. 494. 
 If halted, the colonel of the regiment in front com- 
 mands: 
 
 1. Attention, 
 '2. Forward. 
 8. MAncii. 
 
 When the rear of his regiment has marched so far that 
 its rear will have the prescribed interval ip. lin§, he also 
 conforms to No. 494. 
 
^^ EVOLUTIONS OP THE LINE. 
 
 cohimnrhaU^<i'?.^^'^''T ^^ ^?' ?^ regimental double 
 f. Tf'/t . ,^^ marching, to form it, in two lines 
 
 mZdsy ^" "'^''' '' ^'"'^ '^' brigadier' geneTalS 
 
 1. Attention. 
 ■3' M^Kc? reghnent-riffht (or left) into line, I 
 
 Each regirflent conforms to No. 500. 
 
 ^ f08.--Thc brigade being in line of regimenta* double 
 columns, to form line faced to the rear on the heads of 
 the colunins, it is formed /roni into line; and then wheel, 
 ed by platoon or squadron, left (or right ahotd,) the briff. 
 ndier general giving the commands. . ** 
 
 If on the rear of the columns, the columns are first 
 wheeled by platoons about, and then formed front into 
 line, No. 499. ^ w 
 
 599.— Thcl->rigade being in open column, to form iine, 
 taced to the front, on the leading squadron, 2d regiment 
 the brigadier general commands: 2. On 2d regiment-- 
 left front into line. ^ 
 
 The 2d regiment is formed left front into line, No. 476 
 
 The colonel, let regiment, commands: 2. Platoon's 
 rigid wheel-'-rear sqnadron forward— -irot; 3. March ; 
 4. Forward ; and the front squadrons having marched 
 two squadron fronts to the right, 1. Platoons right wheel; 
 2. March; 3. Forward; 4. Left front into line ; 0. March; 
 the last commands applying only to the seven leading 
 squadrons. 
 
 The captain of the rdar squadron having marched 30 
 paces forward, commands: I. J^latoo7is right wheel; 2. 
 Mabcii ; 3. Forward ; and marches 3 platoon fronts, and 
 then commands: 1. Platoons— right wheel ; 2. March; 3. 
 ^f^—fi'ont into litie ; 4. Marcb. * 
 
 All thp captains, in succession, wheel platoons right 
 about, (towards the other regiment.) 
 
J'a^MH'^ 
 
 c 
 
 
 - J! 
 
 1\ 
 
 y'M. 
 
 
 
 . ^. 
 
 V / 
 
EVOLUTIONS OF THE LINE. 95 
 
 600. — The brigade being in open column, to form line 
 faced to the rear, on the rear of the let reeiment, the 
 brigadier goncrakcommandp : 2. On 1st re^imcnt—left 
 rear into line. 
 
 The 2d reginoent is formed, rirfhi— front into line, No. 
 476; And the captains -^v'heel platoons left about, in sup- 
 cession, after forming in line. 
 
 The 1st regiment conforms to what ia prescribed, No, 
 599, for the let regiment; but inverseh ; and the captains 
 do not wheel platoons about, after forminor Ime. 
 
 ARTICLE THIRD. 
 THE LINE. 
 
 602. — The brigade being in line, to execute a cliange 
 of front to the right or left, of about 45 degrees or less 
 ^he brigadier general coinmand8\- - * 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Change front— left (er rujht) forward. 
 S. March. 
 
 The 1st regiment conforms to No. 5 IB. 
 
 The commands of the colonel of the 2d regiment are : 
 1. Attention) 2. Change front on \st regiment—left for' 
 ward; 8. Fonmrdby platooyis—trot) 4. March. 
 
 The captains, in succeseion, as the heads of their 
 squadrons are opposite their place in the new line com-* 
 mand: Column half right and form left front into line. 
 
 At the discretion of the colonel of the 2d reo-iment 
 when the ground is favorable and the change of direc- 
 tion small, he omits his third command. In which case 
 jU the captains conform to what is prescribed for all 
 but the one of the flank squadron, in No. 513. 
 
94 EVOLUTIONS OF THE LINE. 
 
 603. — The brigade being in line, to change front, 
 throwing back a flank, the brigadier general commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Change front — right (or left) back. 
 
 3. March. 
 
 The 2i"! regiment conforms to No. 515. 
 
 The colonel of the 1st regiment commands: I. Atten- 
 tion ; 2. Change front on ^d regiment — right hack ; Z. Re- 
 tire bg fours ; 4. March ; No. 536. 
 
 The sergeant major being posted for the new position 
 of the left of the regiment, the right guides of squadrons 
 promptly take post ; the lieutenants, at the heads of the 
 columns, conduct them round, and five paces to {he rear 
 of their guides; and as they arrive, the left squadron 
 behind t!ie markers and with reghuental interval — the 
 others, in succession, with squadron intervals, the cap- 
 tains command : 1. Right into line wheel ; 2. Mauch ; 3. 
 DKEf?8; 4. Frokt. 
 
 004. — The brigade being in line, to change front ob- 
 liquely on a central squadron, the brigadier general 
 commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Change front on \st regiment — right forward. 
 
 3. March. 
 
 The Ist regiment conforms to No. 613. 
 
 The 2d regiment conforms to No. 515; except that the 
 right equadron, after wheeling fours about, like the 
 others, changes somewhat its position; moves forward 
 to the line of the let regiment. The colonels respect- 
 ively give the commands in Nos. 613 and 515. 
 
 To cliange front obliquely to the right, is executed 
 on the same principle and by invei'se means, at the 
 command, change front on right of 2c? regiment — left 
 forward. 
 
F^S/ 
 
 Pa. 
 
 fc ^^ 71 '^ j 
 
 .1 
 
 
 .'s — r 
 
 K- 
 
EVOLUTIONS OF THE LINE, 95 
 
 605. — The brig.ade being in line, to change front at or 
 near a right angle, to the right and faced to the riglit, 
 cr left, the brigadier general first wheels by platoons to 
 the right; then forms left — -front info line ; or, right — 
 front into line ; and then (as he may do in either case) 
 wheels platoons about. To change -front to the left, 
 and faced to the left, or right, he first wheels by pla- 
 toons to the left; then forms right— front into line ; op, 
 left— front into line; and then (as he may do in either' 
 case) wheels platoons about. 
 
 To change front at or near a right angl? on a central 
 squadron, he wheels by platoon to the right, or loft, 
 and then commands, on 2d regiment — left front into 
 line; No. 599. 
 
 606. — The brigade being in line, to advance in line of 
 squadron columiis, ttie brigadier general commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Forward by platoons. 
 
 3. Regulate by right (or left). 
 
 4. March. 
 
 The 1st regiment conforms to "No. 517 ; the colonel 
 omitting the third command of the brigadier general. 
 
 The colonel of the 2d regiment repeats the third com- 
 mand, and that regiment conforms to N"o. 522. 
 
 607. — To reduce the line of open columns to columns 
 of fours, and reform them, and to iJiarch to either flank, 
 and to resume the march in line of columns, the com- 
 mands and mfeana of Nos. 618, 621, and 523, are con- 
 formed to ; to march to the roar, the commands and 
 means of No. 526 are conformed to, the brigadier gen- 
 eral adding to the laet command, regulate by right or left. 
 
 608. — The brigade marching in line of column, to die- 
 po3e it in two lines, the brigadier general communicates 
 with the colohel of tho regiment that is to form the sec- 
 
% EVOLUTIONS OF THE LINE. 
 
 ond line, who commands : 2. Squadrons right, (ov left) — 
 MARCu; and when he is in roar of the first line, squad' 
 
 ront left (or right) — MAncn. 
 
 The brigade halted in lino, to form it in two lines, the 
 regiment designated marclies in open columns square to 
 the roar — yohole distance, or r,oo paces, as required— 
 turns, and when in rear, forms line of columns. 
 
 609. — The brigade being in line, to march to the front, 
 the brigadier general commands : 
 
 1. Attenthn. 
 
 2. Forward. 
 
 8, Regnhitc by left-(or rijht.) 
 4. March. 
 
 The 2d regiment conforms to No. 527. • 
 The colonel, 1st regiment, repeals the third — as he 
 floes the other commands; the left guide of its left flank 
 aquadron preserves the regimental interval, under the 
 superintendence oi the field officer of that flank, or the 
 adjutant. 
 
 610. — The brigade in line, halted or marching, gains 
 ground to a flank or the rear, by the commands and 
 means of Nos. 504-, 535, 
 
 To change it to a line of columns, and to reform tho 
 line, the commands and means prescribed in Nos. 61*7, 
 537, are conformed to. 
 
 6 11. '—The brigade being in twoline^, at whole dis- 
 tance, or 300 yards distance, to change frOnt 90 degrees 
 to the right or left, the brigadier general sends notice 
 to the colonel of the 2d regiment (line) and commands: 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Platoons right wheel. 
 
 3. March, 
 
 1. Left front into line. 
 
 2. MARcn, 
 
4# 
 
I*. _^ 
 
 / 
 
 ¥ "/ 
 
 ) 
 
 >y 
 
 f T 
 
 tv 
 
 /■ 
 
 : / 
 
 i / 
 
 L...,y 
 
 / 
 
 
 « f 
 
 X 
 
 X 
 
 ^/^^ 
 
 izriS; 
 
 q 
 
 r~r 
 
 / 
 
 I. 
 
 rrn 
 
 Lim 
 
 TB 
 
 :xn 
 
 n] 
 
 ra 
 
 Lizri 
 
 txn 
 
mi. 
 
 
 '■ l-i / H 
 
 7 n — 7 
 
 ! ! ' / 
 
 rr 
 
 ■i / 
 
 cy 
 
 y--". •- 
 
 
 y" 
 
 J&gtMM' 
 
 TTTI 
 
 cnn 
 
 m 
 
 rd 
 
 ^■•*j? 
 
 CXEI 
 
 i^ 
 
 H 
 
 — .» — ^ . )*i 
 
 
 q 
 
 cxn 
 
 !:d^-^ 
 
rrro 
 
 \\ 
 
 Hiinn 
 
 M 
 \\ 
 
 I 
 
 ! 
 
 1 1 
 
 i ; 
 
 'i 
 
 •'|i::a::.TJ 
 
 I 
 
 •'t:-i:x;j 
 
 ! 
 
 r:i:n:z:i 
 
 tLXJJ 
 
 Jcu^^z jf:^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 / / 
 
 ,„..^ — J... , , 
 
EVOLUTIONS OF THE LINE. 97 
 
 Or the brigadier general orders the colonel, Ist regi- 
 ment, to give these commanda. 
 
 The dolonel of the second line, of squadron columne, 
 commands: ■ , 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Forward — sqxttidrons > left^trot. 
 
 3. March. 
 
 4. Column right. 
 
 And as soon as his line is in the rear of the first, in the 
 new direction : 
 
 1. Sqxutdrons right. 
 
 2. March. 
 
 3. Halt. 
 
 If the distance is 200 pacea, the second line marches 
 forward the necessary distance. 
 
 If desired, the first line, at whole distance, is formed 
 right front into line; the second line has then but a 
 distance equal to its front to maroh. 
 
 To change front to the left is executed on the same 
 principles, by inverse means and eommands. 
 
 612. — The brigade being in two lines at whole dis- 
 tance, to change front, the right thrown back about 90 
 degrees, the brigader general commands, or, by instruc- 
 tion, the colonel 1st regiment commands: 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Platoons left ivhcel. 
 
 3. March. 
 
 1. Left — front into line. 
 
 2. March. 
 
 3. Platoons riff hi about whe»l. 
 
 4. March. (See No. 488.) 
 
 The colonel 2d regiment commands: 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Forward — squadrons left — trot. 
 
 3. March. 
 
 20 
 
98 EVOLUTIONS OF THE LINE. 
 
 And having marched a distance equal to ij.s front, 
 and one squadron more, eclumn right, and hoing in roar 
 of tho.firet line : 2. Sguadrons riglii ; .':. Makoi ; ^t. Halt 
 
 If d<^«irc'd, llic first line, as above, ia formed right — 
 front into line ; the colonel of the second, after ptitting 
 his recrimcnt in motion, commands, colvtnn half rhjht ; 
 and marches a diagonal course fo the ]ioint where the 
 righl of his regiment is t<^ rest. 
 
 To throw back the I'^ft of the line'', the principle i? 
 the 6amc,,commands ami means inverse. 
 
 613. — The brigade being in two lines, 300 paces dis- 
 tance, to change front obliquely, right forward, notice 
 having been sent to the colonel of the second line, the 
 brigadier general orders the colonel 1st regiment, or 
 himself commands : 
 
 1. Attariion. 
 
 2, Change frord — right forward. 
 P.. Mi*R- n. 
 
 The 1$L regiment changes front — rinJit forxcard, «• in 
 No. 513. 
 
 At the third command, the Fcrgoant major 2d regi- 
 ment takes post at the proper distance directly in l-enr 
 of the right of the left squadron of the fii»?t line.iie'w 
 position, and the colonel '2d regiment comnvinJs: 2. 
 Forvard — .squadrons right — trot; :^. MARrii. lie adds: 
 4. Column half left, so a^ to give the head of the -colamn 
 a direction parallel witli the new line. (If the change 
 of front is very slight, thi?" change of direction may be 
 omitted.) So soon as the head of the rear squadron it! 
 opposite the sergeant major, the eolonel commands : 1. 
 Attention; 2. Regulate bx/ the left; ii ii, \inder 
 
 the direction of a Held ofticer, or the turns to 
 
 the left, and conducts^ his column into pu.-ilion, with itf 
 head against the sergeant major ; tlie other squadrons 
 turn, wJlli proper intervals, to form the new liue of col- 
 umns parallel to the new front (their right guidop pre- 
 ceding them to mark their positions.) 
 
1^35 
 
 Fag^m.E' 
 
 "r"x;\. 
 
 
 ..-,K 
 
 >•-, 
 
 
 y 
 
 \::\n: 
 
 r r:r e:;;;:;z:::;:::::;: 
 
 [::i;q; 
 i:ri:r 
 
 mi; 
 
 [in: 
 arc 
 
 Lin;*^ 
 
 _ ^_^ 
 
 
 .4^ 
 
 // 
 
 / 
 
 '^. 
 
 7^ 
 
 / 
 
98 . 
 
 A 
 
 and 
 oftl 
 
 If 
 from. 
 his 1 . 
 and 
 righ- 
 
 T( 
 thes 
 
 61 
 tanc 
 havi 
 brig! 
 hims 
 
 Th 
 No. 
 
 At. 
 ment 
 of tb 
 posit 
 
 4. Co 
 a dii' 
 of fro 
 
 omitt 
 oppot 
 Alter. 
 the d 
 the ]( 
 bead 
 turn, 
 uinns 
 oedin 
 
EVOLUTIONS OP THE LINK. 99 
 
 To change front — left forward^ is executed on the sam* 
 principlCB by inverse meacs. 
 
 . ♦ ARTICLE FOURTH. 
 
 ECHELONS. 
 
 614. — The brigade being in line, to march forward in 
 echelon, the brigadier general commands: 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Squadrons by the right (^' left)~forward in 
 echelon^ 
 
 3. March. 
 
 The colonels conform to No. 540; that of the 2d regi- 
 ment giving the command only when the left squadron 
 of the let has tak-en its distance (which is squadron front 
 and regimental interval). 
 
 If the brigadier general desire to keep in line any 
 portion of the brigade not yet in echelon, he commands, 
 or sounds, halt, at the proper time ; or he advances the 
 brigade. 
 
 The brigade being in echelon, to make face to a flank ; 
 to retire in echelon ; to form line to the front — the brig- 
 adier general gives the commands prescribed for the 
 colonels, Kos. 542. 544, 550 ; and what is there pre- 
 scribed is conformed to in both regiments. 
 
 615, — The brigade being in line, to march in echelon 
 by wing, either flank advanced, the brigadier general 
 commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Wingti by the left (or right)— fqr ward in echelon. 
 
 3. Mabch. 
 
190 EVOLUTIONS OF THE LINE. 
 
 These commandg are repeated in succession by tlic 
 colonels, and the movement is executed as in No. 555. 
 
 The brigade being in echelon by "sving, to form or to 
 march in echelon by squadron, he commands as in No. 
 540, and the movement is executed as prescribed, 
 Fo. 556. 
 
 The brigade being in echelon by squadron, if the brig- 
 adier general wish to form it in echelon by \ving, he 
 commands as in No. 557. 
 
 616. — ^In all cases, to make partial changes in the 
 echelon order of the brigade, he sends orders to the 
 colonel, who conforms to the school of the regiment, 
 
 617, — ^T'he brigade being^ in line, to retire by alter- 
 nate squadrons, the brigadier general commands : 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 ' S. Retire by alternate squadrons. 
 
 3. Regulate by the right (or left,) 
 
 4. March. 
 
 The brigadier general sounds the signal for the de« 
 sired gait. 
 
 The colonels i*epeat these commands; the lieutenant 
 colonels and captains conform to No. 560, the lieutenant 
 colonels commanding, regulate by the left ; (the original 
 *' right" of the brigadier general's command.) 
 
 The brigadier general sounds the signal, halt; when 
 the retiring line faces to the front. 
 
 The colonels then command : 1. Retire; 2. March; 3. 
 Regulate hy the left ; the captains conform to No. 560. 
 
 The lieutenant colonels give the same commands, 
 when the line of even companies next retires. 
 
 This evolution is important for a retreat, in good 
 order, before a superior enemy. 
 

 
 
 
 • ^ 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 
 J'^M 
 
 
 
 
 ^-^ 
 
 - 
 
 A^ 
 
 /or IT ^ 
 
 ! 
 
 « 
 
 ' 
 
 • 
 
 
 \ 
 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
 -■ 
 
 
 ! 
 
 1 
 
im 
 
 Tac^elOlW^ 
 
:oi 
 
 in 
 &}- 
 
 nd 
 he 
 be 
 «d 
 
 nd 
 ire 
 to 
 to 
 id. 
 
 to 
 an 
 
 oa 
 
 ht 
 
 I. 
 
 ks 
 
 in 
 
 nc 
 tk 
 on 
 
 
7?/^ roi R 
 
 J^^'^S 
 
 400 
 
EVOLUTIONS OP THE LINE. 101 
 
 ARTICLE FIFTH. 
 
 THE CHARGE. 
 
 616. — The charge is executed by eeveml regiments in 
 Hue after the same principles, and by the same cobq- 
 mand^, as those prescribed for the regiment. 
 
 In two lines, while it,i6 important that the second 
 should be near to impi*ove»the effect produced by the 
 first, it must not be so cloee as to be involved In the 
 confusion of a repulse; this danger is greatly diminished 
 by its advance in squadron columns; but it must not be 
 nearer than 800 paces from the first line. 
 
 To conceaLa superiority of force, or where the ground 
 does not aomit of its full deployment, squadrons are 
 placed behind one or both wings; they rnay serve to 
 outflank the enemy, seconding the charge; and also to 
 pursue him. They receive their instruction. -j beforehand. 
 
 When infantry is charged from column, it is better to 
 attack it from several columns, at different points, than 
 from one column of useless depth. 
 
 619. — The order of battle of a brigade depends upoB. 
 the amount of the cavalry force present. 
 
 The brigade being in one line, each regiment, of eight 
 squadrons, is in order of battle as prescribed, Title I 
 Article 1st, with two platoon fronts between the fianks 
 of the flanking squadrons. 
 
 The brigade being in two lines, the 1st regiment is in 
 the order there prescribed; the regiment in second line 
 is in line of squadron columns, 800 paces distance, with, 
 the flank squadrons retired a depth of the squadroa 
 column. 
 
 A brigade of ten squadron regiments, in order of bat- 
 tle, has each regiment as prescribed. Title I, Article Ist; 
 the first line of each in the same line, and with two pla- 
 toon fronts interval between the flanking equadronfl. 
 
102 EVOLUTIONS OF THE LINE. 
 
 APPLICATION OF THE GENERAL RULES FOR 
 THE COMMANDS IN THE EVOLUTIONS OF A 
 DIVISION OF TWO BRIGADES, EACH OF TWO 
 REGIMENTS. 
 
 620. — The division being iu two lines, at half distance, 
 (regimental front and interval) to change front 90 de- 
 grees to the right on the riglit of the first line, and in 
 Wo lines. 
 
 The major general sends notice to the commander o£ 
 the second line, and orders the brigadier general of the 
 iirst line, or himself commands: 
 
 1. Attention. 
 
 2. Platoons right wheel 
 
 3. March. 
 
 1. jiiteniion, 
 
 2. Left front i7ito Ibxe. 
 
 3. Makch. 
 
EVOLUTIONS OP THE LINE. 
 
 108 
 
 
 •« 
 
 ~ 5 o », S o 
 '^ il « S « 
 5S ^5 -< ^ § -1 
 
 . CI coi 
 
 
 n 
 
 - g s 
 
 o *^ « ^ 
 
 
 >. 
 
 tl § tt » g ^ 
 
 K g "i « sD O 
 
 s 2 
 
 
 S.?S^ 
 
 1*1 -- 
 
 Tic* cCrH 
 
T'4 EV0LCTI0X3 OF THE LINE. 
 
 OB^J5IiVATIOK:5, 
 
 If the 2d line be in line of deployed squadrons, Mi& 
 fi!*8t movement would be anticipated. 
 
 llio close column may be deployed on rirjht into lint, 
 after which the .brigadier general •would command : 
 r'orward by plaioo7is — march — ualt. 
 
 In the aimplei-'evolutions the commands of the major 
 general indicate at once the whole movement, and are 
 communicated througliout, if not heard, by the repeti- 
 tiona 
 
 .Example. — The division marching in open column, to 
 form left front into line, the major general commandei: 
 
 1. Attention; 2. Left front into line ; 3. Makcit. 
 
 The briixadior general, leading brigade: 1. Attention; 
 
 2. Left front into line — trot; 3. March. 
 
 The bri^radier tceueral, 2d brigade: 1. Attcniioyi ; 2. 
 Trot — column half Ufl; 3. March. 1. Column half 
 right; 1. Jjcft front . into line; 2. March. The fii*8t 
 turn being directed to a point the depth of hi.s firat regi- 
 ment in column, in rear of tlie point its right shall oc- 
 cupy in line, and there commanding the second turn. 
 
 If the major general command, 2. In each brigade — 
 left front Into line, the caramander, 2d brio-uilo, wo\ild 
 civc the same command.'* above preacrilicd for the firet 
 brigade; or left—front into line of columns. 
 
PART THIRD. 
 
 -*^*- 
 
 SKIRMISTH D*RILL FOR MOUN- 
 TED TROOPS. 
 
 ARTICJ.E FIRST. 
 
 Sec. 1. A Coinpany consists of one Capt.;iii,©nc Jsi 
 Lieuto^ant, two 2d Lieutenants, fivp. Sergeants, four 
 Corporals, one Farrier, one BIacksnuth,.t\vo BuglevF, 
 and from sixty to eighty privates. 
 
 Sec. 2. In all exercises the companies shall be dc- 
 j^ignated as squadrons, and will be organised as designa- 
 ted in Art. 1st, Cavuify Tn* tiV-;;, with the following ex- 
 ceptions: 
 
 Sec. 3. When in line of battle there will b" an in- 
 terval of one yarcTbetwecn the left of»onc platoon and 
 the right of^hc next. The captain will be ten yards in 
 front of the centre of the squadron, anil platoon com- 
 manders five yards in front of the centres of thoit pla-" 
 toons. 
 
 In column of platoons the captaii\ will be on the side 
 of the guide and ten yards outfeidc the centre of the 
 column; the other officers ai7d non-commissione<l Offi- 
 cers V, ill occupy the same pdvition as when in line oi 
 
2 . SKIRMISH DRILL 
 
 battle. In column of fours, twos, or file, the captain 
 will be t-cn yards outside the centre of the flank of the 
 coliwnn, on the side of the guide. ' 
 
 Gommundcrs of platoons will be five yards outside 
 the centre of the flank of tlfeir platoons and on the side 
 of the g.uide. 
 
 Th« company being thus formed will be designated 
 as a squadron, and will be drilled by the means and di- 
 rections laid down in Cavalry Tactics for the squadron. 
 
 Skc. 4. When conipanies.becbmc reduced two coiii- 
 panies should ^])c combined, if practicable, into one 
 squadron for drills and manoeuvres. - 
 
 The squadron when thus composed of two compa- 
 nies will be divided into four platoons, the squadron 
 being commanded by, the senior captain, thc^'unior cap- 
 tain commanding the first platoon, the senior 1st lieu- 
 tenant wiir command the fourth platoon, the next lieu- 
 tenan-trin rank the second, and the next, the third ; the 
 otlier lieutenants will act as file closers, and will'takc 
 their positions oac pace behind the second file from the 
 right or left of their platoons. ' • . 
 
 TO LINK. 
 
 To link after dismounting, the man stands to horse, 
 faces about to the rear, takes the link which hangs from 
 the halter jing of- the horse of his left file in his right 
 hand, seizes his own horse by the bit near-the mouth, 
 and draws the horse o-f his left file towards his own un- 
 til he can hook the snap into the curbring; in hooking 
 the, nails of his .right hand are down. 
 
 When he dismounts he leaves the reins over the 
 poznmel of the saddle. ^ 
 
 ■ To facilitate the linking, the horse holder should 
 bear his horse's licad well towards number three. 
 
FOR MOUNTED TR00P3 3 
 
 ARTICLE SECOND. 
 SKIRMISH D^ILL FOR MOUNTED TROOPS. 
 
 Sec. 5. Prclirrrtnar'y rema/ks. 
 
 i^or this drill the men should be dicseoo, so^as to se- 
 cure the greatest freedom of action, as in the blouse or 
 sack, and in the'foragc cap with, the chin»strap down. 
 The revolver will be w.orn in a bclt-holstir upon the 
 right .side of the man. The gun will be slung across 
 his back, with the butt near his right hip. In addition 
 to the usual equipment of a cavalry soldier each man 
 will be provided with a "link," for the purpose of secu- 
 ring his horse whtnever he dismounts. It -will be 
 buckled in the halter-ring of the headstall, and wHien 
 not wanted for immediate use, will be hooked up by 
 tlie snap in the same ring. - 
 
 At the signal ''boot and saddJe," the horscs'will be 
 saddlcii and bridled. - . • . 
 
 At the signal "to horse,". the command willbefo^-m- 
 cd according to the instructions already givien in Cav-, 
 airy Tactics. * ■ . . 
 
 Should the command be less than a complete com- 
 pany, the officer in charge oT it will make such changes 
 in iti organization as are necessary "ii> consequence of 
 the absence of members. 
 
 Some portion of every command wilL be heU in rc- 
 aerve, unless it is so small as to manifestly r. ndcr it un- 
 wise to divide i(. Any platoon may form the reserve ; 
 and its commander will be assigned by selection, a\id 
 not according to rank. 
 
 . A "set of four" means*thc four men who toll off tQ- 
 gether. 
 
 A' "chief of four" is the right file of the set^ or '*num- 
 ber one" of the set, .and will be habitually thc-guide of 
 his set; when in column of fours, he.will command the 
 set to wMiich lie belongs. 
 
 He will be responsible thSt the men of his set never 
 
4 SKKIMISH DRILL 
 
 separate from each other> and for the interval, distance 
 ami alignment. 
 
 The f^cnior ofiiccr on drill is tcrmcd.the "chief;-' hi? 
 next in rank is termed the "assistant." 
 
 Before skiruiishing, two. or three men will be detailed 
 to accompany and protect the chief. *. 
 
 Preparatory to skirmishing^ a platoon will take open 
 order. ■'' 
 
 The interval, between men iii open "order, measured 
 from •'boot to boot," -is twcnty^rsevcn inches. 
 
 In a column of fours,.open order,' the distance be- 
 tween the sets of four,, from croup to head, is four 
 yards. 
 
 In a column of twos, open order, the "distance from 
 croup to head is eighteen inches. 
 
 In a column "by file," open order, the distance ^Voni 
 croup tohead is eighteen inche^:. 
 
 These distances and intervals are deduced from the 
 iengtJi and breadth of the horse, and from the agree- 
 ment which must exist between the depth of a column 
 and the Jength of the line into which it will wheel. 
 
 The interval of twenty-seven inches will be found in 
 practice ample to enable the men to mount- and dis- 
 mount in tlieir places in line or in column, without the 
 necessity of the alternate files moving out'to the' front 
 for that purpose-i 
 
 III an enemy's country, or when in danger of sudden 
 attack or ambuscade, the leading platoon of the com- 
 pany or scouting party should march in open order, so 
 as to be able to get at once into action. 
 
 TO TAKE OPEN ORDER. 
 
 Sec. 6. Being in line, rig]\t in front, the commands 
 of the chief are : 
 
 1. 1st platoon {or^d or 3d, as the case may be,) 
 
 open order — Gallop. 
 
 2. Mauch. 
 
FOR MOUNTED TROqP?. ' 5 
 
 At the "first command, all gather their horses; at.th? 
 second comm§!nd, all take the gallop, except the rontrc 
 hie of the pfatoon, Avhlch trots out directly to the iront. 
 Those on the right of the centre «>blique to the right, 
 each man continuing to oblique until he has an inter- 
 valof twenty-seven inchrs b<rtween him and the next 
 file on his left; Uiose on the left of the centre continue 
 to oblique to the left, until each man has twenty-seven 
 inches interval bet^vecn l\im and the next file on hi^ 
 right. They all then align themselves on the centre, 
 take up its gait, and continue to move to the front un- 
 til the next command of the chief. 
 
 TO RETURN TO CLOSE ORDER. 
 
 Being in line, right in front, in open order, the com- 
 mands of the chief are : 
 
 1. Close order — Trot. ■ 
 2; March. 
 
 At the first command, all gather their horses ; at the 
 second command, the centre file moves to the front at 
 the walk, the others close in to-v^rds him at the trot; 
 each in succession taking up the walk, and aligning 
 on tlic centre as he gains his position in the line. 
 
 Sec. 7. The platoon being in line, right in front, 
 open order, breaks "into columns of fours by the com- 
 mands : 
 
 1. By fours — Trot (or Gallop.) 
 
 2. March. 
 
 At the first command, the first set of four gathers its 
 horses, and takes the trot together at the second. Af- 
 ter the first set has cleared the front of the line, or 
 marched three yards, the second set moves out at the 
 
6 jSI^IRMISU DRILL 
 
 trot (or gallop,) n^archcs straight to t];ic fi'bnt until 
 clear of the line, and then obliques to the fight until 
 m position in column exactlj' behind the jirst iet, ^nd 
 at four yar^ls distance from it, when it marches to the 
 'front to take its place in colurnn. Tlie third set fol- 
 lows the second, and so on throughout the platoon^ 
 according to the foregoing directions. ^ , •• ' 
 
 Gare must be taken to avoid losing cjistance in this 
 movenient. The gets of four must move out promptly 
 in turn, and oblique together. The chief ooinmande 
 Guide rjght when the first set is out. 
 
 A column of "twos'' and "file" may be formed on 
 the same principles and by the .same means, except 
 that the distance in these cases is only eighteen inc4ies 
 from heaiVto croup. ^ 
 
 In'all formations of this drill, the same principles 
 will be observed in regard to increasing the gait as are 
 now established in Cavalry Tactics. 
 
 When in column- of fours, twos, or file, the various 
 methods of forming into line (front right, or left) can 
 be executed bythe commands and means laid down in 
 Cavalry Tactics for the platoon. 
 
 "When the men arc not well instructed in the drill, 
 the deployments from close order into open order, and 
 frotn open order into skirmishing order*, should be made 
 at the walk or trot. Habitually they should be execu- 
 ted at the gallop; and in action, with the greatesjt pos- 
 sible celerity compatible with steadiness." 
 
 In deploying, theofiicers and non-commissioned offi- 
 cers will fall to the rear of the line in order' to superin- 
 tend the movement. 
 
 Every movement not fully described in the following 
 page» will be understood to be cxeputed, as is now or- 
 dered, in the school of platoonj and squadron. 
 
 Sec. 8. To form column of twos, open order, from 
 column by file, marching at the walk, right in front, 
 the commands are : 
 
rOR-MOU^XvKlfTROOrs. 7 
 
 1. Format Lvos\vj}e7itOi'de7' — 'T>'oi. 
 
 2. March. 
 
 At, the second command, numbers t\vo and four 
 oblique to the left it the trot, ahd move to' the front 
 when in rear of tlieir places in colmnu of twos, until 
 in line with, tlicir respective ones and threes. Tlie 
 leading jfct of two's the-n being at the walk, all tht; o til- 
 ers close up at the trot to their places^ with distance oY 
 efflrtccn inches', and interval from :ho5t to boot of twcyi- 
 tv-sevcn inches. 
 
 Sec. 9. To form^column, of fours, open order, from 
 column b.y file, when marching at. the walk, right in 
 front, the command^ are: 
 
 r. Form fours, open ordtr — Troi. 
 2. Maroh. 
 
 At the first fommaifd, niwnber one of Citch set con- 
 tinues to-m^rch at-the \valk to the front ; twos, threes, 
 and J^urs of every $et. oblique, to the left at the trot, 
 each ij:>ovinfg to the froi\t v/hen \r\ rear of the place he 
 will occvipy in his set of four; when the)' have gained 
 their places in line with, ijumbers one, the leading set 
 being at the walk, the othcr.s take up the trot, which 
 they ke(*p^ until each has arrived at the distance of 
 four yards from the one preceding it ; each in turn 
 then takes up the walk. The chief commands Guide 
 right when the fir.st set is formed. 
 
 Se<:. 10. To form column of fours, open order, from 
 column of twos, open order, when marching at the 
 walk, with right in front, the commands are: 
 
 1. Form fours — Troi. 
 
 2. March. 
 
8 ' SKirv^Igir- DRILL 
 
 At the scconJcojnmaml, throns amVfours oblique to 
 ihe loft at the trot' until opposito tljrir places in the sots 
 of four, when thoy move to the .JVont, taking up the 
 walk when in line with ones and twos. , The chief eom- 
 mauds Guide rigid whew the movcmei\t is completed. 
 Ones and twos preserve the walk and dirertion durinjj 
 the movement; and after the otlicr files hjive moved out 
 must take oawc not to diminish the. distance left'by 
 theip. If the column is trotting when the mov.cm^t 
 i^. ordered, it will "he executed at the gallop. * ,i 
 
 iSKC. .11. To break from columH of fours intocolunin 
 of twos, open or close orderj^maYching at the walk, 
 *»ith right in front, the commands^arrc: " 
 
 1. By twos. • 
 
 2. March. 
 
 At the second command, numbers tlirec and four 
 ha-lt Until numbers one and two have cleared them, 
 wheii they oblique to the right, promptly, into their 
 places in column of twos. The chief commands Guide 
 rii^ht Jis soon as ihc movement is completed.. 
 
 Skc. 12. To break a colump of twos, in open or in 
 c^lose order, into column by file, when marching at the 
 walk, right in front, the commands are: ' 
 
 1. B7/ file— Trot, 
 
 2. Mapxh. 
 
 At the second commaad, number one of the leading 
 set takes the trot. As soon as he has cleared number 
 two of the lirst set, niimber two obliques to t"he right 
 at the trot, and enters the column behind number one. 
 Number three then moves in his place in column at 
 the trot, followed by number four ; who, by obliquing 
 at the trot, takes his place in rear of number three; and 
 
.FOR MOUNTKD TROOPS. ' 9 
 
 30 on throughout ihd column, each cvcn-numbcved file 
 o;bliquing at the trot as soon as the odd-numbered file 
 on his right has cleared him. The files must move 
 very promptly and exactly in their proper time, so as 
 not to lose distance in this movement. 
 
 Being in column of twos, wheels to the left may l)s 
 v^xecuted when the right is in front ; or to the right with 
 the left in front ; but not the reverse" of these, for then 
 Uie twos would be inverted in their respective fours, 
 and confusion would res,uU on account of the change 
 in posUion of the horse-hoId^r. 
 
 «/ *:■ 
 
 S^. 13. To deploy forward as skirmishers, from a 
 lino,*right in front, halted, or marching at any gait, the 
 commands are : * 
 
 1. On (such) set — Deploy as skirm'tshers-r-Gallop . 
 
 2. Mauch. 
 
 At the se.cond conmand, all take the gallop except 
 the designated set, which trots out to the front. Those 
 on the right and left of it oblique at the gallop to the 
 righfe and left, .each set taking up tho«trot when on line 
 with the directing set, and at fifteen yards froln the 
 nearest/file of the next set on the side of direction. 
 
 In this movement the chiefs of four will "be held "re- 
 sponsible for the direction and interval and alignment 
 of the men of their respective sets, and will sec that the 
 seti are at proper intervals ixj&iw each other. The cfiief 
 will halt the line when it has reached the point where 
 it is to act. ♦ 
 
 The following movements will enable cavalry, when 
 on a march, to get into action with the least possible 
 delay, in case of an attack when passing a defile or oT 
 any other ambuscade. 
 
 It is understood that always, when dismounted to 
 fight, the horse-holders remain mounted, unless other- 
 wise ordered. * 
 
 21 
 
10 BKTRMISH DRILL 
 
 In all the mancEUvre? of this-- article', the'nrnimanus^ 
 numbers; J " 1" arc cautionary. 
 
 ARTICLE THIRD. 
 
 Sec. H. To disracui^t to light when vi coiiHun oj 
 fours, open x>r(]rr, right m frrilht, huIted*or niarchingppt 
 any gait, to mett an enemy on iho left of froa|j the 
 <»oinmanclR are : * . 
 
 1. DlSMOUNS" TO FIOHT. 
 
 2. Action FRO.<T AND -LEFT. 
 
 3. "Commence fiuikg. 
 
 At the first com mag J, all halt, spring to the gi'cund. 
 link hprsc.s, unjjjiii^-' rifles, and step one yard to tiir 
 front." At the^cco'iid coJiamand, the -first set uiovcs 
 funvard four yards, mm at the third connnand, ccm- 
 rnencoe firing. The other sets move at the douMo- 
 q^ick oMiqiicl^ to the left, and take tlinr places on the 
 110 with the first set. . Each set-, as sopn. as it*ar]-i,vts 
 upon the line, commences firing. , ' ' S\ * 
 
 In ca.se it be desired to form the line towirds tl.e 
 ri-ght '^<'<^"' firiiil (>f f>ip rolumn, the comiiumds ar.r : 
 
 , . l..-M^>: r. -nr. 
 
 )l. .Actio ■ > m> imgiit. 
 
 ^. f ' :-. '■' - 
 
 All thf sots t xeept the ll.st, will then gain their pla- 
 ces m the line by obliquing to the right. The sets will 
 be in line by inversion,. The men in each set will he 
 Ml (JJrcct order. ^ 
 
FOR MOU^JTKB TROOP!?. 11 
 
 8e.c. 15. Being ;in column bffours, open ordCT,'rfght 
 in front, marching at any gait, or halted, to meet an 
 attack on left of rear, the commands are : 
 
 1. Dismount TO FIGHT. ■ 
 
 2. Action rbau and left. 
 
 3. Commence riRiso. 
 
 At the first command, all halt, spring to the ground, 
 lint horses, unsling rifles, and step one yard to the 
 front.. At the second command, tlie men of the rear 
 set face to Ihc right, an4> led by their chi^f, file to the 
 right around the rear set of _ tu)rses to a lin^e iivetjard;-- 
 in rear of their croups. . . 
 
 At the second comniJ^rid, all the other sets face 'to 
 the left,' and move at the douhU -quick. Each mah as 
 he clears the column moves obliquely to the Ipft ai{d 
 rear to his place on the line with the rear sat. 
 
 If itb.e dcfiircd to get at once into action, tlit? chi^ 
 ■commands Co7nf7ience Jiring as soon as the set first on 
 the line is established. This set then commencrs tiic 
 fire; and each of the others takes it up in succession 
 as it arrives upon the line; and in all of the follow- 
 jjig movements the same rule will be observed. 
 
 Sec. 16. Being in column of fours, open order, rigki 
 in front, marching at any gait, or halted, to meet en 
 attack from the right of the cohim)i, thr commands arc: 
 
 I . Dismount to fkjht. 
 H. Action right. ''^■ 
 
 At the first command, all halt, spring to the ground, 
 link horses, unsling rifles, and step one yard to the 
 front. At the second commnnd, all move briskly upon 
 a line five yards outside the riglit flank of the coluntn, 
 where they take their places, in line of battle, fiicdi 
 to the right. The sets \v;l] be in order by inversion : 
 
12 SKIRMISH DRILL 
 
 Btit th.Q men in each set wHl be in direct order, tlie 
 chief being on the right. From this position they 
 may be deployed forward as skirmishers, if it be de- 
 sired. , 
 
 Sec 17. *When in column of fours, open order, right 
 in front, halted or marching, to meet an attack froin 
 the left, the commands arc : 
 
 1. DiSJJOUNT ,T0 FIGHT. 
 
 3. Action left. 
 
 At the first command, all halt, spring to the ground, 
 link horpcs, unsling rifles, and step one yard, to the 
 front. At the second command, all move briskly to 
 the left, and place themselves on a line five yards out- 
 side the left flank of the column, faciiig to the left of 
 it, and in their proper places in line of battle. From 
 . tliif; position they may be deployed forward as skir- 
 mishers, if desired. 
 
 Sec. 18. Reing in column of twos, witli right in 
 front, marcliing at any gait, -or halted, to n\t?et an ene- 
 my on the l^ft of front, the commands are : 
 
 1. By twos, left wheel— Ma^ch. 
 
 2. DismouS't to fight. 
 
 3. Action front and left. 
 
 At the first command, twos wheel to the left and 
 halt. At the second command, all dismount, link hor- 
 ses, unsling rifles, and step one yard to the front. At 
 the third command, the leading set moves to a line five 
 jards to the right of the right flank, as now formed, 
 and facing in that direction. The others move obliquo- 
 Jyto their right and front, at the double-quick, and 
 take their places on line with the first. 
 
POR MOUNTED TIIOOPS. 13 
 
 If it be desired to' form the line towards the right of 
 the head of the column, the comtnands are: 
 
 1. By twos, left wheel — March. 
 
 2. Dismount to fight. " 
 
 3. Action front and right. 
 
 Each of the sets in rear of the leading set v/ill tken 
 gain its place in the line by passing through the inter- 
 val on the right of its set of horses, and moving oblique-^ 
 ly'to the right and front, to its place in line with the 
 legiding set. The sets will be in line by inversion. 
 
 Sec. 19. Being in column of twos, right in front, 
 marching at any gait, or halted, to meet an enemy in 
 rearj'^he commands are: 
 
 1. By twos, left wheel, 
 
 2. Dismount to fight. 
 
 3. Action rear and left. 
 
 At the first command, all wheel by twos into line to 
 the left, and halt. At the second command, all dis- 
 niount, link horses, unsling rifles, step one yard to the 
 front, an.d'-Uwait the next command. At the third corn- 
 maud, the rear set faces to the left, and moves at the 
 double-quick to its place on a line five yards to the 
 left of the left flank, as now formed, and facing in that 
 di^rection. The other sets face obliquely to the left, 
 and move off at the double-quick to their places in the 
 line with the rear set. 
 
 If it b*e desired to form the line to the right instead 
 of the left, the fust two commands are the same as in 
 the other case ; the third command is : " Action res^R 
 and right;" at which the rear set takes its place on 
 the line as before, and others pass through tbe inter- 
 vals to the left of their sets of horses, respcctivoly, and 
 take their places iji succession on the left of the set 
 
U ^ ,j3KH?MIi>H4>RILL 
 
 ta-st;establit(hed. The sets.iivul thfn be iu line by in- 
 vcisicii. 
 
 Si'.c. 20. Bcin<? iu coiumn of twos, marchiii^r at an.y 
 g^it, or haltexl, wilh right in front, to disenouut to fight, 
 in Older to meet an- enemy on "he right flank, thl* com- 
 mands are*: 
 
 "1. By ttvos, left ivheel—MA.Jicii. 
 
 2. Dismount to fight — Action right. 
 
 At the tirst command, the twos wliecl. into line to tlie 
 It'll and halt. At tlie second command, all dismount 
 :aid link. In linking, the -men remain faced to the 
 iVont, and take the link in the left-hand and the bit in 
 Tht 'right. After linking, thoy face about, unsliijg ri- 
 fles, and take their places in a line five yxirds outside 
 ti^c croups of the horses. The cautionary words, .4c- 
 tifOk 7 ighf, shoxi](i be uttered immediately after "Dis- 
 
 MOl'N'T TO FIGHT." 
 
 The method of linking is- changed in this instance 
 '0 avoid the inconvenience which might result from 
 tllg men having to stoop under.thc links, after linking, 
 in order to pass to, their position in rear of the horses. 
 
 Seo." 21. fi'cing in column of,.' twos, rfght in front, 
 inarching at any gait, or halted, to dismount to fight, 
 
 to meet an enemy on the left, the commands ares 
 
 *■- ' ^ 
 
 1. Bi/ twos, left U'/iffZ-j^MARCU... 
 
 2. Dismount TO FiGflto* 
 
 At the fir^ cojnmand, wheel-by twos intp line to the 
 left, and halt; and at the second command, all dismount, 
 link horses, unsling rifles, .-.tep five yards to the front 
 and stagid fast. • ' 
 
 • In ca^e it should be desired in any of the preceding 
 laanccdvres tp^form the Ijnc la an oblique direction, the 
 
EORMO»:>rei> TROOPS- ir. 
 
 J, . . ,. -^(^i** % . ■ " 
 
 c.ujra!iaiv,l.s would be tlic naine, ; but the ijot fust in t\\v 
 
 line would Hr'placcd in the desired dirc(?fion, and tlie 
 
 others would conform to it. The, chief will judg^c fi'om 
 
 Mijw^ircum.stanccs which of themiuncevkvrcs to adopt — 
 
 vv'Ipthev the Hank, the flPbnt, or the rear. •• 
 
 In jail the cases of this article the command "Gom- 
 
 Mi^NCi: Einiso" will- ])e the signal for the set fusst on the 
 
 Uno to open fire. * The > other sets, if not on tlie line 
 
 \vhen it is given, wfll commoner firing as soon as prag- 
 
 ^icuMc after they ai^^c oji tlic line. 
 
 ARTICLB FOURTH. 
 
 • »- 
 
 Sec. 22. 'I^, deploy as skirmishers, wher. dismoun- 
 ted, the command is: 
 
 1. On {suck) scl — Deploy — -Forward. 
 
 At this co.mmand, the platoon springs forward at the 
 double-quick. The s-ets on the right of the directing- 
 ■jet move obliquely towards the right until opposite 
 their places in line of buttle, when they move to the 
 tVont, aligning by the left. 
 
 The sets on the left of the directing set move oblique- 
 l)fatowurds the 4cft. until opposite their places in line of 
 battle, whqn they. move tfl^ the front, aligning by the 
 rii^ht. AU move forwiird* until halted by the chief. 
 
 ^Vhcn in proper position in line of battle, thus de- 
 ployed, there will be fifteen yards between sets- and 
 three feet between files in each set. 
 
 The firing will commence at the co'^imajid of the 
 •hief. 
 
 If it.bc desired to deploy on the line already occu- 
 pied, the command will be, On (such) set — Dkplot. » 
 
 Thr directing set stand's fa.st; the sets to the right 
 uid left of it face to the right and Ieft,*'rc.«?pectivel.v, 
 
16 SKIiirvilSH DRILL 
 
 and move at the double-quick to- take their iiitervak ; 
 then face to the front, and align thcmselyes on the di- 
 recting set. 
 
 Sec. 23. To deploy as skirrtMshers, mounted fro;^a 
 column of fours, right in front, the commands arc: 
 
 ,1. On {sucK) set — Deploy — Gallop. * 
 
 2. March. 
 
 At the second command, the directing get trots out 
 to the front; tho^e in front of it oblique to the right at 
 the gallop ; those in rear to the left at the gallop ; and 
 all take the'trot when they have gained their intervals 
 of fifteen yards, aligning themselves by the directing 
 set. The chief will halt the li«c when it has arrived 
 where it is to act. ^ 
 
 To assemble the skirmishers^ into Hiie or column 
 again, the chief will place himself at, or otherwise in- 
 dicate, the point at which the directing act is to rest, 
 ^and have the rally sounded. At this signal the sets 
 will close in at the gallop upon the indicated point and 
 take their places in line of battle. 
 
 "When the line is formed, it will be broken into col- 
 umn, in order to advance or retire as may be necessary. 
 
 Sec. 24. Having been thus deployed into line for 
 skirmishing, to commence iJ,ction, the commwnjs ar?! 
 
 1. Dismount to fight. 
 
 2. FORV/ARD. '^ 
 
 3. Halt. 
 
 4. Commence firing. 
 
 At the first command, all, save the horse-holders, 
 dismount, link horses, unsling rifles, step one pace frs 
 the front, and await the next order. At the second 
 command, tlie line moves forward at the double-quick 
 
FOR MOUNTED TROOPg. 17 
 
 until haltcil. At the fourth command the right file ol 
 each sot delivers his lire, and he is followed in succes- 
 sion by the other two. 
 
 The chief of four will take care that Ihcrc is alwavs 
 one gun loaded in his set; this will never be neglected, 
 whether in advancing or retreating. ThcTites of each 
 set must depend upon each other for support and as- 
 sistance; they must never separate; every kind of cov^r 
 must be seized and occupied by the skirmishers ; e.aeh 
 chief of four must be alert to perceive such advanta- 
 ges for his set, taking care, however, that in .attempt*- 
 ing to secure them he does not separate too far from 
 the other sets of the line to receive or give support 
 when necessary. 
 
 The horses will be habitually kept at about one hun- 
 dred yards in rear of their riders, 'though they should 
 be nearer, when they can find shelter from fire which 
 will admit of it. Fifty yards will be ifar enough when 
 the enemy does not use fire-arms. 
 
 They will be under charge of a non-commissioned 
 officer; and when it is desired to remount rapidly, 
 should be advanced to meet their riders. The reserve 
 will be kept niountc>d and where it can -best protect the 
 horses of the dismounted men and get into action best.. 
 
 The deployed line will.be manoeuvred "by the com- 
 mands, signals, and 'means provided in the Caval/y 
 T?actics. 
 
 If it be desired to fight mounted, the cliief tVill com- 
 mand the charge. The men will then draw sabre or 
 pistols and charge. 
 
 :- ■■•¥> 
 
 Sec. 25. The platoon being in column of fours, open 
 order, right in front, an«l at the walk, to take close or- 
 der, the commands are T 
 
 1. Close order — Tuot. 
 •^-2. March. 
 
I^ S^KTP.MISH DRILL 
 
 At thiT^i connnanc!, aiimber one of the leading set 
 V. areh^g to the' front at the walk. The other men of 
 ji"-; set close upon him at the trot until each has gained 
 his place in thc\t>et of four in close oTder. The set 
 then, v/alks. The s'thci- sets close at the trot in the 
 same mai«tt?r, each walking when it has closed to 
 eighteen inches -frxjnrthat in iUi front. 
 
 Sec. 26,. The platoon tcing in column of twos, right 
 Mn frontj'^op^n order, to take close or lor, tlic commands 
 aSe": 
 
 i. Close order. 
 2.. March. ♦ 
 
 At this command, numbers two and four" incline to 
 the right, slightly quickening the gait, and place them- 
 selves Iroot to boot with numbers one and three. 
 
 f5EC. 27. To form column of fours, in close order,, 
 when marcliin'g in column of file at the'' w5lk, wjjth 
 
 i'fjht in front, the commcindfj arc ; . « • . * -^ 
 
 t. TuoT- — K/.nciu 
 
 At Hkc second couirri^id, riurnbcr one of tlio, leadin<(|l 
 set Continues to marcfl'So. the front at tlie walk. All 
 *4ie others oWique to tho left at the trot ; each man 
 raftd-ching to tho front when iil^^^rear of his place in* his 
 sei of fours in close m-ftofj and aligning by number one 
 rf his set. i*Pll of^he sets (except the leading set) con-i 
 . -r.ue to trot-until they have closed up to within eigh- 
 tC5w.i inclxfa of cach-cthc-;, .and then take the walk. 
 
FOR MOUNTKD TKOOPS. 19 
 
 ARTICLE FIFTH. 
 
 Skc. 2."^. To sling rifle?, from carry arms, tlire com- 
 maud is : 
 
 1. SlinO KlPLEy. 
 
 At thld conisnaiid, raise the piece with the right hand 
 .t little higher than the hip, inclining the liarrcl over 
 the right shoulder, and in rear of the head ; at the same 
 time, with the left liand near the right shoulder, move 
 tjic sJing- out fronv the barrel, thrust the head, right 
 .shoXilder, and'rij^it ann tlirough the opening, let the 
 piece fall into its position, steadying it witii the right 
 ha-nd, and drop the liaud.s by the side. • 
 
 To unsling rifles, the Command is : 
 
 Ik 
 
 1. Uns'lIKC, UIFI/BS. ^ 
 
 At this command, pass the right hand through the 
 -opening between the sling and piece near the rif ht hip, 
 bear the piece towards the front with- the right arm, 
 seize it with the right hand as in carry arms, and'raiac 
 it a little above the right hip; at thcr sarno time, with 
 the left hand, free the sling from the head and lower 
 'he piece to the position of carry arms. 
 
 Sec. 29. . AU. of, tlie m-ovenicnts described herein are 
 ■supposed to -be* executed whcii the right i.sjn front..- It 
 will Se understood that tliey can all bo executed when, 
 the left^is in f'"oirt upon the same priiiciples by inrcrso 
 iWaos. 
 
 The nicn should ahvays, after dismounting, leave 
 jttieir reins over the pommel of the saddle.' 
 
 When inor& than tvro fail companies aje serving to- 
 gether,. and their front- iii single rank would ^c untluly 
 extended, all lines should bo formed of companies in 
 ^Mumn of platoons at \vh«oling distanc<H 
 
20 SKIRMISH DRILL 
 
 As far as possible, the composition of the different 
 sets will remain unchanged ; and everything should 
 be done wliich will promote the mutual dependence of 
 the men of each set on each other. 
 
 They should act together as much as possible on all 
 kiiids of duty, as well in the fatigue duties of the camp 
 or garrison as when on drill or in action. 
 
 All details should be made as much as praeticabte of 
 sets of four rather than of individuals from different 
 sets ; and the chief of four should be always in com- 
 mand of his set, and invested with the authority of a 
 non-commissioned officer over it. He must see that 
 his men stand l»y each, other in action, and whether in 
 the charge, in pursuit, or in .retreat, that they never 
 separate. After the men and horses are familiar with 
 the drill, all t)f its movements should be executed at 
 the gallop. 
 
 . JXhe. men should be made to saddle up vyith the great- 
 qi ^ possible dispatch whenever*the "boot and saddle" 
 
 BOtMlds. 
 
 Always bcfore^iising their guns the men must dis- 
 mount? 
 
 In order to avoid fretting the horses, the men should 
 be at least live yards from them before they commence 
 firing- 
 
 When the men are in action on foot, they should 
 be mancBUvrcd with due reference to the safety of their 
 horses. 
 
 While the horses should be so far in rear of the men 
 as to be out of the range of the enemy's fire, they 
 should not be so far that their riders cannot reach them 
 before the enemy, if an attempt should be made to cap- 
 ture or stampede them. Generally, in" open grourta, 
 one hundred. yards will be about the maximum dis- 
 tance. They should be nearer, if they can be safe from 
 fire. 
 
 One of the non-commissioned officcrsof each platoon 
 should be left in charge of its horses when the men dis- 
 prjount to-fightj and he will be held responsible for their 
 
FOR MOUNTED TRO0P3.' 21 
 
 security and proper management. The other will di.s- 
 mount with his platoon, linking his horse to that of the 
 nearest number one. 
 
 In this drill, inversions of platoons, and of. sets of 
 four, should be frequently practiced, hut tliOs individual 
 men of the sets should never, either when mounted or 
 on foot, be inverted in their sets. 
 
 When the company is about to be formed, two or 
 three men will be detailed to accompany the chief (Ju- 
 ring the drill or skirmish. 
 
 Whenever the men are dismounted, at the command 
 " mount" they will run to their horses without unne- 
 cessary noise, unlink, and mount. 
 
 When the " rally " is sounded, the skirmishers will 
 close upon the indicated point at the gallop, and by the 
 quickest means. 
 
 When charging in line with pistols or sabres, the 
 officers mui5t ride in the rank ; the captain on the right 
 ©f the squadron, the first lieutenant on the left of it, 
 the senior second lieutenant on the right of the second 
 platoon, and the junior second lieutenant on its left. 
 In case of the absence of any one of them, his place 
 must not be supplied by the next in »ank, except on tlie 
 flank of the company. 
 
 All the commands should be habitually given with 
 the trumpet; and, on drill, the trumpeters should al- 
 ways accompany the chief. . It is very important that, 
 in this drill, the men should I^rn perfectly what the 
 signals mean. 
 
TvEMARKS UPON CAVALRY 
 
 REMARKS UPON CAVALRY TACTIO- 
 y^D MANCEUVREvS. 
 
 The success of cavalry manoeuvres depends on the. 
 rapidjty, steadiness, and boldness with which they aro 
 executed.. Cavalry cannot, like infantry, rely upon 
 fire-arrns as a potent support ; neither can it stand tirm- 
 ly and defend a position, against an aggressor. On the 
 oontrary, a charge of the enemy's cavahy must inevi- 
 tably overtarov/ it, and infantiy, drawn up in line 
 would oppose nearly treble the number of men. Cav- 
 alry has therefore but one system of attack and defence . 
 wliicli consists in throwing itself rapidly upon the ene-: 
 my, and in anticipating his hostile designs. These re- 
 mqirks ha.ve but a partial application to mounted rifle- 
 men, an arm of the service daily increasing in impor- 
 tance. , The nature of its organization clearly demon- 
 strates, that it is only in time of peace, and with infi- 
 nite rare, that cavalry can be solidly organized, so as to 
 obtain success proportionate to its importance and ex- 
 pense ; for though war inures it to fatigue and skirmish- 
 ing, yet, unless, before entering on a campaign, it is 
 peii'cctly instructed in the care necessary for the pre- 
 servation of horses, and furnished with that self-pof- 
 scssion which is only obtained by a constant ,Jiabit oi 
 being on horseback, it will soon encumber the hospi- 
 tals and depots of the army. 
 
 Cavalry is divided into four classes : Mounted Ei!?c- 
 mcn, Heavy Cavalry, Dragoons, and Light Cavalry' 
 
 in mounted rifle regiments the horses are principal- 
 ly used for the purpose of promptly reaching the point 
 of attack,.and such troops are almost invariably fought 
 on. foot, and are ueed in many respects in a manner 
 
TACTICS AND MANCEUVftES. 23 
 
 similar to light infantry. It becomes of great value in 
 coveriug the retreat of an army, or in olistructing the 
 advance of the enemy ; and in broken and wooded 
 countries, where light cavalry becomes almost iiscleeff-, 
 tlie mounted rifleman bccomctj indis])cnsab!c' to an ar- 
 my. By having this arm asoociatod with" lipfht caval- 
 ry and horse artillery, the organization beconie8.com- 
 plete for any enterprise. It in true these troops when 
 dismounted are inferior in compactness to infantrji. 
 but th<?ir rapid movements cnible them freqnonlly -to 
 take the enemy by surprise and thus. defeat liim bcfcK" 
 he has time to perfect his dispositions for delence. 
 
 It is of the lirst importance that mounted riiiemon 
 should be taught to mount and dismount with rapidi^ 
 ty and without c6nfu.-ion, and that the liorse-holders' 
 shoutd understand thoroughly the manngement of 
 horses, so as to prevent their Itecoming frightened 
 when their riders arc lighting upon foot. 
 
 In European armies it hiv^ been found expedient to 
 have, in an army, a corps compo.sed of men of largo 
 stature, proterted by armor, and moxnited upon strong 
 horses; for, in a charge, weiglit and steadiness are -M' 
 ten of move importance than »pt?ed. This principle*, 
 forgotten during the eighteenth century, camcinto'no- 
 lice again as soon as it was perceived what advantage 
 Napoleon had derived by giving cuirasses to twelve regi- 
 ments of cavalry. 
 
 Heavy cavalry, from the weight of tlnir armor and 
 size of their horses, are unable to act as skirmishers or 
 escorts; besides, it is a corps too expensive to be use- 
 lessly exposed ; but. appears with cpnlidcnce on the 
 field of battle, where" the most perilous attacks arc' re- 
 served for it. Its duty is to cliarge squares and masses 
 of infantry, and from its' weight, break through the en- 
 emy's cavalry ; on which account some experienced 
 generals have considered that it would bo of great ad*- 
 vantage to arm heavy cavalry with lances, as being the 
 weapon best fitted for a charge.* 
 
 Dragoons wore originally intended to act both as 
 
24 REMARKS UPON CAVALRY 
 
 horse and foot soldiers, to charge in line with the 
 steadiness of cuirassiers, to skirmish with the activity 
 of hussnrs, and, when dismounted, to be equal to any 
 infantry. After much loss of time and great expense, 
 it was found that only an inferior body of troops had 
 been obtained; and the dragoons of the present day 
 are only a mixed cavalry, sufficiently strongly mount- 
 ed to charge with advantage, and which, being unen- 
 cumbered with any sort of armor, can be employed as 
 skirmishers. 
 
 Light cavalry was, for a length of time, in many 
 countries, an irregular force ; but when the inconven- 
 ience of having undisciplined troops with an army be- 
 gan to be felt, and that petty engagements became less 
 frequent, they were gradually embodied into regi- 
 ments, and disciplined* 
 
 Whatever system may be adopted with .respect to 
 the formation of cavalry, it is certain that a nunierous 
 cavalry, whatever may be its nature, must exercise .a 
 powerful intluence over the operations of a war, by 
 spreading terror over a large tract of country, carrying 
 off convoys, rendering the enemy's communication 
 difficult, if not impossible, and thus destroying all the 
 harmony which might exist in hisenterprises and move- 
 ments. In short almost all the same advantages may 
 be procured, by a proper use of cavalry, as would be 
 obtained by a general rising of the population ; that Is," 
 constantly harrassing the flanks and rear of the enemy, 
 and preventing their general from calculating anything 
 with certainty. 
 
 In this respect, Russia has great advantages over her 
 neighbors, as well by the quantity and quality of the 
 horses of the Don, as by the nature of the irregular 
 militia which she can levy at any moment. These 
 advantages are incalculable ; for though the Cossacks 
 are of little use in the shock of a great battle (except, 
 perhaps, for skirmishing on the flanks,) yet they are 
 terrible in a pursuit, and in a. war of out-posts. As 
 long as^the Russians had only a few regiments ofirreg- 
 
' TACTICS AN'D >f ANvSUVRES. 2a 
 
 ukrs, tlmiv utility was.unklio%vn, hut when their nurrj- 
 bVr bccifmc increas'cd to fiftieeu or tweiit}' thousaiw, 
 their importiujcc bcgaJi to be sensibly felt, cspo^^i^iily 
 in' countries where the popululion was not hOestile to 
 khC'tn, for'a genivral opposed to tliem is never cu^rtain'of 
 ihp". &afc arrival cvr execution of Lis orders: his convoys 
 are»alwaj;s in danger, and his opnations uncdrtaiir. 
 
 Volunteer corps ot'hussarsor lancers, levied and^or* 
 trauizcd ill ihe breaking out of a war, ably led "by hardy 
 chiefs, su<-h as Tettcnboni, in theCTemian war of 1813, 
 would fulfil nearly the same purposes. 
 
 Austria Jias also, in_thc Hungarians, Transylra*- 
 nims, and Croatians, a resource which other States 
 have nat got ; however, the services performed by the 
 mounted L-^ndwehr prove that a great deal can \fc ob- 
 tained from this species of cavalry, were it only to re- 
 lieve the regular cavalry from its accessory duties, such 
 as. escorts, detachments for convoys, flankers, order- 
 lies, &,c. England possesses a fine nucleus for such u 
 corps in her yeomanry. 
 
 All that may be said- with respect to the formation 
 (^f infantry, may appl_y; to cavalry, with the exception 
 of the following modification^ : 
 
 1. Lines deployed in'cchij|uier or in echelon, are 
 much more suitable for cavalry th^n a line without in- 
 tervals; whilst for inf;intry, a line deployed in cchi-* 
 quier would be too disseminated, and even dangerous, 
 if cavalry, were to penetrate and take its battalions in 
 'lank, so that, the formation of infantry in echiquier 
 is only safe as a preparatory movement before approach- 
 ing the enemy, or else for lines in column of attack, 
 able {o defend themselves in every direction against 
 cavalry. However, whether the formation in echi- 
 quier be preferred, or that of lines without intervals, 
 the distance of the several lines from one another 
 should be sufficient to prevent confusion, arising from 
 the rapidity with which cavalry is driven back in case 
 
 22 
 
26 REMARKS IfPON CAVALR-y 
 
 . -• , . . 
 
 f a "Chai-gc not succeeding-. lb should, hov^jcveo-, |k.* 
 : bscvvcd, t-hat in t)ic forniatiidn by cchiquicr,'the dte- 
 . iHceVinay-be less than ia lilies without' intervals-; and 
 rhat in no case should the second line be ,without#n- 
 t'ervals/but'shduld^bc formed in'eolujnns, or at Ica.sl, 
 leave tw^ squadrons, which may be fqrmetl in columns 
 upon thfc flanks of- each rcgiuicitt, to facilitatq the Yai- 
 iyi^g- of the first line, if driven back. 
 
 2. , A column of attack, composed of cavalry ,^hotrId 
 never be formed hi c\6se coluinns ; but, at full and half 
 -liis-tance of squadronsj so as to have plenty of space to 
 wheel and charge. This, of course, is only applicable 
 to troops ordered {o engage; for when they are at rest 
 behind the line', they may be forn}Gd in close column, 
 so as'to take up less spa.ce of ground and diminish the 
 .spaco they wouldjhave to go over io^Qngage; but it must 
 be clearly AinderBtood, that' these'- .masses should be 
 sheltered from artillery., * .» - • 
 
 3. In consequence of a flank attack being more to 
 be feared with respect to cavalry, than an engagement 
 of infantry against infantry, it is necessary to estab- 
 lish, upon the extremities of a line of cavalry, a few. 
 squadrons echeloned. by plato2his, so'^as to be able to 
 fornix by facing to the right o'r left, against the enemy, 
 who flight endeavor io disturb the flank. 
 
 4. *Fqj the same' reason,, it is necessary to know 
 vvhep to'or^er a few squ.^drons to. charge the flank of a 
 
 * line of cavalry which is being attacked: if there is a 
 corps of irregular cavalry, it should be especially Re- 
 served for this UH<j in a battle ; as, for such a purpose, 
 it is worth as much as, and perliaps more, than regu- 
 lar troops. .. '■ . " . 
 
 An important ob.^crvatien is that especially with res- 
 pect to cavalry, the command should extend in depth 
 rattfer than in length ; that is to say, supposing a divis- 
 ion of t.vo brigades to be deployed, it would not rr 
 correct for them to form line one in rear of the other, 
 but each brigade should have two regiments in the 
 ^rst line, and two in the second ; thus each unity of 
 
TACtlt^' AND MA^CEUVrxEf. .'" 
 
 th^'liiic would h&vc it?: proper rcKeA-c in tear ot it-aii ad- 
 vantagc^which caiMiot hvu be apprrt iated, for the evenjt-- 
 of a charge are so various, thnt it is impossible for a 
 rfcn.exaS orticor to "Ho master of lour (*avaliy reginicnts 
 ^o^loy'cd in a single line. 
 
 If it be deemed advisable to ibim the division int-- 
 foi^r lines, each brigadc^ishould bo formed in a column 
 of regiments, in order ths^tthe ,s£U)ic.pr4nciplc'pi'uii'itv 
 eould be better preserved. In a , wooded or ^broken 
 country, where it becomes necessary to use cnvarry", it 
 will frequently t>t5 necessary to form regiments in col- 
 umns of squadrons for the chftrgc, in order that jcof- 
 »iiels may the m.ofc. easily m-astcr their command:. 
 "CircuuVstahces will ^Tso arise where the fprmation c' 
 squadron'-'" ■■^I'mins of platoons will .becoine necc-- 
 f5ar^, but ioo^ arc well drilled, and the cottr>- 
 
 try iR Ru.ii: iciuiy oi^'en, a rcluom of regiments, ha-' 
 many advantagcg ia a- gxaiid "qhargc^ The^distarijj.- 
 between the lines should be regulated b}' flie ixatnre o 
 the ground. If possible,, each line sho.uld be reserve 1 
 Tromthe enemy's fire until the charge commences, bvr, 
 the nK)ral effect will be increased if the enemy sees aH 
 the line.s advancing hefore th^ first Ti«e comes in ac- 
 tual coniart. Tn case cavalry is fighthigin conjunction 
 with infantry, all the lines may char g-e if it isthough'' 
 advisable; but if fighting alone, one line should.br 
 held in jreserve as ei basis on which t\\e others c^r- 
 rally- * •" " « - " " " - J* 
 
 The. nature of conflict shouKl also regulate theimm- 
 bcj of lines, fol- ini^trance,if fighting in conjunction with 
 infantry, two or three lines will sufliee, and frequently 
 one line will attain ,a great object, but if cavalry- is 
 fighting alone, it must depend upon- its own resourceis, 
 and must have three or four lines in- arder to reduc-o" 
 the chahc'cs of disaster. ' .• '- - 
 
 In the preceding paragraphs the variou^ formation^ 
 
 -mentioned are only suggested, and. ofiiceis of expeYr- 
 
 'ience will readily perceive whether these. or other for- 
 
 mationa are adapted to his^purposes, and if these are 
 
S^ rvEMARKS U?ON GA-VAliRY 
 
 suitable he x5aii easily judge which are most favorable 
 for the particular action in which he is to ■ eiigagc. 
 Most of the actions referred to in this book, were on 
 European soil, where but few fences obstruct move- 
 ments of troops, but in this country 03^ always having 
 active men to precede the head of each column to re- 
 move such obstructions, troops can be movedwith con- 
 siderabl-e celerity. . For instance : suppose a regirhent 
 to advance in line "through' a field having a fence on 
 the side it is approaching — by sending a few good m.eh 
 a sufficient number of gaps can be made to pass 
 through by the right or loft of squadrons, bearing to 
 the front, and the line coUld be promptly reformed on 
 the other side, of course such obstructions are ombar- 
 assing, but are by no means insurmountable. 
 
 The formation heretofore mentioned supposes the 
 brigade to consist of four regiments. If it consists of 
 five regiments we might place the fifth regiment in a 
 third line, or we might have three regiments in the first 
 line and two in the second. 
 
 Two essential maxims are generally allowed respect- 
 ing engagements of cavalry against cavalry. The 
 first is, that, sooner or later, the first line must be 
 brought tack ; for even'werc it to succeed most brilli- 
 antly in a charge, it is probable that the enemy, by op- 
 posing new squadrons, would force it to rally in rear 
 of the second' lino. The second maxim is, that, tlie 
 troops and commanders being equal in merit, the vie- 
 lOry- will remain to him who, having the last squad- 
 rons in reserve, will know the- decisive moment when 
 to make them charge the flanks of the enemy's line al- 
 ready engaged with his. 
 
 At the battle of Wachau, near Leipzig, on the 16th 
 October/ 1R13,. two Russian regiments of light cavalry 
 were posted in two lines in front of a small brook or 
 drain which ran from Gossa towards Pleiss. The banks 
 happened to be swampy, and could only be passed 
 with difficulty, and by a leap across awide drain with 
 the exception of causeways made in two or three 
 
TACTICS AND MANOEUVRES'. C^J 
 
 places by the farmer*! for agricultural purpo'-e.-*. This 
 rtbgtaclc was only partial, and, at a few lumdrcl yards 
 to tlic right, nearer Gossa, it ceased to he ai> impedi- 
 ment^ On a hill facing it, was formed thcwhoie corps 
 of Latoijr Maiibourg, amountinn; to 5,000 horse. Mu- 
 r^had taken the command, and began to descend the 
 hiTl, directing his iUtack upon the two Ru?siai\ rcgi- 
 mcnl.s at its foot.. The French advanced in line of 
 regiment*; cortainly in one body only, that is, with.n<5 
 isccond line or reserve. No doubt they expected to 
 dispose oftheir first opponents easily. ' The narrow- 
 iiess of the front to be attacked, as well as the nature 
 of the. ground, caused this powerful force to crowd 
 iwto one dense mass before they came in contact with 
 the Russian dragoons ; these were overwhelmed and 
 driven ticross the swamps, or oyer the causeways. — 
 Many of the rearmost werc^ killed, biU the rest rallied 
 as soon as they crossed the brook. The laneers, who 
 were in thcfjccond line, retired by their left to another 
 causeway, Iiut did not cross it, and formed again. 
 
 But the enemy were unexpectedly checked by thig 
 unforeseen obstacle ; their crowding and confusion in- 
 creased, and, at that moment, a Russiaif regiment 
 5f hu.sears appeared in their rt^u This caused a 
 panic. The unwieldy mass became noisy and, at- 
 tempted to retire ; the Russian light cavalry in*<taiUly» 
 followed .thcni. The Emperor Alexander, who stood 
 on the hill above, seized this opportunity to sefid of?' 
 his own escort of Gossacks of the Guard, amounting 
 to several -squadrons, who passed the stream at a fa- 
 vorable spot near Gossa, and took the retiring mas.o in 
 flank. This completed the panic, which then became 
 a flight, and the fugitives did not draw their . bridles 
 till they had regained the protection of their own in- 
 fantry^.- 
 
 La.tour Maubourg received a severe wound, which, 
 disabled him for life ; Murat was in great danger of 
 being taken, and six guns fell into the hands of 
 the Cossacks. 
 
S(» REMARKS UPOK pAVALRY 
 
 Thus 5000 of tlie French caralr.y, led by Murat in, 
 person,; were foiled by an insignificant obstacle. They,, 
 were seized with apanic, and, fo-r want of -a second Hnfe 
 on_^ which to rally, and from which to take a fresh de- 
 parture — a precaution without wliich no cavalry at- 
 tack sh-ould be made — thgy were obliged to abandpn 
 tlicir enterprise, and fly before a fprce of light cavalry, 
 v/hich, altogieriier, could not have" amounted to. 2,0U0 
 men. *, ' 
 
 It is upoxx these two truths, that a'propcj idea uTay 
 
 '3 based of the system of formation the mo&f suitable 
 
 for leading a large corp^ of cavalry to the charge. ". 
 
 Whatever systefn may be adopted, care^inu^t Fc ta* 
 ken not to deploy large coyps of cavalry i-n lines with,- 
 out intervals, for they are diflicult ma§ses tO- manag? ;■ 
 and if the fk'st line' failed in its charge,- the- sc"cond 
 would be drivjeniack' without being ahle io draw th^ 
 sword. ' • . 
 
 At Oiiat^au-Thierry, in. 1814, the Prussian'gencral, 
 Horn, with twenty -four squadrons, was ordered, to 
 keep the French in check^untif the Russian general, 
 Sacken, could cross th? Marne, after his defeat at Mont- 
 merail, 30*h January, 1814. He fornijcd these troops 
 in two lines of t\\^e squadrons each, without intci*» 
 vals. The whole first line advanced.to the altacli.. 
 'J'he French waited till it came to a proper distSjieie, 
 ancl routed it. . ,Th€se sq'uadrons threw the second 
 line into disorder, and carried it away, ^je// t??^//, yi 
 every direction over the plain. " , , * - 
 
 If an attack of cavalry should be spirited, it^ pursuit 
 should not be less so ; but no -line of cavalry should 
 follow up a pursuit, unless it has a re-sca-vc. If- it has-. 
 no reserve, it should promptly rally ,*and follow up tlie 
 pursuit wit^- only part of its forces. '• 
 
 The excessive negligence, on the part ofl^ngli^h 
 jjavaJry officers, in not supporting their attacks' by -a 
 resci've,' frequently, during the Peninsular war,' pro- 
 duced the most pernicious consequences. The follow- 
 ing case was so glaring, that Lord WcUiiigton ordered 
 
TACTICS AND MANOEUVRES. 31 
 
 a court of inquirj'- upoii it : In the montk of June. 
 1812i' Majt)V General felaJc was ordered to advance 
 frdm'LIera in the direction of La Grrtnga, to cover ^ 
 reconnoi,ss;;::cc» F-jr thi*i purpose he took with hinV 
 two reginlcnts of .cavalry. * 
 
 General LMllcmandc, having a like object, came for- 
 ward also with tw<f*rGgi)ncntE of French dragoons, on 
 thcieidc" of ♦Valence do las'Torrcns. Slade, hearing 
 '.hat the French cavalry wa.s "so near, attacked it anP. 
 drove it back bfeyond the defile of-Maquill-a, a dislanco 
 of cjght inilcsjliis troo'pcri?, in the heat of the pursuit, 
 brcalvh^^ irrtp a confused mass. But Lallcinande had 
 here his r<^tfcrvc in hand,«Bnd attacking ilic disorderly 
 English horse, totally routed it. 
 
 Oif ,thc other hand," kistances can be given where 
 *ivalry .in .small force rcsisrted the ativancc of largr 
 Ijodies of froop.s of all arms ; as the case of General 
 Bfhg^in JCcntucky, in the autumn of 1862, when le.'^.s 
 than ona tho'Usand"ca\arry prevented General BuelTf^ 
 vast army from inovinn' fasiter than an average of fou)- 
 or five miII59 a'da}'. .Again, when General liosccrans 
 advanced from Nstshvilk, to Murfrccsboro,. in the lat- 
 tci"*paTt of the r^amf' year, cavalry so retarded his'ad- 
 vancc a.s to coMipoi Itim to iii6vc equally slow, fighting 
 his way stb]^ by step'os he advanced.' 
 
 When, after a victory, infantry should continue to 
 resist, the cavalry should not cliarge them, but endea- 
 vor to reach the head of the disordered masses, and cu' 
 off their retreat,. "for the great art of pursuit is not to 
 cause the enemy to fly with rapidity, but to induc*e him 
 to hold together for some timf", whibs^t his escape is ren- 
 dered impossible ;*or else, by dividing the'eneiny's col- 
 umn, to get between them and beat them in detail. 
 
 ,«rhe mo^t .sinking example, perhapsj'df the results 
 produced by Ji vigorous; pursuit, is that produced by 
 tliC French army after the double battle of Aucrstadt 
 and Jdna, 18th of October, -ISOG. The Prussian army 
 separated#into several corps, was pursued, without 
 ces>iing, -in every dg-ection ;■ could rally nowhere, 
 
88 REMARKS UPON CAVALHY 
 
 and capitulated at Erfuil, Madgeburg, Lubeck, P|-cng- 
 lovv, and in Westphalia. -Tlie French cavalry, f^l- 
 lowed close by an indefatigable infantry, whiph 
 marched from ten to Iweive leagues a day, hadcrossc.d 
 the Saale, the Elbe, and .the Oder, and in spite of, so 
 many divergent marches, found itself one month af- 
 ter the battle, upon the borders of the Vistula. The 
 two-thirJs of the Prussian Monarchy were conqu(?te(5, 
 and its army nearly annihilated. 
 
 Of all the branches of the service, cavalry ap^p^aTS 
 to' be the one most difficult to manage. * 
 
 Incapable of defending a position by itself, unable 
 e,ven to engage on many Itflids of ground, casijy dis- 
 united, almost totally dependent on their horses, no 
 corps so much requires discrimination and zeal" in its- 
 leaders. This art requires, in fact, a thorough knowl- 
 edge of this branch of the service, and a quicknjc.ss 
 of eye whicli can seize rapidly the whole of a move- 
 ment, and understand all its consequences. 
 
 ^Looking back upon the European wars from 1792 to 
 1815, it is remarkable what little advantage those 
 nations, who were most celebrated for their cavahy. 
 derived from it, although their efforts were dircctct; 
 against one which was supposed to- possess bad horses 
 and worse horsemen. 
 
 The Austrian cavalry, so numerous and well 
 mounted, were almost always decimated ; and, even in 
 countries best suited to its manoeuvres, could boast of 
 but few brilliant engagements. Their generals seemed 
 to have forgotten how to make use of them in masses. 
 
 The Prussian cavalry, so famous in the days of the 
 great Frederick, performed no one' remarkably 'great 
 feat during the first three campaigns of the French 
 Revolution; and when, after two years of peace, it ap- 
 peared at Jena and Auerstadt, it was nearly annihi- 
 If^tcd. 
 
 The campaign of 1814 began under the worst au- 
 slices for the French. Invaded by all the European 
 powers', France was overrun by their numberless cav* 
 
TACTICS AND MAN'<EUVRES. 83 
 
 airy ; but what ailvaiitagc did they carry ofl' in con- 
 nection with their numerical 1 )rce and organization 1 
 How can wc explain the bold manouvrcs of Napo- 
 leon) and his success, \yith men overcome by fatigue I 
 How was It that, his army was not destroyed before 
 Lavro 1 Why did the allLci;, with their numerotis 
 cavalry, suffer the rcverscit of- Montmerail, Chateau- 
 Thierry, Craonnc, Nangis and Montereau? 
 
 The reason of the feeble PUCcesH of their cavalry is 
 easily explained. A service, whose very existence 
 consistsiii activity and boldncBs, will lose all its vigor 
 as soon as the operations of an army become undeci- 
 ded ; and, if cavalry played so great a port under 
 Frederic and Napoleon, it was because those great 
 men never allowed that body to engage except in 
 strong divisions, and never waited for the" enemy's 
 attack, but always anticipated it ; .for the moral 
 strength of cavalry is much more easily alTcctcd thai) 
 that of infantry. 
 
 We have stated above, that the- strength of cavalry 
 consists in th(5 rapidity and steadiness of its move- 
 ments. It should, therefore, take up a position which 
 would enable it to see everything going on, and allo%v 
 it to be perfectly free in its actions. Besides, no boidj^ 
 of troops should be able to approach without-bein^ 
 exposed to be charged ; it would therefore co)nmit * 
 serious error, were it to support its wings vi-ith a wood', 
 vineyard, a yillage accessible to the enemy's infantry. 
 or not occupied by its own. If, however, unavoidable 
 circumstances forced a body of cavalry to do so-, it 
 should send out patrols, so as to be warned of anv 
 rnovemcnts which might be directed against it; hut- 
 should the enemy appear on its flanks, the position 
 will be no longer tenable. 
 
 At the battle of Kollin, in 1756, fifty-five Prussian 
 squadrons, wishing to outflank the enemy's lyght 
 wing and take it in rear, overthrew the Austfian cav- 
 alry, and continued their movement between the wood 
 of Radovesnitz and a ravine. I'his wood was lined 
 
U-^ REMARKS UPON CAVALRY 
 
 with Austrian infantry, who took the - Prussians >in 
 dank, and made them retire with a loss- of fourteen 
 hundred men. 
 
 -Although ilie ground may appear to be level, it may 
 contain hollow roadfe, ditches, marshy spots, which 
 may be totally, concealed by drifts of snow or the height 
 6f the cfops. From this results the necfessity'of hav- 
 ing the front and flanks of a- position thoroughly re- 
 connoilered-; an.d if this cannot be done beforehand-) 
 skirmishers should bo sent out to precede the troops 
 as they approach the enemy. "^ . ^, 
 
 .When at the battle of Talavcra,-July, 1809, Sir Ar- 
 Ihur Wellcsley -ordered Anson's brigade of cavalry, 
 composed of the 53d. Light Dragoons and the Ist Ger- 
 man Hussars, to charge the head of Villatte's columns, 
 the brigade went off at a canter, and, increasing the 
 speed an it advanced; x6,do headlong against the ene- 
 my; but'in a few moments it came upon thfe brink of 
 a hollow cleft, which was not perceptible at a distance. 
 The French, throwing themselves into squares, opened 
 'hc-ir fire. 'Colonel Arenstchild, commanding the Hus- 
 yars, an officer of forty years' experience, promptly 
 reined up at the brink; but the 23d, under Colonel 
 iSej-mour, continued their impetuous career, men and 
 iwjrses falling over each other in- dreadful confusion. 
 ^ The success of a charge depends upon a well regu- 
 1-ated rapidity, accelerated by degrees, added to a per- 
 fect alignment, which "will enable the whole line to 
 reach the* enemy at the same time. But in many 
 cases, the greater or lesser degree of boldness of the 
 meai, and speed of tho horses, prevent this; and a 
 charge in line is often only a rapid succession of 
 charges, of whicli the~ brayost- men form the, salient 
 points. These a*e the reasons which so often causp 
 undeeided charges,- and- should prevent any being 
 made on too exteiided a-fiont. The failure of a charge 
 is x^t always attributable to the cowardice of the 
 horsemen. Slippery, unequal ground, renders the 
 maioh difficult ; rains, snows, thaws^ cause the horsCvS 
 
TA0TIC8 AND MaIJqEUVRES. 35- 
 
 to slip ; many of tliem become frightened; in such 
 cases no vigor can' exist in the niOvemcnt.s. Sbme- 
 times great dif^ordcr will be occasioned by beginning 
 the" charge at too great a distance ; for, the troop lead- 
 ers, chirgi^ig under the enemy's fire, Lose their, point's 
 of. direclion ; the soldiei; no longer marclios straight 
 before him ; the intervals between the squadrons dre 
 lost, and they get jammed up together; the killed and 
 wounded delay the general movements; the cneroy 
 charge ; the disorder b(fComes complete. 
 
 The gradual incrcetse of speed in a' charge should 
 be attended to ; otherwise, both men- and horses wiH 
 be breathless when they reach the enemy. In most 
 cases, befdre engaging, the cavalry will have made a 
 tedious march, "^^hc" horses, worn ont with want oif 
 food anJ the weight of their riders, will, if u.- elessly 
 gallopped, be too much fatigued, after one or two char- 
 ges, to attempt any decided* movements during the 
 remainder of the day; besides, if the charge is.imme- 
 'jjately begun at a gallop, the men cannot be made to 
 keep line. It was the deep conviction of this truth 
 which caused General Lasalie, one of the best cavalry 
 officers oi' his day, on seeing a body of the enemy's cav-* 
 airy charging at full gallop for a long distance, to ex clafm 
 — " There go lost men!" and it was soon after com 
 plctely routed by its opponents, who had advanced at 
 a trbt.. There arc, however, a few cases in* which, 
 whatever state, the cavalry be in, the charge must be 
 begun at a gallop. For exariiplc : when an axiibushed 
 enemy suddenly attacks cavalry, it must then incet 
 the attack at the height of its speed, to oppose tKcen- 
 emy with a shock equal to its own. 
 
 In the retreat of the allies from Bautzen, May, 1813, 
 Blucher, having passed his main column across tho 
 bridge -and through the defile of Haynau, still de-< 
 fendedthe entrance to the village with the Skirmishers 
 of his rear guard ; but finding that tlio nature ol the 
 sfTOund in rear of Haynau favored his purpose, he 
 formed five regiments of cavalry in .mass behind the. 
 
86 RKMARKS UPON CAVALRY 
 
 village of Baiulmansdorf, in a situation completely/ 
 concealed from the enemy's view by the village and 
 a-n intervening rise of ground. This ambuscade was 
 formed obliquely to^the line of retreat of the main col- 
 umn, which traversed an uninclosed country, and to 
 the' southward of that line. <When all was arranged', 
 three regiments forming the rear guard gave up the 
 bridge at Haynau and retired, following the main col- 
 umn to a good rear guard position, on the direct road 
 to Liegnitz, a few miles from Haynau. Here .'they 
 halted and showed front, inviting an attack. 
 
 As soon as Ney's advanced guard had passed the 
 defile, entered the plain, and deployed to attack the 
 Prussian infantry rear guard, a preconcerted signal 
 was given — the burning of a windmill. The allied 
 <^avalry, masked till that moment, now* deployed in 
 two lines on the right of t^e enemy, and moved rap- 
 idly onward to attack hirii in flank. It was necessary 
 that the charge should be made at a gallop the whole 
 way, 60 as not to give the French time to recover ; 
 and the success of this charge Was a loss to the French 
 of 1500 men and eleven guns. 
 
 The art of moving cavalry — which consists in con- 
 cealing its movements, and in rapidly bringing. to- 
 gether a superior force u]jon the w^eak points of 
 the enemy ; in avoiding useless engagements, in 
 order to" overwhelm him ; keeping part in reserve, and 
 making it suddenly appear at the decisive moment — 
 this art cannot be so ably exercised in a flat and open 
 covintry, although this is supposed to be best far cav- 
 alry movements. Districts consisting of undulating 
 plains, sprinkled^ here and there, with woods, villages 
 and farms, where the hills have gentle slopes, and the 
 valleys are tolerably wide, will enable superior officers 
 to obtain the greatest. success with inferior forces* . 
 
 Cavalry should never appear before the eneiiiy ex- 
 cept to engage. To keep it exposed whole hours, 
 without charging, is to misunderstand the spirit of 
 this service and to destroy its rnorat cotirage. The 
 
TACTICS AND MANOEUVRKS. 87 
 
 men cannot become animated at the sight of their 
 ■compaiiions killed or wounded, nor the hoiscs fron) 
 the effect of i\ie cannon balls and shells wliich fall 
 among^ them. -It is tnic that cavalry cannot ahvavfi 
 be kept slicltered, in an action, from tlie enemy's fii-e 
 until the inoment for charging. Its presence is some- 
 times indispensable in certain points which cannot 
 remain unprovided with troops, and there may be no 
 rising ground to conceal- it; but this circumstance 
 must be considered an unfortunate exception. Napo- 
 leon's battles present many examples of a similar USo 
 of cavalry, which often obliged it to be renewed, and 
 finally caused its ruin. By a natural consequence of 
 the principle above stated, cavalry should not be posted 
 on the ground it is to defend, but in the rear of it. 
 The mechanism of cavalry engagements requires that 
 changes sliould succeed one another rapidly, so that, 
 its efforts being continual, the advantage may remain 
 with the most obstinate ; but, to effect this,, there must 
 be a second line in support, and in many cases aTC- 
 serve. The necessity for this support lies, first of all, 
 in the human heart ; men expose themselves to danger 
 with greater confidence, if they feel that they have 
 companions in their rear, ready to back them ; it is 
 requisite, also, from the uncertainty of the success of 
 cavalry, and in consequence of the disorder which fol- 
 lows even among conquerors ; so that, an able enemy, 
 possessing a reserve, would be certain of obtaining 
 the final advantage over an imprudent cavalry which 
 had attacked it without having the same resource. 
 Besides, the rally, after a defeat, would be excessively 
 difiicult, if not impossible. 
 
 It should, however, be observed, that, in case there 
 was no second line of cavalry, the first might take re- 
 fuge in rear of its infantry. Still, in such a case, great 
 loss would be sustained, and the advantage not easily 
 obtained again. At the battle of Wurzburg, the 
 French cavalry, without having a reserve, engaged the 
 Austrian cavalry, whom they drove back; but tho lat- 
 
§3 EEM ARKS UPON CAVALRY 
 
 ter had formed a second line, which, having re-estab- 
 •lisliedthe engagement, not only repulsed the French 
 Cavalry but completely demoralized it ; for, although 
 the fire of the infantry kept the conquerors in check, 
 no efforts of General Jourdan could bring back. his 
 discouraged cavalry to the charge. 
 
 The second line is generally from 30(Xto 400 yards 
 in rear of the first, and this distance is considered suf- 
 ficient to prevent the support being disordered, should 
 the first line meet with a repulse; its wings should 
 extend beyond those of the latter; this formation will 
 enable it to charge the enemy's troops, in the event of 
 their taking the wings of the first line in flanker rear ; the 
 support may also, in the same manner as the first line, 
 have columns in rear of its wings ; and, ^Vhen the first 
 line chargers at>a gallop, the second follows at a trot. 
 
 When one body of cavalry has defeated another, the 
 conquerors should rally and mancauvre, to attack the 
 flank of the troops which the enemy protected; it 
 was fo this m.anosiivre that Conde, at the age of 22. 
 owed the victory of Rocroi. After having defeatct" 
 the Spanish cavalry of the left wing> he ordered Gas- 
 sion to continue the pursuit with part of the first lint . 
 whilst he himself, with the remainder and the support, 
 broke through the German end Ttalianjufantry-. Hav- 
 ing then learnt that his left-wing was defeated ajid 
 .pursued b}' the Spanish cavahy of the opposite wing, 
 he passed in rear of the latter, charged th'eni, and re- 
 took their prisoners. ■ 
 
 There only remained on the field four veteran rogi- 
 ments of Spanish infantry, who were formed into a 
 solid mass, and defended by eighteen pieces of can- 
 non, Conde rallied his fatigued cavalry, and after a 
 fourth charge, succeeded in penetrating the ranks of 
 this hrave infantry ; his victory was complete. , 
 
 But such manoeuvres require a great- deal of cool- 
 ness in the commanding officer ; for a man is easily 
 carried away by the appearance of the first advantage, 
 and neglects the opportunity of obtaining a greater. 
 
TACTICS AND MANOEUVUESi 89 
 
 From the above it will be Been that, in general, a 
 charge of cavalry should be directed upon the extrem- 
 ity of a line, and not upon the centre ; and th;it point 
 which will soonest enable the conqueror to cut olfthe 
 enemy's line of retreat, should be 'the one selected for 
 attack. 
 
 The most unfavorable charge ibr cavalry, »i.s that 
 which is directed against a weJl disciplined infantry ; 
 for infantry, in its usual formation, present about t\v<> 
 men to every horsemali, and can even double this 
 number, wheii preparing to receive cavalry. Son*o 
 . tacticians, struck with the danger to which infantry 
 ie exposed ■• under such a circumstance, and knowing 
 the injurious iiaprcsaions made upon young soldiers 
 by the menacing- aspect of a charge., have proposed 
 various means to: defend tjAom from'-it. 
 
 Amongst others, Oaebcrt- proposed to fix picquets, 
 fastened together by means of ropes, in front of the 
 squares ; and BohsSn,who 'a an authority in cavalry 
 movements, approved of this system ; but any one 
 who has been in action, knows the impossibility ot 
 making use of either of the above, or of chevaux-dt- 
 frise, or gf crow's-feet, which v.ore employed when 
 there was ho rapidity in the moveniionts. It is, there- 
 fore, only bjiits fire and able formation, that infaotry 
 can expect to resist cavalry. 
 
 To charge infantry there arc certain favorable mo- 
 ments, which should be instantly seized, and wheh its 
 resistance will be neither long nor destructive ; these 
 are : when a column on the marcli is engaged under 
 a well directed fire, leaving the woundi?d in rear, or 
 appearing to hesitate; it should then be taken in 
 flank; such was General Kellerman's manwuvre at 
 Marengo. He was in line with a feeble brigade, on 
 the right flank of Desaix's division, and concealed by 
 means of vines hung to the trees ; the 9th I^ight In- 
 fantry was actively engaged with a column of Aus- 
 trian grenadiers, who were following up the succesp 
 which had, till then, been obtained by the Austrians, 
 
m REMARKi- UPON CA7AIRY TACTICS AND MAN«UVRE8. 
 
 Kcllcrman imnicdiately formed colutr.n, left in^ront, 
 charged and dispersed the grenadiers, which decided 
 the victory in favor of the French. 
 
 Another favorahh^ opportunity for chiirging is, when 
 the enemy's line is altering its formation. In such a 
 case no time sliould be lost, but the charge made as 
 rapidly as possible.. 
 
 The moral state of the enemy should always be 
 taken into account. If former actions have proved its 
 valor, no attack should be made without being pre- 
 ceded by artillery, otherwise the attacking force would 
 subject itself to serious losses without any result; on 
 the other hand, a dispirited infantry will often give 
 way :^t the mere upprcach of a body of cavalry. In 
 some cases cavalry is obliged to act dismounted; and 
 althouirh it cannot expect to he equal to infantry, it 
 may still be found a good substitute. Thus, a body 
 of cavalry,- forming the rear detachment of a rear 
 guard, may have to defend a bridge, a defile, or a bar- 
 ricade; whilst the remainder of the rear guard contin- 
 ues its retreat ; in such a case part of the men will 
 have to dismount and keep back the enemy w-ith the 
 fire of their carbines ; and as soon as they consider the 
 rear gunrd in safety, tht-y remount and rapidly join :i. 
 In liUe manner an advance guard can prevent a re- 
 treating enemy from destroying a bridge, or making 
 preparntions for defence at the head of a defile ; its 
 tire. will either t^lop t^csc operations, or delay them 
 until the infantry coracs up. In this manner the 
 French dragoons, having dismounted, prevented the 
 British, in the retreat to Corunna, 1808, from blowing 
 up the bridges of -Pucnto Fcrrera and Berleira ; also, 
 1811, a regiment of dismounted cavalry protected the 
 retreat of two other regiments of the same service, 
 through a defile near Usagre ; but, in such cases, tho 
 cavalry soldier acts as a skirmisher, docs not leave his 
 position, fires from behind some natural or artificial* 
 obstacle, and it is seldom that he is engaged against 
 other troops than dismounted cavalry, iike himself. 
 
RBCONNOISANCKS. 41 
 
 RECONNOISANCES. 
 
 A reconnoisance has for its object the examination 
 of the position, strength, movements and intentiona-jof 
 the enemy. 
 
 To be able to reconnoitre with any accuracy, re- 
 quires quickness of eye, presence of mind, a great deal 
 of prudence and resolution, and sometimes even a 
 thorough knowledge of warfare. A commander, be- 
 fore rtiaking any movement, will generally use every 
 exertion to deceive his enemy ; for example, if a gen- 
 eral wishes to withdraw his army from the face of the 
 one to which he is opposed, he will generally double 
 and advance the pickets in his front, in order the bet- 
 ter to screen his movements. It will thus be seen 
 what great difficulty attends a reconnoitering party in 
 its endeavors to ascertain the movements and, intentions 
 of an enemy. The indications discovered frequently 
 give rise to very varied opinions among the most dis- 
 tinguished and experienced officers. 
 
 The following account of the reconnoissance which 
 preceded the battle of Essling in 1809, will illustrate 
 this point : 
 
 "On the 2lst of May, between twelve and one 
 o'clock in the morning, Marshal Massena recannoiter- 
 ed the line of outposts. Various reports were made of 
 a rear guard, from 4000 to 5f)00 strong, who were re- . 
 treating. The marshal asked Gen. Pelet what he 
 thought of it. He answered, that as he could perceive 
 a glimmer along the horizon, extending about three 
 miles, it must bo the enemy's bivouac ; and that, from 
 the works carried on during the last three days, added 
 to the cannonade of the previous evening, we had the 
 
 2S 
 
42 RICONNOISANCES, 
 
 whole enemy before us, but that it was easy to make 
 certain of it from the steeple of Aspern. The mar'shail 
 went up there and recognizing the truth of his obser* 
 vations, returned to the Emperor. At daybreak the 
 Emperor was on horseback. The marshals around him 
 all disagreed as to the enemy's movements. Lanncs 
 considered that there was only a rear guard, of from 
 6000 to 8000 men, which ought to be at once over- 
 thrown. Bessieres relied on the reports of his cavalry, 
 who had assured him that nothing had been encoun- 
 tered for several leagues. Massena, who had acquired 
 experience by a long command was certain that the 
 whole 'Austrian ar;ny was in front, and Mouton agreed 
 in this. Napoleon, anxious to satisfy himself, advanc- 
 ed beyond the ridge of Aspern ; but he could get nc 
 further, owing to the enemy's light cavalry having ad- 
 vanced since daylight. It was necessary to await the 
 cavalry before this mask could be penetrated. Recon- 
 noitering his own position Napoleon was continually 
 between the outposts and the bridges. About one 
 o'clock in the day Gen. Pelet was at the lines of the 
 furthest outposts. Skirmishing began; the ground 
 o-radually rising in front of him, concealed what was 
 going on beyond. Suddenly he saw three heavy masses 
 directing their march on our left flank, and, as they 
 crowned the ridge, forming in order of battle. Thirty 
 thousand men were advancing in an oblique line to- 
 ward Aspern, the key and support of the position. He 
 at once went to warn the marshal of the approach of 
 the columns, which in five minutes would be upon 
 him. He ordered Gen. Molitor to his support, and an- 
 nounced the state of matters to the Emperor. 
 
 Had the opinions of Lannes or Bessieres been relied 
 upon, a division of ten thousand men would probably 
 have been pressed forward and been met and over- 
 thrown by the advancing columns of the enemy. To 
 know how hard to press the pickets in these cases, and 
 to judge by their actions whether they are a mere skel- 
 eton left to cover a retreat, or whether they are backed 
 
REC0NN0ISANCE8, 4« 
 
 by a large force ready for battle, requires, as wc see, 
 judgment, experience and a knowledge of war. To 
 learn with certainty, it is frequently necessary to send 
 scouts and spies around to the enemy's rear, but the 
 length of time necessary to get information in this 
 manner frequently causes a general to lose the best op- 
 portunity to press a retiring foe. 
 
44 IMPROTEMBNTS £N 
 
 IMPROVEMENTS IN CAVALRY 
 ORGANIZATIONS. 
 
 According to Polybius, the cavalry of the Greeks 
 consisted ot two kinds : 
 
 1. The Caiaphracti or heavy cavalry, m which both 
 rider and horse were well covered with defensive armor, 
 the former armed with the lance, and a sabre slung from 
 a shoulder belt. 
 
 2. A light cavalry of an irregular character, who- 
 were without defensive armor, consisting of archers and 
 lancers, who also carried a sword, javelin and a small 
 buckler. A body of cavalry called an epiiagma, was 
 divided into two equal parts, each composed alike, 
 termed Telea. One was placed on each wing of the 
 line of battle. 
 
 The teles was subdivided into five divisions, the 
 strength of each subdivision being the half of the one- 
 next in order above it. The lowest, termed Ila, of 64 
 hojsemen, corresponding to the modern squadron, was 
 drawn up on a front of 16 with four files, and was 
 commanded by an officer with the title of Ilarch. 
 
 The Roman cavalry formed a privileged class, into 
 which only those were admitted who paid certain tax. 
 Tiiis classification being jn,ade, the tribuas named 10 
 first Sind 10 second decuriofis for the cavalry ; and then 
 in concert with the officers thus selected, divided the 
 classes into manipali and turma, assigning to each its 
 two proper officers; whilst these, in turn, selected the 
 two officers in each maniple who acted as file closers. 
 Since that time to thepresent.day, constant changes and 
 improvements have been made in the formation of cav- 
 
CAVALRY ORGANIZATIONS. 46 
 
 airy, tlie most manifest change being the diminution 
 in depth, and we now find ourselves adopting tho sin- 
 gle rank formation, which presents a far different sys- 
 tem to the formation in ten ranks of which we read in 
 the earliest histories of war. 
 
48 INSTRUCTIONS TO PICKETS. 
 
 INSTRUCTIONS TO PICKETS. 
 
 I. When an officer in command of an outpost shall 
 arrive at the position he is to occupy, he will immedi- 
 ately throw forward from one third to half of his com- 
 mand, divided into three or more pickets, a distance of 
 500 yards. One of these pickets will be placed on the 
 main avenue of approach and the others on its right 
 and left in favorable positions, and each of these''pick- 
 ets will throw forward videttes a still further distance 
 of 400 or 500 yards. 
 
 II. To prevent jiny misconception of terms, the 
 main body of the outpost will be denominated grand 
 guard. The detachments in advance will be denomi- 
 nated pic^cets and the outer chain be denominated vi- 
 dettes, 
 
 III. Immediately upon taking his position, the officer 
 commanding the grand guard will send patrols to his 
 right and left, to e«tablish communication and learn 
 the position of the grand guards upon his flanks. — 
 These, patrols will be kept moving during the night to 
 prevent the possibility of a vigilant and enterprising 
 enemy creeping in between the guards. Patrols will 
 also be kept moving from the grand guard to the pick- 
 ets and videttes to insure vigilance on their part. 
 
 IV. From 3 o'clock in the morning till sunrise re- 
 doubled vigilance will be exacted, and patrols will be 
 sent forward at least two miles in advance of the vi- 
 dettes. 
 
 V. Pickets and videttes must remain mounted and 
 ready for action at any moment, 
 
 VI. At the grand guard not more than one third of 
 the men may be allowed to feed and water at the same 
 
 'time. In feeding the bridle may be removed, -but no 
 
INBTBUCTIONS TO PICKKTS. 4T 
 
 trooper on any outp'^st will be permitted to tie up his 
 horse or remove his saddle under any circumstances 
 whatever. 
 
 VII. By day, videttcs should be placed in ^elevated 
 positions where their view will be most extended. By 
 night, they should be placed Jiear the base of hills, 
 where they will be obscured, and any person ap- 
 proaching will be more readily seen against the sky. 
 
 VIII. Pickets and grand guards will choose favor- 
 \ble positions for defence, such as near houses, 
 barns, fcncos, stonewalls, &c., &c. 
 
 IX. Great care will be taken by officer* command- 
 ing grand guards, to see that all outposts have an 
 unobstructed and well understood line of retreat to 
 the main, body of the command. 
 
 X. In case of an attack upon the videttes, the 
 commanding officer of the grand guard will immedi- 
 ately dispatch a courier to the main body of the 
 command to notify the commanding officer. He 
 will also send other couriers to notify the grand 
 guard on his flanks. 
 
 XI. Videttcs will reserve their fire until the enemy 
 has approached sufficiently near to enable them to 
 discharge their fire-arms with probable effect, but it 
 is their duty to notify the commanding officer of 
 the grand guard of the first indication of their ap- 
 proach. 
 
 XII. The videttes and pickets having been driven 
 back upon the grand guard, the commanding officer 
 finding his position no longer tenable, may fall back 
 slowly upon the main body of the command, on 
 being assured that it is ready for action. 
 
 XIII. When any patrol or detachment of any 
 kind approaches the main body of the command, 
 whether in camp, on the march, or while engaging 
 the enemy, they will send forward a trooper to give 
 notification of their approach, in order that no 
 doubt may arise to whether they are friends or ene- 
 mies. 
 
BUGLE S/GNALS. 
 
 97 
 
 BUGLE SIGNALS. 
 
 NP /._ THE GENERAL . 
 
 ^j J3 J^ J^|[^ [jj" ^v^ i^ 
 
 i 
 
 ^a \ r \ \ 
 
 4 4 4 4* 4 
 
 AfPS.^ BOOTS AND SADDLES: 
 
 
 >r.^.5._ TD HOffSE. 
 
 2C 
 
98. 
 
 ^lUgro .Moderam 
 
 BUeiF SIGNALS. 
 NO 4_ ASSEMBLY. 
 
 AfP S.^ TO ARMS. 
 
 f^r'^ ' Q i r^ tf Lj Tgij: 
 
 /^P e._ TO THE STANDARD, 
 
BUGLT S/G^AIS. 
 
 95 
 
 i 
 
 jbtLm- 
 
 jCZ 
 
 zx 
 
 ^^ 
 
 :?:q-r-T 
 
 ^ 
 
 ¥=^ 
 
 ^§ 
 
 zz: 
 
 »s 
 
 >» *•• * 1*: 
 
 ^ 
 
 ZZZSEZ'TBE 
 
 ^ 
 
 frn?^l a-CfmlfCrJSJIifCM 
 
 rv «!.-»« iiiMtwm^wM\m \m i 
 
 ) I ^|>W| U U Lid LI H^ 
 
 S 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 1^ 
 
 TT 
 
 M — m- 
 
 i 
 
 /^P ^_ #y4/f<r^. 
 
 AUeffro 
 
BUGLf S/GNALS. 
 
 102. 
 
 
 NPiJ.,-^ STABLE CALL. 
 
 itJumJL 
 
 JSEjEaM. 
 
 ^ 
 
 F^^f^ 
 
 *^j; 
 
 •^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 9 #### ^ 
 
 tazf- 
 
 
 \ f\^ ^S-i-9 
 
 i 
 
 =^- 
 
 i'liu 
 
 i 
 
 y— y 
 
 if tf # 
 
 Pir uxAA-^ 
 
 /l^/' /i'.- WATERING CALL. 
 
 iLjIJL^r q:^^ 
 
 =p^ 
 
 ty4/U^r 
 
 hi 9 13.^ BREAKFAST 
 
 UM\^-^^ 
 
 ^1^ 
 
 wjsmpi 
 
 ri#v [ff ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 MJtULM. 
 
 bJFPiijm 
 
 /^ 
 
 W.^ 14..- ASSEMBLY OF GUARD. 
 
 g.frrririr rifi-i 'ifi ^^ 
 
N? IS.. ORDERS. 
 $n9. ^ — MMJL 
 
 i 
 
 A^P//^.- ASSEMBLY OF BUGLERS. 
 p ff p p p 
 
 fcrniL'i 
 
 ¥^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 Q s -ft-» 
 
 ^^ 
 
 n l-t- 
 
 ^ 
 
 JfTW. 
 
 
 f JifTfy 
 
 r I * 
 
 s 
 
 Jij" a siguaJ^plai/ lo f/iiW mark . @ 
 2A>. 
 
 »^ *♦ # 
 
 ^m 
 
 Solo . 
 
 
 ©. 
 
 • * •' 
 
 
104., 
 
 . BUGLE SISNMS. 
 
 # , # 
 
 =^=^ 
 
 1^ 
 
 jz 
 
 r p i clr/ir-irn g 
 
 pU -JS 
 
 Kzzs: 
 
 m m m m 
 
 ¥ 
 
 tf # 
 
 t 
 
 *mfff' 
 
 TL 
 
 ^m 
 
 p 
 
 \f\y -j — — ,' I \m mwa, liiHni — 
 
 s 
 
 i 
 
 1 . m 
 
 # 4» 
 
 /K.^ /^._ FATIGUf CALL 
 
 Alh^!*0. 
 
 lOTpCJ/tl^^^^ 
 
 p f pp^ 
 
 
 3 
 4L4L4L 
 
 itLTrjL 
 
 t 
 
 ^ 
 
 3r 
 
 o^ 
 
 ? 
 
 i 
 
A ihffm. 
 
 fk'P /S. „ Dl NNER CALl ■ 
 
 toe 
 
 105 
 
 %. 
 
 Aikffra 
 
 NP^o... n/STRfsi/rjofifS. 
 
 i 
 
 ff-^^-j J- ^ i'-«fa S=t 
 
 • < * ■ 
 
 ^^^^^s^ 
 
 Jl&egn. 
 
 hfPS/... OR I Li CALL 
 
 l^P^^.^OFffCERS CALL. 
 
106. Bi/Gl£ S/6/\/ALS. ' 
 
 /VP£3..TH£ RfCALL. 
 
 ^^^^^ndanit. 
 
 I 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 ^ 
 
 E30E 
 
 X=E 
 
 KZ=X 
 
 x=z=x 
 
 b^ 
 
 ±. 
 
 N924..- SICK CALL. 
 
 
 ^ fr^lf r|p^[^lfl ; ffl-ffl 
 
 4^.^i^.^_ TATTOO. 
 
 
 p 
 
 • > #.# 1 •> 
 
 ,"■ — 
 
 
 ih^M 
 
 m 4.4 m 
 
 s 
 
 =F^ 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 >> J .J J J 
 
 ^^i 
 W 
 
 ^ 
 
 -0h4i4S~4 - 
 
 Si 
 
Bi^Gli SIGNALS. 
 76=\ /^P^S.-ro exr/NGU/SH l/GHTS. 
 
 ifil Allrg 
 
 107 
 
 ' ^ ' 1 1 _ f f -T 
 
 ^^S^3 
 
 FOR THE SERVICE OF SKIRMISHERS. 
 
 f<9 /.- FOUWAHD. 
 
 ^^^^^^m 
 
 fi?^.. /^AlT 
 
 ^ ^=rrf=r= & 
 
 NP3.^ TO THS IfFr. 
 
 -^^m 
 
 /VP4-.~ TO THe RIGHT 
 
 , Aliegrc m 
 
 /VPS.^ ABOUT 
 
 9L 3 
 
 ^^^^^i 
 
 //^7== j j^f ^- CHAffG£ amCT/Ofil TO THT fi/G/^T 
 
 3C 
 
 /TV, /^ 
 
 ^^^^^^^ 
 
B£/^l£ S/6/^AlS, 
 
 108 
 
 77^=1 J^Fr_c/^AA/6£ D//?£cr/mro r//rifn 
 
 I 
 
 # I § 
 
 ^7N 
 
 E? 
 
 «4-#-* -#■ 
 
 ^ 
 
 /*^ 
 
 gff^ 
 
 *' ^ 
 
 JitocUraio . ' 
 
 /V?S.- Tf?OT. 
 
 E 
 
 i^zs: 
 
 USCfK) 
 
 
 hi / r^i^"^ 
 
 /V^ /^. - C0MAI£A/Cf /7/P //V^?. 
 
 i£^IL£;^ri^ ^ ^ ^f^ 
 
 rj Alhffro 
 
 J^P JI.^TO C£AS£ £//?/A/S. 
 
 ll l\ uJ"^ ^^ 
 
 w 
 
 ^ 
 
 AtP /J. _ CMAffG£ AS fORA$£/?S. 
 
 JPr-tsbs. ^ 9 § 
 
 ^^^^^m 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 PART FIRST. 
 
 TITLE FIRvST. 
 
 BASIS OF INSTRUCTION. 
 
 ARTICLE I. 
 
 Fagt. 
 
 Pornftation of a regiment of ten squadrons in line, . . . ■ 1 
 Posts of the ofiScers and non-commissioned officers of 
 
 the field and staff of a regiment in line, 2 
 
 Posts of the officera and non-commiaaioued officers of 
 
 a squadron in line, '?> 
 
 Assembly of a regiment, mounted, 4 
 
 AMcmbly of a regiment, dismounted, 6 
 
 Dress parade and guard mounting, 5 
 
 The standard, 7 
 
 Salute with the standard and sabre, 8 
 
 The order of battle,. .^ s 
 
 ARTICLE ir. 
 
 Formation of a regiment in column, 9 
 
 Order in column by twos or fours, 9 
 
 Order in column of platoons, ; '. . . 11 
 
 Order in close column, 12 
 
 Order in double column, 13 
 
 Compliments by cavalry under review, IS 
 
 Form and course of inspection, 16 
 
 ARTICLE 111. 
 
 Dt3ti«s of instructors, 3S 
 
 ARTICLE IV. 
 
 Wvisiop, order, and progression of Instruction, 19 
 
31 TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 ARTICLE V. . . 
 
 Oradation of instruclion, . . . : 20 
 
 Recruit!?, 20 
 
 Corporals, 21 
 
 Sergeants, 21 
 
 Officers, , 22 
 
 ARTICLE VI. 
 
 Insti-uction to mount without saddle, and to saddle,. 22 
 
 Manner of vaulting, . ■ • , 22 
 
 Manner of rolling the cloak, 23 
 
 Manner of saddling, 23 
 
 ARTICLE VII. 
 
 Of training horses which have already been ridden, . 24 
 Treparatory Lesson. To make a horse tractable and 
 
 steady at mounting,' 25 
 
 To bend or to supple the horse's neck, 26 
 
 How to make. a horse obey the pressure of the leg,-. . 29 
 
 Circling on the haunches, 31 
 
 Reining back, 82 
 
 The horse's paces, walk, trot, and canter, 83 
 
 Demi-pirouette, So 
 
 Manner of accustoming the horses to leap 8& 
 
 To accustom horses to firing and military noises, ... 36 
 
 Practice of paces for manoeuvre, 37 
 
 ARTICLE VIII. • 
 
 DefiaitioDB and general principles, ST 
 
 ARTICLE IX. 
 
 Signals, • • • 42 
 
 TITLE SECOND. 
 
 INSTRUCTION ON FOOT. 
 
 School of the trooper, dismounted, 45 
 
 Position of trooper, dismounted, 46 
 
 Eyes right— eyes left, 46 
 
 Right face, left face, about face, right— oblique face, 
 
 left— oblique face, 4T 
 
 Common step, *^ 
 
 To change feet, 4^ 
 
 To march by a flank, *;* 
 
 To face to the right or left, when marching, 49 
 
 Ol'liQue face to the right or left when marching, — o9 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. Ill 
 
 Page. 
 
 Quickstep, 50 
 
 Double quick step, 51 
 
 Sabre exercise 52 
 
 General observations and directions, 62 
 
 Manual of the pistol, 64 
 
 Inspection of arras .' 66 
 
 Target practice, ; 6T 
 
 Platoon, iquadron and regiment, dismounted, 61 
 
 TITLE THIKD. 
 
 INSTRUCTION ON HORSKBAOK, 
 
 LESSON }. 
 
 School of the trooper, mounted, 71 
 
 Position of the trooper, before mounting, 72 
 
 To mount, 72 
 
 To dismount, 73 
 
 position of the trooper mounted, 74 
 
 The use of the reins, 74 
 
 Thtt use of the lege, 75 
 
 The effect of the legs and reins combined 75 
 
 To march, 75 
 
 To halt, 76 
 
 To turn to the right and to the left, 76 
 
 To turn about to the right and to the left, ] , 77 
 
 To make a third of a turn to the right aud to the 
 
 left, 77 
 
 To rein back, and to cease reining back, 78 
 
 To file cff, , 70 
 
 LESSON II. 
 
 To march to the right hand, and to march to the left 
 
 hand, '. 79 
 
 To turn to the right and to the left in marching 80 
 
 To halt, and to step off, 80 
 
 To pass from the walk to the trot, and from the trot 
 
 to the walk, 81 
 
 Changes of hand, 82 
 
 To turn to the right and to the left by trooper in 88 
 
 marching, 83 
 
 To tnrn about to the right and to the left by trooper 
 
 in marching on the same line, 63 
 
 The same moveraents Ui marching ia column,, ...... 84 
 
IV TABLE OP CONTENTS, 
 
 LESSON IIL 
 
 Fagt. 
 
 Of th€ spur, , 86 
 
 To rcarch to the right hand or to the left hand, 87 
 
 To pasB from the walk to the trot, and from the trot 
 
 to the walk, , 88 
 
 Change of direction in the breadth of the riding 
 
 house, 88 
 
 Change of direction obliquel j by trooper, 88 
 
 To march in a circle, 90 
 
 LESSON IV. 
 
 To turn to the right,' or to the left by trooper in 
 
 inarching, 01 
 
 To turn about to the right, or to the left, the troop- 
 ers inarching on the same line (or abreast), 91 
 
 The same, the troopers marching in column, 91 
 
 To pass successively from the head^to the rear of the 
 
 column '. 92 
 
 ■> Being halted, to commence the move at a trot, 93 
 
 Marching at a trot, to halt, 93 
 
 To pass from the trot to the trot-out, and from the 
 
 trot-out to the trot, 96 
 
 To pass from the trot to the gallop, 94 
 
 To passage to the right or to the left, the head to 
 
 the wall, 95 
 
 To passage to the right or to the left, being in j 
 column 97 
 
 LESSON V. 
 
 To take the snaflle in the right hand, 98 
 
 To drop the snaffle, 99 
 
 The principal movements of the bridle hand, 99 
 
 To gather the horse, ^ . . , . 100 
 
 To march, 100 
 
 To halt, 100 
 
 To turn to the right in marching, 100 
 
 To" turn to the left in marching, 100 
 
 To turn about to the right and to the left, in march' 
 
 mg. 
 
 10« 
 
 To make an oblique turn to the right and to the left 
 
 in marching, •• 101 
 
 To rein back, and to cease reining back, 101 
 
 Exercise of the 4th lesson with the curb bridle, 101 
 
 To passage to the right and to the left,. . . , 102 
 
 -LESSON VI. 
 
 Principles of the gallop, 10*2 
 
 Siercise at the gallop upon right lines, 103 
 
 Exercise at the gallop on the circle IW 
 
.TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 LESSON vir. 
 
 Pago. 
 
 Sxwcise of the oth lesson with the sabpc only,., .. lOo 
 
 MaiQual of arms at a halt, 105 
 
 To fire the pistol, 107 
 
 To load the pistol, ,. . lot 
 
 iMpectlon of arms, 108 
 
 S*bre exerciee at a halt, 109 
 
 LESSON vm. 
 
 Manual of arms in marching, » 110 
 
 Sabre exercise at all gaits, 110 
 
 Leaping, 110 
 
 To leap the ditch, lU 
 
 To leap the feisce, Ill 
 
 Individual charge, Ill 
 
 Circling on the forehand and haunches, and demi- 
 
 pirouette,. . ., v 113 
 
 Target practice 113 
 
 Record and report* of target firing, 1 14 
 
 SOflOOt. Of THE PLATOOW, MOUNTED HX 
 
 ABTfCLE L 
 
 (ieoeral principles of alignment, 117 
 
 Successive alignment of files in the platoon, 118 
 
 Alignment of the platoojL, 121 
 
 To break the platoon by nle, by twos, and by fours. 121 
 
 Direct march in column by file, by twos and by foura 122 
 
 Change of direction, 128 
 
 To halt, and to commence the march, in column.. . . 12^3 
 
 Individual oblique march, ■. 124 
 
 The platoon marching iu column by file, by twos, or 
 by fours, to form line faced to the front, to the 
 
 left, and to the right,. 124 
 
 Manual of arms, 127 
 
 AUncLE 11. 
 
 To form twos and fours at the same gait, 127 
 
 To break by twos and by file at the same gait, 129 
 
 To form twos and fours in doubling the gait, 180 
 
 To break by twos and by file in doubling the gait,. .. 181 
 
 Sabre exercise,. ] 32 
 
 ARTICLE IIL 
 
 Direct march of the platoon in line, 188 
 
 Countermarch, 188 
 
 Wheelings, 1S8 
 
 To wheel on a fixed pivot, 140 
 
 To wheel on a moYablc pivot, » 14$. 
 
VI TABLE OF GONTENTS. 
 
 Page. 
 
 Individual oblique march, 146 
 
 The platoon marching in line, to break It by twos, 
 
 or by fours, at the same gait, 146 
 
 The platoon marching in column by twos or by 
 
 fours, to form it at the same gait 147 
 
 The platoon marching in line, to break it by fours 
 
 or by twos, in doubling the gait, 148 
 
 The platoon marching in column by twos or by fours, 
 
 to form it in doubling the gait, .148 
 
 Movements by fours, the platoon being in column or 
 
 line , , 149 
 
 ARTICLE IV. 
 
 Running at the heads, and pistol practice 152 
 
 To leap the ditch and the fence, 163 
 
 To charge by platoon, 154 
 
 Rallying, ; .• 156 
 
 Skirmishing, ...,-... 155 
 
 Prepare to fight on foot, 162 
 
 SCHOOIv OF THE SQX7ADR0N, MOUNTED,. , 166 
 
 ARTICW: I. 
 
 Successive alignment of platoons in the squadron. . 1€7 
 
 Alignment of the squadron, . . 168 
 
 The squadron being in line, to form a column of 
 
 fours, 169 
 
 To break the squadron to the right or left to march 
 
 to the front, 169 
 
 To break by fours from the right to march to the 
 
 left, 150 
 
 Direct march in column of fours, 171 
 
 Change of direction, 172 
 
 Individual oblique march, 172 
 
 The squadron marching in column of fours to march 
 
 to the rear, 172 
 
 Te break by fours to the right, column half left, 
 
 (right or half right), 1T8 
 
 The squadron marching in column by fours, by twos 
 
 and by file, to form line faced to the front, to 
 
 the left, to the right, or to the rear, .- 178 
 
 To regulate the rapidity of gaits, 177 
 
 Sabre ex«rci8e, 177 
 
 ARTICLE IT. 
 
 The squadron being in line, to form it in open 
 
 column, 178 
 
 To march in open column, 170 
 
 Changes of direction by succeseiTe wlieell, 181 
 
 2<ndiTidual oblique march,. 181 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. Vii 
 
 Change of gait in open column, "^fi2*' 
 
 To brcjik by four«, by twos, and by file, Vo form 
 
 twos, foarg, and platoons at the f>ame gait, jrh 
 
 The same movements in doubling ihe gait 1 rt, 
 
 The squadron marching in open column* to march 
 
 to the rear, ^q^ 
 
 To halt the column .'.'.".".'.".'.'.■''..■ jgg 
 
 The squadron marching in open coiiiran,' "to 'form 
 
 hne faced to the left, to the right, to the front. 
 
 and to the rear, ' -, co 
 
 • To break by platoons io the ft-ont,'.'. '.'.'.'.'.'.'. 1 90 
 
 T# break by platoons to the rear from the "liffht 'to 
 
 march to the left, ^ ' j^.^ 
 
 Movement . by fours, the squadron 'being "i'n 'open 
 
 column, ° ' jj,^ 
 
 ARTICLE III. 
 
 Direct march of the squadron in line iq« 
 
 Countermarch. ' ix^ 
 
 Wheelings, ; ; ; • ; ; }^« 
 
 To wheel on a fixed pivot, iXX 
 
 To wheel on a movable pivot,. n'J^ 
 
 Individual oblique march, on? 
 
 Oblique march by platoons, '.,.[ "" ' ' ^° 
 
 The squadron being in line, to 'cause * 'it Vo* " cain 
 
 ground to the rear, and to face it again to the 
 
 front by fours, • oo^ 
 
 The squadron marching in line, to march it Vo' th4 ■ 
 
 rear by wheelinK the platoons a))out,. ook 
 The squadron marching in line, to break 'it to' tiie 
 
 front by platoons, and to reform it ortu 
 
 The same movem«nts in doubling the gai't ' on-r 
 
 Passage of obstacles,.. ;...... ...;'.' ■.■.■.','/ * 2O8 
 
 ARTICLE IV. 
 
 The charge, ^. g^,, 
 
 Rallying, ^..;:; 209 
 
 Skirmishing, ?i^* 
 
 To fight on foot, ■. .".'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.■.■.'.■;.■;;;;;;;; ^ 
 
 208 
 
TABLE OF C0MENT8. IX 
 
 PART SECOND. 
 •-•-•- 
 
 TITLE FOURTH. 
 
 EVOLUTIONS OF A REGIMENT. 
 
 -•'• • 
 
 GENERAL RULES. 
 
 ABTICLE I. 
 
 Formation of columms— their march, and OBAiiGits. .... a 
 
 Alignment of the regiment, 8 
 
 To form a column of fours — its march and change of 
 
 direction, T 
 
 To form an open column — its march and change of 
 
 direction, g 
 
 To form a column of squadrons, and a close column 11 
 
 To march in a column of squadrons, and in a close 
 
 column, and their change of direction, 17 
 
 To form a double column— its march and change of 
 
 direction, 20 
 
 To pass from a column of twos to a column of fours; 
 to an open column, and to a column of squad- 
 rons, and to a close column, 9S 
 
 To pass from a column of squadrons and a close col- 
 umn to an open column, and a column of fours 
 and twos, 9(} 
 
 ARTICLE 11, 
 Formation of linb from thb dipferknt columns, 29 
 
 To form line from the column of fours, and open 
 column, faced to the front, obliquely, to the left, 
 right, and rear, S9 
 
 To form line from a column of squadrons (or col- , 
 
 nmn of attack), faced to the front, left, right » 
 andrear, , S% 
 
 24 
 
X TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 Page 
 To form hne from close column faced to the front, 
 
 obliquely, left, right., and rear, , . , g5 
 
 To form line from doable column faced to the front, 
 
 right, left, and rear, 41 
 
 To form line from open column by combining two 
 
 or more moTements, 48 
 
 article iii. 
 
 The Link — its changes akd march, 46 
 
 Changes of front, 46 
 
 Movements of the line of squadron columns, 47 
 
 The march in line, 52 
 
 ARTICLE IV. 
 
 ECHBLOHS, 57 
 
 Echelons by squadron fiom line, St 
 
 Echelons from column of squadrons,. 69 
 
 Echelons from open column, 60 
 
 Formation of line from echelons, 62 
 
 Echelons by half regiment or wing, ^ 64 
 
 Observations on echelons, '. 65 
 
 To retire by alternate squadrons 66 
 
 article v. 
 
 Charge, 66 
 
 Observations on the different manners of charging, . 66 
 
 Charge In line,. . . * 68 
 
 Charge in column, 72 
 
 Special bervige of cavalet in THte tvest, 74 
 
 The camp, 74 
 
 The march, , T6 
 
 Escorts, ■ • 77 
 
 TITLE FIFTH. 
 
 EVOLUTIONS OP THE LINE. 
 Pbbliminabt kdlks akd bbmaeks, 7P 
 
 ARTICLB L 
 COLUMMB, 82 
 
 Open columns, ..'., • 81 
 
 Their march by the rear to pas» a defile, 81 
 
 Oolumn of gquadrons, 5^ 
 
taelk of contents. xi 
 
 Page. 
 To form close column from a line faced to a flank, . . 81 
 
 To form a Close column from an open column, 81 
 
 The march and change of direction of a close col- 
 umn ; its countermarch ; to gain ground t>o flan\^ 
 or rear ; and its wheel by platoons to repel a 
 
 sudden attack in flank, 81 
 
 To form anil advance in regimental double columns, 61 
 
 To reduce tlicm to double columns of foure, .... .81 
 
 To face and march to the rear, ^ 81 
 
 Tb pass from a column of squadrons, oi^ close col- 
 umn to an open column; from an open column 
 to a column of fours ; from a column ofiours to 
 an open column ; and from an open cplumn to a 
 
 column of squadrons, and a close column, 61 
 
 To form close columns from line without changing 
 
 front, ' 82 
 
 To change the diroctlon of a general close column. 
 
 by a n^nk, 88 
 
 ARTICLE II. 
 Formations of mkb, , 96 
 
 To form liqe from an open column, or column of 
 squadrons, to the right or left, and on right or 
 on left into line, 82 
 
 To form line to the front from double columns, and 
 faced to the rear, on the head or rear of the 
 columns, 88 
 
 To form line from an open column, where a part has 
 changed direction, in the several cases, by com- 
 bining two or more evolutions, 82 
 
 To form line from open column to the front, oblique- 
 ly, faced to the right or left rear, on the rear of 
 the column, and on the head of the column, .... 8i 
 
 To forin line faced to the front, and to the rear, from 
 
 cplumn of squadrons, 8t 
 
 To deploy by regiment in mass and in echelon, 89 
 
 To deploy the close column to either flank, 89 
 
 To deploy the close column to both flanks, 90 
 
 To deploy a line of regimental close columns or 
 
 masses, 90 
 
 To form line on the left flank faced to the left, and 
 
 and on right flauk faced to the right, from the ' 
 
 close column, 91 
 
 To form a line of double columns, in two lines, faced 
 
 to the right or left, 9« 
 
 To form a line of double columns in line faced to the 
 
 rear, 92 
 
 To form line from open columns, on a central squad- 
 ron faced to the front, 92 
 
Xn TABI.K OF CONTENTS.- 
 
 To form line from open column, on a central squad- 
 ron, faced to the rear, , 98 
 
 ARTIOtE III. 
 Th8 line,. &8 
 
 Changes of front, 98 
 
 -Movements of the line of squadron columns 94 
 
 The march In line^i - 94 
 
 The brigade in two lines, 96 
 
 ARTICLE IV. . 
 3SCHBLOK8, 99 
 
 ARTICLE V. 
 
 The chabqb, 101 
 
 Application of the general rules in three examy)les 
 
 of evolutions of a division of two brigades, — 102 
 
TABLE OF CO>f TENTS, -Yill 
 
 PART THIRD. 
 
 SKIRMISH DRILL FOR MOUNTED TROOP?. 
 ARTICLE r. 
 
 Composition of Company • 1 
 
 Designation of Company ^ ij 
 
 Posts of OflScers 8 
 
 To Link 4 
 
 ARTICLE II. 
 
 Skirmlsii drill ;, preliminary remarks, 5 
 
 To take open order an0 to return to close order (in 
 
 line,) / 6 
 
 Open order in line — to break into fours, twos and 
 
 files, T 
 
 In column of Ole to form twos, open order, , 8 
 
 In column of file to form fours, open order,. 9 
 
 In coluum of twos, open order, to form fours, open 
 
 order, 10 
 
 In column of fours to form twos, open or close order, 11 
 
 in column of twos to form files, open or close order, li» 
 
 To deploy as skirmishers from line, 18 
 
 ARTICLE III. 
 
 In open oi'der column of fours ; action front and left, 14 
 
 In open order column of fours ; action rear ancl left, 16 
 
 In open order column of fours ; action right, 16 
 
 In open order column of fours ; action left, 17 
 
 In open order column of twos; action front and left, 18 
 
 In open order column of twos ; action rear and left, 19 
 
 In open order column of twos ; action right, 20 
 
 In open order column of twos ; action left, 21 
 
 ARTICLE IV. 
 
 To deploy as skirmishers when dismounted, 22 
 
 To deploy as skirmishers from column of fours,, t ... 23 
 
 After deploying as skirmishers to commenae action, 84 
 
 Column of fours open order to retiirn to close order, 26 
 
XtV TABLE OF CONTENTS, 
 
 ^^. 
 
 Column of'twos open order to return to dose ordei-, 96 
 
 Column of file to form fours in clc'se order, 2T 
 
 AETICLK V. ' 
 
 Changes of the Manual. 
 
 To sling and to unsling rill es, , 28 
 
 Concluding remarks, 29 
 
 Pag«. 
 
 Remarks rpos Cavalry Tactics AND Manceuvkes, 23 
 
 Reconnoisancks,. 41 
 
 IMPE0VEUE.NT8 IN OaTALBT ORCANIZATIOSS, 44 
 
 Ikstrpctioks to Pickets, .♦ 46 
 
LIST OF PUBLICATIONS. 
 
 A STRANG-E STORY, 
 
 BY FIR K. BULWBR LY'TTON— Price $3 00 
 
 . -THE CONFEDERATE, 
 
 BY A SOUTH CVnOLI MAN— Price ,..,.., $1 25 
 
 RAIDS AND ROMANCE OF MORGAN AND HIS MEN, 
 
 BY MRS. SALLIE ROCHESTER FORD—Price .... $8 50 
 
 GREAT EXPECTATIONS, 
 
 BY CHARLES DICKENS, (Boz,)— Price ...... $8 00 
 
 TANNHAUSER, or the BATTLE OF THE BARDS, 
 
 A POEM, 
 BY NEVILLE TEMPLE and EDWARD TREVOR— Price . $2 50 
 
 THE WAR IN NICARAGUA, 
 
 BY GENERAL WILLIAM WALKER, 
 
 One Volume, 13mo. Cloth, complete, $1 60 
 
 Do. Half Calf, 2 60 
 
 ROMANTIC PASSAGES IN SOUTH- 
 WESTERN HISTORY, 
 
 BY HON. A. B. MEEK— One Volume, 12mo. Cloth, , . $1 25 
 
 lOynMnit^ on ncvct pag*.") 
 
LIST OF PUBLICATIONS----Contlnued. 
 
 THE CODE OF ORDINANCES FOR 
 THE CITY OF MOBILE, 
 
 BY HON. ALEX. McKIN3TRY— One Volume, 8rao. Sheep, U 00 
 
 ' IlEV. DR. P. P. NEELY'S SERMONS,. 
 
 One Volume, 12mo. Cloth, $1 25 
 
 SOUVENIRS OF TRAVEL, 
 
 BY M'MB OCTAVIA WALTON LEVERT, 
 
 Half Morocco Gilt, $4 00 
 
 Turk do. Ant., . . : 6 00 
 
 Horizontal Plowing and Hill-Side Ditching, 
 
 BY DR. N. T. SORSBY, of Ala. 
 One Volume, Paper, 50 cents.. 
 
 HARDEE'S 
 RIFLE AND INFANTRY TACTICS, 
 
 Two Volumes, 24mo., |4 00 
 
 SILAS MARNER, 
 
 BY THE AUTHOR OP "ADAM BEDE,"— (Jti Press.) 
 
 Orders from abroad are respectfully requested to give 
 
 JHatind. Directions of their PostoflB.ces, Landings, or Rail Road 
 Statlone. 
 
 S. H. OOETZEL; Mobile, Ala. 
 
■^y 
 
-^'.- 
 
 .^'^^A 
 
 s^'-'r-^ 
 
 W